20-F
Table of Contents

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORM 20-F

 

 

¨ Registration statement pursuant to Section 12(b) or 12(g) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

or

 

x Annual report pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

For the Fiscal Year Ended December 31, 2012

or

 

¨ Transition report pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

For the transition period from/to

or

 

¨ Shell company report pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report:

Commission file number 000–12033

 

 

TELEFONAKTIEBOLAGET LM ERICSSON

(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in Its Charter)

LM ERICSSON TELEPHONE COMPANY

(Translation of Registrant’s Name Into English)

 

 

Kingdom of Sweden

(Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization)

SE-164 83 Stockholm, Sweden

(Address of Principal Executive Offices)

Roland Hagman, Vice President Group Function Financial Control

Telephone: +46 8 719 53 80, Facsimile: +46 8 719 42 22

SE-164 83 Stockholm, Sweden

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile Number and Address of Company Contact Person)

 

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of Each Class

 

Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered

American Depositary Shares (each representing one B share)   The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC
B Shares *   The NASDAQ Stock Market LLC

 

* Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of the American Depositary Shares representing such B Shares pursuant to the requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

None

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

None

 

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the Annual Report:

 

B shares (SEK 5.00 nominal value)

     3,043,295,752   

A shares (SEK 5.00 nominal value)

     261,755,983   

C shares (SEK 1.00 nominal value)

     0   

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.    Yes  x    No  ¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes  ¨    No  x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes  x    No  ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes  ¨    No  ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer” and “large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

x  Large accelerated filer             ¨  Accelerated filer             ¨  Non-accelerated filer

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

US GAAP   ¨    International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board  x    Other  ¨

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.    Item 17  ¨    Item 18  ¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).    Yes  ¨    No  x

 

 

 


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

CONTENTS

 

FORM 20-F 2012 CROSS REFERENCE TABLE

     i   

THIS IS ERICSSON

     1   

GROUP OVERVIEW

     5   

LETTER FROM THE CEO

     7   

MARKET TRENDS

     10   

OUR COMPETITIVE ASSETS

     13   

OUR PEOPLE

     14   

STRATEGY AND CUSTOMERS

     15   

OUR PORTFOLIO

     18   

REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT

     23   

OUR PERFORMANCE

     25   

SUSTAINABILITY AND CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY

     27   

FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY

     29   

LETTER FROM THE CHAIRMAN

     30   

BOARD OF DIRECTORS’ REPORT

     31   

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

     69   

CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     70   

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     75   

MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

     163   

RISK FACTORS

     164   

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

     177   

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 2012

     179   

REMUNERATION REPORT

     216   

SHARE INFORMATION

     223   

SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION

     231   

RECONCILIATIONS TO IFRS

     261   

GLOSSARY

     266   

FINANCIAL TERMINOLOGY

     269   

SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION

     272   

SIGNATURES

     274   

 


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

FORM 20-F 2012 CROSS REFERENCE TABLE

This document comprises the English version of our Swedish Annual Report for 2012 and our Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2012. Reference is made to the Form 20-F 2012 cross reference table on pages i to viii hereof and the Supplemental Information beginning on page 137, which contains certain other information required by Form 20-F. Only (i) the information in this document that is referenced in the Form 20-F 2012 cross reference table, (ii) the Supplemental Information, and (iii) the Exhibits required to be filed pursuant to the Form 20-F shall be deemed to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission for any purpose, including incorporation by reference into the Registration Statement on Form F-3 filed on April 23, 2012 (File No. 333-180880) and any other documents filed by us pursuant to the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, which incorporates by reference the 2012 Form 20-F. Any information herein which is not referenced in the Form 20-F 2012 cross reference table or filed as an exhibit thereto shall not be deemed to be so incorporated by reference.

This annual report includes financial measures that were not calculated or presented in accordance with IFRS, and we refer to these measures as non-IFRS financial measures. Reconciliations of these non-IFRS financial measures to the most directly comparable IFRS financial measures can be found on page 234 and pages 261-265 of this annual report.

The information included on the websites that appear in the Annual Report on Form 20-F is not incorporated by reference in the report.

The following cross reference table indicates where information required by Form 20-F may be found in this document.

 

Form 20-F Item Heading

  

Location in Document

   Page
Number
 

PART I

     

1

   Identity of Directors, Senior management and advisers    N/A   

2

   Offer statistics and expected timetable    N/A   

3

   Key information      
   A    Selected financial data    Five-year summary      29   
         Reconciliations to IFRS      261-265   
         Financial terminology      269-270   
         Supplemental information   
        

Exchange rates

     232   
   B    Capitalization and indebtedness    N/A      -   
   C    Reason for the offer and use of proceeds    N/A      -   
   D    Risk factors    Risk factors      164-176   

4

   Info on the Company      
   A    History and development of the Company    Our Business   
        

This is Ericsson—2012 in review

     3-4   
         Board of Directors’ Report   
        

Business in 2012

     32-34   
        

Cash flow—Capital expenditures

     48   
        

Notes to the Consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C26 Business combinations

     143-146   
        

Note C33 Events after the reporting period

     161-162   

 

i


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Form 20-F Item Heading

  

Location in Document

   Page
Number
 
         Supplemental information   
        

General facts on the Company

     231   
        

Company history and development

     232   
   B    Business overview    Our business   
        

This is Ericsson

     1-2   
        

Group overview

     5-6   
        

Our competitive assets

     13   
        

Strategy and customers

     15-17   
        

Our portfolio

     18-22   
        

Regional development

     23-24   
         Board of Directors’ report   
        

Business in 2012

     32-34   
        

Financial results of operations—Seasonality

     39-40   
        

Business results—Regions

     50   
        

Business results—Segments

     50-57   
        

Material contracts

     59   
        

Sourcing and supply

     60   
        

Sustainability and corporate responsibility

     60-64   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C3—Segment information

     95-101   
         Risk factors   
        

Market, technology and business risks

     164-172   
        

Regulatory, compliance and corporate governance risks

     172-175   
        

Corporate governance regulation and compliance

     180-181   
   C    Organizational structure   

Supplemental information

  
        

General facts on the company

     231   
        

Investments

     260-261   
   D    Property, plants and equipment    Our business   
        

Sustainability and corporate responsibility

     27-28   
         Supplemental information   
        

Primary manufacturing and assembly facilities

     233   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C11—Property, plant and equipment

     109-110   
        

Note C27—Leasing

     147-148   
         Board of Directors’ report   
        

Cash Flow—Capital expenditures

     48   

4A

   Unresolved staff comments      

 

ii


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Form 20-F Item Heading

  

Location in Document

   Page
Number
 

5

   Operating and financial review and prospects      
   A    Operating results    Our business   
        

Group overview

     5-6   
        

Our performance

     25-26   
        

Regional development

     23-24   
        

Five-year summary

     29   
         Board of Directors’ report   
        

Business in 2012

     32-34   
        

Financial results of operation

     38-41   
        

Business results—Regions

     50   
        

Business results—Segments

     50-57   
         Board of Directors’ report   
        

Risk management

     59   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C1—Significant accounting policies

     75-91   
        

Note C20—Financial risk management and financial instruments—Foreign exchange risk

     134-136   
         Risk Factors   
        

Market, technology and business risks

     164-172   
         Supplemental information   
        

Operating results

     233-248   
   B    Liquidity and capital resources    Board of Directors’ report   
        

Financial results of operations—Seasonality

     39-40   
        

Financial position

     42-46   
        

Cash flow

     47-49   
        

Risk Management

     59   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C19—Interest-bearing liabilities

     131-132   
        

Note C20—Financial risk management and financial instruments

     133-140   
        

Note C25—Statement of cash flows

     142-143   
         Supplemental information   
        

Operating results

     234-248   
   C    R&D, Patents and licenses, etc.    Five-year summary      29   
         Our business   
        

This is Ericsson

     1-2   
        

Our competitive assets-technology leadership

     13   
         Board of Directors’ report   
        

Fair return on R&D investment

     33-34   
        

Business in 2012

     32-34   
        

Financial results of operations—Operating expenses

     40   

 

iii


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Form 20-F Item Heading

  

Location in Document

   Page
Number
 
         Consolidated financial statements   
        

Consolidated income statement

     70   
   D    Trend information    Our business   
        

Market trends

     10-12   
        

Strategy and customers

     15-17   
         Board of Directors’ report   
        

Trends and drivers

     31-32   
        

Business results—Regions

     50   
        

Business results—Segments

     50-57   
   E    Off-balance sheet arrangements    Board of Directors’ report   
        

Financial position—Off-balance sheet arrangements

     46   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C24—Contingent liabilities

     141-142   
        

Note C32—Transfers of financial assets

     161   
   F    Tabular disclosure of contractual obligations   

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C31—Contractual obligations

     161   
6    Directors, senior management and employees      
   A    Directors and senior management    Corporate governance report 2012   
        

Members of the Board of Directors

     196-201   
        

Members of the Executive Leadership Team

     206-211   
   B    Compensation   

Board of Directors’ report

  
        

Corporate governance—
Remuneration

     58   
        

Corporate Governance Report 2012

  
        

Remuneration to Board members

     195   
         Remuneration report      216-222   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C17—Post-employment benefits

     121-129   
        

Note C28—Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees

     149-158   
   C    Board practices   

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C28—Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees

     149-158   
         Corporate governance report 2012   
        

Board of Directors

     186-190   
        

Committees of the Board of Directors—Audit committee

     191-193   

 

iv


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Form 20-F Item Heading

  

Location in Document

   Page
Number
 
        

Committees of the Board of Directors—Remuneration committee

     193-195   
   D    Employees    Our business   
        

Our people

     14   
        

Five-year summary

     29   
        

Notes to the Consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C28—Information Regarding Members of the Board of Directors, the Group Management and Employees

     149-158   
   E    Share ownership    Share Information   
        

Shareholders

     228-230   
        

Corporate governance report 2012

  
        

Shareholders

     182-183   
        

Members of the Board of Directors

     196-201   
        

Members of the Executive Leadership Team

     206-211   
         Remuneration report   
        

Total remuneration

     219-222   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C28—Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees

     149-158   

7

  

Major shareholders and related party transactions

     
   A    Major shareholders   

Corporate governance report 2012

  
        

Shareholders

     182-183   
         Share information   
        

Shareholders

     228-230   
   B    Related party transactions   

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C29—Related party transactions

     158-160   
   C    Interests of experts and counsel    N/A   

8

   Financial information   
   A   

Consolidated statements and other financial information

  

Board of Directors’ report

  
        

Legal proceedings

     64-65   
        

Consolidated financial statements

     70-74   
        

Please see also Item 17 cross references

  
        

Report of independent registered public accounting firm

     69   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

     75-162   

 

v


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Form 20-F Item Heading

  

Location in Document

   Page
Number
 
         Supplemental information   
        

Memorandum and articles of association—Dividends

     249-250   
  

B

  

Significant changes

   Board of Directors’ report   
        

Post-closing events

     67-68   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial Statements

  
        

Note C33—Events after the reporting period

     161-162   

9

   The offer and listing      
   A    Offer and listing details    Share Information   
        

Offer and listing details

     226-228   
   B    Plan of distribution    N/A   
   C    Markets   

Share Information

  
        

Stock exchange trading

     223-224   
   D    Selling shareholders    N/A   
  

E

   Dilution    N/A   
  

F

   Expenses of the issue    N/A   

10

   Additional information      
   A    Share capital    N/A   
   B    Articles of association    Supplemental information   
        

Memorandum and articles of association

     248-252   
   C    Material contracts    Board of Directors’ report   
        

Material contracts

     59   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C31 Contractual obligations

     161   
   D    Exchange controls    Supplemental information   
        

Exchange controls

     252   
   E    Taxation    Supplemental information   
        

Taxation

     252-257   
   F    Dividends and paying agents    N/A   
   G    Statement by experts    N/A   
   H    Documents on display    Supplemental information   
        

General facts on the Company

     232   
   I    Subsidiary information      

11

  

Quantitative and qualitative disclosures
about market risk

     
   A   

Quantitative information about market risk

  

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C20—Financial risk management and financial instruments

     133-140   
   B   

Qualitative information about market risk

   Board of Directors’ Report   
        

Risk management

     59   

 

vi


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Form 20-F Item Heading

  

Location in Document

   Page
Number
 
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C20—Financial risk management and financial instruments

     133-140   
         Corporate governance report 2012   
        

Risk management

     203-206   
   C    Interim periods    N/A   
   D    Safe harbor    N/A   
   E    Small business issuers    N/A   

12

  

Description of securities other than equity securities

     
   A    Debt securities    N/A   
   B    Warrants and rights    N/A   
   C    Other securities    N/A   
   D    American Depositary Shares    Supplemental information   
        

Depositary fees and charges

     257   

PART II

     

13

  

Defaults, Dividends, Arrearages and Delinquencies

   N/A   

14

  

Material modifications to the rights of security holders and use of proceeds

   N/A   

15

   Controls and Procedures      
   A    Disclosure controls and procedures    Corporate governance report 2012   
        

Disclosure controls and procedures

     212-213   
   B   

Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting

  

Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting

     163   
   C   

Attestation report of the registered public accounting firm

  

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     69   
   D   

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

  

Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting

     163   

16

   Reserved      
   A    Audit Committee financial expert    Corporate governance report 2012   
        

Audit Committee—Members of the Audit committee

     192   
   B    Code of Ethics    Corporate governance report 2012   
        

Code of business ethics

     180-181   
        

Form 20-F 2012 cross reference table

  
        

Part II—19—Exhibit 11

     viii   
        

Board of Directors’ report

  
        

Corporate governance—High ethical standards

     57   
   C    Principal accountant fees and services   

Supplemental information

  
        

Audit committee pre-approval policies and procedures

     258   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
        

Note C30 Fees to auditors

     160   

 

vii


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Form 20-F Item Heading

  

Location in Document

   Page
Number
 
   D   

Exemptions from the listing standards for Audit Committees

  

Corporate governance report 2012

  
        

Board of Directors—Independence

     187   
        

Supplemental information

  
        

Corporate governance requirements

     257-258   
   E   

Purchase of equity securities by the issuer and affiliated purchasers

  

N/A

  
   F   

Change in registrant’s certifying accountant

   N/A   
   G    Corporate governance   

Corporate governance report 2012

  
        

Board of Directors—Independence

     187   
     

Supplemental information

  
        

Corporate governance requirements

     257-258   

PART III

     

17

   Financial statements      
        

Consolidated income statement and Statement of comprehensive income

     70-71   
        

Consolidated balance sheet

     72   
        

Consolidated statement of cash flows

     73   
        

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

     74   
        

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

     75-162   
        

Report of independent registered public accounting firm

     69   

18

   Financial statements    N/A   
19    Exhibits         
     

Exhibit 1

  

Articles of Association (incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 1 to the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2011 filed by the registrant on April 4, 2012 (File No. 000-12033))

  
     

Exhibit 6

  

Please see Notes to the consolidated financial statements, Note C1 Significant accounting policies

     75-91   
     

Exhibit 7

  

For definitions of certain ratios used in this report, please see Financial terminology

     269-270   
     

Exhibit 8

  

Please see Supplemental Information—Investments

     260-261   
     

Exhibit 11

  

Our Code of business ethics is included on our web site at www.ericsson.com/code-of-business-ethics

  
     

Exhibit 12

  

302 Certifications

  
     

Exhibit 13

  

906 Certifications

  
     

Exhibit 15.1

  

Consent of independent registered public accounting firm

  

Note: The Company’s holding in ST-Ericsson SA meets the requirements of Rule 3-09 under Regulation S-X for the provision of separate financial statements of ST-Ericsson SA, a non-listed Swiss company that has a December 31 fiscal year end.

The Company intends to file the financial statements of ST-Ericsson SA as of and for the year ended December 31, 2012 as an amendment to this Annual Report on Form 20-F as soon as practicable after they become available.

 

viii


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

THIS IS ERICSSON

We are a world-leading provider of communications networks, telecom services and support solutions.

Communication is changing the way we live and work. When one person connects, his or her world changes. With everything connected, our world changes. Ericsson plays a key role in this evolution, using innovation to empower people, business and society. We are enabling the networked society with efficient real-time solutions that allow us all to study, work and live our lives more freely, in sustainable societies.

Since the establishment of the Company in 1876, we are a leader in telecommunication and are now expanding our role into an ICT (Information and Communications Technology) solutions provider.

Our research and solutions development has made mobile communications and broadband possible. When you make a call or browse the internet on your handset, tablet or mobile PC, you will likely use one of our solutions.

Our offering comprises services, software and infrastructure, mainly for telecom operators.

 

   

40% of the world’s mobile traffic runs through networks that are supplied by us

 

   

We provide solutions and services to all major telecom operators in the world

 

   

The networks we manage for operators serve about 950 million subscribers

 

   

We have more than 33,000 granted patents, comprising one of the industry’s strongest patent portfolios.

OUR SEGMENTS

Today, we are more than 110,000 people serving customers in more than 180 countries. To best reflect our business, we report four business segments:

Networks

Networks provides the infrastructure that is the basis for all mobile communication. We deliver superior-performance and cost-efficient networks to ensure the best user experience.

Global Services

With 60,000 services professionals globally, we deliver managed services, consulting and systems integration, customer support, network design and optimization and network rollout.

Support Solutions

Support Solutions is the new name for former segment Multimedia and it signposts a change of direction. The segment focuses on software for operations support systems and business support systems (OSS and BSS), TV and media management, and m-commerce.

Joint venture ST-Ericsson

ST-Ericsson offers modems and ModAps (integrated modem and application processor platforms) for handset and tablet manufacturers.

OUR REGIONS

We secure an efficient go-to-market setup through ten regions. We strive for profitable growth through solid regional competence and strong customer relationships, backed by our global knowledge.

 

1


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In our ten regions, we work together with our customers to develop innovative and scalable solutions that help operators grow their revenues and reduce their costs.

Once a successful case is proven, we can roll out the same practice all over the world, sharing common processes, methods and tools. This ensures quality and efficiency.

Solutions and services often go hand-in-hand as networks become more complex and often include products from several suppliers. Operators look for long-term services partnerships with companies such as Ericsson for support in every aspect of their business.

We serve our customers through regional competence organized into six engagement practices: Mobile Broadband; Communication Services; Fixed Broadband and Convergence; Managed Services; Operations and Business Support Systems; and Television and Media Management.

 

2


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

2012 IN REVIEW

JANUARY

Ericsson strengthens its focus on IPR licensing, to get a fair return on R&D investments in patents development.

Any company that provides wireless connectivity will likely need a license from us.

JANUARY

Ericsson signs a deal to connect the entire vessel fleet of the world’s largest shipping company, Maersk Line, using our capabilities to enable machine-to-machine communication.

FEBRUARY

Ericsson complements the heterogeneous network offering with telecom grade Wi-Fi through acquisition of Wi-Fi company BelAir Networks, enabling operators to further improve the mobile broadband user experience.

MARCH

Ericsson widens the scope of managed services to include such services for broadcasters by announcing the acquisition of the Broadcast Services Division of Technicolor.

APRIL

SOFTBANK MOBILE signs 4G/LTE contract with Ericsson in Japan. The network will cover three major cities in the country, together accounting for 70% of the data and voice traffic. Ericsson has deployed LTE networks on five continents.

MAY

Ericsson’s efficient AIR radio base station is selected by T-Mobile as the first operator in the USA to launch this technology, which enables improvement of existing coverage and quick launch of LTE in 2013. The contract also includes consulting and systems integration and rollout services.

JUNE

At a briefing for journalists in San Francisco, Ericsson’s President and CEO Hans Vestberg discusses how the rapid increases in subscribers and data usage impact the entire ICT industry. Network quality, user experience, billing and charging models and services offerings all need to be adapted.

JULY

MTN Nigeria boosts its ability to serve subscribers and their growing data needs by becoming the first African operator to deploy Ericsson’s scalable SSR 8020 platform for wireless IP core networks. This is one of 39 SSR contracts that Ericsson won in 2012.

AUGUST

Italian operator FASTWEB signs a seven-year IT managed services contract with Ericsson. It includes data center consolidation and transformation, as well as managed operations for its IT infrastructure. Ericsson extends the scope of managed services from telecoms to data centers.

 

3


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

SEPTEMBER

Ericsson partners in the Social Good Summit 2012 in New York, discussing how mobile broadband can be used to help tackle global challenges such as poverty and climate change.

OCTOBER

Ericsson is selected to implement a new LTE network for Vivo, a subsidiary of Telefônica, helping meet user demand for connectivity and mobile broadband services in Brazil. Ericsson has an LTE market share of more than 50% in Latin America.

NOVEMBER

Ericsson holds its annual Investor Day, focusing on profitable growth and how the company is transforming into a leading ICT solutions provider in telecoms.

NOVEMBER

The new Ericsson Mobility Report is launched, stating that “Traffic in mobile networks continues to grow at an impressive rate worldwide, driven by uptake of smart devices and apps.” This is a recurrent report on network traffic and market trends, based on data traffic measurements in live networks globally and on internal forecasts.

DECEMBER

Ericsson announces that Volvo Car Group will use Ericsson’s Connected Vehicle Cloud to allow drivers, passengers and their cars to connect to services available in the cloud. Drivers and passengers can access applications for information, navigation and entertainment from a screen in the car.

 

4


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

GROUP OVERVIEW

Our four business segments provide solutions and services which in combination create an industry-leading telecommunications portfolio.

 

Segment

 

NETWORKS

 

GLOBAL SERVICES

 

SUPPORT SOLUTIONS

  Headed by Johan Wibergh   Headed by Magnus Mandersson   Headed by Per Borgklint
 

We develop and deliver superior-performance network infrastructure for 2G/GSM, 3G/WCDMA/HSPA & CDMA, and 4G/LTE with solutions for:

 

•    Radio access, based on multi-standard radio base station RBS 6000

 

•    IP and transport; IP Edge routing based on SSR 8000 and transport solutions based on fiber and microwave

 

•    Core network; switching and IMS solutions based on the Ericsson Blade System platform.

 

Globally, 60,000 service professionals deploy and operate networks, and integrate solutions to allow operators to monetize increasing data traffic and ensure high user experience in networks. We use global processes, methods and tools to ensure quality and efficiency in the networks. Global Services include:

 

•    Professional Services; consulting and systems integration, managed services, network design and optimization as well as customer support

 

•    Network Rollout.

 

We develop and deliver software solutions for:

 

•    Operations and Business Support Systems (OSS and BSS); enabling management of networks and services, customer interaction and revenue management

 

•    TV and Media management; enabling operators, broadcasters and content owners to create multiscreen TV experience on all devices

 

•    M-Commerce; software solutions and hosted services to enable mobile financial services and global interoperability.

 

5


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

LOGO

ST-ERICSSON*

Headed by Didier Lamouche

A 50/50 joint venture with STMicroelectronics, ST-Ericsson offers modems and ModAps (integrated modem and application processor platforms) for leading handset and tablet manufacturers.

STMicroelectronics announced in October its intention to exit as a shareholder in ST-Ericsson. Ericsson is presently exploring various strategic options for the future of ST-Ericsson assets.

Ericsson continues to believe that the modem technology, which it originally contributed to the JV, has a strategic value for the wireless industry.

 

* The Ericsson share of ST Ericsson’s results is accounted for according to the equity method.

 

6


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

LETTER FROM THE CEO

2012 was a year of growth in Global Services and Support Solutions, but more challenging for Networks. We have extended our leadership in several key growth areas and taken important steps in executing our strategy.

Our mission is “Innovating to empower people, business and society.”

 

LOGO

  

LOGO

DEAR SHAREHOLDERS

We can look back at 2012 in which the strong growth of mobile data continued across the world and 4G/LTE launches started across all regions. Broadband is a transformative technology that is already improving quality of life, productivity and sustainability globally. During the year we have clearly seen how the world is moving towards our vision of a networked society, and over time, this will create new business opportunities for Ericsson and our customers.

Executing our strategy

The work to leverage our strength in the growth areas mobile broadband, managed services and operations and business support solutions (OSS and BSS) has continued with both selective acquisitions and divestments to enhance and streamline the portfolio.

Key acquisitions in the year that have contributed to strengthening our leadership include BelAir in the area of mobile broadband, ConceptWave and Telcordia in the area of OSS and BSS as well as Technicolor’s broadcast services division in the area of managed services.

In addition we completed the divestment of our share in Sony Ericsson and launched a new strategy for Support Solutions.

Our R&D and services investments form the foundation for the long-term strength of the company. Despite a challenging year for Networks, we remain almost the size of number two and three combined in the market when it comes to installed base of radio base stations and we have maintained a strong market share also in mobile network equipment. Global Services outperformed the market and solidified its leadership. In the fragmented telecom services market, Ericsson held a 13% market share for 2012, well ahead of its closest competitor.

 

7


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Our joint venture ST-Ericsson had a tough year. Following the announcement of STMicroelectronics’ intention to exit as a shareholder, Ericsson will, together with STMicroelectronics, continue to explore various strategic options for ST-Ericsson assets. We continue to believe that the modem technology which we originally contributed to the JV has a strategic value to the wireless industry.

Performance in 2012

Sales in 2012 were flat compared to 2011, despite a challenging year for Networks.

Global Services contributed with both sales growth and stable operating profitability, and Support Solutions went from making losses in 2011 to achieving profitability.

Global Services and Support Solutions together represented close to 50% of Group sales, compared to 42% in 2011, highlighting the ongoing transformation into an ICT company combining services, software and hardware, into industry-leading solutions.

Profitability has been under pressure during the year due to operating losses in ST-Ericsson, the ongoing network modernization projects in Europe as well as the underlying business mix, with a higher share of coverage projects than capacity projects. Improving profitability has been a key priority throughout the year and we have taken actions globally to reduce costs and improve efficiency.

Throughout 2012 North America was our strongest region, driven by continued mobile broadband investments and a high demand for services. Our second largest region was North East Asia where sales grew in Japan, though not fully offsetting the lower sales of GSM in China and 3G in Korea.

Financial strength

We continue to have high focus on capital efficiency. We ended the year with strong cash flow, full-year cash conversion well above target and maintained our strong net cash position.

Financial strength allows us to make selective acquisitions to capture opportunities to consolidate the market, gain market share and fill portfolio gaps when relevant, and provide a good return to shareholders. It is also a competitive advantage in our customer relationships.

The Board of Directors proposes a dividend for 2012 of SEK 2.75 (2.50) per share.

Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility

Ericsson is strongly committed to sustainability and corporate responsibility.

Focus remains on reducing our carbon footprint and in 2012 we exceeded our target. We see an increasing interest from customers in driving energy efficiency in their networks, and using broadband to shape the low-carbon economy of the future.

We continue to advocate the use of broadband to enable access to education, better health and livelihood through our partnerships and programs such as Connect To Learn and Ericsson Response.

Responsibility and high governance standards guide all Ericsson employees in all parts of the world. Our aim is to be the trusted partner to all of our stakeholders and as such we put strong focus on evolving our governance framework with further integration of sustainability and corporate responsibility principles.

 

8


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Our Code of Business Ethics was updated during the year to reflect our ongoing commitment to respect human rights and the new UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights.

During 2012 we also signed the World Economic Forum’s Partnering Against Corruption Initiative, enhanced our anti-corruption program and broadened our whistle blower procedure.

Strong long-term drivers

We build our strength on the combination of our core assets: technology leadership, services leadership and global scale. We have strong and long-standing customer relationships and highly skilled and engaged employees. I have worked in this company for 24 years and the dedication and professionalism that Ericsson employees demonstrate never cease to impress me.

Our focus on profitable growth remains. While the macroeconomic and political uncertainty continues in certain regions, the industry fundamentals remain attractive. We have a strong portfolio, position and capabilities to continue to support our customers in a transforming ICT market and look forward to a year of leveraging our leadership position and continuing our journey into the networked society.

Hans Vestberg

President and CEO

 

9


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

MARKET TRENDS

Everything is going mobile. The uptake of mobile broadband, driven by increasing use of smartphones, tablets and apps is driving change for people, business and society.

Market trends 2012

USERS

Higher demand for data capacity due to:

 

   

Smartphone uptake acceleration

 

   

Increasing use of mobile broadband

 

   

Changing lifestyle with mobility and cloud-based services.

OPERATORS

Focus on:

 

   

Superior-performance broadband networks

 

   

Increasing efficiency through transformation and outsourcing

 

   

Creating new value streams from networks.

THE NETWORKED SOCIETY

In the networked society, connectivity will be the starting point for new ways of innovating, collaborating and socializing. It’s about creating freedom, empowerment and opportunity that will transform industries and society while helping find solutions to some of the greatest challenges facing our planet.

When one person connects, his or her world changes. With everything connected, our world changes. We believe ICT will be a fundamental driver of this transformation. For our customers the networked society will offer opportunities to expand their existing businesses, and to engage in new business areas, such as cloud services and industry-specific services.

Operators’ revenue growth and potential for efficiencies will steer their investments going forward. As a result, although the total addressable telecom market is growing at a modest pace, our portfolio momentum areas—mobile broadband, managed services as well as OSS and BSS—are set for higher growth.

Fundamentally, we believe the market is strong, fueled by higher smartphone penetration and growing mobile data usage. As a market leader, we understand the possibilities—and have the ability to drive rethinking, reinvention and innovation of our industry.

In 2012, mobile data traffic doubled. We expect it will continue to grow at a high rate in the coming years. The main driver is the change in user behavior, leading to increasing user expectations on network and application performance. Demand for greater mobile data capacity will also affect how operators choose to develop and operate networks and services.

CHANGING USER BEHAVIOR

The rapid increase in mobile data traffic will, in the coming years, be fuelled by three trends: increased smartphone uptake, the increasing use of mobile broadband, and the breakthrough of cloud-based services.

 

10


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Smartphone uptake is accelerating

While voice traffic is increasing at a steady rate, mobile data traffic is increasing exponentially. This increase is driven largely by smartphone use. Clearly phones are no longer simply for talking and texting—most of the time spent on a smartphone is dedicated to activities such as watching videos, playing games, shopping and engaging in social media.

Today 15–20% of the worldwide installed base of mobile phone subscriptions use smartphones—the number of smartphone subscriptions was 1.1 billion at the end of 2012 and we estimate that it will reach 3.3 billion by the end of 2018.

Mobile broadband use is increasing

People and businesses increasingly demand good network coverage, high-speed and high-quality broadband access at all times.

The number of mobile broadband subscriptions is increasing rapidly, from approximately 1.5 billion in 2012, to an estimated 6.5 billion in 2018. As the number of subscriptions increases, so does the data volume per subscription. By the end of 2018, we estimate that both mobile PCs and smartphones will generate four times as much data per device per month as today. Global mobile data traffic is estimated to grow twelve-fold between 2012 and 2018.

The largest contributor to increased data traffic is video, which is also watched on smartphones and tablets. Online video now constitutes on average 25–40% of traffic in mobile networks.

With the increasing use of ‘apps’, coverage is expected everywhere. But, when a user runs an app that requires higher performance (e.g. throughput) than needed for voice, the actual coverage area for the app will be smaller than that for voice.

In a network, every app has its own coverage area; a video application has a smaller coverage area than a music-streaming app which in turn has a smaller coverage area than voice.

Understanding of app coverage is therefore essential in order for operators to make the right investments in a network.

Cloud for availability everywhere

For many businesses and individuals, content is delivered as a cloud service—that is, as a service over the internet. Users see the benefits of accessing applications and data from any computer, phone or tablet anywhere, and at any time. Often they choose not to own the content but to stream it, gaining access to movies, TV, music and much more. Cloud-based services add to the demand for mobile capacity.

CHANGING OPERATOR NEEDS

The changes in how people, businesses and society at large operate, use the internet and interact will demand greater speed, capacity, quality of service and operational efficiency. To meet these demands, operators are upgrading their networks, revising how they can increase their operational efficiency and how they should best monetize the increased data traffic.

 

11


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Focus on superior-performance broadband networks

As user demand for coverage, speed and quality increases, superior-performance networks have become a key differentiator for operators. 3G/HSPA coverage is expected to increase from over 50% of the world’s population today, to 85% by the end of 2017. We anticipate that by 2017, half the world’s population will be covered by 4G/LTE networks. Operators come to Ericsson to expand network coverage and to upgrade networks for higher speed and capacity. To maintain superior performance there is also a continuous need for network tuning and optimization as traffic increases.

Focus on operational efficiency

To improve efficiency and reduce cost, operators increasingly choose to outsource the network and field operations, allowing them to focus on strategy, marketing and customer care. In a managed services project, Ericsson transforms the customer’s operations and implements our processes, methods and tools.

Monetizing data traffic

The demands created by mobile connectivity present new opportunities for operators. They are developing business models to monetize the increasing data use, with tiered pricing plans aligned to user needs, based for example on volume, time or speed. Increasingly, quality of service is becoming a differentiator for operators, as some focus on pure network development and others choose to be providers of premium services such as media, m-commerce and mobile finance.

Ericsson Operations Support Systems (OSS) enable the monitoring and optimization of the performance of operators’ increasingly complex networks and services, while our Business Support Systems (BSS) enable monetization of services and enhance their customer interaction capabilities.

 

LOGO

  

LOGO

 

12


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

OUR COMPETITIVE ASSETS

The unique combination of core assets drives our performance throughout the business.

TECHNOLOGY LEADERSHIP

Combining superior performance and thought leadership

Innovation is an important element of our corporate culture and a foundation for our competitiveness. Our long-time pioneering in telecommunications technologies is reflected in one of the industry’s largest patent portfolios. Through research into new technologies and a strong contribution to the creation of open standards, we strive to be first-to-market with new solutions. Our networks are designed and optimized for superior end-user experience. They are built to accommodate future traffic increase and the increasing number of connected devices.

SERVICES LEADERSHIP

Meeting operator objectives of business efficiency & revenue growth

Service delivery is industrialized in four Global Services Centers and local resources in our ten regions, where we use the same processes, methods and tools. This ensures standardized services packages of high quality. Our services professionals have advanced multi-vendor and multi-technology competence. They create value for customers by improving network efficiency and user experience as well as by supporting them in business innovation and revenue growth.

GLOBAL SCALE

Combining global scale advantages with local presence

We have a geographically diversified business, with customers in more than 180 countries. We have established relationships with all major telecom operators in the world, supporting networks with over 2.5 billion subscriptions. Focus on global standards means that we can provide global products. Economies of scale in R&D and production ensure that the products are efficient and of high quality.

Ericsson’s core values

Our values are the foundation of our culture. They guide us in our daily work, in how we relate to each other and the world around us and in the way we do business.

 

LOGO

 

13


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

OUR PEOPLE

At the end of the day it is our people that make the real difference. Our people strategy centers on building the best talent in the industry.

Our people are at the heart of everything we do, and they made us the industry leader we are today.

But what brought us here will not keep us here. Our industry is changing, and we work every day to secure high performance in everything we do.

In order to maintain our technology and services leadership, and to leverage our global scale, we have developed a business-aligned people strategy.

Grounded on our core values—professionalism, respect and perseverance—our people strategy focuses on building the best talent in the industry. To achieve this we have four objectives:

Attract exceptional talent

We leverage a strategic and aligned approach to attracting the best talent at all levels in all the markets where we have employees.

Rigorous talent planning and development

Our objective is to have the right talent at the right time in the right place.

We have a rigorous process for identifying, calibrating and developing our talent. We have a comprehensive career and competence model that allows our employees to build career paths, and clearly understand how to keep developing capabilities for the continued success of the company.

Our approach emphasizes best-in-class learning solutions through our Ericsson Academy and on-the-job development through stretch assignments and internal mobility.

Leadership

We believe that strong leadership is a key factor in creating and maintaining a high performance work environment with a highly engaged workforce.

We expect our leaders to maintain an environment that fosters creativity, innovation and the constant flow of ideas. Our employees should have clear goals and receive continuous feedback and coaching. These are the drivers of high performance and employee engagement.

Diversity

We have a focused strategy aimed at ensuring that our employee base and our leadership teams are as diverse as the world in which we operate. We believe a diverse and inclusive workforce drives innovation and leads to high performing teams and superior business results.

 

14


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

STRATEGY AND CUSTOMERS

We aim to become a leading information and communication technology (ICT) solutions provider by combining our core assets: technology leadership, services leadership and global scale.

VISION

The Company’s vision is to be the prime driver in an all-communicating world. Ericsson envisions a continued evolution, from having connected 6 billion people to connecting 50 billion ‘things’. The Company envisions that anything that can benefit from being connected will be connected, mainly via mobile broadband in the networked society that is beginning to come to life.

OUR STRATEGY

The Company’s strategy builds on a long-term vision and mission which is translated into a business strategy that should generate value for the Company’s key stakeholders; customers, employees and shareholders.

Four pillars form the foundation for our business strategy: Excel in Networks, Expand in Services, Extend in Support Solutions and Establish leading position in enablers of the networked society.

Excel in Networks

Networks’ strategic focus is on evolving networks from 2G to 3G to 4G with superior quality and performance. We secure a strong footprint in LTE and continue to assist operators in expanding their business by providing support for new business models and revenue streams.

We will expand our portfolio with heterogeneous networks in which Wi-Fi access will be part of our offering.

We will also utilize our large installed base of systems for mobile telephony to lead the transition to voice over LTE (VoLTE), where next-generation video and presence capabilities will be added to the traditional voice services.

We anticipate an array of “things” communicating, in addition to billions of people being connected. Mobile networks will thus increasingly carry more data and video, and we will evolve networks for the networked society through 4th-generation IP networks that are smart, scalable, simple and offer superior performance.

Expand in Global Services

In Global Services, we will leverage our momentum in sales and growth, and keep our focus on innovation, competence and cost control.

The focus area of innovation involves developing new business by capturing opportunities in new areas such as IT and broadcasting, as well as in new business models.

Competence is critical when expanding into an ICT market with a higher degree of complexity, with new competitors such as IT and professional services companies.

Cost control is supported by industrializing delivery, standardized services packaging and automated tools.

Our service delivery model enables us to provide services in the same way and with the same quality across the world. It also ensures that innovation and knowledge sharing are spread globally in an efficient way.

 

15


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Extend in Support Solutions

Segment Support Solutions focuses on building business in OSS and BSS, TV and Media management, as well as M-Commerce.

After the acquisitions of Telcordia and ConceptWave in 2012, we now have a full spectrum of OSS solutions from planning and engineering tools, through fulfillment and inventory tools and service assurance products. We now provide customers with the solutions to be best in class in plan-to-provision, lead-to-service and trouble-to-resolution.

We will continue to invest in our market-leading charging, billing and converged charging and billing solutions.

Our m-commerce business, focused on international remittance, builds on the strength in charging systems and our customers’ prepaid customer base.

Our TV and Media management offering comprises of compression, for both operators and media companies, and multiscreen TV & video, including IPTV, service enablement and service delivery platforms.

Establish leading position in enablers of a networked society

In the networked society anything that benefits from being connected will be connected. This development will be made possible through enablers such as solutions for machine-to-machine communications, modems from ST-Ericsson and IPRs.

We are shifting the focus from connected devices to enablers of a networked society. This is an area that will be developed over the coming years as we start investigating different opportunities both together with operator customers and with customers from other industries.

COMPANY TRANSFORMATION

We are going through a period of transformation and change – both in the industry and within the company. Two important areas of company-wide transformation are:

Go-to-market model

A new go-to-market model with ten regions and six global engagement practices was introduced in 2010, enabling us to expand engagements with customers into new areas, develop skills across our portfolio, and build momentum around global knowledge sharing.

This makes it possible for us to work even closer together with our customers, to understand their needs, while leveraging our global scale.

Lean and agile ways of working in R&D

One major undertaking to improve performance and efficiency in our R&D is to implement a lean and agile methodology. This is a way of working that includes shortened feedback loops, improved communication and rationalized processes.

Some product development projects have just begun the transition to lean and agile ways of working, while others are well advanced.

 

16


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

OUR CUSTOMERS

Our business is defined by long-term relationships mainly with large telecom operators around the world. We serve approximately 400 customers. Globally, telecom operators represent the majority of net sales.

We also engage directly with customers in certain other industries such as utilities and media.

We have customers in more than 180 countries and have been present in many markets for more than 100 years. Our ten largest customers, of which half are multinational, account for 46% of net sales.

Our customers operate in a wide range of local economies and are at various technology stages. They have different business focuses depending on the maturity of their respective markets.

 

17


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

OUR PORTFOLIO

We have the competence, the skills and the solutions our customers need to tackle the challenges of today and tomorrow. Here we feature our offering to telecom operators.

MOBILE BROADBAND

In summary

 

   

Evolving networks from 2G/GSM to 3G/WCDMA/HSPA and 4G/LTE

 

   

Helping operators meet demand for higher speed and capacity

 

   

Building heterogeneous networks where capacity demand is high, such as in cities.

Mobile broadband is playing an increasingly important role in our daily lives. It is changing the way we are entertained and educated, and helps us work, keep in touch, and share information and ideas, regardless of where we are. It has the power to lessen the divide between geographic regions and socioeconomic groups, and improve the quality of life in all parts of the world. Mobile data traffic almost doubled in 2012, driven particularly by video, new smartphone and tablet launches, and mobile PC users generating even more data traffic. Mobile data traffic is expected to grow at a high rate, presenting a significant opportunity for operators, both in mature and emerging markets. Operators need to enhance network quality by increasing coverage, speed and capacity, and by providing service differentiation to ensure they can monetize the ever-increasing consumer demands for mobile broadband, and the accompanying lifestyle expectations. We provide the network infrastructure, upgrades and LTE expansions and support solutions to meet these operators’ needs.

Network evolution

We were a key force behind the development of mobile technologies. Now our strategic focus is on evolving networks. With the evolution of the major mobile broadband technologies WCDMA/HSPA and LTE, true broadband performance and capacity is used to connect smartphones, PCs, tablets, sensors and machines to the internet and broadband services. With the high-speed, high-capacity mobile broadband possible through our WCDMA/HSPA and LTE offerings, operators can cost-effectively meet user demand for advanced internet services anywhere, anytime. We expect WCDMA/HSPA to be the predominant mobile broadband technology for many years to come. With the transition toward LTE, we take further steps towards greater capacity and higher throughput. LTE covers only 5–10% of global population today, but by 2017, we expect it will cover roughly half the people in the world. The ramp up of LTE is quicker than for earlier generations.

In addition, by 2017, densely populated urban areas, are expected to generate around 60% of total mobile traffic. To increase network capacity in these areas, we will build heterogeneous networks. Here, we complement powerful radio base stations with smaller radio base stations including Wi-Fi, which provide extra capacity in areas of high traffic loads, such as malls, transport hubs, hotels and offices.

Platform strength

Our network infrastructure is built on three main platforms:

 

   

The RBS 6000 multi-standard platform for radio base stations. The platform supports GSM/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA, LTE and CDMA in a single unit. The RBS 6000 family ensures a smooth transition to new technology such as LTE. Upgrades and expansions involve mostly software and services, often delivered remotely. RBS 6000 now accounts for almost all of radio base station shipments.

 

   

The Ericsson Blade System platform for handling of network control functionality in fixed and mobile core networks.

 

18


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

The SSR 8000 family of smart services routers for network gateways which provides two powerful differentiators for operators. It is a high-capacity router platform with multi-application capabilities, thus enabling better network performance; it also supports services across fixed and mobile networks.

All platforms offer cost-effective deployment and a future-secured evolution for capacity and functionality.

MANAGED SERVICES

In summary

 

   

Networks and business models becoming increasingly complex

 

   

Market pressures leading operators to enhance offerings while increasing efficiency

 

   

We build and manage networks, allowing operators to focus on strategy and customer attraction and retention.

Greater consumer expectations, and the upsurge in data traffic, demand greater network capacity and capability, which in turn lead to increased complexity, both in networks and their supporting business models. Maturing markets, intensified competition and stronger financial pressure lead to a need among telecom operators for greater service differentiation, enhanced offerings, and faster time to market, all at the same time as trying to reduce costs and increase efficiency.

This is where a managed services model comes into play. We take responsibility for activities telecom operators once handled in-house, from designing, planning and building a network, to managing its day-to-day operation. Operators can look to reduce costs and manage complexity through a partner such as Ericsson, who can take on a broader responsibility, and apply global best practices.

The world’s largest managed services provider

We handle complex issues such as convergence, quality and capacity management, while freeing up operator resources to focus on strategy, marketing and customer care. We can also help operators scale quickly and cost-effectively, and address new opportunities in cloud solutions and media offerings.

We manage networks with approximately 950 million subscribers in more than 100 countries.

The networks we manage are typically complex multi-vendor, multi-technology environments. More than 50% of the equipment we manage is non-Ericsson. Our four global service centers (GSCs) all house global network operation centers (GNOCs) for efficient remote network management.

Expanding the scope

We are expanding the managed services model to adjacent, growing industries such as TV/media and IT systems.

The television industry is clearly migrating towards the internet. Traditional broadcasting is being complemented or replaced by a multitude of communications technologies. Here we see the opportunity to extend the managed services model to be a true ICT service provider, covering the full broadcast chain.

 

19


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Operators also look for providers that can run and operate their entire IT systems and data centers. Consequently our managed services offering has expanded from network operations into IT Managed Services. This means Ericsson can run day-to-day operations IT systems and offer complete application life-cycle management, application development, and maintenance of both applications and infrastructure.

 

LOGO

OPERATIONS AND BUSINESS SUPPORT SYSTEMS (OSS AND BSS)

In summary

 

   

We provide systems used for managing services, revenues and subscriber relationships

 

   

We help operators manage and monetize the increasing amount of data traffic

 

   

We help operators manage increasingly complex networks.

In the telecom industry, customers need change fast, driven by swiftly-evolving technology. Business models that once promised commercial success are being challenged. These are the reasons operations and business support systems (OSS and BSS) have become key areas of investment for operators.

OSS and BSS are the systems and services used for managing services, revenues and subscriber relationships. With the growth in mobile broadband, operators need to evolve their OSS and BSS solutions to monetize the increasing amount of data, and to manage increasing network complexity. Our solutions help operators optimize their services based on:

 

   

Customer experience, where understanding, acting and responding to changes in the way customers experience and use services helps meet their expectations

 

   

Business innovation, being able to adapt to and adopt different approaches

 

   

Business efficiency, consolidating systems and simplifying processes to manage the total cost of ownership.

Our OSS and BSS solutions have led change and created value through four generations of telecoms evolution. They are based on deep and broad experience in the business, and are now significantly strengthened by our acquisition of Telcordia. Solutions include:

 

   

Service differentiation—We provide the means for operators to improve customer loyalty and revenues as they are adopting new business models with tiered pricing plans for different speeds, data use or quality guarantees as well as personalized and improved customer experiences

 

   

Transformation—We support the transformation of operations through consulting, systems integration and software solutions, to help operators adapt to rapidly changing and competitive markets

 

20


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Assurance—We offer solutions for monitoring network performance, and for planning, building and optimizing networks, so operators can improve customer experience and secure revenue

 

   

Billing and revenue management—BSS solutions include those for revenue management and customer care. Our mobile money solution is pre-integrated with charging systems to help operators to lower churn, increase customer loyalty and reduce operating expenses.

This is OSS and BSS

Business Support Systems facilitate the relationship of the operator with their customers.

Operations Support Systems facilitate the operations of the operator’s network.

 

LOGO

COMMUNICATION SERVICES

 

   

Operator-based services, based on industry standards, to ensure interoperability

 

   

IMS, HD voice and Voice over LTE (VoLTE) drive development.

Communication services are the services people use to interact with each other, such as voice and video calls as well as text and multimedia messaging. These operator-based services are provided globally and are based on industry standards, ensuring interoperability.

Users expect their communication services to provide a seamless, instantaneous experience across all devices and all subscriptions. This shift requires operators to provide new functionality and richer offerings.

Operators now exploit opportunities to enhance user experience while reducing costs for voice communication. Our IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) enables this. Services controlled by IMS include voice (including HD voice), messaging and video calls.

HD voice significantly improves quality of voice communication. It helps ensure that voice continues to provide revenue streams for operators of both fixed and mobile networks.

Voice over LTE (VoLTE) enables operators to offer voice services over all-IP LTE networks. It also brings with it new services such as HD video and richer multimedia services.

 

21


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

FIXED BROADBAND AND CONVERGENCE

 

   

Our IP-based converged networks provide low-cost and high-performance services.

Strong growth in data traffic drives a need for higher capacity solutions, based on IP and Ethernet technologies. Operators compete by evolving their networks to provide fast internet speeds, reliable high-definition IPTV and video on demand. To reduce cost and enable service bundling, fixed traffic can be provided over a multiservice network converging telephony, internet and TV. Our 4th generation IP network portfolio supports IP-based services and applications at low cost and high performance.

TV AND MEDIA MANAGEMENT

 

   

A broad suite of standard-based products for digital TV, HDTV, video on demand, IPTV, mobile TV and content management.

TV is going digital and interactive. In the converging media landscape, broadcast and broadband are coming together. The worldwide digital TV market is growing rapidly.

With a broad suite of open standards-based products, we offer high-quality solutions for digital TV, HDTV, video on demand, IPTV, mobile TV and content management.

High-performance video means large amounts of traffic in the networks. This can be handled with our media distribution solution for video delivery over IP, combining a content distribution network with our TV portfolio.

Our IPTV network infrastructure offers a verified end-to-end solution from video head-end to broadband access, optimized for multi-stream HD-IPTV and on-demand video services. The solution also offers support for video to mobile handsets over HSPA and LTE networks.

Ericsson’s multiscreen TV solution combines the full features of IPTV, mobile TV and web TV with a common user interface. It fully integrates fixed line and wireless media for the first time.

Business consulting, systems integration and implementation ensure a smooth launch of new TV infrastructure and services.

 

22


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT

Ericsson is a truly global player, with customers in more than 180 countries. We have been present in many countries, such as China, Brazil and India, for more than 100 years.

LATIN AMERICA

Net sales: SEK 22.0 billion (+0%)

In 2012, all major operators chose their 4G/LTE suppliers resulting in an estimated market share for Ericsson of more than 50% in 4G/LTE.

NORTH AMERICA

Net sales: SEK 56.7 billion (+16%)

Development in North America has been strong across all segments, driven by operators’ demand for rollout of 4G networks as well as 3G capacity upgrades. A wide range of 4G devices are available to North American consumers and this fueled traffic growth and operators’ demand for network capacity. All Ericsson CDMA customers have transitioned to 4G/LTE.

NORTHERN EUROPE AND CENTRAL ASIA

Net sales: SEK 11.3 billion (–25%)

Lower operator investments during the year, primarily in Russia, impacted sales negatively.

WESTERN AND CENTRAL EUROPE

Net sales: SEK 17.5 billion (–8%)

Sales for Networks and Support Solutions declined due to cautious operator spending. Global Services sales increased slightly, driven by network modernization.

MEDITERRANEAN

Net sales: SEK 23.3 billion (–2%)

Sales for Networks and Support Solutions were negatively impacted by the macroeconomic environment in many countries, making operators more cautious with their investments. Global Services sales increased driven by network modernization projects.

MIDDLE EAST

Net sales: SEK 15.6 billion (+1%)

2012 was characterized by political unrest in some countries which made operators more cautious. Operators focused on network performance and efficiency which drove sales for Global Services.

SUB-SAHARAN AFRICA

Net sales: SEK 11.3 billion (+12%)

Sales increased in all segments mainly driven by rollout of 2G/GSM voice services. Mobile broadband penetration slowly increased with low-cost smartphone availability.

 

23


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

INDIA

Net sales: SEK 6.5 billion (–34%)

India had a weak year, due to low activity levels with operator investments only in certain areas.

NORTH EAST ASIA

Net sales: SEK 36.2 billion (–5%)

Both Japan and South Korea are building country-wide 4G/ LTE networks. In Japan sales grew during 2012, while sales in Korea were negatively impacted by lower 3G revenues. China had focus on the coming 4G/LTE rollouts and GSM sales declined.

SOUTH EAST ASIA AND OCEANIA

Net sales: SEK 15.1 billion (+9%)

Sales growth was driven by 3G deployments in Indonesia, Thailand and the Philippines. Global Services developed well in Australia during the year.

OTHER

Net sales: SEK 12.3 billion (+15%)

Includes revenues generated across all regions, through licensing, sales of cables, broadcast services, power modules and other businesses.

 

24


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

OUR PERFORMANCE

Our overall goal is to create shareholder value. We use a range of financial and non-financial targets to drive business performance.

 

What we aim for   

GROWING SALES FASTER THAN

THE MARKET

   BEST-IN-CLASS OPERATING MARGIN    STRONG CASH CONVERSION
Why we measure it    Outperforming our market confirms the validity of our strategic direction.    A clear focus on operating margins demonstrates our commitment to profitable growth.    A strong cash position supports new business activity, enables appropriate acquisition opportunities and provides resilience to external economic volatility.

 

Our performance

  

LOGO

 

 

   LOGO   

LOGO

 

 

25


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

What we aim for   GROWTH IN JV EARNINGS   CUSTOMER SATISFACTION   EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT
Why we measure it   The modem technology has a strategic value to the wireless industry.   Customer satisfaction is a prerequisite for customer loyalty. We strive to ensure that our customers perceive us as a thought leader and their preferred business partner.   Engaged employees are motivated to contribute to the success of Ericsson and are willing to go the extra mile to meet the organization’s goals.

 

Our performance

  LOGO   LOGO  

LOGO

 

Our score is 8 percentage points higher than external benchmark average, as measured across over 250 companies. We started to measure the engagement index in 2011.

 

26


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

SUSTAINABILITY AND CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY

Our approach to sustainability and corporate responsibility is integrated into our core business operations and in our relationship with stakeholders.

SUSTAINABILITY

Sustainability is about the “triple bottom line”:

 

   

Social equity; communication is a basic human need and should be available to everyone

 

   

Environmental performance; minimizing environmental impact and creating a low-carbon society

 

   

Economic prosperity; contributions to social and economic development.

We have implemented strong social, ethical and environmental standards. This commitment generates positive business impacts, which in turn benefit society.

Reducing environmental impact

The energy use of products in operation remains our most significant environmental impact. We also work to reduce our own environmental impact. Focus is on product energy efficiency and materials management as well as business travel, facilities and transport of our products. We have set a five-year target to reduce Ericsson carbon footprint intensity by 40% for products in operation and for our own operations and we have achieved it one year ahead of time.

We work proactively with our customers to encourage network and site energy optimization.

One aspect of our sustainability strategy is the role broadband can play in helping to offset global CO2 emissions.

70% of these are attributed to cities. We work on sustainable city solutions and are engaged in global climate policy.

Technology for Good

Our Technology for Good program is focused on applying Ericsson’s expertise, global presence and scale to find market-based solutions that empower people, business and society to help shape a more sustainable world. We have used our technology and competence to help achieve the Millennium Development Goals for more than a decade.

Through our volunteer program Ericsson Response™, we have played an active role in humanitarian disaster relief efforts.

CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY

Corporate Responsibility is about managing risks to secure that Ericsson remains a trusted partner among our stakeholders.

Conducting business responsibly

We actively support the UN Global Compact, and endorse its principles regarding human and labor rights, anti-corruption and environmental protection.

 

27


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

We have a Code of Business Ethics and a Code of Conduct which reflect responsible business practices. Promotion of these practices is reinforced by employee awareness training, workshops and monitoring.

Suppliers must comply with our Code of Conduct.

We continued to develop our anti-corruption program and broadened Ericsson’s whistleblower procedure.

 

28


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY

For definitions of the financial terms used, see Glossary, Financial Terminology and Exchange Rates.

Five-year summary

 

SEK million

  2012     Change     2011     2010     2009     2008  

Income statement items

                                   

Net sales

    227,779        0     226,921        203,348        206,477        208,930   

Operating income

    10,458        –42     17,900        16,455        5,918        16,252   

Financial net

    –276        —          221        –672        325        974   

Net income

    5,938        –53     12,569        11,235        4,127        11,667   

Year-end position

                                   

Total assets

    274,996        –2     280,349        281,815        269,809        285,684   

Working capital as defined1)

    100,619        –8     109,552        105,488        99,079        99,951   

Capital employed as defined1)

    176,653        –5     186,307        182,640        181,680        182,439   

Gross cash as defined1)

    76,708        –5     80,542        87,150        76,724        75,005   

Net cash as defined1)

    38,538        –2     39,505        51,295        36,071        34,651   

Property, plant and equipment

    11,493        7     10,788        9,434        9,606        9,995   

Stockholders’ equity

    136,883        –4     143,105        145,106        139,870        140,823   

Non-controlling interest

    1,600        –26     2,165        1,679        1,157        1,261   

Interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits

    38,170        –7     41,037        35,855        40,653        40,354   

Per share indicators

                                   

Earnings per share, basic, SEK

    1.80        –53     3.80        3.49        1.15        3.54   

Earnings per share, diluted, SEK

    1.78        –53     3.77        3.46        1.14        3.52   

Cash dividends per share, SEK

    2.75 2)      10     2.50        2.25        2.00        1.85   

Stockholders’ equity per share, SEK

    42.51        –5     44.57        45.34        43.79        44.21   

Number of shares outstanding (in millions)

                                   

end of period, basic

    3,220        —          3,211        3,200        3,194        3,185   

average, basic

    3,216        —          3,206        3,197        3,190        3,183   

average, diluted

    3,247        —          3,233        3,226        3,212        3,202   

Other information

                                   

Additions to property, plant and equipment

    5,429        9     4,994        3,686        4,006        4,133   

Depreciation and write-downs/impairments of property, plant and equipment

    4,012        13     3,546        3,296        3,502        3,105   

Acquisitions/capitalization of intangible assets

    13,247        —          2,748        7,246        11,413        1,287   

Amortization and write-downs/impairments of intangible assets

    5,877        7     5,490        6,657        8,621        5,568   

Research and development expenses

    32,833        1     32,638        31,558        33,055        33,584   

as percentage of net sales

    14.4     —          14.4     15.5     16.0     16.1

Ratios

                                   

Operating margin excluding joint ventures and associated companies

    9.7     —          9.6     8.7     6.5     8.0

Operating margin

    4.6     —          7.9     8.1     2.9     7.8

EBITA margin as defined1)

    6.6     —          9.9     11.0     6.7     9.4

Cash conversion

    116     —          40     112     117     92

Return on equity as defined1)

    4.1     —          8.5     7.8     2.6     8.2

Return on capital employed as defined1)

    6.7     —          11.3     9.6     4.3     11.3

Equity ratio

    50.4     —          51.8     52.1     52.3     49.7

Capital turnover

    1.3        —          1.2        1.1        1.1        1.2   

Inventory turnover days

    73        —          78        74        68        68   

Trade receivables turnover

    3.6        —          3.6        3.2        2.9        3.1   

Payment readiness, SEK million

    84,951        –2     86,570        96,951        88,960        84,917   

as percentage of net sales

    37.3     —          38.1     47.7     43.1     40.6

Statistical data, year-end

                                   

Number of employees

    110,255        5     104,525        90,261        82,493        78,740   

of which in Sweden

    17,712        1     17,500        17,848        18,217        20,155   

Export sales from Sweden, SEK million

    106,997        –8     116,507        100,070        94,829        109,254   

 

1) These financial measures as defined by us may constitute non-IFRS measures. For a reconciliation to the most directly comparable IFRS measures, see pages 262–266.
2) For 2012, as proposed by the Board of Directors.

 

29


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

LETTER FROM THE CHAIRMAN

DEAR SHAREHOLDERS

It is now almost two years since I assumed the role as Chairman of the Board of Ericsson, and looking back they have certainly been interesting years. The rapid pace of change of the industry and the transformative power of the technology are two reasons why I find this role so interesting and inspiring.

A year of strategy execution

During 2012, the Company continued to strengthen its core assets; technology and services leadership as well as global scale. A key event during the year was the completion of the divestment of Sony Ericsson. In addition, the Company has strengthened and streamlined its portfolio through a few strategic acquisitions and divestments.

Board discussions

During the year, the Board has closely monitored the overall market conditions for Ericsson such as macroeconomic development, customers’ financial performance and strategy as well as the competitive landscape among ICT vendors. It is important for us to understand how potential moves by competitors, both commercial and technological, might change the landscape and the relative strength of the company.

A main focus area for the Board of Directors during the year has been Ericsson’s financial performance and working capital development. Commercial management and the balance between market share gains and profitable growth have been key topics.

The Board has also closely monitored the work during the year to find the best solution for ST-Ericsson assets given the strategic options at hand.

Strong financial position

One of the Board’s key areas of responsibility is to manage the Company’s financial position. The Company has a strong balance sheet and we believe it is appropriate to remain fairly conservative considering the continued macroeconomic uncertainty in parts of the world. We will, as before, consider selective acquisitions but prefer to invest in further strengthening the Company’s technology and services leadership and its offering to the market.

The Company’s dividend policy takes into account last year’s earnings and balance sheet structure, as well as coming years’ business plans and expected economic development. Based on this, the Board proposes a dividend increase of 10%.

Importance of corporate governance

Good corporate governance is the basis for building a robust corporate culture. However, corporate governance is not only about efficient and reliable controls and procedures. It is also about adherence to strong principles of responsible business practice by all employees. Over time this strengthens the business, which in turn generates shareholder value. Ericsson has a strong portfolio for value creation at large, and strong social, environmental and governance standards supporting risk management.

I am proud to be Chairman of the Board of this Company with so many dedicated and competent people working hard every day, to stay the leader in this rapidly changing market.

Leif Johansson

Chairman of the Board of Directors

 

30


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

BOARD OF DIRECTORS’ REPORT

TRENDS AND DRIVERS

Major industry trends in 2012 were operators focus on high-performance mobile broadband networks and their focus on increasing the operational efficiency. Tiered pricing and new business models continued to be high on our customers’ agendas. In Europe, the network modernization projects continued the rapid implementation. In North America, Japan and Korea, major LTE rollouts took place.

Across the globe, operators continued to focus on increasing their operational efficiency and reducing their operating expenses. Their focus on operational efficiencies together with transformation activities in the voice, IP and OSS and BSS domains drove demand for consulting and systems integration as well as managed services.

When developing its internal plans, Ericsson looks at a number of parameters that have an impact on data traffic. These include:

 

   

Smartphone subscriptions, as a percentage of total subscriptions

 

   

Mobile broadband subscriptions, as a percentage of total mobile subscriptions

 

   

Average data traffic and peaks in traffic.

Mobile subscriptions and smartphones

Today, 15–20% of the worldwide installed base of mobile phone subscriptions use smartphones. About 40% of all mobile phones sold during 2012 were smartphones, compared to around 30% for 2011. With less expensive smartphones being introduced, there is considerable room for further uptake.

 

Subscriptions

 

billion

   2012      2018
Forecast
 

Mobile subscriptions

     ~6.3         ~9   

Mobile broadband subscriptions

     ~1.5         ~6.5   

 

Ericsson estimate

Mobile broadband subscriptions and population coverage

Mobile network coverage is constantly increasing. GSM/EDGE technology has the widest reach and covers more than 85% of the world population.

WCDMA/HSPA covers more than 50% of the world population. Further build out of WCDMA/HSPA coverage will be driven by factors such as demand for internet access and affordability of smartphones. By 2017, Ericsson estimates that 85% of the world’s population will have access to WCDMA/HSPA.

All WCDMA networks deployed by Ericsson have been upgraded to HSPA of various speeds.

Despite being in the early days, LTE networks can already provide downlink peak rates of around 100 Mbps. There are around 60 LTE networks in commercial operation. By 2017, Ericsson estimates that 50% of the world’s population will have LTE coverage.

Regions have different radio technology mixes dependent on maturity level. Less mature regions are dominated by 2G technologies while more mature regions are dominated by HSPA. LTE is growing strongly, particularly in North America, where LTE is forecasted to be the leading radio technology before 2018. The fast growth in LTE subscriptions is driven by strong competition and consumer demand, following CDMA operators’ decisions to migrate to LTE.

 

31


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Operators who have 2G or 3G-specific radio base stations will have to invest in new radio base stations in order to introduce 4G/LTE. The Ericsson multi-standard radio base station is an efficient way of doing so, being capable of all technologies; 2G, 3G and 4G/LTE.

Data traffic

Access to the internet from mobile devices continues to drive mobile traffic development. In 2012, mobile data traffic continued the trend of doubling each year. Ericsson estimates that mobile data traffic will grow 12 times between 2012 and 2018. The increasing data traffic will drive the need for more capacity in mobile broadband networks.

Data traffic per subscriber is partly dependent on the screen size of the user’s device. Resolution is also a factor. On average, a mobile PC generates about seven times more data traffic than a smartphone.

 

Average mobile data traffic

 
     2012      2018
Forecast
 

Monthly data traffic per PC

     3 GB         11 GB   

Monthly data traffic per tablet

     0.6 GB         2.7 GB   

Monthly data traffic per smartphone

     0.45 GB         1.9 GB   

 

Ericsson estimate

BUSINESS IN 2012

Strong year for services

With strong growth in Global Services and Support Solutions in 2012, Ericsson took further steps in establishing itself as a leading ICT player. Networks sales declined 2012 following a strong 2011.

In the coming years, Ericsson expects software sales to gradually increase as radio expansions and upgrades, IP and OSS and BSS materialize. This development will result in more recurring revenues from software and services business as well as less capital utilization.

 

LOGO

 

32


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

High share of coverage projects

Ericsson’s gross margin and the amount of required capital employed vary with project type. When building network coverage, projects are often of a turnkey character. Generally there are more hardware and network rollout services in coverage projects, resulting in lower gross margin and a larger capital utilization.

During 2012, Ericsson was in a phase with a high share of coverage projects. Sales for 2012 showed a higher share of services and a lower share of hardware. This reflects the good momentum in services throughout the year, reduced CDMA infrastructure business and impact from network modernization projects in Europe.

Network modernization in Europe

The modernization of networks in Europe became an opportunity for the Company in mid-2010 when operators in Europe started to consider replacing old 2G and 3G equipment with multi-standard radio equipment.

Ericsson that had lost out on market share in 3G compared to its strong 2G position, identified this as an opportunity to regain footprint. Competition for new footprint is always tough and a strategic decision was taken to accept short-term profitability pressure to increase technology and services leadership. As a result, market share has increased and the Company has further strengthened its leading market position in Europe. Average project duration for these modernization projects is 18–24 months and the first projects were completed in late 2012. The negative impact from network modernization projects in Europe will continue to gradually decline during 2013 as projects are finalized.

Acquisitions, partnerships and divestments

The Company’s strategy is to focus on organic growth and be selective with acquisitions. Acquisitions might be considered for three purposes: if there is a crucial opportunity to consolidate the Company’s market position, to fill portfolio gaps, or to enter new growth areas. In 2012, the following activities were announced:

 

   

Completion of the acquisition of Telcordia

 

   

Completion of the divestment of the 50% stake in Sony Ericsson Mobile Communication AB to Sony in February. The divestment was effective on January 1, 2012

 

   

Increased ownership in Ericsson-LG, now holding 75%

 

   

Acquisition of Canadian telecom-grade Wi-Fi company BelAir Networks

 

   

Acquisition of Technicolor’s broadcast services division

 

   

Divestment of EDA 1500 GPON portfolio to Calix, Inc.

 

   

Acquisition of Canadian ConcepStWave in the OSS and BSS domain

 

   

Divestment of the multimedia brokering platform (IPX) to Gemalto.

Fair return on R&D investment

In the networked society, Ericsson envisions that anything that benefits from being connected will be connected.

 

33


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In this scenario, Ericsson foresees new entrants to the connectivity markets, from device and equipment manufacturers as well as from other industries. Any company that provides wireless connectivity today is likely to require a license to Ericsson’s patents. The Company believes it is the strongest holder of essential patents in the wireless industry. Ericsson has more than 100 patent license agreements and is a net receiver of royalties. The Company’s product portfolio is well licensed, which is beneficial to its customers.

 

LOGO

 

* Ericsson’s key network equipment market includes Radio, i.e. 2G, 3G, 4G RAN including CDMA, public WLAN access and OSS for mobile. IP and Transport includes IP Edge, packet core, microwave, opto metro and OSS for fixed. Core includes circuit-switched core, IMS, user data management and machine-to-machine.

Cash generation

A tight focus is kept on the cash generation of the Company and its working capital. Working capital decreased by –8% mainly due to lower inventories at year-end. The balance sheet is strong and the cash position sufficiently large to ensure the financial flexibility to invest in future growth and to capture business opportunities. The earnings and balance sheet structure makes it possible for the Board of Directors to propose to increase the dividend. This proposal reflects earnings and balance sheet structure in 2012, as well as coming years’ business plans and expected economic development, according to Ericsson’s dividend policy.

Cost and efficiency

The Board of Directors has paid extra attention to commercial management and the balance of market share gains with profitable growth. In addition, the Company has also taken a number of initiatives to reduce cost and increase capital efficiency. Among these is the multi-year program to reduce cost by industrializing service delivery, implementing more lean and agile ways of working in software development as well as improving the order-to-cash process. The Company will also continue to optimize capital expenditures and debt management.

TARGETS AND PERFORMANCE

Ericsson’s overall goal is to create shareholder value. Management uses four financial metrics to evaluate the Company’s long-term ambitions:

 

   

Sales growth faster than the market

 

   

Best-in-class operating margin

 

   

Growth in joint ventures’ earnings

 

   

Strong cash conversion.

 

34


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

The Board of Directors has translated these metrics into three performance criteria in the Executive Performance Stock Plan, included in the Company’s Long-Term Variable (LTV) remuneration program. These performance criteria have been approved by the Annual General Meeting.

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

35


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Long-term ambitions

Grow faster than the market

Ericsson maintained its share of global installed base of radio base stations at close to 40%.

In 2012, Ericsson widened the definition* of the equipment market to also reflect the R&D investments during the past years. For the equipment market, which includes the key segment of Radio, IP and Transport as well as Core, preliminary market data indicates that the market share was 24%, down from 27% in 2011. The decline is due to a lower market share in the mobile network equipment market, at 35%, down from 38% in 2011, negatively impacted by the technology shift in China where investments are moving from GSM to other technology areas where Ericsson has limited presence.

Ericsson’s global market share for LTE is twice as big as the largest competitor, measured in shipments for the full year 2012. This makes Ericsson the world’s largest supplier of LTE. The LTE technology is still in an early build-out phase.

As expected, Ericsson’s sales of CDMA equipment decreased by –40% in 2012, following operators’ transition to LTE. All Ericsson CDMA customers are now Ericsson LTE customers.

In telecom services, internal market data indicates that the Company increased its market share to 13% and is larger than any of its competitors in this fragmented market. After the acquisition of Telcordia, consolidated as from January 2012, Ericsson has a leading position in OSS and BSS.

Best-in-class operating margin

The Company’s operating margin before share in JV earnings and gain from the sale of its share in Sony Ericsson was 6.4% (9.6%). Based on reported results for 2012, the operating margin remains the highest among the Company’s traditional publicly listed telecom competitors.

Growth in JV earnings

The Ericsson share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies was SEK –11.7 (–3.8) billion. The Company took a non-cash charge of SEK 8.0 billion, related to its 50% stake of ST-Ericsson. The charge included write-down of investments of SEK 4.7 billion to reflect the current best estimate of Ericsson’s share of the fair market value of the JV. A provision of SEK 3.3 billion was also included, related to the available strategic options at hand for the future of the ST-Ericsson assets. Ericsson’s share of the JV Sony Ericsson was divested in early 2012 resulting in a gain of SEK 7.7 billion, reported as Other operating income. The Company did not consolidate Sony Ericsson in 2012.

Cash conversion

The cash conversion rate was 116% (40%), driven by reduced working capital. The Company reached its target of a cash conversion rate above 70%. Cash conversion is defined as cash flow from operating activities divided by the sum of net income and adjustments to reconcile net income to cash.

Other performance indicators

Ericsson believes that satisfied customers and motivated employees are key to success.

Customer satisfaction

Every year, an independent customer satisfaction survey is performed. In 2012 about 15,000 representatives of Ericsson customers, in different positions around the world, were polled to assess their satisfaction with

 

36


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Ericsson, compared to its main competitors. Over the past five years, Ericsson has maintained a high level of excellence; a customer satisfaction index above 70. The goal is to further increase the customer satisfaction.

Employee engagement

In order to measure employee engagement, an annual survey is conducted by an independent company. In 2012, 94% (90%) of employees across the world responded to the survey.

The 2012 survey results show a continued strong employee engagement. The Employee Engagement index is 77%, which is unchanged from 2011 and 8%–points higher than the external benchmark average.

Executive Performance Stock Plan

The Company has a Long-Term Variable (LTV) remuneration program. It builds on a common platform, but consists of three separate plans; one targeting all employees, one targeting key contributors and one targeting senior management. The program is designed to encourage long-term value creation in alignment with shareholders’ interests.

The aim of the plan for senior managers is to attract, retain and motivate executives in a competitive market through performance-based share-related incentives and to encourage the build-up of significant equity stakes. The performance criteria for senior management, i.e. the Executive Performance Stock Plan, are revised yearly and approved by the Annual General Meeting. Performance criteria for the 2013 Executive Performance Stock Plan will be communicated in the notice to the Annual General Meeting.

The targets for the 2011 and 2012 Executive Performance Stock Plans are shown in the illustration below. The performance criteria are:

 

   

Up to one-third of the award will vest if the target for compound annual growth rate of consolidated net sales is achieved

 

   

Up to one-third of the award will vest if the target for compound annual growth rate of consolidated operating income, including earnings in joint ventures and restructuring, is achieved. For the 2011 plan, base year 2010 is excluding restructuring of SEK 6.8 billion.

 

   

Up to one-third of the award will vest if cash conversion is at or above 70% during each of the years and vesting one-ninth of the award for each year the target is achieved. The target was reached in 2012 but not reached in 2011.

 

37


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Before the number of performance shares to be matched are finally determined, the Board of Directors shall examine whether the performance matching is reasonable considering the Company’s financial results and position, conditions on the stock market and other circumstances, and if not, reduce the number of performance shares.

 

LOGO

Working capital targets

Ericsson’s working capital targets are described on page 43. The targets remain for 2013.

FINANCIAL RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

ABBREVIATED INCOME STATEMENT

 

     IFRS     Restructuring charges  

SEK billion

   2012     2011     2010         2012              2011              2010      

Net sales

     227.8        226.9        203.3           

Cost of sales

     –155.7        –147.2        –129.1        –2.2         –1.2         –3.4   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Gross income

     72.1        79.7        74.3           –1.2         –3.4   

Gross margin %

     31.6     35.1     36.5        
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Operating expenses

     –58.9        –59.3        –58.6        –1.2         –2.0         –3.5   

Operating expenses as % of sales

     25.8     26.1     28.8        

Other operating income and expenses

     9.0        1.3        2.0        —           —           —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Operating income before share in earnings of JVs and associated companies

     22.2        21.7        17.6        –3.4         –3.2         –6.8   

Operating margin % before share in earnings of JVs and associated companies

     9.7     9.6     8.7        
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Share in earnings of JVs and associated companies

     –11.7        –3.8        –1.2        –0.3         –0.6         –0.5   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Operating income

     10.5        17.9        16.5        –3.8         –3.7         –7.3   

Operating margin %

     4.6     7.9     8.1        
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Financial income and expenses, net

     –0.3        0.2        –0.7           

Taxes

     –4.2        –5.6        –4.5           

Net income

     5.9        12.6        11.2           

EPS diluted (SEK)

     1.78        3.77        3.46           
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

38


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Sales

2012 was a year with strong growth in Global Services and Support Solutions while Networks had a more challenging year. Sales for comparable units, adjusted for foreign currency exchange rates and hedging, decreased –2%. The acquired Telcordia operation added sales of SEK 4.2 billion, split 50/50 between the segments Global Services and Support Solutions.

In 2012, the Company continued to execute its strategy to leverage its strengths in the growth areas of mobile broadband, managed services as well as OSS and BSS. Due to the current technology cycle in which mobile broadband is being rolled out, the business mix in 2012 continued to include a higher share of coverage business than capacity business. Ericsson was also to a large extent engaged in network modernization projects in Europe with its lower margins.

Sales of CDMA equipment declined –40% to SEK 8.4 (14.0) billion. The decline in CDMA was expected and planned for, following operators migration to LTE. The growth in Global Services is primarily related to continued good momentum in managed services and consulting and systems integration as well as network rollout sales following a high share of coverage projects. The sales growth in Support Solutions is mainly driven by TV and media management, business support solutions (charging solutions) and the acquisition of Telcordia. The segments Global Services and Support Solutions together represented close to 50% of Group sales.

In 2012, five of our ten regions showed growth. The share of software sales was unchanged in 2012, at 23% (23%) of sales while the portion of hardware decreased to 35% (40%) and services increased to 42% (37%) of Group sales. Longer term, the software part is expected to increase following more expansions and upgrades of networks.

IPR (intellectual property rights) revenues showed a favorable development and amounted to SEK 6.6 (6.2) billion.

 

LOGO

Seasonality

The Company’s quarterly sales, income and cash flow from operations are seasonal in nature, generally lowest in the first quarter of the year and highest in the fourth quarter. This is mainly a result of the seasonal purchase patterns of network operators.

 

39


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Most recent five-year average seasonality

 

     First
quarter
    Second
quarter
    Third
quarter
    Fourth
quarter
 

Sequential change

     –21     7     –2     26

Share of annual sales

     23     24     24     30

Gross margin

Gross margin declined to 31.6% (35.1%). The decrease is due to increased share of Global Services sales, higher proportion of coverage than capacity projects and network modernization projects in Europe. Close to 50% of the gross margin decline is related to the increased services share.

With current visibility, the underlying business mix, with a higher share of coverage projects than capacity projects, is expected to gradually shift towards more capacity projects during the second half of 2013. The negative impact from the network modernization projects in Europe will continue to gradually decline during 2013.

Operating expenses

Total operating expenses declined slightly. Excluding acquisitions and restructuring charges, Group operating expenses amounted to SEK 55.1 billion, down –4% from 2011.

To secure continued technology leadership, focus is on innovation and R&D. R&D expenses (see table below) increased slightly due to higher restructuring charges and acquisitions. Based on current portfolio and efficiencies in ways of working, R&D expenses for 2013 are expected to decrease somewhat.

Selling and administrative expenses represented 11.4% of sales compared to 11.8% in 2011.

Research and development

 

     2012     2011     2010  

Expenses (SEK billion)

     32.8        32.6        31.6   

As percent of Net sales

     14.4     14.4     15.5

Employees within R&D as of December 311)

     24,100        22,400        20,800   

Patents1)

     33,000        30,000        27,000   

 

1) The number of employees and patents are approximate.

Operating margin before JVs

Operating margin before share in JV earnings was 9.7% (9.6%). Excluding the gain related to the divestment of the share of Sony Ericsson, operating margin was 6.4%. The negative impact was due to the business mix having more coverage business than capacity business as well as network modernization projects in Europe.

Share in earnings of JVs

ST-Ericsson reported a loss in 2012. Ericsson’s share in ST-Ericsson’s income before tax, adjusted to IFRS, was SEK –3.7 (–2.7) billion. The reported loss of SEK –11.7 billion includes a write-down of investments of SEK 4.7 billion and a provision of SEK 3.3 billion.

 

40


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Other Operating income and expenses

Other operating income and expenses includes a gain of SEK 7.7 billion related to the divestment of Sony Ericsson. It also includes a gain of SEK 0.2 billion from the divestment of the Multimedia brokering (IPX) operation.

 

LOGO

Financial net

The financial net decreased mainly due to negative currency exchange revaluation effects on financial investments and liabilities.

Taxes

The tax rate for the year was 42% (31%) of income after financial items. The high tax rate is due to product and market mix as well as a reduction in corporate tax rate for 2013, decided by the Swedish Parliament. The lower corporate tax rate in Sweden reduced the deferred tax assets with approximately SEK 0.5 billion. Over time, the lower tax rate in Sweden will have a positive impact on taxes.

Net income

Net income decreased primarily due to the negative impact from ST-Ericsson and lower contribution from Networks.

Earnings per share, diluted

Earnings per share decreased –53% to SEK 1.78 (3.77). Earnings per share, non-IFRS, decreased –42% to SEK 2.74 (4.72). The Board of Directors proposes a dividend of SEK 2.75 (2.50). This represents an increase of 10% over 2011.

Restructuring charges

Restructuring charges were SEK 3.4 (3.2) billion, excluding joint ventures. Restructuring charges mainly relate to continued execution of the service delivery strategy as well as other ongoing cost reduction measures. Cash outlays that have been provided for were SEK 1.2 (3.2) billion. At the end of the year, cash outlays of SEK 1.2 (1.3) billion remain to be made. Ericsson’s share in ST-Ericsson’s restructuring charges was SEK 0.3 (0.1) billion.

 

41


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

FINANCIAL POSITION

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET (ABBREVIATED)

 

December 31, SEK billion

   2012     2011      2010  

Assets

       

Non-current assets, total

     81.7        81.5         83.4   

of which intangible assets

     49.4        44.0         46.8   

of which property, plant and equipment

     11.5        10.8         9.4   

of which financial assets

     8.5        13.7         14.5   

of which deferred tax assets

     12.3        13.0         12.7   

Current assets, total

     193.3        198.8         198.4   

of which inventory

     28.8        33.1         29.9   

of which trade receivables

     63.7        64.5         61.1   

of which other receivables/financing

     24.1        20.7         20.2   

of which short-term investments, cash and cash equivalents

     76.7        80.5         87.2   

Total assets

     275.0 1)      280.3         281.8   

Equity and liabilities

       

Equity

     138.5        145.3         146.8   

Non-current liabilities

     39.1        38.1         38.3   

of which post-employment benefits

     9.5        10.0         5.1   

of which borrowings

     23.9        23.3         27.0   

of which other non-current liabilities

     5.7        4.8         6.2   

Current liabilities

     97.4        97.0         96.8   

of which provisions

     8.4        6.0         9.4   

of which current borrowings

     4.8        7.8         3.8   

of which trade payables

     23.1        25.3         25.0   

of which other current liabilities

     61.1        58.0         58.6   

Total equity and liabilities1)

     275.0        280.3         281.8   

 

1) Of which interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits SEK 38.2 (41.0) billion.

Ericsson’s strategy is to maintain a strong balance sheet, including a sufficiently large cash position to ensure the financial flexibility to invest in future growth and to capture business opportunities. This has been particularly important during the past years’ difficult macroeconomic and financial market situation. By maintaining a strong cash position, the Company gains competitive advantages and can maintain an active strategy for selective acquisitions.

The Company’s capital targets are to have an equity ratio above 40%, to generate a cash conversion rate above 70%, to have a positive net cash position and to achieve solid investment grade ratings.

An important focus area is the monitoring of working capital. Major efforts have been made during the year in order to reduce days sales outstanding and inventory turnover days as well as to increase payable days. The target for days sales outstanding was met, while the other two targets were not achieved. Efforts to further reduce working capital will continue in 2013 and the working capital targets are the same as previous years.

For 2011, the dividend was SEK 2.50 per share. The Board of Directors will propose to the Annual General Meeting 2013 a dividend of SEK 2.75 per share for 2012. This represents a total dividend of approximately SEK 9.1 (8.2) billion. The proposal reflects year 2012’s earnings and balance sheet structure, as well as coming years’ business plans and economic development, according to Ericsson’s dividend policy.

 

42


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

LOGO

 

43


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Non-current assets

Intangible assets increased to SEK 49.4 (44.0) billion due to acquisitions during the year. Customer financing, current and non-current, increased to SEK 5.3 (4.2) billion.

 

LOGO

 

44


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Current assets

Inventory levels decreased at the end of the year. At year end, inventory was SEK 28.8 (33.1) billion. The target of inventory turnover days less than 65 days was not reached and improvement efforts will continue in 2013.

Trade receivables: Days sales outstanding reached 86 (91) days at year end due to strong sales and good collections. The Company’s credit losses have historically been low and continued to be so in 2012.

Net cash decreased by SEK 1.0 billion. For a more detailed discussion on changes in cash, see pages 47–50.

Equity

Equity decreased by SEK –6.8 billion primarily due to the non-cash charge of SEK 8.0 billion related to ST-Ericsson. The equity ratio was maintained at a healthy level of 50.4% (51.8%). Return on equity decreased to 4.1% (8.5%) due to lower profitability. Return on capital employed (ROCE) was 6.7% (11.3%).

 

LOGO    LOGO

Non-current liabilities

Post-employment benefits related to defined benefit plans declined to SEK 9.5 (10.0) billion. In 2012 there was a decrease in discount rates, which was offset as plan assets yielded higher than expected.

Non-current borrowings was almost unchanged at SEK 23.9 (23.3) billion. In 2012, Ericsson performed refinancing activities to extend its average debt maturity profile and to further diversify funding sources:

 

   

Issue of a USD-denominated 1 billion ten-year bond in order to refinance debt maturing in 2012 to 2014

 

   

Repurchase of EUR 441 million related to the 2013 and 2014 EMTN bonds in order to reduce gross debt and optimize net interest

 

   

Repayment of two SEK-denominated bonds with a total of SEK 3.5 billion at maturity

 

   

Taken up a loan with the Nordic Investment Bank of EUR 0.15 billion (or the equivalent in USD). The loan is divided into two equal tranches with seven-year and nine-year maturities respectively.

 

   

Signed loan agreement with the European Investment Bank of EUR 0.5 billion (or the equivalent in USD) with an option for disbursement until April 2014. The loan will mature seven years after disbursement

 

   

The Company also has unutilized committed credit facilities of USD 2.0 billion available, maturing in 2014.

 

45


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

LOGO

Current liabilities

Provisions increased to SEK 8.4 (6.0) billion. SEK 1.2 (1.3) billion were related to restructuring. The cash outlays of provisions were SEK 3.5 (6.0) billion. The higher amount of provisions is due to a provision of SEK 3.3 billion related to ST-Ericsson. Provisions will fluctuate over time, depending on business mix, market mix and technology shifts.

Payable days decreased to 57 (62) days, reflecting the high level of network rollout where suppliers normally have shorter payment days. The target of payable days of more than 60 days was not met.

Off-balance sheet arrangements

There are currently no material off-balance sheet arrangements that have, or would be reasonably likely to have, a current or anticipated effect on the Company’s financial condition, revenues, expenses, result of operations, liquidity, capital expenditures or capital resources.

 

46


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

CASH FLOW

Cash flow (abbreviated) January 1–December 31

 

SEK billion

   2012     2011     2010  

Net income

     5.9        12.6        11.2   

Income reconciled to cash

     19.0        25.2        23.7   

Changes in operating net assets

     3.0        –15.2        2.9   

Cash flow from operating activities

     22.0        10.0        26.6   

Cash flow from investing activities

     –4.9        4.5        –12.5   

of which capital expenditures, sales of PP&E, product development

     –6.5        –6.1        –5.2   

of which acquisitions/divestments, net

     –2.1        –3.1        –2.8   

of which short-term investments for cash management purposes and other investing activities

     3.7        13.8        –4.5   

Cash flow before financing activities

     17.1        14.5        14.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flow from financing activities

     –9.4        –6.5        –5.7   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash conversion (Cash flow from operating activities divided by income reconciled to cash)

     116     40     112
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross cash (Cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments)

     76.7        80.5 1)      87.2   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash (Gross cash less interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits)

     38.5        39.5        51.3   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) Including loan to ST-Ericsson of SEK 2.8 billion.

Cash conversion

Cash conversion was 116% (40%), above the target of 70%. Cash conversion in 2012 was positively impacted by lower working capital.

 

LOGO

 

47


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Cash flow from operating activities

The operating cash flow was positively impacted by reduced working capital.

 

LOGO

Cash flow from investing activities

Cash outlays for regular investing activities increased to SEK –6.5 (–6.1) billion. Acquisitions and divestments during the year were net SEK –2.1 (–3.1) billion, with the major item being the USD 1.15 billion acquisition of Telcordia and the divestment of Sony Ericsson.

Cash flow from short-term investments for cash management purposes and other investing activities was net SEK 3.7 (13.8) billion, mainly attributable to changes between short-term investments and cash and cash equivalents.

Capital expenditures

Annual capital expenditures are normally around 2% of sales. This corresponds to the needs for keeping and maintaining the current capacity level, including the introduction of new technology and methods. Expenditures are largely related to test equipment in R&D units and network operations centers as well as manufacturing and repair operations.

The Board of Directors reviews the Company’s investment plans and proposals. The Company believes it has sufficient cash and cash generation capacity to fund expected capital expenditures without external borrowings in 2013.

We believe that the Company’s property, plant and equipment and the facilities the Company occupies are suitable for its present needs in most locations. As of December 31, 2012, no material land, buildings, machinery or equipment were pledged as collateral for outstanding indebtedness.

Capital expenditures 2008–2012

 

SEK billion

   2012     2011     2010     2009     2008  

Capital expenditures

     5.4        5.0        3.7        4.0        4.1   

of which in Sweden

     1.3        1.7        1.4        1.3        1.6   

Share of annual sales

     2.4     2.2     1.8     1.9     2.0

 

48


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Cash flow from financing activities

Cash flow from financing activities was SEK –9.4 (–6.5) billion, mainly impacted by dividend paid of SEK –8.6 (–7.5) billion. Other financing activities net amounted to SEK –0.8 (1.0) billion. However, substantial refinancing activities were performed during 2012 to extend the average debt maturity profile and to further diversify funding sources. For more information see section “Non-Current Liabilities”, on previous page.

Cash held in countries with exchange controls

The Company holds cash or cash equivalents in countries where exchange controls or legal restrictions apply. These restrictions normally refer to approval procedures prior to cross-border cash transfers. The amount of cash and cash equivalents in such countries is SEK 10.6 (13.9) billion, of which SEK 9.2 (12.8) billion can be used for repayment of external and internal liabilities as well as other operating needs. Therefore, net cash and cash equivalents that are not readily available for use by the Group is SEK 1.4 (1.1) billion.

Gross cash and net cash

The change in gross cash of SEK 3.8 billion is related to ST-Ericsson where loans of SEK 5.0 billion were converted into investments. The net income reconciled to cash was SEK 19.0 (25.2) billion. Net operating assets was SEK 3.0 (–15.2) billion and investing activities SEK –14.7 (–9.9) billion. Dividends to shareholders amounted to SEK –8.6 (–7.5) billion. This resulted in a decrease in net cash of SEK 1.0 billion.

 

LOGO

 

49


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

BUSINESS RESULTS—REGIONS

Sales per region and segment 2012 and percent change from 2011

 

     Networks     Global Services     Support Solutions              

SEK billion

   2012     Percent
change
    2012     Percent
change
    2012     Percent
change
    Total
2012
    Percent
change
 

North America

     30.5        6     23.5        27     2.7        103     56.8        16

Latin America

     9.8        –15     10.6        12     1.6        65     22.0        0

Northern Europe and Central Asia

     6.3        –35     4.5        –10     0.5        –6     11.3        –25

Western and Central Europe

     6.2        –21     10.6        3     0.7        –27     17.5        –8

Mediterranean

     9.5        –11     13.0        10     0.8        –42     23.3        –2

Middle East

     6.8        –9     7.3        7     1.5        24     15.6        1

Sub-Saharan Africa

     6.4        10     3.9        14     1.0        16     11.3        12

India

     3.5        –42     2.5        –22     0.5        –14     6.5        –34

North East Asia

     22.4        –19     13.3        34     0.5        0     36.2        –5

South East Asia and Oceania

     8.0        6     6.6        18     0.5        –29     15.1        9

Other1)

     7.9        –14     1.2        –844     3.1        90     12.3        15
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     117.3        –11     97.0        16     13.5        26     227.8        0

Share of total

     51       43       6       100  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) Region “Other” includes licensing revenues, sales of cables, broadcast services, power modules and other businesses. In the regional dimension, all of the Telcordia sales are reported in the Support Solutions segment except for North America where it is split 50/50 between Global Services and Support Solutions. The acquired Technicolor Broadcast Service Division is reported in region “Other”. Multimedia brokering (IPX) was previously reported in each region in segment Support Solutions. For the first three quarters 2012 it was part of region “Other”. Multimedia brokering (IPX) was divested end of Sept. 2012.

BUSINESS RESULTS—SEGMENTS

Networks

Sales

Sales were SEK 117.3 (132.4) billion following a strong 2011. The decline is primarily related to lower sales in China, Russia, India and South Korea. North America grew despite the –40% decline in CDMA equipment sales. The IP portfolio developed favorably, especially packet core products.

The decline in sales of CDMA equipment was expected. Sales of CDMA equipment amounted to SEK 8.4 (14.0) billion.

 

50


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In CDMA, the priority has been to support customers’ migration to Ericsson’s LTE solution and excel in life-cycle management. Ericsson is today a key supplier to all four major operators in North America.

 

LOGO

Profitability

Operating margin decreased due to lower sales as well as negative impact from a business mix with more coverage than capacity projects. In addition, modernization projects in Europe impacted profitability negatively.

 

LOGO

Business in 2012

In 2012, Ericsson maintained its share of global installed base of radio base stations of close to 40%, which is almost the size of number two and three combined.

For the key market areas the Company addresses: Radio, IP and Transport as well as Core, preliminary market data indicates that the combined market share was 24%, down from 27% in 2011. The decline is due to a lower market share in the mobile network equipment market; from 38% in 2011 to 35% in 2012, negatively impacted by the technology shift in China, where investments are moving from GSM to other technology areas where Ericsson has limited presence.

Operators’ focus on improving network performance and on service differentiation has been a main driver for mobile broadband investments throughout the year.

 

51


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In 2012, AIR, the world’s first commercially deployed antenna-integrated radio and part of the RBS 6000 family, met accelerating demand. AIR provides enhanced radio performance and ease of deployment.

After the initial large-scale LTE rollouts in the US, Korea and Japan, Ericsson is now starting to see other countries following. Late 2012, Latin America started LTE rollouts and after executing awarded contracts Ericsson will have a strong LTE footprint in Latin America, substantially higher than its 3G market share in the region.

Up until the end of 2011, Ericsson had won a total of 38 contracts for LTE on five continents.

At the end of 2012, Ericsson had won more than 120 contracts for LTE on six continents. More than 60 LTE networks were in commercial use.

Ericsson’s global market share for LTE was twice as big as the largest competitor, measured in shipments for full year 2012

In 2012, Ericsson put the world’s first converged multi-standard radio base station for LTE FDD/TDD into commercial operation.

The demand for IMS is increasing as operators are preparing to launch Voice over LTE (VoLTE). Ericsson has a number of contracts for VoLTE.

The demand for circuit-switched core will continue to decline.

During the year, the Smart Services Router (SSR) gained good traction and 39 contracts were signed.

Competitors

In the Networks segment, Ericsson competes mainly with telecommunication equipment suppliers such as Alcatel-Lucent, Cisco, Huawei, Juniper, Nokia Siemens Networks, Samsung and ZTE. The Company also competes with local and regional manufacturers and providers of telecommunications equipment.

Global Services

Two subareas are reported in Global Services: Professional Services and Network Rollout. Professional Services includes Managed services, Customer Support as well as Consulting and Systems Integration.

Sales

Sales were SEK 97.0 (83.9) billion.

 

52


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

The growth in Professional Services is mainly related to continued good momentum in Managed Services as well as in Consulting and Systems Integration. Operators continue to focus on increasing operational efficiency and reducing operating expenses through transformation activities in the voice, IP and OSS and BSS domains which drive demand for managed services and consulting and systems integration. More than 60% of Professional Services sales were recurrent.

 

LOGO

The increase in Network Rollout is related to major activities in North East Asia, North America and Europe reflecting the high coverage project activity.

Profitability

Global Services’ operating margin development was stable, despite the continued loss in Network Rollout, due to continued efficiency gains and higher sales in Professional Services. Professional Services has over the past years shown an operating margin of 11–14%. Network Rollout is a low-margin business due to its high level of third-party suppliers for services such as civil works. The losses in 2012 are mainly a consequence of network modernization projects in Europe.

 

53


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Restructuring charges from continuous transformation of the service delivery organization is a natural part of the services business.

 

LOGO

Business in 2012

Market demand for services continued to grow in both subareas. Ericsson also strengthened its capabilities to address new markets and customers in areas such as IT Managed Services and Broadcast Services. The Company’s capability to deliver services remotely from the four global services centers expanded with the establishment of two new global network operation centers in Asia and Latin America.

The telecom services market is highly fragmented with a few global, but many local suppliers. In telecoms services, internal market data indicates that the Company reached a market share of 13% and is larger than any of its competitors in this fragmented market.

During 2012, 52 (70) managed services contracts were signed of which 19 (32) were expansions or extensions. In 2012, 24 (34) significant consulting and systems integration contracts were signed. At year end, there were approximately 950 (900) million subscribers in networks managed by Ericsson. Approximately 550 (500) million subscribers were in network operations contracts.

The number of services professionals also increased during the year from 56,000 end of 2011 to 60,000 end of 2012. The strategy to industrialize the service delivery continues and the capability of remote delivery has now reached a level of 23% in 2012 compared with 17% in 2011. This increases capacity and provides economies of scale.

Competitors

Competition in services includes the traditional telecommunication equipment suppliers. The Company also competes with companies such as Accenture, HP, IBM, Oracle, Tata Consultancy Services and Tech Mahindra. Among the competition is also a large number of smaller but specialized companies operating on a local or regional basis.

 

54


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Support Solutions

Sales

Sales were SEK 13.5 (10.6) billion. Sales development was good in all four strategic focus areas, i.e. OSS, BSS, TV and Media Management and M-Commerce.

The acquired Telcordia operation added sales of SEK 2.1 billion, representing 50% of Telcordias total sales. The divested Multimedia brokering business (IPX) contributed with sales of SEK 1.2 billion for the first nine months of the year.

 

LOGO

Profitability

Increased sales and execution on the new strategy, as well as portfolio streamlining and efficiency improvement, generated a higher operating margin. The divestment of IPX generated a capital gain of SEK 0.2 billion.

 

LOGO

Business in 2012

The segment changed name in 2012 from Multimedia to Support Solutions following a change of strategy. Focus is now on OSS and BSS solutions, TV and Media management and M-Commerce.

Ericsson has a leading position in both OSS and BSS.

 

55


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In BSS, Ericsson has 280 charging and billing installations which at year end served two billion subscriptions. Ericsson’s market share in prepaid is 31%.

In the media market, Ericsson is number one in broadcast video contribution, distribution and satellite direct-to-home. Customers include BSkyB, Chunghwa Telecom, Telekom A1, DirecTV, EBU and ESPN.

In M-Commerce, Ericsson is offering a mobile wallet platform and hosted services for interoperability between mobile and financial services. In 2012, the Company signed agreements for wallet payments with Western Union and MTN.

Competitors

The markets for BSS, OSS, TV and Media management and M-Commerce are fragmented with many local players. Competitors vary depending on the solution being offered. In the OSS and BSS market, they include many of the traditional telecommunication equipment suppliers as well as IT suppliers, such as Amdocs, Comverse and Oracle. Competition in the TV business includes Harmonic and Harris. Competition in M-Commerce includes Comviva, Sybase, Infosys and Gemalto.

The JV ST-Ericsson

ST-Ericsson is a 50/50 joint venture between STMicroelectronics and Ericsson, established in 2009. The Ericsson share of ST-Ericsson’s results is accounted for according to the equity method. ST-Ericsson’s main competitor is Qualcomm.

In December 2012, STMicroelectronics announced its intention to exit as a shareholder in ST-Ericsson. On the same day, Ericsson announced that it will continue to work together with STMicroelectronics to find a suitable strategic solution for ST-Ericsson. In December, Ericsson also stated that it will not acquire the full majority of ST-Ericsson and that the Company intends to write down investments and make a provision related to its 50% stake in ST-Ericsson.

This resulted in a non-cash charge of SEK 8.0 billion in 2012. The charge includes write-down of SEK 4.7 billion of investments to reflect the current best estimate of Ericsson’s share of the fair market value of the joint venture. The charge also includes a provision of SEK 3.3 billion related to the available strategic options at hand for the future of the ST-Ericsson assets. As of year-end 2012, there are no more investments related to ST-Ericsson on Ericsson’s balance sheet.

Ericsson continues to believe that the modem technology, which it originally contributed to the JV, has a strategic value to the wireless industry.

Business and financial performance in 2012

Early 2012, ST-Ericsson set a new strategic direction aiming at lowering its break-even point and introducing new technologies as well as developing competitive system solutions either directly or with partners.

During 2012, ST-Ericsson reached key maturity milestones with its advanced LTE modem. That is tested with customers and is anticipated to be commercialized in 2013. The NovaThor ModAp is the world’s fastest integrated LTE modem and application processor platform. The ModAp delivers industry-leading performance while improving battery life.

ST-Ericsson sales in 2012 decreased –18% to USD 1.4 (1.7) billion. The operating loss for the year, adjusted for restructuring charges, was USD –0.8 (–0.7) billion. Adjustments for IFRS compliance mainly consist of capitalization of R&D expenses for hardware development.

 

56


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

ST-Ericsson’s net financial position was USD 37 (–798) million at year-end, reflecting the cancellation of the parents’ loan facility. Ericsson’s share in ST-Ericsson’s income before taxes, adjusted to IFRS, was SEK –11.7 (–2.7) billion including the non-cash charge of SEK 8.0 billion.

 

LOGO

The JV Sony Ericsson

In February 2012, Ericsson announced the completion of the divestment of its 50% stake in Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications to Sony. The agreed cash consideration for the transaction was EUR 1.05 billion. The deal includes a broad IPR cross-licensing agreement. Sony Ericsson was consolidated until December 31, 2011, according to the equity method.

The divestment resulted in a gain of SEK 7.7 billion and a positive cash flow effect of SEK 9.1 billion.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

In accordance with the Annual Accounts Act ((SFS 1995:1554), Chapter 6, Sections 6 and 8) and the Swedish Corporate Governance Code (the “Code”), a separate Corporate Governance Report, including an Internal Control section, has been prepared. It is attached to this Annual Report.

Continued compliance with the Swedish Corporate Governance Code

Ericsson applies the Code and is committed to complying with best-practice corporate governance standards on a global level wherever possible. In 2012, Ericsson did not report any deviations from the Code.

High ethical standards

Ericsson’s Code of Business Ethics summarizes the Group’s basic policies and directives governing its relationships internally, with its stakeholders and with others. It also sets out how the Group works to achieve and maintain its high ethical standards. There have been no amendments or waivers to Ericsson’s Code of Business Ethics for any Director, member of management or other employee.

 

57


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Board of Directors 2012/2013

The Annual General Meeting held on May 3, 2012, re-elected Leif Johansson Chairman of the Board. Roxanne S. Austin, Sir Peter L. Bonfield, Börje Ekholm, Ulf J. Johansson, Sverker Martin-Löf, Nancy McKinstry, Anders Nyrén, Hans Vestberg, Michelangelo Volpi and Jacob Wallenberg were re-elected and Alexander Izosimov was elected new member of the Board. Pehr Claesson, Kristina Davidsson and Karin Åberg were appointed employee representatives by the unions, with Rickard Fredriksson, Karin Lennartsson and Roger Svensson as deputies.

Management

Hans Vestberg has been President and CEO of the Group since January 1, 2010. The President and CEO is supported by the Group management, consisting of the Executive Leadership Team (ELT). During 2012, the ELT consisted of the President and CEO, the heads of Group functions, the heads of business units and two of the heads of Ericsson’s regions.

A management system is in place to ensure that the business is well controlled and has the ability to fulfill the objectives of major stakeholders within established risk limits. The system also monitors internal control and compliance with applicable laws, listing requirements and governance codes.

Remuneration

Fees to the members of the Board of Directors and the remuneration to Group management, as well as the 2012 Guidelines for remuneration to Group Management, are reported in Notes to the consolidated financial statements—Note C28, “Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees”.

As of December 31, 2012, there were no loans outstanding from and no guarantees issued to or assumed by Ericsson for the benefit of any member of the Board of Directors or senior management.

The Board of Directors’ proposal for guidelines for remuneration to Group management

The Board of Directors proposes the following guidelines for remuneration to Group management, consisting of the Executive Leadership Team, for the period up to the Annual General Meeting (AGM) 2014. Compared to the guidelines resolved by the AGM 2012, these guidelines have been amended to enable consecutive time-limited arrangements according to the third item in the list below. Information on estimated costs for variable remuneration has been removed from the guidelines and is instead appended to the AGM 2013 proposal.

Guidelines for remuneration to Group Management:

For Group Management consisting of the Executive Leadership Team, including the President and CEO, total remuneration consists of fixed salary, short- and long-term variable remuneration, pension and other benefits. The following guidelines apply for the remuneration to the Executive Leadership Team:

 

   

Variable remuneration is through cash and stock-based programs awarded against specific business targets derived from the long-term business plan approved by the Board of Directors. Targets may include financial targets at either Group or unit level, operational targets, employee engagement targets and customer satisfaction targets

 

   

All benefits, including pension benefits, follow the competitive practice in the home country taking total compensation into account. The retirement age is normally 60 to 65 years of age

 

58


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

By way of exception, additional arrangements can be made when deemed necessary. An additional arrangement can be renewed but each such arrangement shall be limited in time and shall not exceed a period of 36 months and twice the remuneration that the individual concerned would have received had no additional arrangement been made

 

   

The mutual notice period may be no more than six months. Upon termination of employment by the Company, severance pay amounting to a maximum of 18 months fixed salary is paid. Notice of termination given by the employee due to significant structural changes, or other events that in a determining manner affect the content of work or the condition for the position, is equated with notice of termination served by the Company.

MATERIAL CONTRACTS

Material contractual obligations are outlined in Note C31, “Contractual obligations.” These were entered into in the ordinary course of business and were primarily related to operating leases for office and production facilities, purchase contracts for outsourced manufacturing, R&D and IT operations, and the purchase of components for the Company’s own manufacturing.

Ericsson is party to certain agreements, which include provisions that may take effect or be altered or invalidated by a change in control of the Company as a result of a public takeover offer. However, none of the agreements currently in effect would entail any material consequence to Ericsson due to a change in control of the Company.

RISK MANAGEMENT

Risks are defined in both short-term and long-term perspective. They are categorized into industry and market risks, commercial risks, operational risks and compliance risks.

Ericsson’s risk management is based on the following principles, which apply universally across all business activities and risk types:

 

   

Risk management is an integrated part of the Ericsson Group Management System

 

   

Each operational unit is accountable for owning and managing its risks according to policies, directives and process tools. Decisions are made or escalated according to defined delegation of authority. Financial risks are coordinated through Group Function Finance

 

   

Risks are dealt with during the strategy process, annual planning and target setting, continuous monitoring through monthly and quarterly steering group meetings and during operational processes (customer projects, customer bid/contract, acquisition, investment and product development projects). They are subject to various controls such as decision tollgates and approvals.

At least twice a year, in connection with the approval of strategy and targets, risks are reviewed by the Board of Directors.

A central security unit coordinates management of certain risks, such as business interruption, information security and physical security. The Crisis Management Council deals with events of a serious nature.

For information on risks that could impact the fulfillment of targets and form the basis for mitigating activities, see the other sections of the Board of Directors’ report, Notes C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”, C14, “Trade receivables and customer finance”, C19, “Interest-bearing liabilities”, C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments” and the chapter Risk factors.

 

59


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

SOURCING AND SUPPLY

Ericsson’s hardware largely consists of electronics. For manufacturing, the Company purchases customized and standardized components and services from several global providers as well as from local and regional suppliers. Certain types of components, such as power modules and cables, are produced in-house.

The production of electronic modules and sub-assemblies is mostly outsourced to manufacturing services companies, of which the vast majority are in low-cost countries. Production of radio base stations is largely done in-house and on-demand. This consists of assembling and testing modules and integrating them into complete units. Final assembly and testing are concentrated to a few sites. Ericsson has 16 manufacturing sites in Brazil, China, Estonia, India, Italy, Mexico and Sweden.

A number of suppliers design and manufacture highly specialized and customized components. The Company generally attempts to negotiate global supply agreements with its primary suppliers. Ericsson’s suppliers are required to comply with the Code of Conduct.

Where possible, Ericsson relies on alternative supply sources and seeks to avoid single source supply situations. A need to switch to an alternative supplier may require allocation of additional resources. This process could take some time to complete.

Variations in market prices for raw materials generally have a limited effect on total cost of goods sold. For more information, see chapter Risk Factors.

SUSTAINABILITY AND CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY

The Company has implemented strong social, environmental and ethical standards supporting value creation and risk management. This commitment generates positive business impacts, which in turn benefit society.

Ericsson’s approach to Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility (CR) is integrated into its core business operations throughout its value chain. The Board of Directors considers these aspects in governance decision-making. Group policies and directives ensure consistency across global operations.

Ericsson publishes an annual Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility Report, which provides additional information.

Responsible business practices

Since 2000, Ericsson has actively supported the UN Global Compact, and endorses its ten principles regarding human and labor rights, anti-corruption and environmental protection. The Ericsson Group Management System (EGMS) includes a Code of Business Ethics and a Code of Conduct (CoC), among other policies which reflect responsible business practices. Promotion of these practices is reinforced by employee awareness training, workshops and monitoring, including a global assessment plan run by an external assurance provider.

In 2012, Ericsson has continued to develop its anti-corruption program and expanded its whistleblower procedure.

Human rights

In 2012, the Company updated its Code of Business Ethics to reflect the ongoing commitment to respect human rights, and the UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights. Ericsson has worked actively to

 

60


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

strengthen its internal governance processes including the Sales Compliance Board, which also considers potential negative human rights impacts in its decisions. The Company joined the Shift Business Learning Program to support human rights risk analysis capabilities.

Ericsson is part of the Burma (Myanmar) Human Rights and Business Framework, led by the Institute for Human Rights and Business and the Danish Human Rights Institute. Together with Deloitte, the Company launched a report, “The Potential Economic Impact of Mobile Communications in Myanmar,” which shows the importance of mobile communications from both GDP and job-creation perspectives.

Supply chain

Suppliers must comply with Ericsson’s CoC. Approximately 170 employees, covering all regions, are trained as supplier CoC auditors. The Company uses a risk-based approach to ensure that the high risk portfolio areas, and highest risk markets, are targeted first. For prioritized areas, Ericsson performs regular audits and works with suppliers to ensure measurable and continuous improvements. Findings are followed up to ensure that improvements are made. Training for suppliers is available in 13 languages.

To effectively address the issue of conflict minerals, including compliance with the US Dodd-Frank Act and the disclosure rule adopted by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), Ericsson takes active measures in its sourcing and product management processes. Ericsson also participates in industry initiatives such as The Extractives Workgroup on conflict minerals, driven by the Global e-Sustainability Initiative (GeSI).

 

LOGO

Reducing environmental impact

Energy use of products in operation remains the Company’s most significant environmental impact. Ericsson works proactively with its customers to encourage network and site energy optimization, through innovative products, software, solutions and advisory services. Processes and controls are in place to ensure compliance with relevant product-related environmental, customer and regulatory requirements. The Company works actively to reduce its own environmental impact, with a focus on Design for Environment, which includes product energy efficiency and materials management.

 

61


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

A five-year target which aims to reduce the Ericsson carbon footprint intensity by 40% was set in 2009 (with a 2008 baseline). The target comprises two focus areas: Ericsson’s own activities and the life-cycle impacts of products in operation. In 2012, Ericsson exceeded the annual 10% reduction target and, as a result, the target has been achieved in four years instead of five, with the following results:

 

   

A 22% reduction in direct emission intensity from own activities was achieved during 2012, including facilities energy use, product transportation and business travel. This was achieved by

 

   

reducing absolute emissions from business travel by 16%

 

   

reducing absolute emissions from product transportation by 12%

 

   

decreasing facility energy consumption by approximately 3%. while related emissions increased by 13%

 

   

A 16% reduction in indirect emission intensity from life-cycle impacts of products in operation was achieved in 2012.

 

LOGO

 

62


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

Product take-back and recycling

Ericsson Ecology Management is a program to take responsibility for products at the end of their life and to treat them in an environmentally preferable way. The program also ensures that Ericsson fulfills its extended producer responsibility and is offered to all customers globally free of charge, not only in markets where it is mandatory.

 

63


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Radio waves and health

Ericsson employs rigid product testing and installation procedures with the goal of ensuring that radio wave exposure levels from Ericsson products and network solutions are below established safety limits. The Company provides public information on radio waves and health, and supports independent research to further increase knowledge in this area. Since 1996, Ericsson has cosponsored over 90 studies related to electromagnetic fields and health. Independent expert groups and public health authorities, including the World Health Organization, have reviewed the total amount of research and have consistently concluded that the balance of evidence does not demonstrate any health effects associated with radio wave exposure from either mobile phones or radio base stations.

Ericsson has been cosponsoring the Swedish part of the international COSMOS study, which aims to carry out long-term health monitoring of more than 200,000 people to identify if there are any health issues linked to long-term mobile phone use. To assure scientific independence there is a firewall in place between the industrial sponsors and the researchers.

Climate change

Information and Communication Technology (ICT) represents about 2% of global CO2 emissions, but can potentially offset 16% of the remaining 98% from other industries, according to GeSI’s SMARTer2020 report. The report also shows that the abatement potential of ICT is over seven times its own emissions. Ericsson takes measures to ensure that its own carbon footprint intensity is continuously reduced.

Ericsson’s sustainability strategy includes focus on the role broadband can play in helping to offset global CO2 emissions, 70% of which are attributed to cities, according to UN-Habitat. Ericsson works on sustainable city solutions and is engaged in global climate policy. Ericsson’s President and CEO Hans Vestberg leads the Climate Change Working Group of the Broadband Commission for Digital Development which launched the report “The Broadband Bridge: Linking ICT with climate action for a low-carbon economy.”

Technology for Good

In 2011, Ericsson launched the Technology for Good program, focused on applying the Company’s expertise, global presence and scale to find market-based solutions that empower people, business and society to help shape a more sustainable world. Mobile connectivity fuels economic growth, which is vital for billions of people living at the base of the economic pyramid. Ericsson has used its technology and competence to help achieve the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) for more than a decade. Ericsson’s President and CEO also joined the Leadership Council of the Sustainable Development Solutions Network, an initiative of the UN Secretary General, to contribute to the post-2015 development agenda and the Sustainable Development Goals. The Company engages in many Technology for Good projects globally, including Connect to Learn and Ericsson Response.

Reporting according to GRI 3.0

Full key performance data is available on the Ericsson website and has achieved an A+ rating according to the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI). The performance data has been assured, and the application level has been checked by a third party.

LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

On November 27, 2012, Ericsson filed two patent infringement lawsuits in the US District Court for the Eastern District of Texas against Samsung. Ericsson seeks damages and an injunction. Ericsson also asked the

 

64


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Court to adjudge that Samsung breached its commitment to license any standard-essential patents it owns on fair, reasonable, and non-discriminatory terms and to declare Samsung’s allegedly standard essential patents to be unenforceable.

On November 30, 2012, Ericsson filed a complaint with the US International Trade Commission, ITC, seeking an exclusion order blocking Samsung from importing certain products into the USA. The ITC instituted an investigation of Ericsson’s complaint on January 3, 2013.

On December 21, 2012, Samsung filed a complaint with the US International Trade Commission seeking an exclusion order blocking Ericsson from importing certain products into the USA. The ITC instituted an investigation of Samsung’s complaint on January 25, 2013.

On October 1, 2012, Wi-LAN Inc. filed a complaint against Ericsson in the US District Court of Southern Florida alleging that Ericsson’s LTE products infringe three of Wi-LAN’s US patents. The parties are presently engaged in discovery. Ericsson was, on October 4, 2010, sued by Wi-LAN in another patent infringement law suit in the US District Court for the Eastern District of Texas. Wi-LAN alleged that Ericsson products, compliant with the 3GPP standard. Infringe three US patents assigned to Wi-LAN. A trial is scheduled for April 2013.

In February 2012, Airvana Networks Solutions Inc. sued Ericsson in the Supreme Court of the State of New York, alleging that Ericsson has violated key contract terms and misappropriated Airvana trade secrets and proprietary information. Airvana is seeking damages of USD 330 million and to enjoin Ericsson from developing, deploying or commercializing Ericsson products allegedly based on Airvana’s proprietary technology. In April 2012, the Court heard Airvana’s request for preliminary injunction. The motion for preliminary injunction remains under consideration by the Court. The parties are presently engaged in further discovery.

In 2011, TruePosition sued Ericsson, Qualcomm, Alcatel-Lucent, the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) and the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) in the US District Court for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania for purported federal antitrust violations. The complaint alleged that Ericsson , Qualcomm and Alcatel-Lucent illegally conspired to block the adoption of TruePosition’s proprietary technology into the new mobile positioning standards for LTE, while at the same time ensuring that their own technology was included into the new standards. In January 2012, the Court dismissed the complaint on a “without prejudice” basis. Following the dismissal, TruePosition filed an amended complaint in February 2012. The case is proceeding to discovery.

In 2007, H3G S.p.A. (H3G) filed arbitral proceedings in Italy against Ericsson. H3G claims compensation from Ericsson for alleged breach of contract. H3G claims approximately EUR 475 million plus default interest. In addition to denying the claim in substance, Ericsson made a number of formal objections to the claim and filed a motion for the case to be dismissed. Ericsson’s formal objections were however dismissed by the Arbitral Tribunal in a partial award rendered in February 2012. The Tribunal has appointed experts to render an opinion on various substantive technical and financial issues. The final report was rendered in February 2013. The final arbitral award is expected to be rendered at the end of 2013.

In addition to the proceedings discussed above, the Company is, and in the future may be, involved in various other lawsuits, claims and proceedings incidental to the ordinary course of business.

PARENT COMPANY

The Parent Company business consists mainly of corporate management, holding company functions and internal banking activities. It also handles customer credit management, performed on a commission basis by Ericsson Credit AB.

 

65


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

The Parent Company has 6 (6) branch offices. In total, the Group has 71 (70) branch and representative offices.

Financial information

Income after financial items was SEK –4.9 (4.4) billion. The Parent Company had no sales in 2012 or 2011 to subsidiaries, while 34% (31%) of total purchases of goods and services were from such companies.

Major changes in the Parent Company’s financial position for the year included:

 

   

Write-down of original investment in ST-Ericsson of SEK 8.6 billion. This write-down does not have any impact on Group level. Another write-down was made including the short-term credit facility to ST-Ericsson of SEK 5.0 billion. and a provision of SEK 3.3 billion relating to the strategic options at hand for ST-Ericsson assets. The total write-downs and provision related to ST-Ericsson amount to SEK 17.0 billion.

 

   

Increased current and non-current receivables from subsidiaries of SEK 7.2 billion.

 

   

Increased other current receivables of SEK 1.7 billion

 

   

Increased cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments of SEK 1.3 billion

 

   

Increased current and non-current liabilities to subsidiaries of SEK 8.7 billion

 

   

Decreased other current liabilities of SEK 1.1 billion.

At year-end, cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments amounted to SEK 57.4 (56.1) billion.

Share information

As per December 31, 2012, the total number of shares in issue was 3,305,051,735, of which 261,755,983 were Class A shares, each carrying one vote, and 3,043,295,752 were Class B shares, each carrying one tenth of one vote. Both classes of shares have the same rights of participation in the net assets and earnings.

The Annual General Meeting (AGM) 2012 resolved to issue 31.7 million Class C shares for the Long-Term Variable Remuneration Program (LTV). In accordance with an authorization from the AGM, in the second quarter 2012, the Board of Directors resolved to repurchase the new issued shares, which were subsequently converted into Class B shares. The quotient value of the repurchased shares was SEK 5.00, totaling SEK 158.5 million, representing less than one percent of capital stock, and the acquisition cost was approximately SEK 158.7 million.

The two largest shareholders at year-end were Investor and Industrivärden holding 21.37% and 14.96% respectively of the voting rights in the Parent Company.

In accordance with the conditions of the Long-Term Variable Remuneration Program (LTV) for Ericsson employees, 9,748,408 treasury shares were sold or distributed to employees in 2012. The quotient value of these shares was SEK 5.00, totaling SEK 48.7 million, representing less than 1% of capital stock, and compensation received for shares sold and distributed shares amounted to SEK 91.2 million.

The holding of treasury stock at December 31, 2012 was 84,798,095 Class B shares. The quotient value of these shares is SEK 5.00, totaling SEK 424.0 million, representing 2.6% of capital stock, and the related acquisition cost amounts to SEK 655.3 million.

 

66


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Proposed disposition of earnings

The Board of Directors proposes that a dividend of SEK 2.75 (2.50) per share be paid to shareholders duly registered on the record date April 12, 2013, and that the Parent Company shall retain the remaining part of non-restricted equity.

The Class B treasury shares held by the Parent Company are not entitled to receive dividend. Assuming that no treasury shares remain on the record date, the Board of Directors proposes that earnings be distributed as follows:

 

Amount to be paid to the shareholders

     SEK 9,088,892,271   

Amount to be retained by the Parent Company

     SEK 16,535,096,753   
  

 

 

 

Total non-restricted equity of the Parent Company

     SEK 25,623,989,024   

As a basis for its dividend proposal, the Board of Directors has made an assessment in accordance with Chapter 18, Section 4 of the Swedish Companies Act of the Parent Company’s and the Group’s need for financial resources as well as the Parent Company’s and the Group’s liquidity, financial position in other respects and long-term ability to meet their commitments. The Group reports an equity ratio of 50% (52%) and a net cash amount of SEK 38.5 (39.5) billion

The Board of Directors has also considered the Parent Company’s result and financial position and the Group’s position in general. In this respect, the Board of Directors has taken into account known commitments that may have an impact on the financial positions of the Parent Company and its subsidiaries.

The proposed dividend does not limit the Group’s ability to make investments or raise funds, and it is the Board of Directors’ assessment that the proposed dividend is well-balanced considering the nature, scope and risks of the business activities as well as the capital requirements for the Parent Company and the Group in addition to coming years’ business plans and economic development.

POST-CLOSING EVENTS

On January 10, 2013, Ericsson entered into an agreement with Unwired Planet whereby Ericsson will transfer 2,185 issued patents and patent applications to Unwired Planet. Ericsson will also contribute 100 additional patent assets annually to Unwired Planet commencing in 2014 through 2018. Unwired Planet will compensate Ericsson with certain ongoing rights in future revenues generated from the enlarged patent portfolio. Unwired Planet will also grant Ericsson a license to its patent portfolio.

On January 21, 2013, Ericsson announced its intention to acquire Devoteam Telecom & Media operations in France. Devoteam has employees in Europe, Middle East and Africa. The acquisition is in line with Ericsson’s services strategy to broaden its IT capabilities.

In January, 2013, ST-Ericsson was granted a loan facility by their owners of USD 260 million. Ericsson’s share of this credit facility is USD 130 million.

On January 10, 2013 Adaptix Inc. filed two lawsuits against Ericsson, AT&T, AT&T Mobility and MetroPCS Communications in the US District Court for Eastern District of Texas alleging that certain Ericsson products infringe five US patents assigned to Adaptix. Adaptix seeks damages and an injunction.

On January 25 Adaptix filed a complaint with the US International Trade Commission (ITC) against Ericsson, AT&T, AT&T Mobility and MetroPCS Communications requesting that the commission open a patent

 

67


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

infringement investigation of certain Ericsson products and further on January 29 Adaptix filed a complaint with the Tokyo District Court alleging certain Ericsson products infringe two Japanese patents assigned to Adaptix. Adaptix seeks damages and an injunction.

On March 18, 2013, Ericsson and STMicroelectronics announced an agreement on the way forward for the joint venture (JV) ST-Ericsson.

The main steps agreed upon to split up the JV are the following: Ericsson will take on the design, development and sales of the LTE multimode thin modem products, including 2G, 3G and 4G multimode; ST will take on the existing ST-Ericsson products, other than LTE multimode thin modems, and related business as well as certain assembly and test facilities; starting the close down of the remaining parts of ST-Ericsson.

The formal transfer of the relevant parts of ST-Ericsson to the parent companies is expected to be completed during the third quarter of 2013, subject to regulatory approvals.

After the split up it is proposed that Ericsson will assume approximately 1,800 employees and contractors.

BOARD ASSURANCE

The Board of Directors and the President declare that the consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS, as adopted by the EU, and give a fair view of the Group’s financial position and results of operations. The financial statements of the Parent Company have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in Sweden and give a fair view of the Parent Company’s financial position and results of operations.

The Board of Directors’ Report for the Ericsson Group and the Parent Company provides a fair view of the development of the Group’s and the Parent Company’s operations, financial position and results of operations and describes material risks and uncertainties facing the Parent Company and the companies included in the Group.

 

68


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Shareholders of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ)

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, shareholders equity and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson and its subsidiaries at December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, which can be found herein, under “Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting”. Our responsibility is to express opinions on these financial statements and on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits. We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) and International Standards on Auditing. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Stockholm, April 8, 2013

 

By:   /s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers
Name:   PricewaterhouseCoopers AB

 

69


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

 

January–December, SEK million

   Notes      2012     2011     2010  

Net sales

     C3, C4         227,779        226,921        203,348   

Cost of sales

        –155,699        –147,200        –129,094   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross income

        72,080        79,721        74,254   

Gross margin (%)

        31.6     35.1     36.5

Research and development expenses

        –32,833        –32,638        –31,558   

Selling and administrative expenses

        –26,023        –26,683        –27,072   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating expenses

        –58,856        –59,321        –58,630   

Other operating income and expenses

     C6         8,965        1,278        2,003   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income before shares in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies

        22,189        21,678        17,627   

Operating margin before shares in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies (%)

        9.7     9.6     8.7

Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies

     C3, C12         –11,731        –3,778        –1,172   

Operating income

        10,458        17,900        16,455   

Financial income

     C7         1,708        2,882        1,047   

Financial expenses

     C7         –1,984        –2,661        –1,719   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income after financial items

        10,182        18,121        15,783   

Taxes

     C8         –4,244        –5,552        –4,548   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

        5,938        12,569        11,235   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income attributable to:

         

Stockholders of the Parent Company

        5,775        12,194        11,146   

Non-controlling interest

        163        375        89   

Other information

         

Average number of shares, basic (million)

     C9         3,216        3,206        3,197   

Earnings per share attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company, basic (SEK)1)

     C9         1.80        3.80        3.49   

Earnings per share attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company, diluted (SEK)1)

     C9         1.78        3.77        3.46   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) Based on Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company.

 

70


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

January–December, SEK million

   Notes      2012      2011      2010  

Net income

        5,938         12,569         11,235   

Other comprehensive income

           

Actuarial gains and losses, and the effect of the asset ceiling, related to pensions

     C16         –451         –6,963         3,892   

Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations

           

Fair value remeasurement

     C16         6         —           7   

Cash Flow hedges

           

Gains/losses arising during the period

     C16         1,668         996         966   

Reclassification adjustments for gains/losses included in profit or loss

     C16         –568         –2,028         –238   

Adjustments for amounts transferred to initial carrying amount of hedged items

     C16         92         —           –136   

Changes in cumulative translation adjustments

     C16         –3,947         –964         –3,259   

Share of other comprehensive income of joint ventures and associated companies

     C16         –486         –262         –434   

Tax on items relating to components of Other comprehensive income

     C16         –422         2,158         –1,120   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total other comprehensive income

        –4,108         –7,063         –322   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income

        1,830         5,506         10,913   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total Comprehensive Income attributable to:

           

Stockholders of the Parent Company

        1,716         5,081         10,814   

Non-controlling interest

        114         425         99   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

71


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

 

December 31, SEK million

   Notes      2012      2011  

Assets

        

Non-current assets

        

Intangible assets

     C10         

Capitalized development expenses

        3,840         3,523   

Goodwill

        30,404         27,438   

Intellectual property rights, brands and other intangible assets

        15,202         13,083   

Property, plant and equipment

     C11, C26, C27         11,493         10,788   

Financial assets

        

Equity in joint ventures and associated companies

     C12         2,842         5,965   

Other investments in shares and participations

     C12         386         2,199   

Customer finance, non-current

     C12         1,290         1,400   

Other financial assets, non-current

     C12         3,964         4,117   

Deferred tax assets

     C8         12,321         13,020   
     

 

 

    

 

 

 
        81,742         81,533   

Current assets

        

Inventories

     C13         28,802         33,070   

Trade receivables

     C14         63,660         64,522   

Customer finance, current

     C14         4,019         2,845   

Other current receivables

     C15         20,065         17,837   

Short-term investments

     C20         32,026         41,866   

Cash and cash equivalents

     C25         44,682         38,676   
     

 

 

    

 

 

 
        193,254         198,816   

Total assets

        274,996         280,349   
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Equity and liabilities

        

Equity

        

Stockholders’ equity

     C16         136,883         143,105   

Non-controlling interest in equity of subsidiaries

     C16         1,600         2,165   
     

 

 

    

 

 

 
        138,483         145,270   

Non-current liabilities

        

Post-employment benefits

     C17         9,503         10,016   

Provisions, non-current

     C18         211         280   

Deferred tax liabilities

     C8         3,120         2,250   

Borrowings, non-current

     C19, C20         23,898         23,256   

Other non-current liabilities

        2,377         2,248   
     

 

 

    

 

 

 
        39,109         38,050   

Current liabilities

        

Provisions, current

     C18         8,427         5,985   

Borrowings, current

     C19, C20         4,769         7,765   

Trade payables

     C22         23,100         25,309   

Other current liabilities

     C21         61,108         57,970   
     

 

 

    

 

 

 
        97,404         97,029   

Total equity and liabilities1)

        274,996         280,349   
     

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Of which interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits SEK 38,170 (41,037) million.

 

72


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

 

January–December, SEK million

   Notes      2012     2011      2010  

Operating activities

          

Net income

        5,938        12,569         11,235   

Adjustments to reconcile net income to cash

     C25         13,077        12,613         12,490   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 
        19,015        25,182         23,725   

Changes in operating net assets

          

Inventories

        2,752        –3,243         –7,917   

Customer finance, current and non-current

        –1,259        74         –2,125   

Trade receivables

        –1,103        –1,700         4,406   

Trade payables

        –1,311        –1,648         5,964   

Provisions and post-employment benefits

        –1,920        –5,695         –2,739   

Other operating assets and liabilities, net

        5,857        –2,988         5,269   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 
        3,016        –15,200         2,858   

Cash flow from operating activities

        22,031        9,982         26,583   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Investing activities

          

Investments in property, plant and equipment

     C11         –5,429        –4,994         –3,686   

Sales of property, plant and equipment

        568        386         124   

Acquisitions of subsidiaries and other operations

     C25, C26         –11,529 1)      –3,181         –3,286   

Divestments of subsidiaries and other operations

     C25, C26         9,452        53         454   

Product development

     C10         –1,641        –1,515         –1,644   

Other investing activities

        1,540        –900         –1,487   

Short-term investments

        2,151        14,692         –3,016   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cash flow from investing activities

        –4,888        4,541         –12,541   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cash flow before financing activities

        17,143        14,523         14,042   

Financing activities

          

Proceeds from issuance of borrowings

        8,969        2,076         2,580   

Repayment of borrowings

        –9,670        –1,259         –1,449   

Proceeds from stock issue

        159        —           —     

Sale/repurchase of own shares

        –93        92         51   

Dividends paid

        –8,632        –7,455         –6,677   

Other financing activities

        –118        52         –175   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cash flow from financing activities

        –9,385        –6,494         –5,670   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash

        –1,752        –217         –306   

Net change in cash

        6,006        7,812         8,066   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period

        38,676        30,864         22,798   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of period

     C25         44,682        38,676         30,864   
     

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Includes payment of external loan of SEK -6.2 billion attributable to the acquisition of Telcordia.

 

73


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

 

     Notes      Capital
stock
     Additional
paid in
capital
     Retained
earnings
     Stockholders’
equity
     Non-controlling
interest (NCI)
     Total
equity
 

January 1, 2012

        16,367         24,731         102,007         143,105         2,165         145,270   

Total comprehensive income

     C16         —           —           1,716         1,716         114         1,830   

Transactions with owners

                    

Stock issue

        159         —           —           159         —           159   

Sale/Repurchase of own shares

        —           —           –93         –93         —           –93   

Stock Purchase Plans

        —           —           405         405         —           405   

Dividends paid

        —           —           –8,033         –8,033         –599         –8,632   

Transactions with non-controlling interest

        —           —           –376         –376         –80         –456   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2012

        16,526         24,731         95,626         136,883         1,600         138,483   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

January 1, 2011

        16,367         24,731         104,008         145,106         1,679         146,785   

Total comprehensive income

     C16         —           —           5,081         5,081         425         5,506   

Transactions with owners

                    

Sale of own shares

        —           —           92         92         —           92   

Stock Purchase Plans

        —           —           413         413         —           413   

Dividends paid

        —           —           –7,207         –7,207         –248         –7,455   

Transactions with non-controlling interest

        —           —           –380         –380         309         –71   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

        16,367         24,731         102,007         143,105         2,165         145,270   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

January 1, 2010

        16,367         24,731         98,772         139,870         1,157         141,027   

Total comprehensive income

     C16         —           —           10,814         10,814         99         10,913   

Transactions with owners

                    

Sale of own shares

        —           —           52         52         —           52   

Stock Purchase Plans

        —           —           762         762         —           762   

Dividends paid

        —           —           –6,391         –6,391         –286         –6,677   

Transactions with non-controlling interest

        —           —           —           —           708         708   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2010

        16,367         24,731         104,008         145,106         1,679         146,785   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

74


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C1    SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Introduction

The consolidated financial statements comprise Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson, the Parent Company, and its subsidiaries (“the Company”) and the Company’s interests in joint ventures and associated companies. The Parent Company is domiciled in Sweden at Torshamnsgatan 23, SE-164 83 Stockholm.

The consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012, have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the IASB, without any early application, and RFR 1 “Additional rules for Group Accounting”, related interpretations issued by the Swedish Financial Reporting Board (Rådet för finansiell rapportering), and the Swedish Annual Accounts Act. There is no difference between IFRS effective as per December 31, 2012, and RFR 1 related interpretations issued by the Swedish Financial Reporting Board (Rådet för Finansiell Rapportering) or the Swedish Annual Accounts Act in conflict with IFRS, for all periods presented.

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on March 5, 2013. The balance sheets and income statements are subject to approval by the Annual General Meeting of shareholders.

New standards, amendments of standards and interpretations, effective as from January 1, 2012:

 

   

Amendment to IAS 12, income taxes: deferred tax: recovery of underlying assets

 

   

Amendments to IFRS 7, Financial instruments Disclosures: Transfers of Financial Assets.

None of the new or amended standards and interpretations have had any significant impact on the financial result or position as well as disclosure of the Company.

For information on “New standards and interpretations not yet adopted”, refer to the end of this Note.

Basis of presentation

The financial statements are presented in millions of Swedish Krona (SEK). They are prepared on a historical cost basis, except for certain financial assets and liabilities that are stated at fair value: derivative financial instruments, financial instruments held for trading, financial instruments classified as available-for-sale and plan assets related to defined benefit pension plans.

Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements are prepared in accordance with the purchase method. Accordingly, consolidated stockholders’ equity includes equity in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associated companies earned only after their acquisition.

Subsidiaries are all companies in which Ericsson has an ownership interest, directly or indirectly, including effective potential voting rights, has the power to govern the financial and operating policies generally associated with ownership of more than one half of the voting rights or in which Ericsson by agreement has control. The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences until the date that control ceases.

Intra-group balances and any unrealized income and expense arising from intra-group transactions are fully eliminated in preparing the consolidated financial statements. Unrealized losses are eliminated in the same way as unrealized gains, but only to the extent that there is no evidence of impairment.

 

75


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Business combinations

At the acquisition of a business, the cost of the acquisition, being the purchase price, is measured as the fair value of the assets given, and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of exchange, including any cost related to contingent consideration. Transaction costs attributable to the acquisition are expensed as incurred. The acquisition cost is allocated to acquired assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities based upon appraisals made, including assets and liabilities that were not recognized on the acquired entity’s balance sheet, for example intangible assets such as customer relations, brands, patents and financial liabilities. Goodwill arises when the purchase price exceeds the fair value of recognizable acquired net assets. In acquisitions with non-controlling interest full or partial goodwill can be recognized. Final amounts are established within one year after the transaction date at the latest.

In case there is a put option for non-controlling interest in a subsidiary a corresponding financial liability is recognized.

Non-controlling interest

The Company treats transactions with non-controlling interests as transactions with equity owners of the Company. For purchases from non-controlling interests, the difference between any consideration paid and the relevant share acquired of the carrying value of net assets of the subsidiary is recorded in equity. Gains or losses on disposals to non-controlling interests are also recorded in equity.

When the Company ceases to have control, any retained interest in the entity is remeasured to its fair value, with the change in carrying amount recognized in profit or loss. The fair value is the initial carrying amount for the purposes of subsequently accounting for the retained interest in an associate, joint venture or financial asset. In addition, any amounts previously recognized in other comprehensive income in respect of that entity are accounted for as if the Company had directly disposed of the related assets or liabilities. This may mean that amounts previously recognized in other comprehensive income are reclassified to profit or loss.

At acquisition, there is a choice on an acquisition-by-acquisition basis to measure the non-controlling interest in the acquiree either at fair value or at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s net assets.

Joint ventures and associated companies

Both joint ventures and associated companies are accounted for in accordance with the equity method. Under the equity method, the investment in an associate or joint venture is initially recognized at cost and the carrying amount is increased or decreased to recognize the investor’s share of the profit or loss of the investee after the date of acquisition. If the Company’s interest in an associated company or joint venture is nil the Company shall not, as prescribed by IFRS, recognize its part of any future losses. Provisions related to obligations for such an interest shall, however, be recognized in relation to such an interest.

JVs are ownership interests where a joint influence is obtained through agreement.

Investments in associated companies, i.e. when the Company has significant influence and the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the associated company, but is not control or joint control over those policies. Normally this is the case when voting stock interest, including effective potential voting rights, is at least 20% but not more than 50%.

Ericsson’s share of income before taxes is reported in item “Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies”, included in Operating Income. This is due to that these interests are held for operating

 

76


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

rather than investing or financial purposes. Ericsson’s share of income taxes related to joint ventures and associated companies is reported under the line item Taxes in the income statement.

Unrealized gains on transactions between the Company and its associated companies and joint ventures are eliminated to the extent of the Company’s interest in these entities. Unrealized losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of the asset transferred.

Shares in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies included in consolidated equity which are undistributed are reported in Retained earnings in the balance sheet.

Impairment testing as well as recognition or reversal of impairment of investments in each joint venture is performed in the same manner as for intangible assets other than goodwill. The entire carrying amount of each investment, including goodwill, is tested as a single asset. See also description under “Intangible assets other than goodwill” below.

If the ownership interest in an associate is reduced but significant influence is retained, only a proportionate share of the amounts previously recognized in other comprehensive income are reclassified to profit or loss where appropriate.

In Note C2, “Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgments”, a further disclosure is presented in relation to (i) key sources of estimation uncertainty and (ii) the decision made in relation to accounting policies applied.

Foreign currency remeasurement and translation

Items included in the financial statements of each entity of the Company are measured using the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (‘the functional currency’). The consolidated financial statements are presented in Swedish Krona (SEK), which is the Parent Company’s functional and presentation currency.

Transactions and balances

Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at period-end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognized in the income statement, unless deferred in Other comprehensive income (OCI) under the hedge accounting practices as described below.

Changes in the fair value of monetary securities denominated in foreign currency classified as available-for-sale are analyzed between translation differences resulting from changes in the amortized cost of the security and other changes in the carrying amount of the security. Translation differences related to changes in the amortized cost are recognized in profit or loss, and other changes in the carrying amount are recognized in OCI.

Translation differences on non-monetary financial assets and liabilities are reported as part of the fair value gain or loss.

Group companies

The results and financial position of all the group entities that have a functional currency different from the presentation currency are translated into the presentation currency as follows:

 

   

Assets and liabilities for each balance sheet presented are translated at the closing rate at the date of that balance sheet

 

77


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Income and expenses for each income statement are translated at average exchange rates

 

   

All resulting net exchange differences are recognized as a separate component of OCI.

On consolidation, exchange differences arising from the translation of the net investment in foreign operations, and of borrowings and other currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments, are accounted for in OCI. When a foreign operation is partially disposed of or sold, exchange differences that were recorded in OCI are recognized in the income statement as part of the gain or loss on sale.

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign entity are treated as assets and liabilities of the foreign entity and translated at the closing rate.

There is no significant impact due to a currency of a hyperinflationary economy.

Statement of cash flows

The statement of cash flow is prepared in accordance with the indirect method. Cash flows in foreign subsidiaries are translated at the average exchange rate during the period. Payments for subsidiaries acquired or divested are reported as cash flow from investing activities, net of cash and cash equivalents acquired or disposed of, respectively.

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash, bank, and short-term investments that are highly liquid monetary financial instruments with a remaining maturity of three months or less at the date of acquisition.

Revenue recognition

Background

The Company offers a comprehensive portfolio of telecommunication and data communication systems, professional services, and multimedia solutions. Products, both hardware and software as well as services are in general standardized. The impact of this is that any acceptance terms are normally only formal requirements. In Note C3, “Segment information”, the Company offer is disclosed more in detail as per operating segment.

The Company’s products and services are generally sold under delivery-type or multi-year recurring services contracts. The delivery type contracts often have content from more than one segment.

Accounting treatment

Sales are based on fair values of consideration received and recorded net of value added taxes, goods returned and estimated trade discounts. Revenue is recognized when risks and rewards have been transferred to the customer, with reference to all significant contractual terms when:

 

   

The product or service has been delivered

 

   

The revenue amount is fixed or determinable

 

   

Customer has received and activation has been made of separately sold software

 

   

Collection is reasonably assured.

Estimation of contractual performance criteria impact the timing and amounts of revenue recognized and may therefore defer revenue recognition until the performance criteria are met. The profitability of contracts is periodically assessed, and provisions for any estimated losses are made immediately when losses are probable.

 

78


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Allocation and/or timing criteria specific per type of contract are:

 

   

Delivery-type contracts. These contracts relate to delivery, installation, integration of products and providing of related services, normally under multiple elements contracts. Under multiple elements contracts the accounting is based on that the revenue recognition criteria are applied to the separately identifiable components of the contract. Revenue, including the impact of any discount or rebate, is allocated to each element based on relative fair values. Networks, Global Services and Support Solutions have contracts that relate to this type of contracts.

 

   

Contracts for services. Relate to multi-year service contracts such as support—and managed service contracts and other types of recurring services. Revenue is recognized when the services have been provided, generally pro rata over the contract period. Global Services has contracts that relate to this type of contracts.

 

   

Contracts generating license fees from third parties for the use of the Company’s intellectual property rights. License fees are normally measured as percentage on sales or currency amount per unit and recognized over the license period as the amount of the consideration becomes reasonably certain. Networks and Support Solutions have contracts that relate to this type of contracts.

For sales between consolidated companies, associated companies, joint ventures and segments, the Company applies arm’s length pricing.

In Note C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”, a further disclosure is presented in relation to (i) key sources of estimation uncertainty and (ii) the decision made in relation to accounting policies applied.

Earnings per share

Basic earnings per share are calculated by dividing net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company by the weighted average number of shares outstanding (total number of shares less treasury stock) during the year.

Diluted earnings per share are calculated by dividing net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company, when appropriate adjusted by the sum of the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding and dilutive potential ordinary shares. Potential ordinary shares are treated as dilutive when, and only when, their conversion to ordinary shares would decrease earnings per share.

Stock options and rights to matching shares are considered dilutive when the actual fulfillment of any performance conditions as of the reporting date would give a right to ordinary shares. Furthermore, stock options are considered dilutive only when the exercise price is lower than the period’s average share price.

Financial assets

Financial assets are recognized when the Company becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. Regular purchases and sales of financial assets are recognized on the settlement date.

Financial assets are derecognized when the rights to receive cash flows from the investments have expired or have been transferred and the Company has transferred substantially all risks and rewards of ownership. Separate assets or liabilities are recognized if any rights and obligations are created or retained in the transfer.

The Company classifies its financial assets in the following categories: at fair value through profit or loss, loans and receivables, and available for sale. The classification depends on the purpose for which the financial assets were acquired. Management determines the classification of its financial assets at initial recognition.

 

79


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Financial assets are initially recognized at fair value plus transaction costs for all financial assets not carried at fair value through profit or loss. Financial assets carried at fair value through profit or loss are initially recognized at fair value, and transaction costs are expensed in the income statement.

The fair values of quoted financial investments and derivatives are based on quoted market prices or rates. If official rates or market prices are not available, fair values are calculated by discounting the expected future cash flows at prevailing interest rates. Valuations of Foreign exchange options and Interest Rate Guarantees (IRG) are made by using a Black-Scholes formula. Inputs to the valuations are market prices for implied volatility, foreign exchange and interest rates.

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are financial assets held for trading. A financial asset is classified in this category if acquired principally for the purpose of selling or repurchasing in the near term.

Derivatives are classified as held for trading, unless they are designated as hedges. Assets in this category are classified as current assets.

Gains or losses arising from changes in the fair values of the “financial assets at fair value through profit or loss”-category (excluding derivatives) are presented in the income statement within Financial income in the period in which they arise. Derivatives are presented in the income statement either as cost of sales, other operating income, financial income or financial expense, depending on the intent with the transaction.

Loans and receivables

Receivables, including those that relate to customer financing, are subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest rate method, less allowances for impairment charges. Trade receivables include amounts due from customers. The balance represents amounts billed to customer as well as amounts where risk and rewards have been transferred to the customer but the invoice has not yet been issued.

Collectability of the receivables is assessed for purposes of initial revenue recognition.

Available-for-sale financial assets

Available-for-sale financial assets are non-derivatives that are either designated in this category or not classified in any of the other categories. They are included in non-current assets unless management intends to dispose of the investment within 12 months of the balance sheet date.

Dividends on available-for-sale equity instruments are recognized in the income statement as part of financial income when the Company’s right to receive payments is established.

Changes in the fair value of monetary securities denominated in a foreign currency and classified as available-for-sale are analyzed between translation differences resulting from changes in amortized cost of the security and other changes in the carrying amount of the security. The translation differences on monetary securities are recognized in profit or loss; translation differences on non-monetary securities are recognized in OCI. Changes in the fair value of monetary and non-monetary securities classified as available-for-sale are recognized in OCI. When securities classified as available-for-sale are sold or impaired, the accumulated fair value adjustments previously recognized in OCI are included in the income statement.

 

80


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Impairment

At each balance sheet date, the Company assesses whether there is objective evidence that a financial asset or a group of financial assets is impaired. In the case of equity securities classified as available-for-sale, a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of the security below its cost is considered as an evidence that the security is impaired. If any such evidence exists for available-for-sale financial assets, the cumulative loss—measured as the difference between the acquisition cost and the current fair value, less any impairment loss on that financial asset previously recognized in profit or loss—is removed from OCI and recognized in the income statement. Impairment losses recognized in the income statement on equity instruments are not reversed through the income statement.

An assessment of impairment of receivables is performed when there is objective evidence that the Company will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the receivable.

Significant financial difficulties of the debtor, probability that the debtor will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganization, and default or delinquency in payments are considered indicators that the trade receivable is impaired. The amount of the allowance is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is recognized in the income statement within selling expenses. When a trade receivable is finally established as uncollectible, it is written off against the allowance account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited to selling expenses in the income statement.

Financial Liabilities

Financial liabilities are recognized when the Company becomes bound to the contractual obligations of the instrument.

Financial liabilities are derecognized when they are extinguished, i.e. when the obligation specified in the contract is discharged, cancelled or expires.

Borrowings

Borrowings are initially recognized at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently stated at amortized cost; any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognized in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Company has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 12 months after the balance sheet date.

Trade payables

Trade payables are recognized initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

Derivatives at fair value through profit or loss

Certain derivative instruments do not qualify for hedge accounting and are accounted for at fair value through profit or loss. Changes in the fair value of these derivative instruments that do not qualify for hedge accounting are recognized immediately in the income statement either as cost of sales, other operating income, financial income or financial expense, depending on the intent of the transaction.

 

81


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Derivative financial instruments and hedging activities

Derivatives are initially recognized at fair value at trade date and subsequently re-measured at fair value. The method of recognizing the resulting gain or loss depends on whether the derivative is designated as a hedging instrument, and if so, the nature of the item being hedged. The Company designates certain derivatives as either:

 

  a) Fair value hedge: a hedge of the fair value of recognized liabilities

 

  b) Cash flow hedge: a hedge of a particular risk associated with a highly probable forecast transaction; or

 

  c) Net investment hedge: a hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation.

At the inception of the hedge, the Company documents the relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives and strategy for undertaking various hedging transactions. The Company also documents its assessment, both at hedge inception and on an ongoing basis, of whether the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions are highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows of the hedged items.

The fair values of various derivative instruments used for hedging purposes are disclosed in Note C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments”. Movements in the hedging reserve in OCI are shown in Note C16, “Equity and other comprehensive income”.

The fair value of a hedging derivative is classified as a non-current asset or liability when the remaining maturity of the hedged item is more than 12 months, and as a current asset or liability when the remaining maturity of the hedged item is less than 12 months. Trading derivatives are classified as current assets or liabilities.

Fair value hedges

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with any changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk. The Company only applies fair value hedge accounting for hedging fixed interest risk on borrowings. Both gains and losses relating to the interest rate swaps hedging fixed rate borrowings and the changes in the fair value of the hedged fixed rate borrowings attributable to interest rate risk are recognized in the income statement within Financial expenses. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, the adjustment to the carrying amount of a hedged item for which the effective interest method is used is amortized to the income statement over the remaining period to maturity.

Cash flow hedges

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognized in OCI. The gain or loss relating to an ineffective portion is recognized immediately in the income statement within financial income or expense.

Amounts deferred in OCI are recycled in the income statement in the periods when the hedged item affects profit or loss (for example, when the forecast sale that is hedged takes place), either in Net Sales or Cost of Sales. When the forecast transaction that is hedged results in the recognition of a non-financial asset (for example, inventory or fixed assets), the gains and losses previously deferred in OCI are transferred from OCI and included in the initial measurement of the cost of the asset. The deferred amounts are ultimately recognized in Cost of Sales in case of inventory or in Depreciation in case of fixed assets. When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss which at that time remains in OCI is recognized in the income statement when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognized. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in OCI is immediately transferred to the income statement within financial income or expense.

 

82


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Net investment hedges

Hedges of net investments in foreign operations are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges. Any gain or loss on the hedging instrument relating to the effective portion of the hedge is recognized in OCI. A gain or loss relating to an ineffective portion is recognized immediately in the income statement within financial income or expense. Gains and losses deferred in OCI are included in the income statement when the foreign operation is partially disposed of or sold.

Financial guarantees

Financial guarantee contracts are initially recognized at fair value (i.e. usually the fee received). Subsequently, these contracts are measured at the higher of:

 

   

The amount determined as the best estimate of the net expenditure required to settle the obligation according to the guarantee contract

 

   

The recognized contractual fee less cumulative amortization when amortized over the guarantee period, using the straight-line-method.

The best estimate of the net expenditure comprises future fees and cash flows from subrogation rights.

Inventories

Inventories are measured at the lower of cost or net realizable value on a first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis.

Risks of obsolescence have been measured by estimating market value based on future customer demand and changes in technology and customer acceptance of new products.

A significant part of Inventories is Contract work in Progress (CWIP). Recognition and de recognition of CWIP relates to the Company´s revenue recognition principles meaning that costs incurred under a customer contract are recognized as CWIP. When revenue is recognized CWIP is derecognized and is instead recognized as Cost of Sales.

In Note C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”, a further disclosure is presented in relation to (i) key sources of estimation uncertainty and (ii) the decision made in relation to accounting policies applied.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets other than goodwill

Intangible assets other than goodwill comprise capitalized development expenses and acquired intangible assets, such as patents, customer relations, trademarks and software. At initial recognition, capitalized development expenses are stated at cost while acquired intangible assets related to business combinations are stated at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition, both capitalized development expenses and acquired intangible assets are stated at initially recognized amounts less accumulated amortization and any impairment. Amortization and any impairment losses are included in Research and development expenses, mainly for capitalized development expenses and patents, in Selling and administrative expenses, mainly for customer relations and brands, and in Cost of sales.

Costs incurred for development of products to be sold, leased or otherwise marketed or intended for internal use are capitalized as from when technological and economical feasibility has been established until the product is available for sale or use. These capitalized expenses are mainly generated internally and include direct labor

 

83


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

and directly attributable overhead. Amortization of capitalized development expenses begins when the product is available for general release. Amortization is made on a product or platform basis according to the straight-line method over periods not exceeding five years. Research and development expenses directly related to orders from customers are accounted for as a part of Cost of sales. Other research and development expenses are charged to income as incurred.

Amortization of acquired intangible assets, such as patents, customer relations, brands and software, is made according to the straight-line method over their estimated useful lives, not exceeding ten years. However, if the economic benefit related to an item of intangible assets is front-end loaded the amortization method reflects this. Thus, the amortization for such an item is amortized on a digressive curve basis and the asset value decreases with higher amounts in the beginning of the useful life compared to the end.

The Company has not recognized any intangible assets with indefinite useful life other than goodwill.

Impairment tests are performed whenever there is an indication of possible impairment. However, intangible assets not yet available for use are tested annually. An impairment loss is recognized if the carrying amount of an asset or its cash-generating unit exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of the value in use and the fair value less costs to sell. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows after tax are discounted to their present value using an after-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. Application of after tax amounts in calculation, both in relation to cash flows and discount rate is applied due to that available models for calculating discount rate include a tax component. The after tax discounting, applied by the Company is not materially different from a discounting based on before-tax future cash flows and before-tax discount rates, as required by IFRS.

Corporate assets have been allocated to cash-generating units in relation to each unit’s proportion of total net sales. The amount related to corporate assets is not significant. Impairment losses recognized in prior periods are assessed at each reporting date for any indications that the loss has decreased or no longer exists. An impairment loss is reversed if there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amounts and if the recoverable amount is higher than the carrying value. An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount after reversal does not exceed the carrying amount, net of amortization, which would have been reported if no impairment loss had been recognized.

In Note C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”, a further disclosure is presented in relation to (i) key sources of estimation uncertainty and (ii) the decision made in relation to accounting policies applied.

Goodwill

As from the acquisition date, goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated to each cash-generating unit (CGU) of the Company expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. Ericsson’s four operating segments have been identified as CGUs. Goodwill is assigned to three of them, Networks, Global Services and Support Solutions.

An annual impairment test for the CGUs to which goodwill has been allocated is performed in the fourth quarter, or when there is an indication of impairment. Impairment testing as well as recognition of impairment of goodwill is performed in the same manner as for intangible assets other than goodwill, see description under “Intangible assets other than goodwill” above. An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed.

Additional disclosure is required in relation to goodwill impairment testing, see Note C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”, below and in Note C10, “Intangible assets”.

 

84


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment consist of real estate, machinery and other technical assets, other equipment, tools and installation and construction in process and advance payment, they are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and any impairment losses.

Depreciation is charged to income, generally on a straight-line basis, over the estimated useful life of each component of an item of property, plant and equipment, including buildings. Estimated useful lives are, in general, 25–50 years for real estate and 3–10 years for machinery and equipment. Depreciation and any impairment charges are included in Cost of sales, Research and development or Selling and administrative expenses.

The Company recognizes in the carrying amount of an item of property, plant and equipment the cost of replacing a component and derecognizes the residual value of the replaced component.

Impairment testing as well as recognition or reversal of impairment of property, plant and equipment is performed in the same manner as for intangible assets other than goodwill, see description under “Intangible assets other than goodwill” above.

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing the proceeds less cost to sell with the carrying amount and are recognized within Other operating income and expenses in the income statement.

Leasing

Leasing when the Company is the lessee

Leases on terms in which the Company assumes substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as finance leases. Upon initial recognition, the leased asset is measured at an amount equal to the lower of its fair value and the present value of the minimum lease payments. Subsequent to initial recognition, the asset is accounted for in accordance with the accounting policy applicable to that type of asset, although the depreciation period must not exceed the lease term.

Other leases are operating leases, and the leased assets under such contracts are not recognized on the balance sheet. Costs under operating leases are recognized in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Lease incentives received are recognized as an integral part of the total lease expense, over the term of the lease.

Leasing when the Company is the lessor

Leasing contracts with the Company as lessor are classified as finance leases when the majority of risks and rewards are transferred to the lessee, and otherwise as operating leases. Under a finance lease, a receivable is recognized at an amount equal to the net investment in the lease and revenue is recognized in accordance with the revenue recognition principles.

Under operating leases the equipment Is recorded as property, plant and equipment and revenue as well as depreciation is recognized on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

Income taxes

Income taxes in the consolidated financial statements include both current and deferred taxes. Income taxes are reported in the income statement unless the underlying item is reported directly in equity or OCI. For those items, the related income tax is also reported directly in equity or OCI. A current tax liability or asset is recognized for the estimated taxes payable or refundable for the current year or prior years.

 

85


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Deferred tax is recognized for temporary differences between the book values of assets and liabilities and their tax values and for tax loss carry forwards. A deferred tax asset is recognized only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the deductible temporary differences and tax loss carry forwards can be utilized. In the recognition of income taxes, the Company offsets current tax receivables against current tax liabilities and deferred tax assets against deferred tax liabilities in the balance sheet, when the Company has a legal right to offset these items and the intention to do so. Deferred tax is not recognized for the following temporary differences: goodwill not deductible for tax purposes, for the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit, and for differences related to investments in subsidiaries when it is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred tax is measured at the tax rate that is expected to be applied to the temporary differences when they reverse, based on the tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date. An adjustment of deferred tax asset/liability balances due to a change in the tax rate is recognized in the income statement, unless it relates to a temporary difference earlier recognized directly in equity or OCI, in which case the adjustment is also recognized in equity or OCI.

The measurement of deferred tax assets involves judgment regarding the deductibility of costs not yet subject to taxation and estimates regarding sufficient future taxable income to enable utilization of unused tax losses in different tax jurisdictions. All deferred tax assets are subject to annual review of probable utilization. The largest amounts of tax loss carry forwards relate to Sweden, with indefinite period of utilization.

In Note C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”, a further disclosure is presented in relation to (i) key sources of estimation uncertainty and (ii) the decision made in relation to accounting policies applied.

Provisions and contingent liabilities

Provisions are made when there are legal or constructive obligations as a result of past events and when it is probable that an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligations and the amounts can be reliably estimated. When the effect of the time value of money is material, discounting is made of estimated outflows. However, the actual outflows as a result of the obligations may differ from such estimates.

The provisions are mainly related to warranty commitments, restructuring, customer projects and other obligations, such as unresolved income tax and value added tax issues, claims or obligations as a result of patent infringement and other litigations, supplier claims and customer finance guarantees.

Product warranty commitments consider probabilities of all material quality issues based on historical performance for established products and expected performance for new products, estimates of repair cost per unit, and volumes sold still under warranty up to the reporting date.

A restructuring obligation is considered to have arisen when the Company has a detailed formal plan for the restructuring (approved by management), which has been communicated in such a way that a valid expectation has been raised among those affected.

Project related provisions include estimated losses on onerous contracts, contractual penalties and undertakings. For losses on customer contracts, a provision equal to the total estimated loss is recorded when a loss from a contract is anticipated and possible to estimate reliably. These contract loss estimates include any probable penalties to a customer under a loss contract.

 

86


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Other provisions include provisions for unresolved tax issues, litigations, supplier claims, customer finance and other provisions. The Company provides for estimated future settlements related to patent infringements based on the probable outcome of each infringement. The actual outcome or actual cost of settling an individual infringement may vary from the Company’s estimate.

The Company estimates the outcome of any potential patent infringement made known to the Company through assertion and through the Company’s own monitoring of patent-related cases in the relevant legal systems. To the extent that the Company makes the judgment that an identified potential infringement will more likely than not result in an outflow of resources, the Company records a provision based on the Company’s best estimate of the expenditure required to settle with the counterpart.

In the ordinary course of business, the Company is subject to proceedings, lawsuits and other unresolved claims, including proceedings under laws and government regulations and other matters. These matters are often resolved over a long period of time. The Company regularly assesses the likelihood of any adverse judgments in or outcomes of these matters, as well as potential ranges of possible losses. Provisions are recognized when it is probable that an obligation has arisen and the amount can be reasonably estimated based on a detailed analysis of each individual issue.

Certain present obligations are not recognized as provisions as it is not probable that an economic outflow will be required to settle the obligation or the amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability. Such obligations are reported as contingent liabilities. For further detailed information, see Note C24, “Contingent liabilities”.

In Note C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”, a further disclosure is presented in relation to (i) key sources of estimation uncertainty and (ii) the decision made in relation to accounting policies applied.

Post-employment benefits

Pensions and other post-employment benefits are classified as either defined contribution plans or defined benefit plans. Under a defined contribution plan, the Company’s only obligation is to pay a fixed amount to a separate entity (a pension trust fund) with no obligation to pay further contributions if the fund does not hold sufficient assets to pay all employee benefits. The related actuarial and investment risks fall on the employee. The expenditures for defined contribution plans are recognized as expenses during the period when the employee provides service.

Under a defined benefit plan, it is the Company’s obligation to provide agreed benefits to current and former employees. The related actuarial and investment risks fall on the Company.

The present value of the defined benefit obligations for current and former employees is calculated using the Projected Unit Credit Method. The discount rate for each country is determined by reference to market yields on high-quality corporate bonds that have maturity dates approximating the terms of the Company’s obligations. In countries where there is no deep market in such bonds, the market yields on government bonds are used. The calculations are based upon actuarial assumptions, assessed on a quarterly basis, and are as a minimum prepared annually. Actuarial assumptions are the Company’s best estimate of the variables that determine the cost of providing the benefits. When using actuarial assumptions, it is possible that the actual results will differ from the estimated results or that the actuarial assumptions will change from one period to another. These differences are reported as actuarial gains and losses. They are for example caused by unexpectedly high or low rates of employee turnover, changed life expectancy, salary changes, changes in the discount rate and differences between actual and expected return on plan assets. Actuarial gains and losses are recognized in OCI in the period in which they occur. The Company’s net liability for each defined benefit plan consists of the present value of

 

87


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

pension commitments less the fair value of plan assets and is recognized net on the balance sheet. When the result is a net benefit to the Company, the recognized asset is limited to the total of any cumulative past service cost and the present value of any future refunds from the plan or reductions in future contributions to the plan.

The net of return on plan assets and interest on pension liabilities is reported as financial income or expense, while the current service cost and any other items in the annual pension cost are reported as operating income or expense.

Payroll taxes related to actuarial gains and losses are included in determining actuarial gains and losses.

In Note C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”, a further disclosure is presented in relation to (i) key sources of estimation uncertainty and (ii) the decision made in relation to accounting policies applied.

Share-based compensation to employees and the Board of Directors

Share-based compensation is related to remuneration to all employees, including key management personnel and the Board of Directors.

Under IFRS, a company shall recognize compensation costs for share-based compensation programs based on a measure of the value to the company of services received under the plans.

This value is based on the fair value of, for example free shares at grant date, measured as stock price as per each investment date. The value at grant date is charged to the income statement as any other remuneration over the service period. For example, value at grant date is 90. Given the normal service period of three years within Ericsson, 30 are charged per year during the service period.

The amount charged to the income statement is reversed in equity each time of the income statement charge.

The reason for this accounting principle of IFRS is that compensation cost is a cost with no direct cash flow impact. The purpose of share-based accounting according to IFRS (IFRS 2) is to present an impact of share-based programs, being part of the total remuneration, in the income statement.

Compensation to employees

Stock purchase plans

For stock purchase plans, compensation costs are recognized during the vesting period, based on the fair value of the Ericsson share at the employee’s investment date. The fair value is based upon the share price at investment date, adjusted for the fact that no dividends will be received on matching shares prior to matching and other features that are non-vesting conditions. The employee pays a price equal to the share price at investment date for the investment shares. The investment date is considered as the grant date. In the balance sheet, the corresponding amounts are accounted for as equity. Vesting conditions are non-market based and affect the number of shares that Ericsson will match. Other features of a share-based payment are non-vesting conditions. These features would need to be included in the grant date fair value for transactions with employees and others providing similar services. In the period when an employee takes a refund of previously made contributions (and stops making further contributions) all remaining compensation expense is recognized. Non-vesting conditions would not impact the number of awards expected to vest or valuation thereof subsequent to grant date. When calculating the compensation costs for shares under performance-based matching programs, the Company at each reporting date assesses the probability that the performance targets are met. Compensation expenses are based on estimates of the number of shares that will match at the end of the vesting period. When shares are matched, social security charges are to be paid in certain countries on the value of the employee

 

88


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

benefit. The employee benefit is generally based on the market value of the shares at the matching date. During the vesting period, estimated amounts for such social security charges are expensed and accrued.

Compensation to the Board of Directors

During 2008, the Parent Company introduced a share-based compensation program as a part of the remuneration to the Board of Directors. The program gives non-employed Directors elected by the General Meeting of Shareholders a right to receive part of their remuneration as a future payment of an amount which corresponds to the market value of a share of class B in the Parent Company at the time of payment, as further disclosed in Note C28, “Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees”. The cost for cash settlements is measured and recognized based on the estimated costs for the program on a pro rata basis during the service period, being one year. The estimated costs are remeasured during and at the end of the service period.

Segment reporting

An operating segment is a component of a company whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the Company’s chief operating decision maker, (CODM), to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its performance. Within the Company, the Group Management Team is defined as the CODM function.

The segment presentation, as per each segment is based on the Company’s accounting policies as disclosed in this note. The arm’s length principle is applied in transactions between the segments.

The Company’s segment disclosure about geographical areas is based on in which country transfer of risks and rewards occur.

New standards and interpretations not yet adopted

A number of issued new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations are not yet effective for the year ended December 31, 2012 and have not been applied in preparing these consolidated financial statements.

Below is a list of standards/interpretations that have been issued, except for amendments related to IFRS 1, ‘First time adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards’ and are effective for the periods starting as from January 1, 2013 (except IAS 32 and IFRS 9).

These amendments effective as from January 1, 2013, are not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s financial result or position.

 

   

Amendment to IAS 1, ‘Financial statement presentation’, regarding other comprehensive income

The main change resulting from these amendments is a requirement for entities to group items presented in ‘other comprehensive income’ (OCI) on the basis of whether they are potentially reclassifiable to profit or loss subsequently (reclassification adjustments). The amendments do not address which items are presented in OCI.

 

   

Amendment to IAS 19, ‘Employee benefits’

These amendments eliminate the corridor approach and calculate finance costs on a net funding basis. The Company implemented the immediate and full recognition of actuarial gains/losses in other comprehensive income in 2006, meaning that the corridor method has not been applied by the Company as from that date and therefore the transition to the revised IAS19 applicable starting January 1, 2013 will not have a significant effect on the present obligation. The main issue to address will be the

 

89


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

implementation of the net interest cost/gain, which integrates the interest cost and expected return on assets to be based on a common discount rate. An analysis of fiscal year 2012 in relation to this amendment indicates an impact on pension costs for 2012 with an increase of approximately SEK 0.4 (–0.1) billion. The Company will also need to address the taxes to be incorporated into the defined benefit obligation. This amendment relates to the Swedish special payroll taxes to be reclassified from Other current liabilities to Post-employment benefits with an estimated amount of SEK 1.8 (1.8) billion as per December 31, 2012. The amendment also includes additional disclosure requirements on financial and demographic assumptions, sensitivity analysis, duration and multi-employer plans.

 

   

Amendment to IFRS 7, ‘Financial instruments: Disclosures’, on asset and liability offsetting

This amendment requires disclosure of gross amounts related to financial instruments for which off set has been made.

 

   

IFRS 10, ‘Consolidated financial statements’

The objective of IFRS 10 is to establish principles for the presentation and preparation of consolidated financial statements when an entity controls one or more other entities to present consolidated financial statements. It defines the principle of control, and establishes controls as the basis for consolidation. It sets out how to apply the principle of control to identify whether an investor controls an investee and therefore must consolidate the investee. An entity controls an investee if the entity has power over the investee, has the ability to use the power and is exposed to variable returns. It also sets out the accounting requirements for the preparation of consolidated financial statements.

 

   

IFRS 11, ‘Joint arrangements’

IFRS 11 is a more realistic reflection of joint arrangements by focusing on the rights and obligations of the arrangement rather than its legal form. There are two types of joint arrangement: joint operations and joint ventures. Proportional consolidation of joint ventures is no longer allowed. The Company does not apply the proportionate consolidation method.

 

   

IFRS 12, ‘Disclosures of interests in other entities’

IFRS 12 includes the disclosure requirements for all forms of interests in other entities, including joint arrangements, associates, special purpose vehicles and other off balance sheet vehicles.

 

   

IFRS 13, ‘Fair value measurement’

IFRS 13 does not extend the use of fair value accounting but provide guidance on how it should be applied where its use is already required or permitted by other standards within IFRS.

 

   

IAS 27 (revised 2011), ‘Separate financial statements’

IAS 27 (revised 2011) includes the provisions on separate financial statements that are left after the control provisions of IAS 27 have been included in the new IFRS 10.

 

   

IAS 28 (revised 2011), ‘Associates and joint ventures’

IAS 28 (revised 2011) includes the requirements for joint ventures, as well as associates, to be equity accounted following the issue of IFRS 11.

Below are standards that have been issued and are effective for the periods starting as from later than 1 January, 2013:

 

   

Amendment to IAS 32, ‘Financial instruments: Presentation’, on asset and liability offsetting

These amendments are related to the application guidance in IAS 32, ‘Financial instruments: Presentation’, and clarify some of the requirements for offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities on the balance sheet. This amendment is effective as from 1 January, 2014.

 

90


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

IFRS 9, ‘Financial instruments’

IFRS 9 is the first standard issued as part of a wider project to replace IAS 39. IFRS 9 retains but simplifies the mixed measurement model and establishes two primary measurement categories for financial assets: amortized cost and fair value. This amendment is expected to be effective as from 1 January, 2015. The EU has not yet endorsed IFRS 9, ‘Financial instruments’.

These amendments effective as from later than January 1, 2013, are not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s financial result or position.

Effective date for IFRS 10, IFRS 11, IFRS 12, IAS 27 and IAS 28 is January 1, 2013. EU has in its endorsement decision allowed listed companies in the EU to adopt these standards as from January 1, 2014. The Company will adopt IFRS 10, IFRS 11, IFRS 12, IAS 27 and IAS 28 as from January 1, 2013.

C2    CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGMENTS

The preparation of financial statements and application of accounting standards often involve management’s judgment and the use of estimates and assumptions deemed to be reasonable at the time they are made. However, other results may be derived with different judgments or using different assumptions or estimates, and events may occur that could require a material adjustment to the carrying amount of the asset or liability affected. Following are the most important accounting policies subject to such judgments and the key sources of estimation uncertainty that the Company believes could have the most significant impact on the reported results and financial position.

The information in this note is grouped as per:

 

   

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

 

   

Judgments management has made in the process of applying the Company’s accounting policies.

Revenue recognition

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Examples of estimates of total contract revenue and cost that are necessary are the assessing of customer possibility to reach conditional purchase volumes triggering contractual discounts to be given to the customer, the impact on the Company revenue in relation to performance criteria and whether any loss provisions shall be made.

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies applied

Parts of the Company’s sales are generated from large and complex customer contracts. Managerial judgment is applied regarding, among other aspects, conformance with acceptance criteria and if transfer of risks and rewards to the buyer has taken place to determine if revenue and costs should be recognized in the current period, degree of completion and the customer credit standing to assess whether payment is likely or not to justify revenue recognition.

Trade and customer finance receivables

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

The Company monitors the financial stability of its customers and the environment in which they operate to make estimates regarding the likelihood that the individual receivables will be paid. Total allowances for estimated losses as of December 31, 2012, were SEK 1.1 (1.0) billion or 1.5% (1.4%) of gross trade and customer finance receivables.

 

91


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Credit risks for outstanding customer finance credits are regularly assessed as well, and allowances are recorded for estimated losses.

Inventory valuation

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realizable value. Estimates are required in relation to forecasted sales volumes and inventory balances. In situations where excess inventory balances are identified, estimates of net realizable values for the excess volumes are made. Inventory allowances for estimated losses as of December 31, 2012, amounted to SEK 3.5 (3.3) billion or 11% (9%) of gross inventory.

Investments in joint ventures and associated companies

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Impairment testing of total carrying value of each item of “Equity in joint ventures and associated companies” is performed after initial recognition, whenever there is an indication of impairment. Information regarding information used for impairment tests is provided by respective joint venture and associated company. Negative deviations in actual cash flows compared to estimated cash flows as well as new estimates that indicate lower future cash flows might result in recognition of impairment charges. An impairment in a JV or associated company may not always affect the Company in the same way depending on accounting standard used, initial recognition of assets and liabilities or other differences.

At December 31, 2012, the amount of joint ventures and associated companies amounted to SEK 2.8 (6.0) billion.

Deferred taxes

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Deferred tax assets and liabilities, are recognized for temporary differences and for tax loss carry-forwards. Deferred tax is recognized net of valuation allowances. The valuation of temporary differences and tax loss carry-forwards, is based on management’s estimates of future taxable profits in different tax jurisdictions against which the temporary differences and loss carry-forwards may be utilized.

The largest amounts of tax loss carry-forwards are reported in Sweden, with an indefinite period of utilization (i.e. with no expiry date). For further detailed information, please refer to Note C8, “Taxes”.

At December 31, 2012, the value of deferred tax assets amounted to SEK 12.3 (13.0) billion. The deferred tax assets related to loss carry-forwards are reported as non-current assets.

Accounting for income-, value added- and other taxes

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Accounting for these items is based upon evaluation of income-, value added- and other tax rules in all jurisdictions where we perform activities. The total complexity of rules related to taxes and the accounting for these require management’s involvement in judgments regarding classification of transactions and in estimates of probable outcomes of claimed deductions and/or disputes.

 

92


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Acquired intellectual property rights and other intangible assets, including goodwill

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

At initial recognition, future cash flows are estimated, to ensure that the initial carrying values do not exceed the expected discounted cash flows for the items of this type of assets. After initial recognition, impairment testing is performed whenever there is an indication of impairment, except for goodwill for which impairment testing is performed at least once per year. Negative deviations in actual cash flows compared to estimated cash flows as well as new estimates that indicate lower future cash flows might result in recognition of impairment charges. One source of uncertainty related to future cash flows is long-term movements in exchange rates.

For further discussion on goodwill, see Note C1, “Significant accounting policies” and Note C10, “Intangible assets”. Estimates related to acquired intangible assets are based on similar assumptions and risks as for goodwill.

At December 31, 2012, the amount of acquired intellectual property rights and other intangible assets amounted to SEK 45.6 (40.5) billion, including goodwill of SEK 30.4 (27.4) billion. The Company recognized goodwill in ST-Ericsson of SEK 0.0 (1.3) billion, as disclosed in Note C12, “Financial assets, non-current”.

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies applied

At initial recognition and subsequent remeasurement, management judgments are made, both for key assumptions and regarding impairment indicators. In the purchase price allocation made for each acquisition, the purchase price shall be assigned to the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities based on fair values for these assets. Any remaining excess value is reported as goodwill. This allocation requires management judgment as well as the definition of cash generating units for impairment testing purposes. Other judgments might result in significantly different results and financial position in the future.

Provisions

Warranty provisions

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Provisions for product warranties are based on current volumes of products sold still under warranty and on historic quality rates for mature products as well as estimates and assumptions on future quality rates for new products and estimates of costs to remedy the various qualitative issues that might occur. Total provisions for product warranties as of December 31, 2012, amounted to SEK 1.6 (1.9) billion.

Provisions other than warranty provisions

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Provisions, other than warranty provisions, mainly comprise amounts related to contractual obligations and penalties to customers and estimated losses on customer contracts, restructuring, risks associated with patent and other litigations, supplier or subcontractor claims and/ or disputes, as well as provisions for unresolved income tax and value added tax issues. The estimates related to the amounts of provisions for penalties, claims or losses receive special attention from the management. At December 31, 2012, provisions other than warranty commitments amounted to SEK 7.0 (4.4) billion. For further detailed information, see Note C18, “Provisions”.

 

93


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies applied

Whether a present obligation is probable or not requires judgment. The nature and type of risks for these provisions differ and management’s judgment is applied regarding the nature and extent of obligations in deciding if an outflow of resources is probable or not.

Contingent liabilities

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

As disclosed under ‘Provisions other than warranty provisions’ there are uncertainties in the estimated amounts. The same type of uncertainty exists for contingent liabilities.

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies

As disclosed under Note C1, “Significant accounting policies” a potential obligation that is not probable to result in an economic outflow is classified as a contingent liability, with no impact on the Company’s financial statements. Should, however, an obligation in a later period be deemed to be probable, then a provision shall be recognized, impacting the financial statements.

Pension and other post-employment benefits

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Accounting for the costs of defined benefit pension plans and other applicable post-employment benefits is based on actuarial valuations, relying on key estimates for discount rates, expected return on plan assets, future salary increases, employee turnover rates and mortality tables. The discount rate assumptions are based on rates for high-quality fixed-income investments with durations as close as possible to the Company’s pension plans. Expected returns on plan assets consider long-term historical returns, allocation of assets and estimates of future long-term investment returns. At December 31, 2012, defined benefit obligations for pensions and other post-employment benefits amounted to SEK 52.0 (36.4) billion and fair value of plan assets to SEK 44.6 (28.0) billion. For more information on estimates and assumptions, see Note C17, “Post-employment benefits”.

Financial instruments, hedge accounting and foreign exchange risks

Key sources of estimation uncertainty

Foreign exchange risk in highly probable sales and purchases in future periods are hedged using foreign exchange derivative instruments designated as cash-flow hedges. Forecasts are based on estimations of future transactions. A forecast is therefore per definition uncertain to some degree.

Judgments made in relation to accounting policies applied

Establishing highly probable sales and purchases volumes involve gathering and evaluating sales and purchases estimates for future periods as well as analyzing actual outcome versus estimates on a regular basis in order to fulfill effectiveness testing requirements for hedge accounting. Changes in estimates of sales and purchases might result in that hedge accounting is discontinued.

For further information regarding risks in financial instruments, see Note C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments”.

 

94


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C3    SEGMENT INFORMATION

Operating segments

When determining Ericsson’s operating segments, consideration has been given to which markets and what type of customers the products and services aim to attract as well as the distribution channels they are sold through. Commonality regarding technology, research and development has also been taken into account. To best reflect the business focus and to facilitate comparability with peers, four operating segments are reported:

 

   

Networks

 

   

Global Services

 

   

Support Solutions

 

   

ST-Ericsson

Ericsson’s share in Sony Ericsson was divested in February 2012, with effective date on January 1.

Networks delivers products and solutions for mobile access, IP and transport networks and core networks. The offering includes:

 

   

Radio access solutions that interconnect with devices such as mobile phones, tablets and PCs. The RBS 6000 supports all major standardized mobile technologies

 

   

IP and transport solutions based on the SSR 8000 family of products as well as transmission/backhaul including microwave (MINI-LINK) and optical transmission solutions for mobile and fixed networks

 

   

Switching and IMS solutions, based on Ericsson Blade Server platform, for core networks

 

   

Operations Support Systems (OSS), supporting operators’ management of existing networks and introduction of new technologies and services.

Global Services delivers managed services, product-related services and consulting and systems integration services. The offering includes:

 

   

Managed Services; Solutions for designing, building, operating and managing the day-to-day operations of the customer’s network or solution, maintenance, network sharing solutions as well as shared solutions such as hosting of platforms and applications. Ericsson also offers broadcast services and managed services of IT environments.

 

   

Product-related services: Services to expand, upgrade, restructure or migrate networks, network-rollout services, customer support and network optimization services.

 

   

Consulting and Systems Integration: Technology and operational consulting, integration of multi-vendor equipment, design and integration of new solutions and transforming programs. Industry-specific solutions for vertical industries are also included.

Support Solutions (name changed from Multimedia during 2012) provides enablers and applications for operators. The offering includes:

 

   

Operations Support Systems: plan, build and optimize, service fulfillment and service assurance.

 

   

Business Support Systems: revenue management (prepaid, post-paid, convergent charging and billing), mediation and customer care solutions.

 

   

TV solutions: a suite of open, standards-based solutions and products for the creation, management and delivery of evolved TV experiences on any device over any network. Includes a multi-screen TV platform with consumer experience creation, video content management, on-demand video delivery, advanced video compression and video-optimized delivery network infrastructure.

 

95


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

M-Commerce solutions for money transfer; payment transactions and services between mobile subscribers and operators or other service providers.

ST-Ericsson, the joint venture, offers modems and ModAps (integrated modem and application processor platforms) for device manufacturers.

ST-Ericsson’s results are reported according to the equity method under “Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies” in the income statement.

On December 10, 2012, STMicroelectronics announced its intention to exit as a shareholder in ST-Ericsson. On December 20, 2012, the Company announced that it would take a non-cash charge in the fourth quarter of 2012 related to its 50% stake in ST-Ericsson. The charge includes write-down of investments to reflect the current best estimate of the Company’s share of the fair market value of the joint venture and a provision related to the strategic options at hand for ST-Ericsson assets. In total, the Company has made write-downs of SEK –4.7 billion of ST-Ericsson investments and taken a provision of SEK –3.3 billion. In addition, the Company’s share in ST-Ericsson’s operating loss amounted to SEK –3.7 (–0.8) billion. For more information, see Note C12, “Financial assets, non-current” and Note C18 “Provisions”.

As of December 31, 2012 there are no remaining investments related to ST-Ericsson on the Company’s balance sheet. Costs and cash related to implementation of strategic options at hand will be booked against provisions.

Sony Ericsson, was up until 2012, a joint venture delivering mobile phones and accessories. In February 2012, Ericsson completed the divestment of its 50% stake in Sony Ericsson to Sony. Sony Ericsson has not been consolidated by the Company during 2012. The sale resulted in a gain of SEK 7.7 billion.

Unallocated

Some revenues, costs, assets and liabilities are not identified as part of any operating segment and are therefore not allocated. Examples of such items are costs for corporate staff, IT costs and general marketing costs.

Regions

The Regions are the Company’s primary sales channel. The Company operates worldwide and reports its operations divided into eleven regions. Region China and North East Asia has changed name to North East Asia.

 

   

North America

 

   

Latin America

 

   

Northern Europe & Central Asia

 

   

Western and Central Europe

 

   

Mediterranean

 

   

Middle East

 

   

Sub-Saharan Africa

 

   

India

 

   

North East Asia

 

   

South East Asia & Oceania

 

   

Other.

 

96


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Region “Other” includes licensing revenues, sales of cables, broadcast services, power modules and other businesses.

The acquired Technicolor Broadcast Service Division is reported in region “Other”. Multimedia brokering (IPX) was previously reported in each region in segment Support Solutions. For the first three quarters 2012 it was part of region “Other”. Multimedia brokering (IPX) was divested at the end of the third quarter 2012.

Major customers

The Company does not have any customer for which revenues from transactions have exceeded 10% of the Company’s total revenues for the years 2012, 2011 or 2010.

We derive most of the sales from large, multi-year agreements with a limited number of significant customers. Out of a customer base of approximately 400, mainly network operators, the 10 largest customers account for 46% (44%) of net sales. The largest customer accounted for approximately 7% (7%) of sales in 2012. For more information, see Risk Factors, “Market, Technology and Business Risks”.

Marketing channels

Marketing in a business-to-business environment is expanding, from being primarily through personal meetings, to on-line forums, expert blogs and social media. Ericsson performs marketing through:

 

   

Customer engagement with a consultative approach

 

   

Selective focus on events and experience centers for customer experience and interaction

 

   

Continuous dialogue with customers and target audiences through social and other digital media (including virtual events)

 

   

Activation of the open social and digital media landscape to strengthen message reach and impact

 

   

Execution of solutions-driven programs, aligned globally and regionally.

 

97


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Operating segments

 

    

2012

  Networks     Global
Services
    Support
Solutions
    Sony
Ericsson
    ST-
Ericsson
    Total
Segments
    Unallocated     Eliminations1)     Group  

Segment sales

    117,185        97,009        13,445        —          8,457        236,096        —          –8,457        227,639   

Inter-segment sales

    100        34        6        —          634        774        —          –634        140   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net sales

    117,285        97,043        13,451        —          9,091        236,870        —          –9,091        227,779   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

    7,057        6,226        1,150        8,026 2)      –15,447 3)      7,012        –267        3,713        10,458   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating margin (%)

    6     6     9       –170     3         5

Financial income

                    1,708   

Financial expenses

                    –1,984   
                 

 

 

 

Income after financial items

                    10,182   
                 

 

 

 

Taxes

                    –4,244   
                 

 

 

 

Net income

                    5,938   
                 

 

 

 

Other segment items

                 

Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies

    –59        45        –20        —          –11,734 3)      –11,768        37        —          –11,731   

Amortization

    –3,832        –853        –809        —          –322        –5,816        —          322        –5,494   

Depreciation

    –3,035        –727        –290        —          –741        –4,793        —          741        –4,052   

Impairment losses

    –385        –9        –1        —          —   4)      –395        —          —          –395   

Reversals of impairment losses

    39        9        4        —          —          52        —          —          52   

Write-down of investment

      —          —          —          –4,684        –4,684        —          —          –4,684   

Restructuring expenses

    –1,253        –1,930        –246        —          –624        –4,053        –18        624        –3,447   

Gains/losses from divestments

    –59        1        216        8,026 2)      —          8,184        152        —          8,336   

 

Revenue from the acquired Telcordia business operation is reported 50/50 between segments Global Services and Support Solutions.

1) All segment sales are presented, but as ST-Ericsson sales are accounted for in accordance with the equity method, their sales are eliminated in the Eliminations column.
2) Includes a gain from the divestment of Sony Ericsson of SEK 7.7 billion.
3) Includes a write-down of SEK –4.7 billion of ST-Ericsson investment, a provision of SEK –3.3 billion and the Company’s share in ST-Ericsson’s operating loss of SEK –3.7 billion.
4) Impairment losses included in Write-down of investment.

 

98


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Operating segments

 

    

2011

  Networks     Global
Services
    Support
Solutions
    Sony
Ericsson
    ST-
Ericsson
    Total
Segments
    Unallocated     Eliminations1)     Group  

Segment sales

    131,596        83,854        10,629        46,866        9,232        282,177        —          –56,098        226,079   

Inter-segment sales

    799        30        13        126        1,461        2,429        —          –1,587        842   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net sales

    132,395        83,884        10,642        46,992        10,693        284,606        —          –57,685        226,921   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

    17,295        5,544        –504        –1,854        –5,461        15,020        –501        3,381        17,900   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating margin (%)

    13     7     –5     –4     –51     5         8

Financial income

                    2,882   

Financial expenses

                    –2,661   
                 

 

 

 

Income after financial items

                    18,121   
                 

 

 

 

Taxes

                    –5,552   
                 

 

 

 

Net income

                    12,569   
                 

 

 

 

Other segment items

                 

Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies

    87        28        4        –1,199        –2,730        –3,810        32        —          –3,778   

Amortization

    –4,192        –481        –792        –1        –867        –6,333        —          868        –5,465   

Depreciation

    –2,783        –532        –184        –647        –823        –4,969        —          1,470        –3,499   

Impairment losses

    –50        –23        –12        —          –283        –368        —          283        –85   

Reversals of impairment losses

    12        —          1        —          —          13        —          —          13   

Restructuring expenses

    –1,600        –1,363        –143        –838        –280        –4,224        –78        1,118        –3,184   

Gains/losses from divestments

    –6        —          —          —          —          –6        164        —          158   

 

1) All segment sales are presented, but as Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson sales are accounted for in accordance with the equity method, their sales are eliminated in the Eliminations column.

 

99


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Operating segments

 

2010

  Networks     Global
Services
    Support
Solutions
    Sony
Ericsson
    ST-
Ericsson
    Total
Segments
    Unallocated     Eliminations1)     Group  

Segment sales

    111,459        80,117        10,504        60,118        13,116        275,314        —          –73,234        202,080   

Inter-segment sales

    1,249        6        13        60        3,403        4,731        —          –3,463        1,268   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net sales

    112,708        80,123        10,517        60,178        16,519        280,045        —          –76,697        203,348   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

    12,481        6,513        –643        1,523        –3,527        16,347        –805        913        16,455   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating margin (%)

    11     8     –6     3     –21     6     —          —          8

Financial income

                    1,047   

Financial expenses

                    –1,719   
                 

 

 

 

Income after financial items

                    15,783   
                 

 

 

 

Taxes

                    –4,548   
                 

 

 

 

Net income

                    11,235   
                 

 

 

 

Other segment items

                 

Share in earnings of joint ventures and associated companies

    –64        –17        –2        664        –1,763        –1,182        10        —          –1,172   

Amortization

    –4,554        –303        –806        –25        –930        –6,618        —          955        –5,663   

Depreciation

    –2,600        –555        –144        –731        –1,022        –5,052        —          1,753        –3,299   

Impairment losses

    –675        –276        –52        —          –61        –1,064        —          61        –1,003   

Reversals of impairment losses

    9        2        1        —          —          12        —          —          12   

Restructuring expenses

    –3,915        –2,675        –207        –402        –536        –7,735        –17        938        –6,814   

Gains/losses from divestments

    154        53        92        —          —          299        59        —          358   

 

1) All segment sales are presented, but as Sony Ericsson and ST-Ericsson sales are accounted for in accordance with the equity method, their sales are eliminated in the Eliminations column.

 

100


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Regions

 

    
     Net sales      Non-current assets3)  
     2012      2011      2010      2012      2011      2010  

North America

     56,749         48,785         49,473         15,058         6,296         7,251   

Of which the United States

     56,698         46,519         46,104         6,101         6,020         6,977   

Latin America

     22,006         21,982         17,882         2,084         2,268         1,998   

Northern Europe & Central Asia1)2)

     11,345         15,225         12,171         38,335         41,008         42,112   

Western & Central Europe2)

     17,478         19,030         19,868         2,922         5,097         8,629   

Mediterranean

     23,299         23,807         22,628         1,099         1,395         1,523   

Middle East

     15,556         15,461         15,099         32         42         84   

Sub-Saharan Africa

     11,349         10,163         9,194         119         79         51   

India

     6,460         9,762         8,626         460         355         262   

North East Asia

     36,196         38,209         25,965         3,371         3,939         3,795   

Of which China

     12,637         17,546         14,633         1,399         1,496         1,013   

South East Asia & Oceania

     15,068         13,870         14,902         301         318         351   

Other1)2)

     12,273         10,627         7,540         —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     227,779         226,921         203,348         63,781         60,797         66,056   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

1) Of which Sweden

     5,033         3,882         4,237         37,718         40,415         41,683   

2) Of which EU

     44,230         43,960         43,707         41,546         44,786         46,563   

 

3) Total non-current assets excluding financial instruments, deferred tax assets, and post-employment benefit assets.

For employee information, see Note C28, “Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees”.

C4    NET SALES

Net sales

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Sales of products and network rollout services

     154,068         161,882         140,222   

Of which:

        

Delivery-type contracts

     154,068         161,882         140,156   

Construction-type contracts

     —           —           66   

Professional Services sales

     67,092         58,834         58,529   

License revenues

     6,619         6,205         4,597   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net sales

     227,779         226,921         203,348   

Export sales from Sweden

     106,997         116,507         100,070   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

101


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C5    EXPENSES BY NATURE

Expenses by nature

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Goods and services

     137,769         142,221         130,725   

Employee remuneration

     64,100         58,905         57,183   

Amortization and depreciation

     9,546         8,964         8,962   

Impairments and obsolescence allowances, net of reversals

     1,999         1,363         966   

Financial expenses

     1,984         2,661         1,719   

Taxes

     4,244         5,552         4,548   

Expenses incurred

     219,642         219,666         204,103   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Inventory changes1)

     –2,782         3,417         8,465   

Additions to Capitalized development

     1,641         1,515         1,647   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Expenses charged to the Income Statement

     220,783         214,734         193,991   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) The inventory changes are based on changes of gross inventory values prior to obsolescence allowances.

Total restructuring charges in 2012 were SEK 3.4 (3.2) b.

Restructuring charges are included in the expenses presented above.

Restructuring charges by function

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Cost of sales

     2,225         1,231         3,354   

R&D expenses

     852         561         1,682   

Selling and administrative expenses

     370         1,392         1,778   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total restructuring charges

     3,447         3,184         6,814   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

C6    OTHER OPERATING INCOME AND EXPENSES

Other operating income and expenses

 

     2012     2011      2010  

Gains on sales of intangible assets and PP&E

     12        65         301   

Losses on sales of intangible assets and PP&E

     –261        –64         –422   

Gains on sales of investments and operations

     8,462 1)      210         577   

Losses on sales of investments and operations

     –126        –52         –219   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Capital gains/losses, net

     8,087        159         237   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Other operating revenues

     878        1,119         1,766   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total other operating income and expenses

     8,965        1,278         2,003   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Includes a gain from the divestment of Sony Ericsson of SEK 7.7 billion.

 

102


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C7    FINANCIAL INCOME AND EXPENSES

Financial income and expenses

 

     2012      2011      2010  
     Financial
income
     Financial
expenses
     Financial
income
     Financial
expenses
     Financial
income
     Financial
expenses
 

Contractual interest on financial assets

     1,685         —           1,940         —           811         —     

Of which on financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

     1,308         —           1,381         —           304         —     

Contractual interest on financial liabilities

     —           –1,734         —           –1,706         —           –1,315   

Net gain/loss on:

                 

Instruments at fair value through profit or loss1)

     142         54         1,062         –591         295         –206   

Of which included in fair value hedge relationships

     —           –129         —           –175         —           151   

Loans and receivables

     –127         —           –132         —           –68         —     

Liabilities at amortized cost

     —           –133         —           –105         —           –4   

Other financial income and expenses

     8         –171         12         –259         9         –194   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     1,708         –1,984         2,882         –2,661         1,047         –1,719   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Excluding net gain from operating assets and liabilities, SEK 1,299 million (net gain of SEK 51 million in 2011, SEK 1,528 million in 2010), reported as Cost of sales.

C8    TAXES

The Company’s tax expense for 2012 was SEK –4,244 (–5,552) million or 41.7% (30.6%) of income after financial items. The tax rate may vary between years depending on business and geographical mix. The effective tax rate excluding joint ventures and associated companies as well as the gain due to the divestment of Sony Ericsson was 30.5% (26.4%). The corporate tax in Sweden was reduced from 26.3% to 22.0% from January 1, 2013. This resulted in a reduction of deferred tax assets and an increase of tax expense of SEK –0.5 billion.

Income taxes recognized in the income statement

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Current income taxes for the year

     –5,795         –4,642         –4,635   

Current income taxes related to prior years

     –241         283         –35   

Deferred tax income/expense (+/–)

     1,697         –1,433         307   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Sub total

     –4,339         –5,792         –4,363   

Share of taxes in joint ventures and associated companies

     95         240         –185   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Tax expense

     –4,244         –5,552         –4,548   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

103


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

A reconciliation between reported tax expense for the year and the theoretical tax expense that would arise when applying statutory tax rate in Sweden, 26.3%, on the consolidated income before taxes, is shown in the table below.

Reconciliation of Swedish income tax rate with effective tax rate

 

     2012     2011     2010  

Expected tax expense at Swedish tax rate 26.3%

     –2,678        –4,767        –4,150   

Effect of foreign tax rates

     –581        –1,126        –405   

Of which joint ventures and associated companies

     –778        –754        –467   

Current income taxes related to prior years

     –241        283        –35   

Remeasurement of tax loss carry-forwards

     134        224        –257   

Remeasurement of deductible temporary differences

     468        81        172   

Tax effect of non-deductible expenses

     –3,430        –768        –830   

Tax effect of non-taxable income

     2,573        521        880   

Tax effect of changes in tax rates

     –489        —          77   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Tax expense

     –4,244        –5,552        –4,548   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Effective tax rate

     41.7     30.6     28.8

Deferred tax balances

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are derived from the balance sheet items as shown in the table below.

Tax effects of temporary differences and tax loss carry-forwards

 

     2012      2011  
     Deferred
tax assets
     Deferred
tax liabilities
     Net balance      Deferred
tax assets
     Deferred
tax liabilities
     Net balance  

Intangible assets and property, plant and equipment

     941         4,579            968         2,941      

Current assets

     2,388         293            3,193         100      

Post-employment benefits

     2,600         614            2,233         618      

Provisions

     1,512         48            1,441         23      

Other

     3,487         432            3,423         64      

Loss carry-forwards

     4,239         —              3,258         —        
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Deferred tax assets/liabilities

     15,167         5,966         9,201         14,516         3,746         10,770   

Netting of assets/liabilities

     –2,846         –2,846            –1,496         –1,496      
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Deferred tax balances, net

     12,321         3,120         9,201         13,020         2,250         10,770   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Changes in deferred taxes, net

 

     2012      2011  

Opening balance, net

     10,770         10,166   

Recognized in net income

     1,697         –1,433   

Recognized in Other comprehensive income

     –422         2,158   

Acquisitions/disposals of subsidiaries

     –2,309         53   

Currency translation differences

     –535         –174   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance, net

     9,201         10,770   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

104


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Tax effects reported directly in Other comprehensive income amount to SEK –422 (2,158) million, of which actuarial gains and losses related to pensions SEK –57 (1,809) million, cash flow hedges SEK –363 (350) million and deferred tax on gains/losses on hedges on investments in foreign entities SEK –2 (–1) million.

Deferred tax assets are only recognized in countries where the Company expects to be able to generate corresponding taxable income in the future to benefit from tax reductions.

Significant tax loss carry-forwards are related to countries with long or indefinite periods of utilization, mainly Sweden and Germany. Of the total SEK 4,239 million recognized deferred tax assets related to tax loss carry-forwards, SEK 2,840 million relates to Sweden with indefinite periods of utilization. Due to the Company’s strong current financial position and taxable income during 2012, Ericsson has been able to utilize part of its tax loss carry-forwards during the year. The assessment is that Ericsson will be able to generate sufficient income in the coming years to also utilize the remaining part of the recognized amounts.

Deferred tax assets for ST-Ericsson are not included, as they are recognized in accordance with the equity method.

Tax loss carry-forwards

Deferred tax assets regarding tax loss carry-forwards are reported to the extent that realization of the related tax benefit through future taxable profits is probable also when considering the period during which these can be utilized, as described below.

As of December 31, 2012, the recognized tax loss carry-forwards amounted to SEK 17,081 (12,657) million. The tax value of these tax loss carry-forwards is reported as an asset.

The final years in which the recognized loss carry-forwards can be utilized are shown in the following table.

Tax loss carry-forwards year of expiration

 

Year of expiration

   Tax loss
carry-forwards
     Tax
value
 

2013

     19         5   

2014

     8         2   

2015

     43         13   

2016

     54         16   

2017

     327         78   

2018 or later

     16,630         4,125   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     17,081         4,239   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Tax loss carry-forwards of ST-Ericsson are not included as they are recognized in accordance with the equity method.

In addition to the table above there are loss carry-forwards of SEK 4,737 million at a tax value of SEK 1,432 million that have not been recognized due to judgments of the possibility to be used against future taxable profits in the respective jurisdictions. The majority of these loss carry-forwards have an expiration date in excess of five years.

 

105


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C9    EARNINGS PER SHARE

Earnings per share 2010–2012

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Basic

        

Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company (SEK million)

     5,775         12,194         11,146   

Average number of shares outstanding, basic (millions)

     3,216         3,206         3,197   

Earnings per share, basic (SEK)

     1.80         3.80         3.49   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Diluted

        

Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company (SEK million)

     5,775         12,194         11,146   

Average number of shares outstanding, basic (millions)

     3,216         3,206         3,197   

Dilutive effect for stock purchase plans

     31         27         29   

Average number of shares outstanding, diluted (millions)

     3,247         3,233         3,226   

Earnings per share, diluted (SEK)

     1.78         3.77         3.46   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

C10     INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Intangible assets 2012

 

    Capitalized development expenses     Goodwill         Intellectual property rights (IPR),    
trademarks and other

intangible assets
 
    To be
marketed
    For internal use     Total     Total     Trademarks,
customer
relationships
and similar
rights
    Patents
and
acquired
R&D
    Total  
      Acquired
costs
    Internal
costs
           

Cost

               

Opening balance

    8,125        2,213        1,478        11,816        27,455        14,188        25,689        39,877   

Acquisitions/capitalization

    1,641        —          —          1,641        —          538        103        641   

Balances regarding acquired businesses1)

    —          —          —          —          4,293        4,517        2,155        6,672   

Sales/disposals

    —          —          —          —          –20        –158        –137        –295   

Reclassification

    —          —          —          —          94        —          –94        –94   

Translation difference

    —          —          —          —          –1,400        –490        –300        –790   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    9,766        2,213        1,478        13,457        30,422        18,595        27,416        46,011   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated amortization

               

Opening balance

    –3,187        –1,975        –1,318        –6,480        1        –5,502        –16,078        –21,580   

Amortization

    –840        –131        –87        –1,058        —          –2,023        –2,413        –4,436   

Sales/disposals

    —          —          —          —          –1        46        124        170   

Translation difference

    —          —          —          —          —          202        166        368   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    –4,027        –2,106        –1,405        –7,538        —          –7,277        –18,201        –25,478   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated impairment losses

               

Opening balance

    –1,721        –55        –37        –1,813        –18        —          –5,214        –5,214   

Impairment losses

    –266        —          —          –266        —          —          –117        –117   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    –1,987        –55        –37        –2,079        –18        —          –5,331        –5,331   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net carrying value

    3,752        52        36        3,840        30,404        11,318        3,884        15,202   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) For more information on acquired businesses, see Note C26, “Business combinations”.

 

106


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Intangible assets 2011

 

    Capitalized development expenses     Goodwill         Intellectual property rights (IPR),    
trademarks and other intangible
assets
 
    To be
marketed
    For internal use     Total     Total     Trademarks,
customer

relationships
and similar
rights
    Patents
and
acquired
R&D
    Total  
      Acquired
costs
    Internal
costs
           

Cost

               

Opening balance

    6,610        2,213        1,478        10,301        27,151        13,582        25,330        38,912   

Acquisitions/capitalization

    1,515        —          —          1,515        —          237        354        591   

Balances regarding acquired businesses

    —          —          —          —          260        382        —          382   

Sales/disposals

    —          —          —          —          –2        –20        –20        –40   

Translation difference

    —          —          —          —          46        7        25        32   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    8,125        2,213        1,478        11,816        27,455        14,188        25,689        39,877   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated amortization

               

Opening balance

    –2,526        –1,775        –1,184        –5,485        —          –3,937        –13,103        –17,040   

Amortization

    –661        –200        –134        –995        —          –1,538        –2,932        –4,470   

Sales/disposals

    —          —          —          —          1        15        13        28   

Translation difference

    —          —          —          —          —          –42        –56        –98   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    –3,187        –1,975        –1,318        –6,480        1        –5,502        –16,078        –21,580   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated impairment losses

               

Opening balance

    –1,714        –55        –37        –1,806        —          —          –5,214        –5,214   

Impairment losses

    –7        —          —          –7        –18        —          —          —     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    –1,721        –55        –37        –1,813        –18        —          –5,214        –5,214   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net carrying value

    3,217        183        123        3,523        27,438        8,686        4,397        13,083   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The goodwill is allocated to the operating segments Networks SEK 16.2 (16.7) billion, Global Services SEK 4.2 (4.1) billion and Support Solutions SEK 10.0 (6.6) billion.

The recoverable amounts for cash-generating units are established as the present value of expected future cash flows. Estimation of future cash flows includes assumptions mainly for the following key financial parameters:

 

   

Sales growth

 

   

Development of operating income (based on operating margin or cost of goods sold and operating expenses relative to sales)

 

   

Development of working capital and capital expenditure requirements.

The assumptions regarding industry specific market drivers and market growth are approved by group management and each operating segment’s management. These assumptions are based on industry sources as input to the projections made within the Company for the development 2012–2017 for key industry parameters:

 

   

The number of global mobile subscriptions is estimated to grow from around 6.3 billion by the end of 2012 to around 9 billion by the end of 2017. Of these, around 5-6 billion will be mobile broadband subscriptions. Around three-quarters of a billion of these mobile broadband subscriptions will use mobile PC/tablets/mobile routers, but the vast majority will still use mobile phones to access the internet.

 

107


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Fixed broadband subscriptions are estimated to grow from around 600 million by the end of 2012 to around 750 million in 2017. Fixed broadband includes Fiber, Cable and xDSL.

 

   

Mobile data traffic volume is estimated to increase around 9 times 2012–2017, while the fixed Internet traffic is estimated to increase around 4 times 2012–2017, however from a much larger base.

The growth in network equipment is mainly driven by a shift in investments from voice to data. The end user requirements for “app-coverage” drives deployment of heterogeneous networks and small cells.

The demand for support solutions is driven by the opportunities for new types of service offerings enabled by IP technology and high-speed broadband. There is strong IPTV subscriber growth, rapid growth in digital viewing and on-demand services. The development and build out of Mobile Broadband networks and increasing number of mobile broadband subscriptions drives growth in service introduction and traffic. This puts high demand on plan to provision, implementation and systems integration services as well as real time payment systems. The Business Support Systems’ growth is driven by introduction of new services, new business models and price plans.

The demand for professional services is also driven by an increasing business and technology complexity. Therefore, operators review their business models and look for vendor partners that can take on a broader responsibility, including outsourcing of network operations.

The assumptions are also based upon information gathered in the Company’s long-term strategy process, including assessments of new technology, the Company’s competitive position and new types of business and customers, driven by the continued integration of telecom, data and media industries.

The impairment testing is based on specific estimates for the first five years and with a reduction of nominal annual growth rate to an average GDP growth of 3% (3%) per year thereafter. The impairment tests for goodwill did not result in any impairment.

A number of sensitivity tests have been made, for example applying lower levels of revenue and operating income. Also when applying these estimates no goodwill impairment is indicated.

An after-tax discount rate of 8% (8%) has been applied for all cash generating units for the discounting of projected after-tax cash flows. The assumptions for 2011 are disclosed in Note C10, “Intangible assets” in the Annual Report of 2011.

The Company’s discounting is based on after-tax future cash flows and after-tax discount rates. This discounting is not materially different from a discounting based on before-tax future cash flows and before-tax discount rates, as required by IFRS.

In Note C1, “Significant accounting policies”, and Note C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”, further disclosures are given regarding goodwill impairment testing.

 

108


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C11    PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Property, plant and equipment 2012

 

      Real
estate
     Machinery and
other technical
assets
     Other equipment,
tools and
installations
     Construction in
progress and
advance payments
     Total  

Cost

              

Opening balance

     4,641         5,235         20,663         1,302         31,841   

Additions

     640         370         2,521         1,898         5,429   

Balances regarding divested/acquired businesses

     2         46         432         —           480   

Sales/disposals

     –476         –373         –1,296         –242         –2,387   

Reclassifications

     381         –380         1,458         –1,459         —     

Translation difference

     –203         –152         –745         –48         –1,148   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     4,985         4,746         23,033         1,451         34,215   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Accumulated depreciation

              

Opening balance

     –2,165         –3,485         –15,094         —           –20,744   

Depreciation

     –354         –428         –3,270         —           –4,052   

Balances regarding divested businesses

     —           —           3         —           3   

Sales/disposals

     68         347         1,228         —           1,643   

Reclassifications

     7         –13         6         —           —     

Translation difference

     89         90         504         —           683   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     –2,355         –3,489         –16,623         —           –22,467   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Accumulated impairment losses

              

Opening balance

     –43         –148         –118         —           –309   

Impairment losses

     –4         –8         —           —           –12   

Reversals of impairment losses

     —           22         30         —           52   

Sales/disposals

     —           6         —           —           6   

Translation difference

     2         4         2         —           8   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     –45         –124         –86         —           –255   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net carrying value

     2,585         1,133         6,324         1,451         11,493   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Contractual commitments for the acquisition of property, plant and equipment as per December 31, 2012, amounted to SEK 184 (226) million.

The reversal of impairment losses have been reported under Cost of sales.

 

109


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Property, plant and equipment 2011

 

    Real estate     Machinery and
other technical
assets
    Other equipment,
tools and
installations
    Construction in
progress and
advance payments
    Total  

Cost

         

Opening balance

    4,238        5,004        18,576        814        28,632   

Additions

    265        400        1,910        2,419        4,994   

Balances regarding divested/acquired businesses

    146        37        75        —          258   

Sales/disposals

    –147        –354        –952        –524        –1,977   

Reclassifications

    142        169        1,116        –1,427        —     

Translation difference

    –3        –21        –62        20        –66   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    4,641        5,235        20,663        1,302        31,841   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated depreciation

         

Opening balance

    –1,869        –3,377        –13,695        —          –18,941   

Depreciation

    –415        –571        –2,513        —          –3,499   

Balances regarding divested businesses

    —          —          1        —          1   

Sales/disposals

    74        435        1,085        —          1,594   

Reclassifications

    36        –4        –32        —          —     

Translation difference

    9        32        60        —          101   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    –2,165        –3,485        –15,094        —          –20,744   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated impairment losses

         

Opening balance

    –43        –95        –119        —          –257   

Impairment losses

    —          –48        –12        —          –60   

Reversals of impairment losses

    —          —          13        —          13   

Sales/disposals

    —          —          1        —          1   

Translation difference

    —          –5        –1        —          –6   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    –43        –148        –118        —          –309   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net carrying value

    2,433        1,602        5,451        1,302        10,788   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

C12    FINANCIAL ASSETS, NON-CURRENT

Equity in joint ventures and associated companies

 

    Joint ventures     Associated companies     Total     Total  
    2012     2011         2012             2011         2012     2011  

Opening balance

    4,663        8,648        1,302        1,155        5,965        9,803   

Share in earnings

    –8,399        –3,929        3        151        –8,396        –3,778   

Contributions to joint ventures and associated companies

    5,029        —          —          109        5,029        109   

Taxes

    106        241        –11        –1        95        240   

Translation difference

    –111        –126        42        66        –69        –60   

Change in hedge reserve

    65        4        —          —          65        4   

Pensions

    —          –175        —          —          —          –175   

Dividends

    —          —          –133        –177        –133        –177   

Divestments

    –1,353        —          —          —          –1,353        —     

Reclassification

    —          —          1,639 2)      –1        1,639        –1   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

    —          4,663 1)      2,842 3)      1,302 3)      2,842        5,965   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

110


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

1) Including goodwill for ST-Ericsson of SEK 1.3 billion.
2) Reclassification from Other investments in shares and participations.
3) Goodwill, net, amounts to SEK 12.2 (13.5) million.

Ericsson’s share of assets, liabilities and income in associated company Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.1)

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Non-current assets

     84         113         92   

Current assets

     588         574         749   

Non-current liabilities

     —           1         2   

Current liabilities

     262         197         209   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net assets

     410         489         630   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net sales

     1,085         693         784   

Income after financial items

     80         13         17   

Income taxes

     –8         3         –1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net income

     72         16         16   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Assets pledged as collateral

     4         4         4   

Contingent liabilities

     17         80         43   

 

1) The Company’s share is 49.07%.

Ericsson’s Share of assets, liabilities and income in associated company Rockstar Consortium1)

 

     2012  

Total assets

     1,561   

Total liabilities

     6   
  

 

 

 

Net assets

     1,555   
  

 

 

 

Net sales

     —     

Income after financial items

     –80   

Income taxes

     —     
  

 

 

 

Net income

     –80   
  

 

 

 

Assets pledged as collateral

     —     

Contingent liabilities

     —     

 

1) The Company’s share is 21.26%.

All companies apply IFRS in the reporting to the Company as issued by IASB.

On December 10, 2012, STMicroelectronics announced its intention to exit the joint venture ST-Ericsson. On December 20, 2012 the Company announced its decision not to acquire the full majority. This, together with other factors such as no change in governance rights, no change in funding responsibilities etc, means that the Company continues to not be in control of ST-Ericsson.

 

111


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Due to the status of ST-Ericsson, the Company has made a non-cash charge related to its 50% stake in ST-Ericsson. For further information, see Note C3, “Segment information” and Note C18, “Provisions”. The charge includes a write-down of investments of SEK –4.7 billion. The Company’s share in ST-Ericsson’s operating loss amounted to SEK –3.7 (–0.8) billion.

Ericsson’s share of assets, liabilities and income in joint venture ST-Ericsson

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Non-current assets

     1,097         6,855         6,673   

Current assets

     1,006         1,514         2,249   

Non-current liabilities

     370         397         214   

Current liabilities

     1,339         4,695         2,519   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net assets

     394         3,277         6,189   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net sales

     4,545         5,346         8,260   

Income after financial items

     –2,503         –2,730         –1,762   

Income taxes

     –400         156         50   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net income

     –2,903         –2,574         –1,712   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Assets pledged as collateral

     —           3         3   

Contingent liabilities

     —           —           —     

The table above consists of amounts considered by the Company when applying the equity method in relation to ST-Ericsson.

Ericsson’s Share of assets, liabilities and income in joint venture Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Non-current assets

     —           5,040         3,622   

Current assets

     —           8,745         9,904   

Non-current liabilities

     —           285         592   

Current liabilities

     —           12,172         10,533   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net assets

     —           1,328         2,401   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net sales

     —           23,496         30,089   

Income after financial items

     —           –1,095         705   

Income taxes

     —           85         –231   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net income

     —           –1,010         474   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Assets pledged as collateral

     —           1         —     

Contingent liabilities

     —           37         16   

The Company has divested its 50% stake in Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications to Sony. The divestment was effective on January 1, 2012.

 

112


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Other financial assets, non-current

 

     Other investments
in shares and
participations
     Customer finance,
non-current
     Derivatives,
non-current
     Other
financial assets,
non-current
 
     2012     2011      2012      2011      2012      2011      2012     2011  

Cost

                     

Opening balance

     3,576        1,607         1,661         1,474         816         —           4,633        4,382   

Additions

     45        1,930         5,249         1,875         —           —           313        422   

Disposals/repayments/deductions

     –63        –68         –5,331         –1,699         —           —           –136        –97   

Change in value in funded pension plans1)

     —          —           —           —           —           —           776        42   

Reclassifications

     –1,639 2)      —           —           —           —           —           –1,018 3)      —     

Revaluation

     —          —           —           —           9         816         —          —     

Translation difference

     –161        107         –41         11         —           —           –154        –116   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

     1,758        3,576         1,538         1,661         825         816         4,414        4,633   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Accumulated impairment losses/allowances

                     

Opening balance

     –1,377        –1,388         –261         –193         —           —           –1,332        –1,303   

Impairment losses/allowance

     –51        –54         –26         –91         —           —           –14        –47   

Disposals/repayments/deductions

     —          63         35         19         —           —           —          —     

Reclassifications

     —          —           —           —           —           —           26 3)      —     

Translation difference

     56        2         4         4         —           —           45        18   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Closing balance

     –1,372        –1,377         –248         –261         —           —           –1,275        –1,332   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net carrying value

     386        2,199         1,290         1,400         825         816         3,139        3,301   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) This amount includes asset ceiling. For further information, see Note C17, “Post-employment benefits”.
2) Reclassification to Equity in associated companies.
3) Reclassification to Short-term investments.

C13    INVENTORIES

Inventories

 

     2012      2011  

Raw materials, components, consumables and manufacturing work in progress

     7,351         8,772   

Finished products and goods for resale

     10,981         13,525   

Contract work in progress

     10,470         10,773   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Inventories, net

     28,802         33,070   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Contract work in progress includes amounts related to delivery-type contracts and service contracts with ongoing work in progress.

Reported amounts are net of obsolescence allowances of SEK 3,473 (3,343) million.

 

113


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Movements in obsolescence allowances

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Opening balance

     3,343         3,090         2,961   

Additions, net

     1,403         918         250   

Utilization

     –1,140         –683         –165   

Translation difference

     –133         18         –46   

Balances regarding acquired/divested businesses

     —           —           90   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     3,473         3,343         3,090   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The amount of inventories recognized as expense and included in Cost of sales was SEK 56,842 (60,544) million.

C14    TRADE RECEIVABLES AND CUSTOMER FINANCE

Trade receivables and customer finance

 

     2012      2011  

Trade receivables excluding associated companies and joint ventures

     64,015         64,740   

Allowances for impairment

     –655         –567   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Trade receivables, net

     63,360         64,173   

Trade receivables related to associated companies and joint ventures

     300         349   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Trade receivables, total

     63,660         64,522   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Customer finance credits

     5,731         4,671   

Allowances for impairment

     –422         –426   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Customer finance credits, net

     5,309         4,245   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Of which current

     4,019         2,845   

Credit commitments for customer finance

     5,933         8,569   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Days sales outstanding (DSO) were 86 (91) in December 2012.

Movements in allowances for impairment

 

     Trade receivables      Customer finance  
     2012      2011      2010      2012      2011      2010  

Opening balance

     567         766         924         426         321         772   

Additions

     229         198         282         101         162         25   

Utilized

     –116         –266         –285         –9         –31         –87   

Reversal of excess amounts

     –30         –43         –169         –112         –27         –359   

Reclassification

     21         –69         33         —           —           —     

Translation difference

     –16         –19         –19         16         1         –30   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     655         567         766         422         426         321   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

114


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Aging analysis as per December 31

 

    Total     Of which
neither  impaired
nor past due
    Of which
impaired,
not past due
    Of which past
due in
the following time
intervals:
    Of which past due and
impaired in the following
time intervals:
 
          less than
90 days
    90 days
or more
        less than    
90 days
        90 days or    
more
 

2012

             

Trade receivables excluding associated companies and joint ventures

    64,015        57,526        25        2,459        1,431        779        1,795   

Allowances for impairment

    –655        —          –15        —          —          –70        –570   

Customer finance credits

    5,731        4,549        845        21        15        70        231   

Allowances for impairment

    –422        —          –146        —          —          –45        –231   

2011

             

Trade receivables excluding associated companies and joint ventures

    64,740        56,480        184        4,126        1,072        850        2,028   

Allowances for impairment

    –567        —          –16        —          —          –50        –501   

Customer finance credits

    4,671        3,369        763        238        45        41        215   

Allowances for impairment

    –426        —          –176        —          —          –35        –215   

Credit risk

Credit risk is divided into three categories: credit risk in trade receivables, customer finance risk and financial credit risk, see Note C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments”.

Credit risk in trade receivables

Credit risk in trade receivables is governed by a policy applicable for all legal entities in the Company. The purpose of the policy is to:

 

   

Avoid credit losses through establishing internal standard credit approval routines in all the Company’s legal entities

 

   

Ensure monitoring and risk mitigation of defaulting accounts, i.e. events of non-payment and/or delayed payments from customers

 

   

Ensure efficient credit management within the Company and thereby improve Days sales outstanding and Cash flow

 

   

Ensure payment terms are commercially justifiable

 

   

Define escalation path and approval process for payment terms and customer credit limits.

The credit worthiness of all customers is regularly assessed and a credit limit is set. Through credit management system functionality, credit checks are performed every time a sales order or an invoice is generated in the source system. This is based on the credit risk set on the customer. Credit blocks appear if the credit limit set on customer is exceeded or if past due receivables are higher than permitted levels. Release of a credit block requires authorization.

Letters of credits are used as a method for securing payments from customers operating in emerging markets, in particular in markets with unstable political and/or economic environment. By having banks confirming the letters of credit, the political and commercial credit risk exposures to the Company are mitigated.

 

115


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Trade receivables amounted to SEK 64,015 (64,740) million as of December 31, 2012. Provisions for expected losses are regularly assessed and amounted to SEK 655 (567) million as of December 31, 2012. The Company’s nominal credit losses have, however, historically been low. The amounts of trade receivables closely follow the distribution of the Company’s sales and do not include any major concentrations of credit risk by customer or by geography. The five largest customers represented 27% (30%) of the total trade receivables in 2012.

Customer finance credit risk

All major commitments to finance customers are made only after the approval by the Finance Committee of the Board of Directors according to the established credit approval process.

Prior to the approval of new facilities reported as customer finance, an internal credit risk assessment is conducted in order to assess the credit rating of each transaction (for political and commercial risk). The credit risk analysis is made by using an assessment tool, where the political risk rating is identical to the rating used by all Export credit agencies within the OECD. The commercial risk is assessed by analyzing a large number of parameters, which may affect the level of the future commercial credit risk exposure. The output from the assessment tool for the credit rating also include an internal pricing of the risk. This is expressed as a risk margin per annum over funding cost. The reference pricing for political and commercial risk, on which the tool is based, is reviewed using information from Export credit agencies and prevailing pricing in the bank loan market for structured financed deals. The objective is that the internally set risk margin shall reflect the assessed risk and that the pricing is as close as possible to the current market pricing. A reassessment of the credit rating for each customer finance facility is made on a regular basis.

Risk provisions related to customer finance risk exposures are only made upon events which occur after the financing arrangement has become effective and which are expected to have a significant adverse impact on the borrower’s ability and/or willingness to service the outstanding debt. These events can be political (normally outside the control of the borrower) or commercial, e.g. a borrower’s deteriorated creditworthiness.

As of December 31, 2012, the Company’s total outstanding exposure related to customer finance was SEK 5,731 (4,671) million. As of December 31, 2012, the Company also had unutilized customer finance commitments of SEK 5,933 (8,569) million. Customer finance is arranged for infrastructure projects in different geographic markets and for a large number of customers. As of December 31, 2012, there were a total of 78 (80) customer finance arrangements originated by or guaranteed by the Company. The five largest facilities represented 57% (41%) of the total credit exposure in 2012.

Total outstanding customer finance exposure per region as of December 31

 

Percent

   2012      2011  

North America

     26         1   

Latin America

     4         4   

Northern Europe & Central Asia

     8         8   

Western & Central Europe

     1         1   

Mediterranean

     9         11   

Middle East

     17         24   

Sub-Saharan Africa

     19         29   

India

     9         14   

North East Asia

     7         7   

South East Asia and Oceania

     —           1   

Other

     —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     100         100   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

116


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

The effect of risk provisions and reversals for customer finance affecting the income statement amounted to a net negative impact of SEK 33 million in 2012 compared to a negative impact of SEK 114 million in 2011. Credit losses amounted to SEK 16 (62) million in 2012.

Security arrangements for customer finance facilities normally include pledges of equipment, pledges of certain assets belonging to the borrower and pledges of shares in the operating company. Restructuring efforts for cases of troubled debt may lead to temporary holdings of equity interests. If available, third-party risk coverage is as a rule arranged. “Third-party risk coverage” means that a financial payment guarantee covering the credit risk has been issued by a bank, an export credit agency or other financial institution. A credit risk transfer under a sub participation arrangement with a bank can also be arranged. In this case the entire credit risk and the funding is taken care of by the bank for the part that they cover. A credit risk cover from a third party may also be issued by an insurance company. During 2012, the Company did not take possession of any collateral it holds as security or called on any other credit enhancement.

Information about guarantees related to customer finance is included in Note C24, “Contingent liabilities”, and information about leasing is included in Note C27, “Leasing”.

The table below summarizes the Company’s outstanding customer finance as of December 31, 2012 and 2011.

Outstanding customer finance

 

     2012      2011  

Total customer finance

     5,731         4,671   

Accrued interest

     96         68   

Less third-party risk coverage

     –187         –480   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Ericsson’s risk exposure

     5,640         4,259   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Transfers of financial assets

In previous years, the Company disclosed information in this note about assets transferred where the Company continues to recognize a part of such assets. As required by IFRS, as from fiscal year 2012 this information is disclosed in a separate note, see Note C32, “Transfers of financial assets”.

C15    OTHER CURRENT RECEIVABLES

Other current receivables

 

      2012      2011  

Prepaid expenses

     2,623         2,056   

Accrued revenues

     2,305         2,486   

Advance payments to suppliers

     1,060         1,697   

Derivatives with a positive value1)

     3,068         2,003   

Taxes

     7,727         5,633   

Other

     3,282         3,962   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     20,065         17,837   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) See also Note C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments”.

 

117


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C16    EQUITY AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Capital stock 2012

Capital stock at December 31, 2012, consisted of the following:

Capital stock

 

Parent Company

   Number of shares      Capital stock
(SEK million)
 

Class A shares

     261,755,983         1,309   

Class B shares

     3,043,295,752         15,217   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     3,305,051,735         16,526   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The capital stock of the Parent Company is divided into two classes: Class A shares (quota value SEK 5.00) and Class B shares (quota value SEK 5.00). Both classes have the same rights of participation in the net assets and earnings. Class A shares, however, are entitled to one vote per share while Class B shares are entitled to one tenth of one vote per share.

At December 31, 2012, the total number of treasury shares was 84,798,095 (62,846,503 in 2011 and 73,088,516 in 2010) Class B shares. Ericsson repurchased 31.7 million shares in 2012 in relation to the Long-Term Variable Remuneration Program.

Reconciliation of number of shares

 

     Number of shares      Capital stock
(SEK million)
 

Number of shares Jan 1, 2012

     3,273,351,735         16,367   

Number of shares Dec 31, 2012

     3,305,051,735         16,526   

For further information about number of shares, see chapter Share Information.

Dividend proposal

The Board of Directors will propose to the Annual General Meeting 2013 a dividend of SEK 2.75 per share (SEK 2.50 in 2012 and SEK 2.25 in 2011).

Additional paid in capital

Relates to payments made by owners and includes share premiums paid.

Retained earnings

Retained earnings, including net income for the year, comprise the earned profits of the Parent Company and its share of net income in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associated companies. Retained earnings also include:

Remeasurements related to post-employment benefits

Actuarial gains and losses resulting from experience-based events and changes in actuarial assumptions, fluctuations of the effect of the asset ceiling, and adjustments related to the Swedish special payroll taxes.

Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations

The fair value reserve comprises the cumulative net change in the fair value of available-for-sale financial assets.

 

118


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Cash flow hedges

The cash flow hedge reserve comprises the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash-flow-hedging instruments related to hedged transactions that have not yet occurred.

Cumulative translation adjustments

The cumulative translation adjustments comprises all foreign currency differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign operations and changes regarding revaluation of excess value in local currency as well as from the translation of liabilities that hedge the Company’s net investment in foreign subsidiaries.

Equity and Other comprehensive income 2012

 

2012

  Capital
stock
    Additional
paid in
capital
    Retained
earnings
    Stock-
holders’
equity
    Non-
controlling
interest
(NCI)
    Total
equity
 

January 1, 2012

    16,367        24,731        102,007        143,105        2,165        145,270   

Net income

           

Group

    —          —          17,411        17,411        163        17,574   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          –11,636        –11,636        —          –11,636   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income

           

Remeasurements related to post-employment benefits

           

Group

    —          —          –451        –451        —          –451   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          50        50        —          50   

Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations

           

Group

    —          —          6        6        —          6   

Cash flow hedges

           

Gains/losses arising during the year

           

Group

    —          —          1,668        1,668        —          1,668   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          –25        –25        —          –25   

Reclassification adjustments for gains/losses included in profit or loss

    —          —          –568 1)      –568        —          –568   

Adjustments for amounts transferred to initial carrying amount of hedged items

    —          —          92        92        —          92   

Changes in cumulative translation adjustments

           

Group

    —          —          –3,898 2)      –3,898        –49        –3,947   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          –511        –511        —          –511   

Tax on items relating to components of OCI3)

    —          —          –422        –422        —          –422   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total other comprehensive income

    —          —          –4,059        –4,059        –49        –4,108   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income

    —          —          1,716        1,716        114        1,830   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Transactions with owners

           

Stock issue

    159        —          —          159        —          159   

Sale/Repurchase of own shares

    —          —          –93        –93        —          –93   

Stock Purchase Plans

           

Group

    —          —          405        405        —          405   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          —                 —          —     

Dividends paid

    —          —          –8,033        –8,033 4)      –599        –8,632   

Transactions with non-controlling interest

    —          —          –376        –376        –80        –456   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2012

    16,526        24,731        95,626        136,883        1,600        138,483   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

119


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

1) SEK –172 million is recognized in Net Sales, SEK –232 million is recognized in Cost of Sales, SEK 67 million is recognized in R&D expenses and SEK –231 million is recognized in Other operating income and expenses.
2) Changes in cumulative translation adjustments include changes regarding revaluation of goodwill in local currency of SEK –1,400 million (SEK 46 million in 2011, SEK –1,480 million in 2010), gain/loss from hedging activities of foreign entities, SEK 0 million (SEK 9 million in 2011, SEK 385 in 2010), and realized gain/losses net from sold/liquidated companies SEK –461 million (SEK 192 million in 2011, SEK 140 million in 2010).
3) For further disclosures, see Note C8, “Taxes”.
4) Dividends paid per share amounted to SEK 2.50 (SEK 2.25 in 2011 and SEK 2.00 in 2010).

Equity and Other comprehensive income 2011

 

2011

  Capital
stock
    Additional
paid in
capital
    Retained
earnings
    Stock-
holders’
equity
    Non-
controlling
interest
(NCI)
    Total
equity
 

January 1, 2011

    16,367        24,731        104,008        145,106        1,679        146,785   

Net income

           

Group

    —          —          15,727        15,727        375        16,102   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          –3,533        –3,533        —          –3,533   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income

           

Remeasurements related to post-employment benefits

           

Group

    —          —          –6,963        –6,963        —          –6,963   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          –212        –212        —          –212   

Cash flow hedges

           

Gains/losses arising during the year

           

Group

    —          —          996        996        —          996   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          11        11        —          11   

Reclassification adjustments for gains/losses included in profit or loss

    —          —          –2,028        –2,028        —          –2,028   

Changes in cumulative translation adjustments

           

Group

    —          —          –1,014        –1,014        50        –964   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          –61        –61        —          –61   

Tax on items relating to components of OCI3)

    —          —          2,158        2,158        —          2,158   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total other comprehensive income

    —          —          –7,113        –7,113        50        –7,063   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income

    —          —          5,081        5,081        425        5,506   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Transactions with owners

           

Sale of own shares

    —          —          92        92        —          92   

Stock Purchase Plans

           

Group

    —          —          413        413        —          413   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          —          —          —          —     

Dividends paid

    —          —          –7,207        –7,207        –248        –7,455   

Transactions with non-controlling interest

    —          —          –380        –380        309        –71   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

    16,367        24,731        102,007        143,105        2,165        145,270   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

120


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Equity and Other comprehensive income 2010

 

2010

  Capital
stock
    Additional
paid in
capital
    Retained
earnings
    Stock-
holders’
equity
    Non-
controlling
interest
(NCI)
    Total
equity
 

January 1, 2010

    16,367        24,731        98,772        139,870        1,157        141,027   

Net income

           

Group

    —          —          12,503        12,503        89        12,592   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          –1,357        –1,357        —          –1,357   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income

           

Remeasurements related to post-employment benefits

           

Group

    —          —          3,892        3,892        —          3,892   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          –27        –27        —          –27   

Revaluation of other investments in shares and participations

           

Fair value remeasurement

           

Group

    —          —          7        7        —          7   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          —          —          —          —     

Cash flow hedges

           

Gains/losses arising during the year

           

Group

    —          —          966        966        —          966   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          31        31        —          31   

Reclassification adjustments for gains/losses included in profit or loss

    —          —          –238        –238        —          –238   

Adjustments for amounts transferred to initial carrying amount of hedged items

    —          —          –136        –136        —          –136   

Changes in cumulative translation adjustments

           

Group

    —          —          –3,269        –3,269        10        –3,259   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          –438        –438        —          –438   

Tax on items relating to components of OCI

    —          —          –1,120        –1,120        —          –1,120   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total other comprehensive income

    —          —          –332        –332        10        –322   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income

    —          —          10,814        10,814        99        10,913   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Transactions with owners

           

Sale of own shares

    —          —          52        52        —          52   

Stock Purchase Plans

           

Group

    —          —          762        762        —          762   

Joint ventures and associated companies

    —          —          —          —          —          —     

Dividends paid

    —          —          –6,391        –6,391        –286        –6,677   

Transactions with non-controlling interest

    —          —          —          —          708        708   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2010

    16,367        24,731        104,008        145,106        1,679        146,785   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

C17    POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS

Ericsson sponsors a number of post-employment benefit plans throughout the Company, which are in line with market practice in each country. The year 2012 was characterized by the overall decrease in discount rates and a positive development of plan assets. Consequently, the Company experienced a decrease in the net pension liability. The acquisition of Telcordia resulted in an overfunded provision for post-employment benefits.

 

121


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Amount recognized in the Consolidated balance sheet

Amount recognized in the Consolidated balance sheet

 

     Sweden      EU      US      Other      Total  

2012

              

Defined benefit obligation (DBO)1)

     21,432         10,935         16,472         3,119         51,958   

Fair value of plan assets2)

     15,375         10,275         16,263         2,729         44,642   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Deficit/Surplus (+/–)

     6,057         660         209         390         7,316   

Unrecognized past service costs

     —           –3         —           –25         –28   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     6,057         657         209         365         7,288   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Plans with net surplus excluding asset ceiling3)

     —           1,028         738         449         2,215   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Provision for post-employment benefits4)

     6,057         1,685         947         814         9,503   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

2011

              

Defined benefit obligation (DBO)1)

     20,643         9,994         3,133         2,605         36,375   

Fair value of plan assets2)

     13,490         9,415         2,337         2,777         28,019   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Deficit/Surplus (+/–)

     7,153         579         796         –172         8,356   

Unrecognized past service costs

     —           —           —           –47         –47   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     7,153         579         796         –219         8,309   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Plans with net surplus excluding asset ceiling3)

     —           953         —           754         1,707   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Provision for post-employment benefits4)

     7,153         1,532         796         535         10,016   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) For details on DBO, please refer to section “Change in the defined benefit obligation, DBO” of this note.
2) For details on plan assets, please refer to section “Change in the plan assets” of this note.
3) Plans with a net surplus, i.e. where plan assets exceed DBO, are reported as Other financial assets, non-current, see Note C12, “Financial assets”. Asset ceiling amounted to SEK 217 (483) million.
4) Plans with net liabilities are reported in the balance sheet as Post-employment benefits, non-current.

 

122


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Total pension expenses recognized in the income statement

The expenses for post-employment benefits within Ericsson are distributed between defined contribution plans and defined benefit plans, with a trend toward defined contribution plans.

Pension costs for defined contribution plans and defined benefit plans

 

         Sweden              EU              US              Other              Total      

2012

              

Pension cost for defined contribution plans

     977         520         404         181         2,082   

Pension cost for defined benefit plans1)

     936         56         –454         142         680   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     1,913         576         –50         323         2,762   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total pension cost expressed as a percentage of wages and salaries

                 5.7
              

 

 

 

2011

              

Pension cost for defined contribution plans

     2,039         458         360         185         3,042   

Pension cost for defined benefit plans1)

     621         38         42         146         847   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     2,660         496         402         331         3,889   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total pension cost expressed as a percentage of wages and salaries

                 8.9
              

 

 

 

2010

              

Pension cost for defined contribution plans

     1,037         528         244         192         2,001   

Pension cost for defined benefit plans1)

     762         312         30         –14         1,090   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     1,799         840         274         178         3,091   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total pension cost expressed as a percentage of wages and salaries

                 7.1
              

 

 

 

 

1) See cost details in table below.

 

123


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Cost details for defined benefit plans recognized in the income statement

 

         Sweden              EU              US              Other              Total      

2012

              

Current service cost

     777         169         140         194         1,280   

Interest cost

     717         475         752         176         2,120   

Expected return on plan assets

     –579         –483         –1,060         –235         –2,357   

Past service cost

     —           13         –1         8         20   

Curtailments, settlements and other

     21         –118         –285         –1         –383   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     936         56         –454         142         680   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

2011

              

Current service cost

     547         227         26         157         957   

Interest cost

     714         461         151         169         1,495   

Expected return on plan assets

     –558         –474         –135         –243         –1,410   

Past service cost

     6         10         —           9         25   

Curtailments, settlements and other

     –88         –186         —           54         –220   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     621         38         42         146         847   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

2010

              

Current service cost

     631         290         32         140         1,093   

Interest cost

     643         496         159         172         1,470   

Expected return on plan assets

     –511         –463         –130         –253         –1,357   

Past service cost

     —           33         —           9         42   

Curtailments, settlements and other

     –1         –44         –31         –82         –158   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     762         312         30         –14         1,090   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

124


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

The following sections focus on the defined benefit plans.

Change in the Defined Benefit Obligation (DBO)

The DBO is the gross pension liability.

Change in the defined benefit obligation

 

          Sweden              EU              US              Other              Total      

2012

              

Opening balance

     20,643         9,994         3,133         2,605         36,375   

Current service cost

     777         169         140         194         1,280   

Interest cost

     717         475         752         176         2,120   

Employee contributions

     —           15         —           7         22   

Pension payments

     –282         –195         –871         –130         –1,478   

Actuarial gain/loss (–/+)

     –436         634         1,875         394         2,467   

Settlements

     –22         129         –55         –2         50   

Curtailments

     —           –31         —           —           –31   

Business combinations1)

     —           13         12,565         —           12,578   

Other

     35         –3         –263         159         –72   

Translation difference

     —           –265         –804         –284         –1,353   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     21,432         10,935         16,472         3,119         51,958   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Of which medical benefit schemes

     —           —           423         —           423   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

2011

              

Opening balance

     14,980         8,600         2,693         2,437         28,710   

Current service cost

     547         227         26         157         957   

Interest cost

     714         461         151         169         1,495   

Employee contributions

     —           15         —           1         16   

Pension payments

     –220         –228         –149         –144         –741   

Actuarial gain/loss (–/+)

     4,705         1,030         329         120         6,184   

Settlements

     —           —           —           —           —     

Curtailments

     –88         –183         —           —           –271   

Business combinations

     —           2         —           —           2   

Other

     5         1         22         15         43   

Translation difference

     —           69         61         –150         –20   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     20,643         9,994         3,133         2,605         36,375   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Of which medical benefit schemes

     —           —           658         —           658   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Business combinations in 2012 are related to the acquisition of Telcordia.

 

125


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Funded Status

The funded ratio, defined as total plan assets in relation to the total DBO, was 85.9% in 2012, compared to 77.0% in 2011.

The following table summarizes the value of the DBO per geographical area based on whether there are plan assets wholly or partially funding each pension plan.

Value of the defined benefit obligation

 

     Sweden      EU      US      Other      Total  

2012

              

DBO, closing balance

     21,432         10,935         16,472         3,119         51,958   

Of which partially or fully funded

     20,916         9,623         15,895         2,441         48,875   

Of which unfunded

     516         1,312         577         678         3,083   

2011

              

DBO, closing balance

     20,643         9,994         3,133         2,605         36,375   

Of which partially or fully funded

     20,118         8,847         2,447         2,118         33,530   

Of which unfunded

     525         1,147         686         487         2,845   

Change in the plan assets

A majority of pension plans have assets managed by local Pension Trust funds, whose sole purpose is to secure the future pension payments to the employees.

Change in the plan assets

 

     Sweden      EU      US      Other      Total  

2012

              

Opening balance

     13,490         9,415         2,337         2,777         28,019   

Expected return on plan assets

     579         483         1,060         235         2,357   

Actuarial gain/loss (+/–)

     377         219         994         44         1,634   

Employer contributions

     1,183         332         115         121         1,751   

Employee contributions

     —           15         —           7         22   

Pension payments

     –247         –153         –817         –94         –1,311   

Settlements

     –17         220         –47         —           156   

Business combinations1)

     —           —           13,417         —           13,417   

Other

     10         –23         –7         –22         –42   

Translation difference

     —           –233         –789         –339         –1,361   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     15,375         10,275         16,263         2,729         44,642   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

2011

              

Opening balance

     12,389         8,205         2,048         2,793         25,435   

Expected return on plan assets

     558         474         135         243         1,410   

Actuarial gain/loss (+/–)

     –358         437         155         –84         150   

Employer contributions

     1,086         397         54         125         1,662   

Employee contributions

     —           15         —           1         16   

Pension payments

     –185         –187         –98         –102         –572   

Other

     —           –15         —           –4         –19   

Translation difference

     —           89         43         –195         –63   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     13,490         9,415         2,337         2,777         28,019   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Business combinations in 2012 are related to the acquisition of Telcordia.

 

126


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Refunds from or reductions in future contributions to plan assets are recognized if they are available and firmly decided.

Actual return on plan assets

 

      Sweden      EU      US      Other      Total  

2012

     956         702         2,054         279         3,991   

2011

     200         911         289         160         1,560   

Asset Allocation

 

     Sweden      EU      US      Other      Total  

2012

              

Equities

     4,867         3,168         5,103         319         13,457   

Interest-bearing securities

     9,665         5,900         10,042         1,727         27,334   

Other

     843         1,207         1,118         683         3,851   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     15,375         10,275         16,263         2,729         44,642   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Of which Ericsson securities

     —           —           —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

2011

              

Equities

     4,503         3,014         1,062         356         8,935   

Interest-bearing securities

     8,239         5,265         1,210         1,846         16,560   

Other

     748         1,136         65         575         2,524   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     13,490         9,415         2,337         2,777         28,019   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Of which Ericsson securities

     —           —           —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Equity instruments amount to 30% (32%) of the total assets, interest bearing instruments amount to 61% (59%) of the total assets, and other instruments amount to 9% (9%) of the total assets.

The contributions to the defined benefit plans for the upcoming year will be based on the development of the financial markets as well as on the growth of the pension liability, and how these developments affect the target funding ratio of the Company.

Actuarial gains and losses reported directly in Other comprehensive income

Since January 1, 2006, the Company applies immediate recognition of actuarial gains and losses directly in the statement of Other comprehensive income. Actuarial gains and losses may arise from either a change in actuarial assumptions or in deviations between estimated and actual outcome.

Multi-year summary

 

     2012      2011      2010      2009      2008  

Plan assets

     44,642         28,019         25,435         23,206         19,037   

DBO

     51,958         36,375         28,710         30,717         28,010   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Deficit/Surplus (–/+)

     –7,316         –8,356         –3,275         –7,511         –8,973   

Actuarial gains and losses (–/+)

              

Experience-based adjustments of pension obligations

     –362         –463         177         310         57   

Experience-based adjustments of plan assets

     –1,634         –150         –653         –1,191         2,952   

 

127


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Actuarial gains and losses reported directly in Other comprehensive income

 

     2012      2011  

Cumulative gain/loss (–/+) at beginning of year

     7,911         1,849   

Recognized gain/loss (–/+) during the year

     833         6,034   

Translation difference

     –48         28   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cumulative gain/loss (–/+) at end of year

     8,696         7,911   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total remeasurements in Other comprehensive income related to post-employment benefits

 

     2012      2011  

Actuarial gains and losses (+/–)

     –833         –6,034   

The effect of asset ceiling

     266         208   

Swedish special payroll taxes

     116         –1,137   

Total

     –451         –6,963   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Actuarial gains and losses for joint ventures and associated companies

     50         –212   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Actuarial assumptions

Financial and demographic actuarial assumptions

 

     Sweden     EU1)     US1)     Other1)  

2012

        

Discount rate

     3.50     4.55     4.00     7.24

Expected return on plan assets for the year

     4.33     5.11     7.00     9.06

Future salary increases

     3.25     3.63     4.50     5.57

Inflation

     2.00     2.20     2.50     1.35

Health care cost inflation, current year

     n/a        n/a        9.00     n/a   

Life expectancy after age 65 in years, males

     22        22        19        19   

Life expectancy after age 65 in years, females

     24        24        21        22   

2011

        

Discount rate

     3.50     4.90     5.23     8.18

Expected return on plan assets for the year

     4.55     5.73     7.00     9.27

Future salary increases

     3.25     3.71     4.50     6.07

Inflation

     2.00     2.74     2.50     3.43

Health care cost inflation, current year

     n/a        n/a        9.00     n/a   

Life expectancy after age 65 in years, males

     22        22        19        19   

Life expectancy after age 65 in years, females

     24        24        21        22   

 

1) Weighted average for disclosure purposes only. Land specific assumptions were used for each actuarial calculation.

 

   

Actuarial assumptions are assessed on a quarterly basis.

 

   

The discount rate for each country is determined by reference to market yields on high-quality corporate bonds. In countries where there is no deep market in such bonds, the market yields on government bonds are used.

 

   

The overall expected long-term return on plan assets is a weighted average of each asset category’s expected rate of return. The expected return on interest-bearing investments is set in line with each country’s market yield. Expected return on equities is derived from each country’s risk free rate with the addition of a risk premium.

 

128


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Salary increases are partially affected by fluctuations in inflation rate.

 

   

The net periodic pension cost and the present value of the DBO for current and former employees are calculated using the Projected Unit Credit (PUC) actuarial cost method, where the objective is to spread the cost of each employee’s benefits over the period that the employee works for the Company.

Sensitivity analysis for medical benefit schemes

A one percent change in the assumed trend rate of medical cost would have the following effect (in SEK million):

Sensitivity analysis for medical benefit schemes

 

     1%
increase
     1%
decrease
 

Net periodic post-employment medical cost

     3         –3   

Accumulated post-employment benefit obligation for medical costs

     32         –28   

Information on issues affecting the net pension liability for the year

Sweden

The defined benefit obligation has been calculated using a discount rate based on yields of covered bonds, which is higher than a discount rate based on yields of government bonds. The Swedish covered bonds are considered high-quality bonds, mainly AAA-rated, as they are secured with assets, and the market for covered bonds is considered deep and liquid, thereby meeting IAS19 requirements.

As before, Ericsson has secured the disability and survivors’ pension part of the ITP Plan through an insurance solution with the insurance company Alecta. Although this part of the plan is classified as a multi-employer defined benefit plan, it is not possible to get sufficient information to apply defined benefit accounting, and therefore, it has been accounted for as a defined contribution plan.

Alecta has a collective funding ratio which is a buffer for its insurance commitments to protect against fluctuations in investment return and insurance risks. Alecta’s target ratio is 140% and reflects the fair value of Alecta’s plan assets as a percentage of plan commitments, then measured in accordance with Alecta’s actuarial assumptions, which are different from those in IAS 19. Alecta’s collective funding ratio was 129% (113%) as of December 31, 2012.

Contingent liabilities include the Company’s mutual responsibility as a credit insured company of PRI Pensionsgaranti in Sweden. This mutual responsibility can only be imposed in case PRI Pensionsgaranti has consumed all of their assets, and it amounts to a maximum of 2% of the company’s pension liability in Sweden.

 

129


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C18    PROVISIONS

Provisions

 

     Warranty      Restructuring      Project related      Other      Total  

2012

              

Opening balance

     1,888         1,327         718         2,332         6,265   

Additions

     1,088         1,234         278         4,411         7,011   

Reversal of excess amounts

     –157         –150         –234         –532         –1,073   

Negative effect on Income Statement

                 5,938   

Cash out/utilization

     –1,188         –1,170         –376         –741         –3,475   

Balances regarding divested/acquired businesses

     48                 10         82         140   

Reclassification

     1         11         4         –38         –22   

Translation differences

     –85         –34         –22         –67         –208   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     1,595         1,218         378         5,447         8,638   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

2011

              

Opening balance

     2,469         3,230         1,105         2,940         9,744   

Additions

     1,433         1,806         563         1,005         4,807   

Reversal of excess amounts

     –440         –407         –164         –908         –1,919   

Negative effect on Income Statement

                 2,888   

Cash out/utilization

     –1,527         –3,223         –662         –575         –5,987   

Balances regarding divested/acquired businesses

     21                         2         23   

Reclassification

             –48         –111         –87         –246   

Translation differences

     –68         –31         –13         –45         –157   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Closing balance

     1,888         1,327         718         2,332         6,265   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Provisions will fluctuate over time depending on business mix, market mix and technology shifts. Risk assessment in the ongoing business is performed monthly to identify the need for new additions and reversals. Management uses its best judgment to estimate provisions based on this assessment. In certain circumstances, provisions are no longer required due to more favorable outcomes than anticipated, which affect the provisions balance as a reversal. In other cases the outcome can be negative, and if so, a charge is recorded in the income statement.

For 2012, new or additional provisions amounting to SEK 7.0 billion were made, and SEK 1.1 billion were reversed. The actual cash outlays for 2012 were SEK 3.5 billion compared with the estimated SEK 3.5 billion. The main part of the total cash out for 2012 is warranty provisions of SEK 1.2 billion and restructuring provisions of SEK 1.2 billion. The expected total cash outlays in 2013 is approximately SEK 7 billion.

Of the total provisions, SEK 211 (280) million are classified as non-current. For more information, see Note C1, “Significant accounting policies” and Note C2, “Critical accounting estimates and judgments”.

Warranty provisions

Warranty provisions are based on historic quality rates for established products as well as estimates regarding quality rates for new products and costs to remedy the various types of faults predicted. Provisions amounting to SEK 1.1 billion were made and due to more favorable outcomes in certain cases reversals of SEK 0.2 billion were made. The actual cash outlays for 2012 were SEK 1.2 billion and in line with the expected SEK 1 billion. The cash outlays of warranty provisions during year 2013 are estimated to approximately SEK 1 billion.

 

130


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Restructuring provisions

In 2012 SEK 1.2 billion in provision were made and SEK 0.1 billion were reversed due to a more favorable outcome than expected. The cash outlays were SEK 1.2 billion for the full year and in line with the expected SEK 1 billion. SEK 0.6 billion were related to restructuring programs before 2011. The cash outlays for 2013 are estimated to approximately SEK 1 billion.

Project related provisions

Project provisions relate to estimated losses on onerous contracts, including probable contractual penalties. Provisions amounting to SEK 0.3 billion were made and SEK 0.2 billion were reversed due to a more favorable outcome than expected. The cash outlays of project related provisions were SEK 0.4 billion and in line with the estimated SEK 0.5 billion. The cash outlays for 2013 are estimated to approximately SEK 0.4 billion.

Other provisions

Other provisions include provisions for tax issues, litigations, supplier claims, and other. During 2012, new provisions amounting to SEK 4.4 billion were made, of which 3.3 billion was related to ST-Ericsson, for further information, see Note C3, “Segment information”. SEK 0.5 billion were reversed during 2012 due to a more favorable outcome. The cash outlays were SEK 0.7 billion in 2012 compared to the estimate of SEK 1 billion. For 2013, the cash outlays are estimated to approximately SEK 5 billion.

C19    INTEREST-BEARING LIABILITIES

As of December 31, 2012, the Company’s outstanding interest-bearing liabilities were SEK 28.7 (31.0) billion.

Interest-bearing liabilities

 

     2012      2011  

Borrowings, current

     

Current part of non-current borrowings1)

     3,018         4,314   

Other current borrowings

     1,751         3,451   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total current borrowings

     4,769         7,765   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Borrowings, non-current

     

Notes and bond loans

     16,519         17,197   

Other borrowings, non-current

     7,379         6,059   

Total non-current interest-bearing liabilities

     23,898         23,256   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total interest-bearing liabilities

     28,667         31,021   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Including notes and bond loans of SEK 2,671 (3,461) million.

All outstanding notes and bond loans are issued by the Parent Company under its Euro Medium-Term Note (EMTN) program or under its SEC Registered program. Bonds issued at a fixed interest rate are normally swapped to a floating interest rate using interest rate swaps leaving a maximum of 50% of outstanding loans at fixed interest rates. It resulted in a weighted average interest rate of 4.69% (4.21%). These bonds are revalued based on changes in benchmark interest rates according to the fair value hedge methodology stipulated in IAS 39.

 

131


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In May 2012 the Company placed a US dollar denominated 1 billion 10-year bond with a fixed coupon rate of 4.125%. The offer was made pursuant to the Company’s shelf registration statement filed with the SEC in April 2012, and a prospectus supplement thereto. This was the Company´s debut issue on the US bond market.

In June 2012 the Company repurchased notes with a nominal value of EUR 286.79 million from the EUR 600 million 5% Notes due 2013 and notes with a nominal value of EUR 154.52 million from the EUR 375 million Floating Rate Notes due 2014 pursuant to a tender offer process.

In July 2012 the Company signed a loan of EUR 150 million with the Nordic Investment Bank (NIB). The loan is divided into two equal tranches with respective seven- and nine-year maturity and was disbursed in December 2012. The loan supports the Company’s R&D activities to develop the next generation radio and IP technology supporting Mobile Broadband build-out globally.

In October 2012 the Company signed a loan agreement with the European Investment Bank (EIB). The loan amount is EUR 500 million (or the equivalent in USD), and the Company has an option for disbursement until April 2014. This loan facility currently remains undrawn. The loan will mature seven years after disbursement. The loan supports the Company’s R&D activities to further develop the next generation radio and IP technology that supports mobile broadband build-out globally.

Notes, bonds and bilateral loans

 

Issued–maturing

   Nominal
amount
     Coupon     Currency      Book value
(SEK m.)
    Maturity date     Unrealized hedge
gain/loss (included in
book value)
 

Notes and bond loans

              

2007-2014

     220         0.484     EUR         1,891        Jun 27, 2014 1)   

2007-2017

     500         5.375     EUR         5,117 2)      Jun 27, 2017        –799   

2009-2013

     313         5.000     EUR         2,671 2)      Jun 24, 2013        –30   

2009-20163)

     300           USD         1,952        Jun 23, 2016     

2010-20204)

     170           USD         1,106        Dec 23, 2020     

2012-2022

     1,000         4.125     USD         6,453        May 15, 2022     
          

 

 

     

 

 

 

Total notes and bond loans

             19,190          –829   
          

 

 

     

 

 

 

Bilateral loans

              

2008-20155)

     4,000           SEK         4,000        Jul 15, 2015     

2012-20196)

     98           USD         636        Sep 30, 2019     

2012-20217)

     98           USD         637        Sep 30, 2021     
          

 

 

     

Total bilateral loans

             5,273       
          

 

 

     

 

1) Next contractual repricing date March 27, 2013 (quarterly).
2) Interest rate swaps are designated as fair value hedges.
3) Private Placement, Swedish Export Credits Guarantee Board (EKN) / Swedish Export Credit Corporation (SEK).
4) Private Placement, Swedish Export Credit Corporation (SEK).
5) European Investment Bank (EIB), R&D project financing.
6) Nordic Investment Bank (NIB), R&D project financing.
7) Nordic Investment Bank (NIB), R&D project financing.

 

132


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C20    FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT AND FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

The Company’s financial risk management is governed by a policy approved by the Board of Directors. The Finance Committee of the Board of Directors is responsible for overseeing the capital structure and financial management of the Company and approving certain matters (such as investments, customer finance commitments, guarantees and borrowing) and is continuously monitoring the exposure to financial risks.

The Company defines its managed capital as the total Company equity. For the Company, a robust financial position with a strong equity ratio, investment grade rating, low leverage and ample liquidity is deemed important. This provides financial flexibility and independence to operate and manage variations in working capital needs as well as to capitalize on business opportunities.

The Company’s overall capital structure should support the financial targets: to grow faster than the market, deliver best-in-class margins and generate a healthy cash flow. The capital structure is managed by balancing equity, debt financing and liquidity in such a way that the Company secure funding of operations at a reasonable cost of capital. Regular borrowings are complemented with committed credit facilities to give additional flexibility to manage unforeseen funding needs. The Company strive to finance growth, normal capital expenditures and dividends to shareholders by generating sufficient positive cash flows from operating activities.

The Company’s capital objectives are:

 

   

An equity ratio above 40%

 

   

A cash conversion rate above 70%

 

   

To maintain a positive net cash position

 

   

To maintain a solid investment grade rating by Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s.

Capital objectives related information, SEK billion

 

     2012     2011  

Capital

     138        145   

Equity ratio

     50     52

Cash conversion rate

     116     40

Positive net cash

     38.5        39.5   

The Company has a treasury function with the principal role to ensure that appropriate financing is in place through loans and committed credit facilities, to actively manage the Company’s liquidity as well as financial assets and liabilities, and to manage and control financial risk exposures in a manner consistent with underlying business risks and financial policies. Hedging activities, cash management and insurance management are largely centralized to the treasury function in Stockholm.

The Company also has a customer finance function with the main objective to find suitable third-party financing solutions for customers and to minimize recourse to the Company. To the extent customer loans are not provided directly by banks, the Parent Company provides or guarantees vendor credits. The customer finance function monitors the exposure from outstanding vendor credits and credit commitments. The Company classifies financial risks as:

 

   

Foreign exchange risk

 

   

Interest rate risk

 

133


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Credit risk

 

   

Liquidity and refinancing risk

 

   

Market price risk in own and other equity instruments.

The Board of Directors has established risk limits for defined exposures to foreign exchange and interest rate risks as well as to political risks in certain countries.

For further information about accounting policies, see Note C1, “Significant accounting policies”.

Foreign exchange risk

The Company is a global company with sales mainly outside Sweden. Revenues and costs are to a large extent in currencies other than SEK and therefore the financial results of the Company are impacted by currency fluctuations.

The Company reports the financial accounts in SEK and movements in exchange rates between currencies will affect:

 

   

Specific line items such as Net sales and Operating income

 

   

The comparability of our results between periods

 

   

The carrying value of assets and liabilities

 

   

Reported cash flows.

Net sales and Operating income are affected by changes in foreign exchange rates from two different kinds of exposures, translation exposure and transaction exposure. In the Operating income we are primarily exposed to transaction exposure which is partially addressed by hedging.

 

134


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Currency exposure, SEK billion

 

Exposure currency

   Translation
exposure
     Transaction
exposure
     Net
exposure
     Net
exposure,
percent
of total
 

Net sales

           

SEK

     43.2         –40.5         2.7         1

USD

     57.2         38.9         96.1         42

EUR

     29.7         11.4         41.1         18

CNY

     12.1         –0.2         11.9         5

JPY

     17.5         0.5         18.0         8

INR

     6.1         0.0         6.1         3

BRL

     7.0         –0.3         6.7         3

GBP

     6.3         –1.3         5.0         2

Other

     48.5         –8.5         40.0         18
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Pre-hedge total

           227.6         100

Hedge

           0.2      
        

 

 

    

Total Net sales

           227.8      
        

 

 

    

Net cost

           

SEK

     –43.4         –29.9         –73.3         33

USD

     –57.9         –12.6         –70.5         32

EUR

     –27.4         –4.7         –32.1         15

CNY

     –11.5         0.7         –10.8         5

JPY

     –16.1         11.5         –4.6         2

INR

     –5.1         2.4         –2.7         1

BRL

     –6.5         0.7         –5.8         3

GBP

     –5.9         0.3         –5.6         3

Other

     –43.9         31.6         –12.3         6
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Pre-hedge total

           –217.7         100

Hedge

           0.4      
        

 

 

    

Total Net cost

           –217.3      
        

 

 

    

Operating income

           10.5      
        

 

 

    

Translation exposure

Translation exposure relates to Sales and Cost of sales in foreign entities when translated into SEK upon consolidation. These exposures can not be addressed by hedging, but as the Income Statement is translated using average rate (average rate gives a good approximation), the impact of volatility in foreign currency rates is reduced.

Transaction exposure

Transaction exposure relates to Sales and Cost of sales in non-reporting currencies in individual group companies. Foreign exchange risk is as far as possible concentrated to Swedish group companies, primarily Ericsson AB. Sales to foreign subsidiaries are normally denominated in the functional currency of the customers and are normally denominated in USD or other foreign currency. In order to limit the exposure toward exchange rate fluctuations on future revenues and costs, committed and forecasted future sales and purchases in major currencies are hedged with 7% of 12-month forecast monthly. This corresponds to approximately 5–6 months of an average forecast.

 

135


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

According to Company policy, transaction exposure in subsidiaries’ balance sheets (i.e. trade receivables and payables and customer finance receivables) should be fully hedged, except for non-tradable currencies.

Foreign exchange exposures in balance sheet items are hedged through offsetting balances or derivatives.

As of December 31, 2012, outstanding foreign exchange derivatives hedging transaction exposures had a net market value of SEK 1.1 (–0.5) billion. The market value is partly deferred in the hedge reserve in other comprehensive income to offset the gains/losses on hedged future sales in foreign currency.

Cash flow hedges

The purpose of hedging forecasted revenues and costs is to reduce volatility in the income statement. Hedging is done by selling or buying foreign currencies against the functional currency of the hedging entity using foreign exchange forwards.

Hedging is done based on a rolling 12-month exposure forecast. The Company uses a layered hedging approach, where the closest quarters are hedged to a higher degree than later quarters. Each consecutive quarter is hereby hedged on several occasions and is covered by an aggregate of hedging contracts initiated at various points in time, which supports the objective of reducing volatility in the income statement from changes in foreign exchange rates.

Translation exposure in net assets

The Company has many subsidiaries operating outside Sweden with other functional currencies than SEK. The results and net assets of such companies are exposed to exchange rate fluctuations, which affect the consolidated income statement and balance sheet when translated to SEK. Translation risk related to forecasted results from foreign operations can not be hedged, but net assets can be addressed by hedging.

Translation exposure in foreign subsidiaries is hedged according to the following policy established by the Board of Directors: Translation risk related to net assets in foreign subsidiaries is hedged up to 20% in selected companies. The translation differences reported in Other comprehensive income during 2012 were negative, SEK –3.9 (–1.0) billion, including hedging gain/loss of SEK 0.0 (0.0) billion.

Interest rate risk

The Company is exposed to interest rate risk through market value fluctuations in certain balance sheet items and through changes in interest revenues and expenses. The net cash position was SEK 38.5 (39.5) billion at the end of 2012, consisting of cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments of SEK 76.7 (80.5) billion and interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits of SEK 38.2 (41.0) billion.

The Company manages the interest rate risk by (i) matching fixed and floating interest rates in interest-bearing balance sheet items and (ii) avoiding significant fixed interest rate exposure in the Company’s net cash position. The policy is that interest-bearing assets shall have an average interest duration between 10 and 14 months, taking derivative instruments into consideration. Interest-bearing liabilities do not have a duration target as the duration of the fixed rate portion will be determined by markets conditions when liabilities are issued, Group Treasury has a mandate to deviate from the asset management benchmark given by the Board and take foreign exchange positions up to an aggregated risk of VaR SEK 45 million given a confidence level of 99% and a 1-day horizon.

 

136


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Interest duration, SEK billion

 

     < 3M      <1Y      1-3Y      3-5Y      >5Y      Total  

Interest Bearing Trading

     4.7         –5.4         1.0         0.0         –0.3         0   

Interest Bearing Assets

     58.2         2.6         11.5         3.6         0.8         76.7   

Interest Bearing Liabilities

     –11.7         –5.1         0.0         –4.2         –7.7         –28.7   

When managing the interest rate exposure, the Company uses derivative instruments, such as interest rate swaps. Derivative instruments used for converting fixed rate debt into floating rate debt are designated as fair value hedges.

Fair value hedges

The purpose of fair value hedges is to hedge the variability in the fair value of fixed-rate debt (issued bonds) from changes in the relevant benchmark yield curve for its entire term by converting fixed interest payments to a floating rate (e.g. STIBOR or LIBOR) by using interest rate swaps (IRS). The credit risk/spread is not hedged.

The fixed leg of the IRS is matched against the cash flows of the hedged bond. Hereby the fixed-rate bond/debt is converted into a floating-rate debt in accordance with the policy.

Outstanding derivatives1)

 

     2012      2011  

Fair value

   Asset     Liability      Asset     Liability  

Currency derivatives

         

Maturity within 3 months

     976        60         557        881   

Maturity between 3 and 12 months

     611        10         364        393   

Maturity 1 to 3 years

     4        —           —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     1,591        70         921        1,274   

Of which designated in cash flow hedge relations

     816        6         333        638   

Of which designated in net investment hedge relations

     —          —           —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest rate derivatives

         

Maturity within 3 months

     —          —           —          5   

Maturity between 3 and 12 months

     487        285         324        367   

Maturity 1 to 3 years

     565        681         380        618   

Maturity 3 to 5 years

     1,212        739         416        815   

Maturity more than 5 years

     38        —           778        161   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     2,302 2)      1,705         1,898 2)      1,966   

Of which designated in fair value hedge relations

     969        —           1,002        —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) Some of the derivatives hedging non-current liabilities are recognized in the balance sheet as non-current derivatives due to hedge accounting.
2) Of which SEK 825 (816) million is reported as non-current assets.

Sensitivity analysis

The Company uses the VaR methodology to measure foreign exchange and interest rate risks in portfolios managed by Treasury. This statistical method expresses the maximum potential loss that can arise with a certain

 

137


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

degree of probability during a certain period of time. For the VaR measurement, the Company has chosen a probability level of 99% and a 1-day time horizon. The daily VaR measurement uses market volatilities and correlations based on historical daily data (one year).

The average VaR calculated for 2012 was SEK 9.8 (20.6) million for the combined mandates. No VaR-limits were exceeded during 2012.

Financial credit risk

Financial instruments carry an element of risk in that counterparts may be unable to fulfill their payment obligations. This exposure arises in the investments in cash, cash equivalents, short-term investments and from derivative positions with positive unrealized results against banks and other counterparties.

The Company mitigates these risks by investing cash primarily in well-rated securities such as treasury bills, government bonds, commercial papers, and mortgage covered bonds with short-term ratings of at least A-1/P-1 and long-term ratings of AAA. Separate credit limits are assigned to each counterpart in order to minimize risk concentration. We have had no sub-prime exposure in our investments. All derivative transactions are covered by ISDA netting agreements to reduce the credit risk. No credit losses were incurred during 2012, SEK 0.0 (0.0) billion, neither on external investments nor on derivative positions.

At December 31, 2012, the credit risk in financial cash instruments was equal to the instruments’ carrying value. Credit exposure in derivative instruments was SEK 3.9 (2.8) billion.

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is that the Company is unable to meet its short-term payment obligations due to insufficient or illiquid cash reserves.

The Company minimizes the liquidity risk by maintaining a sufficient net cash position. This is managed through centralized cash management, investments in highly liquid interest-bearing securities, and by having sufficient committed credit lines in place to meet potential funding needs. For information about contractual obligations, please see Note C31, “Contractual obligations”. The current cash position is deemed to satisfy all short-term liquidity requirements.

During 2012, cash and bank and short-term investments decreased by SEK 3.8 billion to SEK 76.7 billion.

Cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments

 

     Remaining time to maturity  

SEK billion

   < 3
months
     < 1
year
     1–5
years
     >5
years
     Total  

Bank Deposits

     40.6         0.2         —           —           40.8   

Type of issuer/counterpart

              

Governments

     3.4         4.5         10.8         0.8         19.5   

Corporations

     3.1         —           —           —           3.1   

Mortgage institutes

     —           0.1         13.2         —           13.3   

2012

     47.1         4.8         24.0         0.8         76.7   

2011

     44.7         4.0         29.8         2.0         80.5   

The instruments are either classified as held for trading or as assets available for sale with maturity less than one year and are therefore short-term investments. Cash, Cash equivalents and short-term investments are mainly held in SEK unless off-set by EUR-funding.

 

138


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Refinancing risk

Refinancing risk is the risk that the Company is unable to refinance outstanding debt at reasonable terms and conditions, or at all, at a given point in time.

Repayment schedule of non-current borrowings1)

 

Nominal amount (SEK billion)

   Current
maturities
of long-
term debt
     Notes and
bonds
(non-current)
     Liabilities
to financial
institutions
(non-current)
     Total  

2013

     3.0         —           —           3.0   

2014

     —           1.9         —           1.9   

2015

     —           —           5.1         5.1   

2016

     —           2.0         —           2.0   

2017

     —           4.3         —           4.3   

2018

     —           —           —           —     

2019

     —           —           0.6         0.6   

2020

     —           1.1         —           1.1   

2021

     —           —           0.6         0.6   

2022

     —           6.4         —           6.4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     3.0         15.7         6.3         25.0   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Excluding finance leases reported in Note C27, “Leasing”.

Debt financing is mainly carried out through borrowing in the Swedish and international debt capital markets.

Bank financing is used for certain subsidiary funding and to obtain committed credit facilities.

Funding programs1)

 

     Amount     Utilized      Unutilized  

Euro Medium-Term Note program (USD million)

     5,000        1,833         3,167   

SEC Registered program (USD Million)

     —   2)      1,000         —     

Long-term Committed Credit facility (USD million)

     2,000        —           2,000   

Indian Commercial Paper program (INR million)

     5,000        3,750         1,250   

EIB Committed Credit Facility (EUR million)

     500        —           500   

 

1) There are no financial covenants related to these programs.
2) Program amount indeterminate.

Financial instruments carried at other than fair value

The fair value of the Company’s financial instruments, recognized at fair value, are determined based on quoted market prices or rates. In the following tables, carrying amounts and fair values of financial instruments that are carried in the financial statements at other than fair values are presented. Assets valued at fair value through profit or loss showed a net gain of SEK 2.7 billion. For further information about valuation principles, please see Note C1, “Significant accounting policies”.

 

139


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Financial instruments carried at other than fair value1)

 

     Book value      Fair value  

SEK billion

   2012      2011      2012      2011  

Current part of non-current borrowings

     3.0         4.3         3.0         4.3   

Notes and bonds

     16.5         17.2         17.0         17.1   

Other borrowings non-current

     7.4         4.9         7.6         4.9   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     26.9         26.4         27.6         26.3   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Excluding finance leases reported in Note C27, “Leasing”.

Financial instruments excluded from the tables, such as trade receivables and payables, are carried at amortized cost which is deemed to be equal to fair value. When a market price is not readily available and there is insignificant interest rate exposure affecting the value, the carrying value is considered to represent a reasonable estimate of fair value.

Market price risk in own shares and other listed equity investments

Risk related to our own share price

The Company is exposed to the development of its own share price through stock purchase plans for employees and synthetic share-based compensations to the Board of Directors.

Stock purchase plans for employees

The obligation to deliver shares under the stock purchase plan is covered by holding Ericsson Class B shares as treasury stock. A change in the share price will result in a change in social security charges, which represents a risk to the income statement. The cash flow exposure is fully hedged through the holding of Ericsson Class B shares as treasury stock to be sold to generate funds to cover also social security payments.

Synthetic share-based compensations to the Board of Directors

For these plans, the Company is exposed to risks in relation to own share price, both in relation to compensation expenses and social security charges. The obligation to pay compensation amounts under the synthetic share-based compensations to the Board of Directors is covered by a liability in the balance sheet.

For further information about the stock purchase plan and the synthetic share-based compensations to the Board of Directors, please see note C28, “Information regarding members of the board of directors, the Group management and employees”.

Financial instruments, book value

 

SEK billion

  Customer
finance
    Trade
receivables
    Short-
term
invest-
ments
    Cash
equiva-
lents
    Borrowings     Trade
payables
    Other
financial
assets
    Other
current
receiv-
ables
    Other
current
liabilities
    2012     2011  

Note

    C14        C14            C19        C22        C12        C15        C21       

Assets at fair value through profit or loss

    —          —          32.0        12.2        —          —          0.8        3.1        –1.8        46.3        43.4   

Loans and receivables

    5.3        63.7        —          2.1        —          —          3.2        —          —          74.3        79.2   

Financial liabilities at amortized cost

    —          —          —          —          –28.7        –23.1        —          —          —          –51.8        –56.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    5.3        63.7        32.0        14.3        –28.7        –23.1        4.0        3.1        –1.8        68.8        66.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

140


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C21    OTHER CURRENT LIABILITIES

Other current liabilities

 

     2012      2011  

Income tax liabilities

     3,878         2,691   

Advances from customers

     4,754         3,942   

Liabilities to associated companies and joint ventures

     —           119   

Accrued interest

     259         351   

Accrued expenses, of which

     32,353         32,652   

Employee related

     11,166         11,314   

Supplier related

     11,440         11,621   

Other1)

     9,747         9,717   

Deferred revenues

     11,658         8,722   

Derivatives with a negative value2)

     1,775         3,240   

Other3)

     6,431         6,253   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     61,108         57,970   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Major balance relates to accrued expenses for customer projects.
2) See Note C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments”.
3) Includes items such as VAT and withholding tax payables and other payroll deductions, and liabilities for goods received where invoice is not yet received.

C22    TRADE PAYABLES

Trade payables

 

         2012              2011      

Payables to associated companies and joint ventures

     81         102   

Other

     23,019         25,207   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     23,100         25,309   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

C23    ASSETS PLEDGED AS COLLATERAL

Assets pledged as collateral

 

         2012              2011      

Chattel mortgages

     185         185   

Bank deposits

     335         267   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     520         452   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

C24    CONTINGENT LIABILITIES

Contingent liabilities

 

         2012              2011      

Contingent liabilities

     613         609   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     613         609   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

141


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Contingent liabilities assumed by Ericsson include guarantees of loans to other companies of SEK 24 (25) million. Ericsson has SEK 59 (111) million issued to guarantee the performance of a third party.

All ongoing legal and tax proceedings have been evaluated, their potential economic outflows and probability estimated and necessary provisions made. In Note C2, “Critical Accounting Estimates and Judgments”, a further disclosure is presented in relation to (i) key sources of estimation uncertainty and (ii) the decision made in relation to accounting policies applied.

Financial guarantees for third party amounted to SEK 286 (449) million as of December 31, 2012. Maturity date for major part of the issued guarantees occurs in 2021 at latest.

C25    STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

Interest paid in 2012 was SEK 1,650 million (SEK 1,422 million in 2011, SEK 977 million in 2010) and interest received was SEK 1,883 million (SEK 2,632 million in 2011, SEK 1,083 million in 2010). Taxes paid, including withholding tax, were SEK 5,750 million (SEK 4,393 million in 2011, SEK 4,808 million in 2010).

Cash and cash equivalents includes cash of SEK 30,358 (29,471) million and temporary investments of SEK 14,324 (9,205) million. For more information regarding the disposition of cash and cash equivalents and unutilized credit commitments, see Note C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments”.

The Company holds cash or cash equivalents in countries where exchange controls or legal restrictions apply. These restrictions normally refer to approval procedures prior to cross-border cash transfers. The amount of cash and cash equivalents in such countries amounts to SEK 10.6 (13.9) billion. Of this amount, SEK 9.2 (12.8) billion can be used for repayment of external and internal liabilities as well as other operating needs. Therefore, net cash and cash equivalents that are not readily available for use by the Group is SEK 1.4 (1.1) billion.

Adjustments to reconcile net income to cash

 

    2012     2011     2010  

Property, plant and equipment

     

Depreciation

    4,052        3,499        3,299   

Impairment losses/reversals of impairments

    –40        47        –3   

Total

    4,012        3,546        3,296   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Intangible assets

     

Amortization

     

Capitalized development expenses

    1,058        995        664   

Intellectual Property Rights, brands and other intangible assets

    4,436        4,470        4,999   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total amortization

    5,494        5,465        5,663   

Impairments

     

Capitalized development expenses

    266        7        49   

Intellectual Property Rights, brands and other intangible assets

    117        18        945   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    5,877        5,490        6,657   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total depreciation, amortization and impairment losses on property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

    9,889        9,036        9,953   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Taxes

    –1,140        1,994        351   

Dividends from joint ventures/ associated companies1)

    133        177        119   

Undistributed earnings in joint ventures/associated companies1)

    11,636        3,533        1,357   

Gains/losses on sales of investments and operations, intangible assets and PP&E, net2)

    –8,087        –159        –237   

Other non-cash items3)

    646        –1,968        947   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total adjustments to reconcile net income to cash

    13,077        12,613        12,490   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

142


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

1) See Note C12, “Financial assets, non-current”.
2) See Note C26, “Business combinations”.
3) Refers mainly to unrealized foreign exchange, gains/losses on financial instruments.

Acquisitions/divestments of subsidiaries and other operations

 

     Acquisitions      Divestments  

2012

     

Cash flow from business combinations1)

     –11,575         9,502   

Acquisitions/divestments of other investments

     46         –50   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     –11,529         9,452   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

2011

     

Cash flow from business combinations1)

     –1,232         –28   

Acquisitions/divestments of other investments

     –1,949         81   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     –3,181         53   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

2010

     

Cash flow from business combinations1)

     –3,286         454   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     –3,286         454   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) See also Note C26, “Business combinations”.

C26    BUSINESS COMBINATIONS

Acquisitions and divestments

Acquisitions

Acquisitions 2010–2012

 

     2012     2011      2010  

Cash

     12,564 1)      1,162         3,789   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total consideration

     12,564        1,162         3,789   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Acquisition-related costs2)

     150        77         67   

Net asset acquired

       

Cash and cash equivalents

     1,139        7         570   

Property, plant and equipment

     480        259         205   

Intangible assets

     6,672        382         3,825   

Investments in joint ventures and associated companies

     —          120         138   

Other assets

     2,105        140         2,506   

Provisions, including post-employment benefits

     714        –23         –390   

Other liabilities

     –3,214        –37         –3,573   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total identifiable net assets

     7,896        848         3,281   

Non-controlling interest

     375        54         –748   

Goodwill

     4,293        260         1,256   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 
     12,564        1,162         3,789   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

143


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

1) The cash transaction includes payment of external loan of SEK 6.2 billion and investment in subsidiary of SEK 2.5 billion.
2) Acquisition-related costs are included in Selling and administrative expenses in the consolidated income statement.

In 2012, Ericsson made acquisitions with a negative cash flow effect amounting to SEK 11,575 (1,232) million. The acquisitions consist primarily of:

 

   

BelAir: On April 2, 2012, the Company acquired 100% of the shares in BelAir Networks, a North American telecom-grade Wi-Fi company. The acquisition gives the Company a telecom-grade Wi-Fi portfolio, technological expertise, IPR, and established customer contracts and relationships. The purchase price was USD 250 million on a cash and debt-free basis.

 

   

ConceptWave: On September 25, 2012, the Company announced the acquisition of 100% of the shares in the Canadian company ConceptWave in an all-cash transaction. The acquisition complements the Company’s portfolio in OSS/BSS with order management and product catalog solutions. The purchase price was CAD 55 million on a cash and debt-free basis. Balances to facilitate the Purchase price allocation are preliminary.

 

   

Ericsson-LG: On March 22, 2012, the Company announced it had acquired additional shares in Ericsson-LG, thereby increasing the ownership from 50% plus one share to 75%. The company is fully consolidated by the Company, since the original acquisition in July 2010.

 

   

Technicolor: On July 3, 2012, the Company announced the closing of the acquisition of the broadcast services division of Technicolor. The acquisition brings broadcast customers and playout operations in France, UK and in the Netherlands. The purchase price amounted to EUR 20 million including a potential earn-out valued at EUR 2 million, based on 2015 revenues of the Broadcast services activity. Balances to facilitate the Purchase price allocation are preliminary.

 

   

Telcordia: On June 14, 2011, the Company announced that it had entered into an agreement to acquire 100% of the shares of Telcordia, a leader in the development of software and services for OSS/BSS. The acquisition was completed on January 12, 2012, with a purchase price of USD 1.15 billion in an all-cash transaction, on a cash and debt-free basis. Net sales for the acquired Telcordia business amounted to approximately SEK 4.2 billion for the period January 12 – December 31, 2012. The acquired Telcordia business had a positive impact on the result. Goodwill represented 57% of the total assets acquired. The goodwill is mainly attributable to the value of the compentence acquired and future synergy effects. None of the goodwill is expected to be deductible for tax purposes. Transaction costs for the acquisition amounted to SEK 57 million.

 

144


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Telcordia

 

     2012  

Cash

     8,725 1) 
  

 

 

 

Total consideration

     8,725   
  

 

 

 

Acquisition-related costs2)

     57   

Net asset acquired

  

Cash and cash equivalents

     886   

Property, plant and equipment

     305   

Intangible assets

     5,543   

Other assets3)

     1,713   

Provisions, including post-employment benefits

     714   

Other liabilities

     –3,586   
  

 

 

 

Total identifiable net assets

     5,575   

Goodwill

     3,150   
  

 

 

 
     8,725   
  

 

 

 

 

1) The cash transaction includes payment of external loan of SEK 6.2 billion and investment in subsidiary of SEK 2.5 billion.
2) Acquisition-related costs are included in Selling and administrative expenses in the consolidated income statement.
3) Other assets include trade receivables with a fair value of SEK 1.4 billion.

In order to finalize a Purchase price allocation all relevant information needs to be in place. Examples of such information are final consideration and final opening balances, they may remain preliminary for a period of time due to for example working capital adjustments, tax items or decisions from local authorities.

Divestments

Divestments 2010–2012

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Cash

     9,502         –28         454   

Net assets disposed of

        

Property, plant and equipment

                1         21   

Investments in joint ventures and associated companies

     1,353         10              

Other assets

     296         38         372   

Other liabilities

     –483         –224         –183   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,166         –175         210   

Net gains from divestments

     8,336         158         357   

Less Cash and cash equivalents

                –11         –113   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Cash flow effect

     9,502         –28         454   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

In 2012, the Company made divestments with a cash flow effect amounting to SEK 9,502 (–28) million.

 

   

IPX: On September 30, 2012, the Company divested its Multimedia brokering platform (IPX) to French listed company Gemalto, with the exception of the operations in the US. The sale resulted in a gain amounting to SEK 237 million and a positive cash flow effect of SEK 260 million.

 

   

Sony Ericsson: On February 16, 2012, the Company announced the completion of the divestment of its 50% stake in Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications, with a carrying value of 1.4 billion. The agreed

 

145


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

cash consideration for the transaction was EUR 1.05 billion. The sale resulted in a gain amounting to SEK 7.7 billion and a positive cash flow effect of SEK 9.1 billion. For further information on the divestment of Sony Ericsson, see note C3, “Segment information”.

Acquisitions 2010–2012

 

Company

  

Description

  

Transaction
date

ConceptWave

   A Canadian OSS/BSS company. The purchase price was CAD 55 million.    Sep, 2012

Technicolor

   A technology company in the media and entertainment sector. The purchase price was EUR 20 million.    Jul, 2012

BelAir

   A telecom-grade Wi-Fi company based in Canada. The purchase price was USD 250 million.    Apr, 2012

Ericsson-LG

   Increase of ownership from 50% plus one share, to 75%.    Mar, 2012

Telcordia

   A US company developing software and services for OSS/BSS. The purchase price was USD 1.15 billion.    Jan, 2012

GDNT

   An asset purchase agreement of certain assets. Enhances the Company’s existing R&D, manufacturing and services capabilities in the China region. The purchase price was RMB 357 million.    May, 2011

Nortel Multiservice Switch business (MSS)

   An asset purchase agreement to acquire certain assets of Nortel’s MSS. The purchase price was USD 53 million.    Mar, 2011

Optimi

   A US-Spanish telecommunications vendor providing products and services within the networks optimization and management sector. The purchase price was USD 99 million.    Dec, 2010

inCode

   An asset purchase agreement of certain assets. A professional services firm providing strategic business and consulting services. The purchase price was USD 12 million.    Sep, 2010

LG-Nortel

   Nortel’s majority shareholding (50% + 1 share) in LG-Nortel. The purchase price was USD 234 million.    Jun, 2010

Nortel GSM

   An asset purchase agreement of the Carrier networks division of Nortel relating to GSM business. The purchase price was USD 79 million.    Mar, 2010

Pride

   An Italian consulting and systems integration company. The purchase price was EUR 66 million.    Jan, 2010

Divestments 2010–2012

 

Company

  

Description

  

Transaction
date

IPX

   Sale of IPX to Gemalto, with a positive cash flow effect of SEK 260 million.   

Sep, 2012

EDA 1500 GPON

   Capital asset sale of EDA 1500 GPON portfolio with a positive cash flow effect of SEK 80 million.   

Aug, 2012

Sony Ericsson

   Sale of the Company’s share in Sony Ericsson (50%) to Sony, with a positive cash flow effect of SEK 9.1 billion.   

Feb, 2012

EFI

   Sale of Ericsson Federal Inc. (EFI), with a positive cash flow effect of SEK 360 million.   

Dec, 2010

 

146


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C27    LEASING

Leasing with the Company as lessee

Assets under finance leases, recorded as property, plant and equipment, consist of:

Finance leases

 

     2012      2011  

Cost

     

Real estate

     1,538         1,856   

Machinery

     3         3   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,541         1,859   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Accumulated depreciation

     

Real estate

     –601         –725   

Machinery

     –3         –3   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     –604         –728   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Accumulated impairment losses

     

Real estate

     –35         –42   
     –35         –42   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net carrying value

     902         1,089   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

As of December 31, 2012, future minimum lease payment obligations for leases were distributed as follows:

Future minimum lease payment obligations for leases

 

     Finance
leases
     Operating
leases
 

2013

     150         2,847   

2014

     229         1,794   

2015

     127         1,388   

2016

     85         1,105   

2017

     76         777   

2018 and later

     795         2,472   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     1,462         10,383   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Future finance charges1)

     –398         n/a   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Present value of finance lease liabilities

     1,064         10,383   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Average effective interest rate on lease payables is 5.69%.

Expenses in 2012 for leasing of assets were SEK 3,172 (3,362) million, of which variable expenses were SEK 20 (7) million. The leasing contracts vary in length from 1 to 20 years.

The Company’s lease agreements normally do not include any contingent rents. In the few cases they occur, they relate to charges for heating linked to the oil price index. Most of the leases of real estate contain terms of renewal, giving the Company the right to prolong the agreement in question for a predefined period of time. All of the finance leases of facilities contain purchase options. Only a very limited number of the

 

147


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Company’s lease agreements contain restrictions on stockholders’ equity or other means of finance. The major agreement contains a restriction stating that the Parent Company must maintain a stockholders’ equity of at least SEK 25 billion.

Leases with the Company as lessor

Leasing income relates to subleasing of real estate as well as equipment provided to customers under leasing arrangements. These leasing contracts vary in length from 1 to 11 years.

At December 31, 2012, future minimum payment receivables were distributed as follows:

Future minimum payment receivables

 

     Finance
leases
     Operating
leases
 

2013

     6         154   

2014

     6         143   

2015

     6         96   

2016

     6         23   

2017

     6         18   

2018 and later

     —           52   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     30         486   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Unearned financial income

     n/a         n/a   

Uncollectible lease payments

     n/a         n/a   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net investments in financial leases

     n/a         n/a   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Leasing income in 2012 was SEK 236 (76) million.

 

148


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C28    INFORMATION REGARDING MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS, THE GROUP MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

Remuneration to the Board of Directors

Remuneration to members of the Board of Directors

 

SEK

  Board fees     Number
of synthetic
shares/
portion of
Board fee
    Value at
grant date of
synthetic

shares
allocated in 2012
A
    Number of
previously
allocated
synthetic
shares
outstanding
    Net change
in value
of allocated
synthetic
shares1)
B
    Committee
fees
    Total fees
paid in
cash2)
C
    Total
remuneration
2012
(A+B+C)
 

Board member

               

Leif Johansson

    3,750,000        0/0     —          —          —          400,000        4,150,000 3)      4,150,000   

Sverker Martin-Löf

    875,000        0/0     —          —          —          250,000        1,125,000        1,125,000   

Jacob Wallenberg

    875,000        6,984/50     437,499        2,262.00        10,826        175,000        612,500        1,060,825   

Roxanne S. Austin

    875,000        6,984/50     437,499        29,172.60        31,648        250,000        687,500        1,156,647   

Sir Peter L. Bonfield

    875,000        3,492/25     218,749        9,722.80        13,411        250,000        906,250        1,138,410   

Börje Ekholm

    875,000        10,476/75     656,248        29,172.60        40,228        175,000        393,750        1,090,226   

Alexander Izosimov

    875,000        3,492/25     218,749        —          8,580        —          656,250        883,579   

Ulf J. Johansson

    875,000        0/0     —          22,384.60        33,495        350,000        1,225,000 4)      1,258,495   

Nancy McKinstry

    875,000        0/0     —          22,002.60        18,092        175,000        1,050,000        1,068,092   

Anders Nyrén

    875,000        0/0     —          —          —          175,000        1,050,000        1,050,000   

Hans Vestberg

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

Michelangelo Volpi

    875,000        0/0     —          4,380.00        –2,409        —          875,000        872,591   

Employee Representatives

               

Pehr Claesson

    18,000        —          —          —          —          —          18,000        18,000   

Kristina Davidsson

    18,000        —          —          —          —          —          18,000        18,000   

Jan Hedlund5)

    6,000        —          —          —          —          —          6,000        6,000   

Karin Åberg

    18,000        —          —          —          —          —          18,000        18,000   

Rickard Fredriksson6)

    10,500        —          —          —          —          —          10,500        10,500   

Karin Lennartsson

    18,000        —          —          —          —          —          18,000        18,000   

Roger Svensson

    18,000        —          —          —          —          —          18,000        18,000   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    12,606,500        31,428        1,968,744        119,097.20        153,871        2,200,000        12,837,750        14,960,365 7) 
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    12,606,500        31,428        1,968,744        128,002.20 8)      138,792 8)      2,200,000        20,706,150 9)      22,813,687 7)9) 
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) The difference in value as of December 31, 2012, compared to December 31, 2011 (for synthetic shares allocated 2008, 2009, 2010 and 2011), and compared to grant date 2012 (for synthetic shares allocated in 2012). The value of synthetic shares allocated in 2008, 2009, 2010 and 2011 includes respectively SEK 1.85, SEK 2.00, SEK 2.25 and SEK 2.50 per share in compensation for dividends resolved by the Annual General Meetings 2009, 2010, 2011 and 2012.
2) Committee fee and cash portion of the Board fee.
3) In addition, an amount corresponding to statutory social charges in respect of the part of the fee that has been invoiced through a company was paid, amounting to SEK 1,303,930.
4) In addition, an amount corresponding to statutory social charges in respect of the part of the fee that has been invoiced through a company was paid, amounting to SEK 122,520.
5) Resigned as employee representative as of May 3, 2012.
6) Appointed deputy employee representative as of May 3, 2012.
7) Excluding social security charges in the amount of SEK 3,950,998.

 

149


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

8) Including synthetic shares previously allocated to the former Director Carl-Henric Svanberg.
9) Including advance payments to the former Directors Michael Treschow and Marcus Wallenberg under the synthetic share programs. Michael Treschow: SEK 7,376,686 for 111,926.80 synthetic shares (in addition, an amount corresponding to statutory social charges in respect of the part of the fee that has been invoiced through a company was paid, amounting to SEK 753,159) and Marcus Wallenberg: SEK 491,714 for 7,460.80 synthetic shares.

Comments to the table

 

   

The Chairman of the Board was entitled to a Board fee of SEK 3,750,000 and a fee of SEK 200,000 for each Board Committee on which he served as Chairman.

 

   

The other Directors elected by the Annual General Meeting were entitled to a fee of SEK 875,000 each. In addition, the Chairman of the Audit Committee was entitled to a fee of SEK 350,000 and the other non-employed members of the Audit Committee were entitled to a fee of SEK 250,000 each. The Chairmen of the Finance and Remuneration Committees were entitled to a fee of SEK 200,000 each and the other non-employed members of the Finance and the Remuneration Committees were entitled to a fee of SEK 175,000 each.

 

   

Members of the Board, who are not employees of the Company, have not received any remuneration other than the fees and synthetic shares as above. None of the Directors have entered into a service contract with the Parent Company or any of its subsidiaries, providing for termination benefits.

 

   

Members and deputy members of the Board who are Ericsson employees received no remuneration or benefits other than their entitlements as employees and a fee to the employee representatives and their deputies of SEK 1,500 per attended Board meeting.

 

   

Board members invoicing the amount of the Board and Committee fee through a company may add to the invoice an amount corresponding to social charges. The social charges thus included in the invoiced amount are not higher than the general payroll tax that would otherwise have been paid by the Company. The entire amount, i.e. the cash portion of the Board fee and the Committee fee, including social charges, constitutes the invoiced Board fee.

 

   

The Annual General Meeting 2012 resolved that non-employed Directors may choose to receive the Board fee (i.e. exclusive of committee fee) as follows: i) 25% of the Board fee in cash and 75% in the form of synthetic shares, with a value corresponding to 75% of the Board fee at the time of allocation, ii) 50% in cash and 50% in the form of synthetic shares, or iii) 75% in cash and 25% in the form of synthetic shares. Directors may also choose not to participate in the synthetic share program and receive 100% of the Board fee in cash. Committee fees are always paid in cash.

The number of synthetic shares is based on a volume-weighed average of the market price of Ericsson Class B shares on the NASDAQ OMX Stockholm exchange during the five trading days immediately following the Annual General Meeting 2012: SEK 62.643. The number of synthetic shares is rounded down to the nearest whole number of shares.

The synthetic shares are vested during the Directors’ term of office and the right to receive payment with regard to the allocated synthetic shares occurs after the publication of the Company’s year-end financial statement during the fifth year following the Annual General Meeting which resolved on the synthetic share program, i.e. in 2017.

The amount payable shall be determined based on the volume-weighed average price for shares of Class B during the five trading days immediately following the publication of the year-end financial statement.

 

150


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Synthetic shares were allocated to members of the Board for the first time in 2008, on equal terms and conditions as resolved in 2009, 2010, 2011 and 2012. Payment based on synthetic shares may thus, under the main rule, occur for the first time in 2013 with respect to the synthetic shares allocated in 2008. The value of all outstanding synthetic shares fluctuates in line with the market value of Ericsson’s Class B share and may differ from year to year compared to the original value on their respective grant dates. The change in value of the outstanding synthetic shares is established each year and affects the total recognized costs that year. As per December 31, 2012, the total number of synthetic shares under the programs is 159,430.20, and the total accounted debt is SEK 11,113,237 (including synthetic shares previously allocated to the former Director Carl-Henric Svanberg). In accordance with the terms and conditions for the synthetic shares, the time for payment to the former Director Carl-Henric Svanberg has been advanced, to occur after the publication of the year-end financial statement 2013. In February 2012, advance payment was made to the former Directors Michael Treschow and Marcus Wallenberg with respect to their synthetic shares, all in accordance with the terms and conditions for the synthetic shares.

Remuneration to the Group Management

The Company’s costs for remuneration to the Group management are the costs recognized in the Income Statement during the fiscal year. These costs are disclosed under “Remuneration costs” below.

Costs recognized during a fiscal year in the Income Statement are not fully paid by the Company at the end of the fiscal year. The unpaid amounts that the Company has in relation to the Group management are disclosed under “Outstanding balances”.

Remuneration costs

The total remuneration to the President and CEO and to other members of the Group management, consisting of the Executive Leadership Team (ELT) includes fixed salary, short-term and long-term variable remuneration, pension and other benefits. These remuneration elements are based on the guidelines for remuneration and other employment conditions for the ELT as approved by the Annual General Meeting held in 2012, see the approved guidelines in section “Guidelines for remuneration to Group Management 2012”.

Remuneration costs for the President and CEO and other members of Executive Leadership Team (ELT)

 

SEK

  The President
and CEO 2012
    The President
and CEO 2011
    Other members
of ELT 2012
    Other members
of ELT 2011
    Total 2012     Total 2011  

Salary

    12,573,233        11,739,341        76,973,215        76,031,733        89,546,448        87,771,074   

Costs for annual variable remuneration earned 2012 to be paid 2013

    3,972,247        2,771,134        21,877,700        18,460,645        25,849,947        21,231,779   

Long-term variable remuneration provision

    6,439,873        5,636,050        6,472,215        8,916,556        12,912,088        14,552,606   

Pension costs

    6,491,713        5,960,566        22,865,674        22,154,413        29,357,387        28,114,979   

Other benefits

    123,612        78,594        4,431,160        4,944,762        4,554,772        5,023,356   

Social charges and taxes

    9,114,641        7,800,766        22,877,888        23,529,200        31,992,529        31,329,966   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    38,715,319        33,986,451        155,497,852        154,037,309        194,213,171        188,023,760   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Comments to the table

 

   

During 2012 there were three Executive Vice Presidents, who have been appointed by the Board of Directors. None of them has acted as deputy to the President and CEO during the year. The Executive Vice Presidents are included in the group “Other members of ELT”.

 

151


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

The group “Other members of ELT” comprises the following persons: Per Borgklint, Bina Chaurasia, Hĺkan Eriksson (up to January 31), Ulf Ewaldsson (from February 1), Jan Frykhammar, Douglas L. Gilstrap, Nina Macpherson, Magnus Mandersson, Helena Norrman, Mats H. Olsson, Rima Qureshi, Angel Ruiz, Johan Wibergh and Jan Wäreby.

 

   

The salary stated in the table for the President and CEO and other members of the ELT includes vacation pay paid during 2012 as well as other contracted compensation which were paid during 2012 or provisioned for 2012.

 

   

“Long-term variable remuneration provision” refers to the compensation costs during 2012 for all outstanding share-based plans.

 

   

For a description of compensation cost, including accounting treatment, see Note C1, “Significant accounting policies”, section Share-based compensation to employees and the Board of Directors.

 

   

For the President and CEO and other members of the ELT employed in Sweden before 2011 a supplementary plan is applied in addition to the occupational pension plan for salaried staff on the Swedish labor market (ITP) with pension from 60 years. These pension plans are not conditional upon future employment at Ericsson.

Outstanding balances

The Company has recognized the following liabilities relating to unpaid remunerations in the Balance Sheet:

 

   

Ericsson’s commitments for benefit based pensions as of December 31, 2012 under IAS 19 amounted to SEK 5,971,282 for the President and CEO which includes ITP plan and temporary disability and survivor’s pension. For other members of ELT the Company’s commitments amounted to SEK 27,103,244 of which SEK 21,429,454 refers to the ITP plan and the remaining SEK 5,673,790 to temporary disability and survivor’s pensions.

 

   

For previous Presidents and CEOs, the Company has made provisions for defined benefit pension plans in connection with their active service periods within the Company.

 

   

Deferred salary, earned 2012 or earlier, to be paid 12 months after period end or later, amounts to SEK 7,899,000.

Maximum outstanding matching rights

 

As per December 31, 2012

Number of Class B shares

   The President
and CEO
     Other members
of the ELT
 

Stock Purchase Plans 2009, 2010, 2011 and 2012 and Executive Performance Stock Plans 2009, 2010, 2011 and 2012

     503,382         661,456   

Comments to the table

 

   

For the definition of matching rights, see the description in section “Long-term variable remuneration”.

 

   

The performance matching result of 70,3% is included for 2009 plan.

 

   

Cash conversion target for 2012 was reached, but not reached in 2011.

 

   

During 2012, the President and CEO received 10,108 matching shares and other members of the ELT 54,803 matching shares.

 

152


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Guidelines for remuneration to Group Management 2012

For Group Management consisting of the Executive Leadership Team, including the President and CEO, total remuneration consists of fixed salary, short and long-term variable remuneration, pension and other benefits. Furthermore, the following guidelines apply for the remuneration to the Executive Leadership Team:

 

   

Variable remuneration is through cash and stock-based programs awarded against specific business targets derived from the long-term business plan approved by the Board of Directors. Targets may include financial targets at either corporate or unit level, operational targets, employee motivation targets and customer satisfaction targets.

 

   

With the current composition of the Executive Leadership Team, the Company’s cost during 2012 for variable remuneration to the Executive Leadership Team can, at a constant share price, amount to between 0 and 150% of the aggregate fixed salary cost, all excluding social security costs.

 

   

All benefits, including pension benefits, follow the competitive practice in the home country taking total compensation into account. The retirement age is normally 60 to 65 years of age.

 

   

By way of exception, additional arrangements can be made when deemed required. Such additional arrangement shall be limited in time and shall not exceed a period of 36 months and two times the remuneration that the individual concerned would have received had no additional arrangement been made.

 

   

The mutual notice period may be no more than six months. Upon termination of employment by the Company, severance pay amounting to a maximum of 18 months’ fixed salary is paid. Notice of termination given by the employee due to significant structural changes, or other events that in a determining manner affect the content of work or the condition for the position, is equated with notice of termination served by the Company.

Long-Term Variable remuneration

The Stock Purchase Plan

The Stock Purchase Plan is designed to offer an incentive for all employees to participate in the Company where practicable, which is consistent with industry practice and with our ways of working. For the 2012 plan, employees are able to save up to 7.5% of gross fixed salary (President and CEO can save up to 10% of gross fixed salary and short-term variable remuneration) for purchase of Class B contribution shares at market price on the NASDAQ OMX Stockholm or American Depositary Shares (ADSs) at NASDAQ New York (contribution shares) during a twelve-month period (contribution period). If the contribution shares are retained by the employee for three years after the investment and the employment with the Ericsson Group continues during that time, the employee’s shares will be matched with a corresponding number of Class B shares or ADSs free of consideration. Employees in 100 countries participate in the plans.

The table below shows the contribution periods and participation details for ongoing plans as of December 31, 2012.

Stock purchase plans

 

Plan

   Contribution period      Number of
participants
at launch
     Take-up
rate–percent of
eligible employees
 

Stock Purchase plan 2009

     August 2009–July 2010         18,000         25

Stock Purchase plan 2010

     August 2010–July 2011         22,000         27

Stock Purchase plan 2011

     August 2011–July 2012         24,000         30

Stock Purchase plan 2012

     August 2012–July 2013         27,000         28

 

153


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Participants save each month, beginning with August payroll, towards quarterly investments. These investments (in November, February, May and August) are matched on the third anniversary of each such investment, subject to continued employment, and hence the matching spans over two financial years and two tax years.

The Key Contributor Retention Plan

The Key Contributor Retention Plan is part of Ericsson’s talent management strategy and is designed to give recognition for performance, critical skills and potential as well as to encourage retention of key employees. Under the program, up to 10% of employees (2012 plan: up to 8,000 employees) are selected through a nomination process that identifies individuals according to performance, critical skills and potential. Participants selected obtain one extra matching share in addition to the ordinary one matching share for each contribution share purchased under the Stock Purchase Plan during a twelve-month program period.

Executive Performance Stock Plans

 

    Executive Performance Stock Plan  
    20121)     2011     2010     2009  

Base year EPS2)

        1.14        2.90   

Target average annual EPS growth range3)

        5% to 15%        5% to 15%   

Matching share vesting range4)

    0.67 to 4        0.67 to 4        0.67 to 4        0.67 to 4   
    1 to 6        1 to 6        1 to 6        1 to 6   
    1.5 to 9        1.5 to 9        1.5 to 9        1.33 to 8   

Maximum opportunity as percentage of fixed salary5)

    30     30     30     30
    45     45     45     45
    162     162     162     72

 

1) Targets for Executive Performance Stock Plan 2012 are described in the next table.
2) Sum of four quarters up to June 30 of plan year 2009. For 2010 plan the sum of 4 quarters up to December 31, 2010.
3) EPS range found from three-year average EPS of the twelve quarters to the end of the performance period and corresponding growth targets.
4) Corresponding to EPS range (no Performance Share Plan matching below this range). Matching shares per contribution share invested in addition to Stock Purchase Plan matching according to program of up to 4, 6 or 9 matching shares.
5) At full investment, full vesting and constant share price. Excludes Stock Purchase Plan matching.

 

154


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Executive Performance Stock Plan targets

 

    Base year
value
SEK billion
     Year 1     Year 2     Year 3  
2012         

Growth (Net Sales Growth)

    227.8        
 
Compound annual
growth rate of 2–8%
  
  

Margin (Operating Income Growth)

    17.9        
 
Compound annual
growth of 5–15%
  
  

Cash Flow (Cash Conversion)

    —         ³ 70   ³ 70   ³ 70
2011         

Growth (Net Sales Growth)

    203.3        
 
Compound annual
growth rate of 4–10%
  
  

Margin (Operating Income Growth)1)

    23.7        
 
Compound annual
growth of 5–15%
  
  

Cash Flow (Cash Conversion)

    —         ³ 70   ³ 70   ³ 70

 

1) Consolidated operating margin excluding restructuring for 2010.

The Executive Performance Stock Plan

The Executive Performance Stock Plan is designed to focus management on driving earnings and provide competitive remuneration. Senior executives, including ELT, are selected to obtain up to four or six extra shares (performance matching shares) in addition to the ordinary one matching share for each contribution share purchased under the Stock Purchase Plan. Up to 0.5% of employees (2012 plan: up to 400 executives) are offered to participate in the plan. The President and CEO can save up to 10% of gross fixed salary and short-term variable remuneration, and may obtain up to nine performance matching shares in addition to the Stock Purchase Plan matching share for each contribution share. The performance matching for the 2009 and 2010 plans is subject to the fulfillment of a performance target of average annual Earnings per Share (EPS) growth.

The performance targets changed from Earnings Per Share (EPS) targets to targets linked to the business strategy as from 2011.

The tables above show all Executive Performance Stock Plans as per December 31, 2012.

Shares for all plans

 

            Stock Purchase Plan, Key Contributor
Retention Plan and Executive
Performance Stock Plans
                   

Plan (million shares)

          2012     2011     2010     2009     2008     Total  

Originally designated1)

     A         26.2        19.4        19.4        22.4        16.5        103.9   

Outstanding beginning of 2012

     B         —          3.4        10.6        9.1        6.1        29.2   

Awarded during 2012

     C         4.4        10.8        —          —          —          15.2   

Exercised/matched during 2012

     D         —          0.3        0.5        2.3        6.0        9.1   

Forfeited/expired during 2012

     E         —          0.4        0.9        0.8        0.1        2.2   

Outstanding end of 20122)

     F=B+C–D–E         4.4        13.5        9.2        6.0        —          33.1   

Compensation costs charged during 2012 (SEK million)

     G         6 3)      132 3)      148 3)      91 3)      28 3)      405 4) 

 

155


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

1) Adjusted for rights offering and reverse split when applicable.
2) Presuming maximum performance matching under the Executive Performance Stock Plans. The 2008 plan has lapsed. The 2009 plan partially vested to an extent of 70,3%.
3) Fair value is calculated as the share price on the investment date, reduced by the net present value of the dividend expectations during the three-year vesting period. Net present value calculations are based on data from external party. Fair value is also adjusted for participants failing to keep hold of their contribution shares during the vesting period. For shares under the Executive Performance Stock Plans, the Company presumes maximum performance matching for all ongoing plans when calculating the compensation cost. The 2008 plan has lapsed. The 2009 plan partially vested to an extent of 70,3%. Fair value of the Class B share at each investment date during 2012 was: February 15 SEK 56.26, May 15 SEK 53.93, August 15 SEK 55.85 and November 15 SEK 49.99.
4) Total compensation costs charged during 2011: SEK 413 million, 2010: SEK 757 million.

Shares for all plans

All plans are funded with treasury stock and are equity settled. Treasury stock for all plans has been issued in directed cash issues of Class C shares at the quotient value and purchased under a public offering at the subscription price plus a premium corresponding to the subscribers’ financing costs, and then converted to Class B shares.

For all plans, additional shares have been allocated for financing of social security expenses. Treasury stock is sold on the NASDAQ OMX Stockholm to cover social security payments when arising due to matching of shares. During 2012, 1,038,200 shares were sold at an average price of SEK 63.17. Sale of shares is recognized directly in equity.

If, as of December 31, 2012, all shares allocated for future matching under the Stock Purchase Plan were transferred, and shares designated to cover social security payments were disposed of as a result of the exercise and the matching, approximately 61 million Class B shares would be transferred, corresponding to 1.9% of the total number of shares outstanding, 3,220 million not including treasury stock. As of December 31, 2012, 85 million Class B shares were held as treasury stock.

The table above shows how shares (representing matching rights but excluding shares for social security expenses) are being used for all outstanding plans. From up to down the table includes (A) the number of shares originally approved by the Annual General Meeting, adjusted for reverse split where applicable; (B) the number of originally designated shares that were outstanding at the beginning of 2012; (C) the number of shares awards that were granted during 2012; (D) the number of shares matched during 2012; (E) the number of shares forfeited by participants or expired under the plan rules during 2012; and (F) the balance left as outstanding at the end of 2012, having added new awards to the shares outstanding at the beginning of the year and deducted the shares related to awards matched, forfeited and expired.

The final column (G) shows the compensation costs charged to the accounts during 2012 for each plan, calculated as fair value in SEK.

For a description of compensation cost, including accounting treatment, see Note C1, “Significant accounting policies”, section Share-based compensation to employees and the Board of Directors.

 

156


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Employee numbers, wages and salaries

Employee numbers

Average number of employees

 

      2012      2011  
     Women      Men      Total      Women      Men      Total  

North America

     3,479         12,607         16,086         2,876         12,106         14,982   

Latin America

     2,137         9,230         11,367         1,913         7,837         9,750   

Northern Europe & Central Asia1)2)

     5,746         15,351         21,097         5,656         14,927         20,583   

Western & Central Europe2)

     1,790         9,463         11,253         1,663         8,968         10,631   

Mediterranean2)

     2,966         10,064         13,030         2,743         9,077         11,820   

Middle East

     617         4,603         5,220         634         4,343         4,977   

Sub-Saharan Africa

     548         1,672         2,220         661         1,290         1,951   

India

     2,137         11,924         14,061         1,613         9,912         11,525   

North East Asia

     4,191         9,584         13,775         3,480         8,839         12,319   

South East Asia & Oceania

     1,175         3,474         4,649         1,155         3,437         4,592   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     24,786         87,972         112,758         22,394         80,736         103,130   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1)       Of which Sweden

     4,232         13,337         17,569         4,188         12,881         17,069   

2)        Of which EU

     9,911         33,581         43,492         9,575         31,667         41,242   

Number of employees by region at year-end

 

      2012      2011  

North America

     15,501         14,801   

Latin America

     11,219         11,191   

Northern Europe & Central Asia1)2)

     21,211         20,987   

Western & Central Europe2)

     11,257         10,806   

Mediterranean2)

     12,205         11,645   

Middle East

     3,992         4,336   

Sub-Saharan Africa

     2,014         2,283   

India

     14,303         11,535   

North East Asia

     14,157         12,567   

South East Asia & Oceania

     4,396         4,374   

Total

     110,255         104,525   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Of which Sweden

     17,712         17,500   

2) Of which EU

     42,872         41,596   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Employees by gender and age at year-end 2012

 

      Women     Men     Percent
of total
 

Under 25 years old

     2,517        6,018        8

25–35 years old

     8,530        31,054        36

36–45 years old

     7,818        28,954        33

46–55 years old

     3,984        15,692        18

Over 55 years old

     1,233        4,455        5

Percent of total

     22     78     100

 

157


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Employee movements

 

           2012      2011  

Head count at year-end

        110,255         104,525   

Employees who have left the Company

        12,280         10,571   

Employees who have joined the Company

        18,010         24,835   

Temporary employees

        766         901   

Employee wages and salaries

Wages and salaries and social security expenses

 

(SEK million)

   2012      2011  

Wages and salaries

     48,428         43,707   

Social security expenses

     15,672         15,198   

Of which pension costs

     2,762         3,888   

Amounts related to the President and CEO and the Executive Leadership Team are included.

Remuneration to Board members and Presidents in subsidiaries

 

(SEK million)

   2012      2011  

Salary and other remuneration

     243         223   

Of which annual variable remuneration

     33         22   

Pension costs

     27         20   

Board members, Presidents and Group management by gender at year end

 

      2012     2011  
     Women     Men     Women     Men  

Parent Company

        

Board members and President

     27     73     20     80

Group Management

     29     71     29     71

Subsidiaries

        

Board members and Presidents

     12     88     11     89

C29    RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

During 2012, various related party transactions were executed pursuant to contracts based on terms customary in the industry and negotiated on an arm’s length basis. For information regarding equity and Ericsson’s share of assets, liabilities and income in joint ventures and associated companies, see Note C12, “Financial assets, non-current”. For information regarding transactions with senior management, see Note C28, “Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees”.

ST-Ericsson

ST-Ericsson, the joint venture between Ericsson and STMicroelectronics, was formed on February 2, 2009, by merging Ericsson Mobile Platforms with ST-NXP Wireless. The joint venture is equally owned by Ericsson and STMicroelectronics. For further information, see Note C3, “Segment information”.

 

158


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Major transactions are as follows:

 

   

Sales: Ericsson provides ST-Ericsson with services in the areas of R&D, HR, IT and facilities.

 

   

Purchases: A major part of Ericsson’s purchases from ST-Ericsson consists of chipsets and R&D services.

 

   

Dividends: Both owners of ST-Ericsson receive dividends, when so decided by the Board of Directors. Ericsson received no dividends from ST-Ericsson during 2012.

ST-Ericsson

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Related party transactions

        

Sales

     138         182         403   

Purchases

     634         781         629   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Related party balances

        

Receivables

     127         51         53   

Liabilities

     —           24         48   

Ericsson does not have any contingent liabilities, assets pledged as collateral or guarantees towards ST-Ericsson.

Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.

Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d. is a company for design, sales and service of telecommunication systems and equipment, and an associated member of the Ericsson Group. Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d. is located in Zagreb, Croatia. Ericsson holds 49.07% of the shares.

Major transactions are as follows:

 

   

Sales: Ericsson sells telecommunication equipment to Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.

 

   

License revenues: Ericsson receives license revenues for Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.’s usage of trademarks.

 

   

Purchases: Ericsson purchases development resources from Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.

 

   

Dividends: Ericsson received dividends from Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d. during 2012.

Ericsson Nikola Tesla D.D.

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Related party transactions

        

Sales

     1,161         465         563   

License revenues

     8         4         2   

Purchases

     607         595         566   

Ericsson’s share of dividends

     133         154         104   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Related party balances

        

Receivables

     189         59         120   

Liabilities

     81         76         75   

 

159


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Ericsson does not have any contingent liabilities, assets pledged as collateral or guarantees towards Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.

Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB

The company has divested its 50% stake in Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications to Sony. The divestment was effective on January 1, 2012.

Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB

 

     2012      2011      2010  

Related party transactions

        

License revenues

     —           855         1,255   

Purchases

     —           126         61   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Related party balances

        

Receivables

     —           27         258   

Liabilities

     —           2         8   

C30    FEES TO AUDITORS

Fees to auditors

 

     PwC      Others      Total  

2012

        

Audit fees

     82         5         87   

Audit related fees

     15         —           15   

Tax services fees

     16         3         19   

Other fees

     10         10         20   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     123         18         141   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

2011

        

Audit fees

     77         9         86   

Audit related fees

     10         —           10   

Tax services fees

     20         3         23   

Other fees

     16         —           16   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     123         12         135   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

2010

        

Audit fees

     79         5         84   

Audit related fees

     17         1         18   

Tax services fees

     16         2         18   

Other fees

     7         2         9   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     119         10         129   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

During the period 2010–2012, in addition to audit services, PwC provided certain audit related services, tax and other services to the Company. The audit related services include quarterly reviews, ISO audits, SSAE16 reviews and services in connection with issuing of certificates and opinions. The tax services include general expatriate services and corporate tax compliance work. Other services include consultation on financial accounting, services related to acquisitions, operational effectiveness and assessments of internal control.

Audit fees to other auditors largely consist of local statutory audits for minor companies.

 

160


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

C31    CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS

Contractual obligations 2012

 

     Payment due by period         

SEK billion

   <1
year
     1–3
years
     3–5
years
     >5
years
     Total  

Long-term debt1) 2)

     3.3         7.0         7.1         9.0         26.4   

Finance lease obligations3)

     0.2         0.3         0.2         0.8         1.5   

Operating leases3)

     2.8         3.2         1.9         2.5         10.4   

Other non-current liabilities

     0.1         0.3         0.1         1.9         2.4   

Purchase obligations4)

     5.7         —           —           —           5.7   

Trade payables

     23.1         —           —           —           23.1   

Commitments for customer finance5)

     5.9         —           —           —           5.9   

Total

     41.1         10.8         9.3         14.2         75.4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Including interest payments.
2) See Note C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments”.
3) See Note C27, “Leasing”.
4) The amounts of purchase obligations are gross, before deduction of any related provisions.
5) See also Note C14, “Trade receivables and customer finance”.

For information about financial guarantees, see Note C24, “Contingent liabilities”.

Except for those transactions described in this report, the Company has not been a party to any material contracts over the past three years other than those entered into during the ordinary course of business.

C32     TRANSFERS OF FINANCIAL ASSETS

Transfers where the Company has not derecognized the assets in their entirety

As per December 31, 2012 there existed certain customer financing assets that the Company had transferred to third parties where the Company did not derecognize the assets in their entirety. The total carrying amount of the original assets transferred was SEK 471 (194) million, the amount of the assets that the Company continues to recognize was SEK 28 (10) million, and the carrying amount of the associated liabilities was SEK 0 (0) million. More information is disclosed about Customer Finance in Note C14 “Trade receivables and customer finance”.

Transfers where the Company has continuing involvement

The Company has during 2012 derecognized financial assets where the Company had continuing involvement. A repurchase of these assets would amount to SEK 225 (596) million. No assets or liabilities were recognized in relation to the continuing involvement.

C33    EVENTS AFTER THE REPORTING PERIOD

On January 10, 2013, Ericsson entered into an agreement with Unwired Planet whereby Ericsson will transfer 2,185 issued patents and patent applications to Unwired Planet. Ericsson will also contribute 100 additional patent assets annually to Unwired Planet commencing in 2014 through 2018. Unwired Planet will compensate Ericsson with certain ongoing rights in future revenues generated from the enlarged patent portfolio. Unwired Planet will also grant Ericsson a license to its patent portfolio.

 

161


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

On January 21, 2013, Ericsson announced its intention to acquire Devoteam Telecom & Media operations in France. Devoteam has employees in Europe, Middle East and Africa. The acquisition is in line with Ericsson’s services strategy to broaden its IT capabilities.

In January 2013, ST-Ericsson was granted a loan facility by their owners of USD 260 million. Ericsson’s share of this credit facility is USD 130 million.

On January 10, 2013, Adaptix Inc. filed two lawsuits against Ericsson, AT&T, AT&T Mobility and MetroPCS Communications in the US District Court for Eastern District of Texas alleging that certain Ericsson products infringe five US patents assigned to Adaptix. Adaptix seeks damages and an injunction.

On January 25, 2013, Adaptix filed a complaint with the US International Trade Commission (ITC) against Ericsson, AT&T, AT&T Mobility and MetroPCS Communications requesting that the commission open a patent infringement investigation of certain Ericsson products and further on January 29, 2013, Adaptix filed a complaint with the Tokyo District Court alleging certain Ericsson products infringe two Japanese patents assigned to Adaptix. Adaptix seeks damages and an injunction.

On March 18, 2013, Ericsson and STMicroelectronics announced an agreement on the way forward for the joint venture (JV) ST-Ericsson.

The main steps agreed upon to split up the JV are the following: Ericsson will take on the design, development and sales of the LTE multimode thin modem products, including 2G, 3G and 4G multimode; ST will take on the existing ST-Ericsson products, other than LTE multimode thin modems, and related business as well as certain assembly and test facilities; starting the close down of the remaining parts of ST-Ericsson.

The formal transfer of the relevant parts of ST-Ericsson to the parent companies is expected to be completed during the third quarter of 2013, subject to regulatory approvals.

After the split up it is proposed that Ericsson will assume approximately 1,800 employees and contractors.

 

162


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

Ericsson’s management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for the Company. Ericsson’s internal control system related to financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and includes those policies and procedures that:

 

   

pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Company;

 

   

provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), and that receipts and expenditures of the Company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the Company; and

 

   

provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of the Company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Although the purpose of internal control systems is to ensure adequate risk management all internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations which may result in that misstatements are not prevented or detected. Therefore, even systems determined to be effective can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to the reliability of financial statement preparation and presentation.

Controls and procedures

Ericsson’s management assessed the effectiveness of Ericsson’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012. In making this assessment, management used the criteria set forth in “Internal Control—Integrated Framework”, issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

Based on this assessment, management has concluded that, as of December 31, 2012, Ericsson’s internal control over financial reporting was effective at a reasonable assurance level.

Attestation report of registered public accounting firm

The effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2012, has been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers AB, an independent registered public accounting firm. PricewaterhouseCoopers AB has issued an attestation report on Ericsson’s internal control over financial reporting, which appears on page 69.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

During the period covered by the Annual Report 2012, there were no changes to the internal control over financial reporting that have materially affected, or are likely to materially affect, the internal control over financial reporting.

 

163


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

RISK FACTORS

You should carefully consider all the information in this Annual Report and in particular the risks and uncertainties outlined below. Based on the information currently known to us, we believe that the following information identifies the most significant risk factors affecting our business. Any of the factors described below, or any other risk factors discussed elsewhere in this report, could have a material negative effect on our business, operational and after-tax results, financial position, cash flow, liquidity, credit rating, brand and/or our share price. Additional risks and uncertainties not presently known to us or that we currently believe to be immaterial may also materially adversely affect our business. Furthermore, our operational results may have a greater variability than in the past and we may have difficulties in accurately predicting future developments. See also “Forward-Looking Statements”.

MARKET, TECHNOLOGY AND BUSINESS RISKS

Challenging global economic conditions may adversely impact the demand and pricing for our products and services as well as limit our ability to grow.

Challenging global economic conditions could have adverse, wide-ranging effects on demand for our products and for the products of our customers. Adverse global economic conditions could cause operators and other customers to postpone investments or initiate other cost-cutting initiatives to improve their financial position. This could result in significantly reduced expenditures for network infrastructure and services, in which case our operating results would suffer. If demand for our products and services were to fall in the future, we could experience material adverse effects on our revenues, cash flow, capital employed and value of our assets and we could incur operating losses. Furthermore, if demand is significantly weaker or more volatile than expected, our credit rating, borrowing opportunities and costs as well as the trading price of our shares could be adversely impacted. When deemed necessary, we undertake specific restructuring or cost saving initiatives, however, there are no guarantees that such initiatives will be sufficient, successful or executed in time to deliver any improvements in our earnings.

Should global economic conditions fail to improve, or worsen, other business risks we face could intensify and could also negatively impact the business prospects of operators and other customers. Some operators and other customers, in particular in markets with weak currencies, may incur borrowing difficulties and slower traffic development, which may negatively affect their investment plans and cause them to purchase less of our products and services.

The potential adverse effects of an economic downturn include:

 

   

Reduced demand for products and services, resulting in increased price competition or deferrals of purchases, with lower revenues not fully compensated through reduced costs

 

   

Risks of excess and obsolete inventories and excess manufacturing capacity

 

   

Risk of financial difficulties or failures among our suppliers

 

   

Increased demand for customer finance, difficulties in collection of accounts receivable and increased risk of counterparty failures

 

   

Risk of impairment losses related to our intangible assets as a result of lower forecasted sales of certain products

 

   

Increased difficulties in forecasting sales and financial results as well as increased volatility in our reported results

 

164


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

A decline in the value of the assets in our pension plans and/or increased pension liabilities due to discount rate changes

 

   

End user demand could also be adversely affected by reduced consumer spending on technology, changed operator pricing, security breaches and trust issues.

The telecommunications industry fluctuates and is affected by many factors, including the economic environment, decisions by operators and other customers regarding their deployment of technology and their timing of purchases.

The telecommunications industry has experienced downturns in the past in which operators substantially reduced their capital spending on new equipment. While we expect the network service provider equipment market and telecommunications services market to grow in the coming years, the uncertainty surrounding the global economic recovery may materially harm actual market conditions. Moreover, market conditions are subject to substantial fluctuation, and could vary geographically and across technologies. Even if global conditions improve, conditions in the specific industry segments in which we participate may be weaker than in other segments. In that case, the results of our operations may be adversely affected.

If capital expenditures by operators and other customers is weaker than we anticipate, our revenues and profitability may be adversely affected. The level of demand by operators and other customers who buy our products and services can change quickly and can vary over short periods of time, including from month to month. Due to the uncertainty and variations in the telecommunications industry, accurately forecasting revenues, results, and cash flow remains difficult.

Sales volumes and gross margin levels are affected by the variation and short order time of our products and services.

Our sales to operators and other customers represent a mix of equipment, software and services, which normally generate different gross margins. We sell our own products as well as third party products, which normally have lower margins than our own products. As a consequence, our reported gross margin in a specific period will be affected by the overall mix of products and services as well as the relative content of third party products. Further, network expansions and upgrades have much shorter lead times for delivery than initial network build outs. Orders for such network expansions and upgrades are normally placed with short notice by customers, often with less than a month’s notice, and consequently variations in demand are difficult to forecast. As a result, changes in our product and service mix and the short order time for certain of our products may affect our ability to accurately forecast sales and margins or detect in advance whether actual results will deviate from market consensus. Short-term variation could have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition.

We may not be able to properly respond to market trends in the industries in which we operate, including the ongoing convergence of the telecom, data and media industries, which may harm our market position relative to our competitors.

We are affected by market conditions and trends within the industries in which we operate, including the convergence of the telecom, data and media industries. Convergence is largely driven by technological development related to IP-based communications. This has changed the competitive landscape and affects our objective setting, risk assessment and strategies. Competitors new to our business may enter this new business context and negatively impact our market share in selected areas. If we fail to understand the market development, or fail to acquire the necessary competences to develop and market products, services and solutions that are competitive in this changing market, our business, operating results and financial condition will suffer.

 

165


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Our business depends upon the continued growth of mobile communications and the acceptance of new services. If growth slows or new services do not succeed, operators’ investment in networks may slow or stop, harming our business.

A substantial portion of our business depends on the continued growth of mobile communications in terms of both the number of subscriptions and usage per subscriber, which in turn drives the continued deployment and expansion of network systems by our customers. If operators fail to increase the number of subscribers and/or stimulate increased usage, our business and operational results could be materially adversely affected. Also, if operators fail to monetize new services, fail to introduce new business models or experience a decline in operator revenues or profitability, their willingness to further invest in their network systems may decrease which will reduce their demand for our products and services and have an adverse effect on our business, operational results and financial condition.

Fixed and mobile networks converge and new technologies, such as IP and broadband, enable operators to deliver a range of new types of services in both fixed and mobile networks. We are dependent upon market acceptance of such services and the outcome of regulatory and standardization activities in this field, such as spectrum allocation. If delays in standardization, regulation, or market acceptance occur, this could adversely affect our business, operational results and financial condition.

We face intense competition from our existing competitors as well as new entrants, including IT companies entering the telecommunications market, and this could materially adversely affect our results.

The markets in which we operate are highly competitive in terms of price, functionality, service quality, customization, timing of development, and the introduction of new products and services. We face intense competition from significant competitors many of which are very large, with substantial technological and financial resources and established relationships with operators. Further, certain competitors, Chinese companies in particular, have become relatively stronger in recent years. We may also encounter increased competition from new market entrants, alternative technologies or due to evolving industry standards. In particular, we may face competition from large IT companies entering the telecommunications market who benefit from economies of scale from being active in several industries. We cannot assure that we will be able to compete successfully with these companies. Our competitors may implement new technologies before we do, offer more attractively priced or enhanced products, services or solutions, or they may offer other incentives that we do not provide. Some of our competitors may also have greater resources in certain business segments or geographic markets than we do. Increased competition could result in reduced profit margins, loss of market share, increased research and development costs as well as increased sales and marketing expenses. Traffic development on cellular networks could be affected if more traffic is off-loaded to Wi-Fi networks. Further, alternative services provided over-the-top have profound effects on operator voice/ SMS revenues with possible reduced capital expenses consequences.

Additionally, we operate in markets characterized by rapidly changing technology. This results in continuous price erosion and increased price competition for our products and services. If our counter measures, including enhanced products and business models or cost reductions cannot be achieved or do not occur in a timely manner, there could be adverse impacts on our business, operating results, financial condition and market share.

Vendor consolidation may lead to stronger competitors who are able to benefit from integration, scale and greater resources.

Industry convergence and consolidation among equipment and services suppliers could potentially result in stronger competitors that are competing as end-to-end suppliers as well as competitors more specialized in particular areas. Consolidation may also result in competitors with greater resources than we have or in reduction of our current scale advantages. This could have a materially adverse effect on our business, operating results, financial condition and market share.

 

166


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

A significant portion of our revenue is currently generated from a limited number of key customers, and operator consolidation may increase our dependence on key customers.

We derive most of our business from large, multi-year frame agreements with a limited number of significant customers. Many of these agreements are opened up on a yearly basis to re-negotiate the price for our products and services and do not contain committed purchase volumes. Although no single customer represents more than 7% of our sales in 2012, our ten largest customers accounted for 46% of our sales in 2012. A loss of or a reduced role with a key customer could have a significant adverse impact on sales, profit and market share for an extended period.

In recent years, network operators have undergone significant consolidation, resulting in a fewer number of operators with activities in several countries. This trend is expected to continue, and intra-country consolidation is likely to accelerate as a result of competitive pressure. A market with fewer and larger operators will increase our reliance on key customers and may negatively impact our bargaining position and profit margins. Moreover, if the combined companies operate in the same geographic market, networks may be shared and less network equipment and associated services may be required. Network investments could be delayed by the consolidation process, which may include, among others, actions relating to merger or acquisition agreements, securing necessary regulatory approvals, or integration of their businesses. Network operators have started to share parts of their network infrastructure through cooperation agreements rather than legal consolidations, which may adversely affect demand for network equipment. Accordingly, operator consolidation may have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition.

Certain long-term frame agreements with customers still include commitments to future price reductions, requiring us to constantly manage and control our cost base.

Long-term frame agreements with our customers are typically awarded on a competitive bidding basis. In some cases, such agreements also include a commitment to future price reductions. In order to maintain our gross margin with such price reductions, we continuously strive to reduce the costs of our products through design improvements, negotiation of better purchase prices from our suppliers, allocation of more production to low-cost countries and increased productivity in our own production. However, there can be no assurance that our actions to reduce costs will be sufficient or quick enough to maintain our gross margin in such contracts, which may have a material adverse effect on our operating results.

Growth of our managed services business is difficult to predict, and requires taking significant contractual risks.

Operators increasingly outsource parts of their operations to reduce cost and focus on new services. To address this opportunity, we offer operators various services in which we manage their networks. The growth rate in the managed services market is difficult to forecast and each new contract carries a risk that transformation and integration of the operations will not be as fast or smooth as planned. Additionally, early contract margins are generally low and the mix of new and old contracts may negatively affect reported results in a given period. Contracts for such services normally cover several years and generate recurring revenues. However, contracts have been, and may in the future be, terminated or reduced in scope, which has negative impacts on sales and earnings. While we believe we have a strong position in the managed services market, competition in this area is increasing, which may have adverse effects on our future growth and profitability.

We depend upon the development of new products and enhancements to our existing products, and the success of our substantial research and development investments is uncertain.

Rapid technological and market changes in our industry require us to make significant investments in technological innovation. We invest significantly in new technology, products and solutions. In order for us to be successful, those technologies, products and solutions must be accepted by relevant standardization bodies and

 

167


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

by the industry as a whole. There can be no assurance that our research and development efforts will be technically or commercially successful. If we invest in the development of technologies, products and solutions that do not function as expected, are not adopted by the industry, are not ready in time, or are not successful in the marketplace our sales and earnings may materially suffer. Additionally, it is common for research and development projects to encounter delays due to unforeseen problems. Delays in production may increase the cost of research and development efforts and put us at a disadvantage against our competition.

We engage in acquisitions and divestments which may be disruptive and require us to incur significant expenses.

In addition to in-house innovation efforts, we make strategic acquisitions in order to obtain various benefits such as reduced time-to-market, access to technology and competence, increased scale or to broaden our product portfolio or customer base. Future acquisitions could result in the incurrence of contingent liabilities and an increase in amortization expenses related to goodwill and other intangible assets, which could have a material adverse effect upon our business, financial condition and results of operations. Risks we could face with respect to acquisitions include:

 

   

Difficulties in the integration of the operations, technologies, products and personnel of the acquired company

 

   

Risks of entering markets in which we have no or limited

 

   

prior experience

 

   

Potential loss of employees

 

   

Diversion of management’s attention away from other business concerns

 

   

Expenses of any undisclosed or potential legal liabilities of the acquired company.

From time to time we also divest parts of our business to optimize our product portfolio or operations. Any decision to dispose of or otherwise exit businesses may result in the recording of special charges, such as workforce reduction costs and industry and technology-related write-offs. We cannot assure that we will be successful in consummating future acquisitions or divestments on favourable terms or at all. The risks associated with such acquisitions and divestments could have a material adverse effect upon our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We are a party to joint ventures and partnerships which may not be successful and expose us to future costs.

We are partners in joint ventures and partnerships. Our partnering arrangements may fail to perform as expected for various reasons, including an incorrect assessment of our needs, our inability to take action without the approval of our partners or the capabilities or financial stability of our strategic partners. Our ability to work with these partners or develop new products and solutions may become constrained, which could harm our competitive position in the market.

Additionally, our share of any losses from or commitments to contribute additional capital to such partnerships may adversely affect our results of operations or financial position.

The Board of Directors’ report includes further information regarding our joint venture ST Ericsson.

We rely on a limited number of suppliers of components, production capacity and R&D and IT services, which exposes us to supply disruptions and cost increases.

Our ability to deliver according to market demands and contractual commitments depends significantly on obtaining a timely and adequate supply of materials, components, production capacity and other vital services on

 

168


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

competitive terms. Although we strive to avoid single-source supplier solutions, this is not always possible. Accordingly, there is a risk that we will be unable to obtain key supplies we need to produce our products and provide our services on commercially reasonable terms, or at all. Failure by any of our suppliers could interrupt our product or services supply or operations and significantly limit sales or increase our costs. To find an alternative supplier or re-design products to replace components may take significant time which could cause significant delays or interruptions in the delivery of our products and services. We have from time to time experienced interruptions of supply and we may experience such interruptions in the future.

Furthermore, our procurement of supplies requires us to predict future customer demands. If we fail to anticipate customer demand properly, an over or under supply of components and production capacity could occur. In many cases, some of our competitors utilize the same contract manufacturers and if they have purchased capacity ahead of us we could be blocked from acquiring the needed products. This factor could limit our ability to supply our customers or could increase costs. At the same time, we commit to certain capacity levels or component quantities, which, if unused, will result in charges for unused capacity or scrapping costs. We are also exposed to financial counterpart risks to suppliers where we pay in advance for supplies.

Product or service quality issues could lead to reduced revenue, gross margins and declining sales to existing customers.

Sales contracts normally include warranty undertakings for faulty products and often include provisions regarding penalties and/or termination rights in the event of a failure to deliver ordered products or services on time or with required quality. Although we undertake a number of quality assurance measures to reduce such risks, product quality or service performance issues may negatively affect our reputation, results and financial position. If significant warranty obligations arise due to reliability or quality issues, our operating results and financial position could be negatively impacted by costs associated with fixing software or hardware defects, high service and warranty expenses, high inventory obsolescence expense, delays in collecting accounts receivable or declining sales to existing customers.

Due to having a significant portion of our costs in SEK and revenues in other currencies, our business is exposed to foreign exchange fluctuations that could negatively impact our revenue and results of operation.

We incur a significant portion of our expenses in SEK. As a result of our international operations, we generate, and expect to continue to generate, a significant portion of our revenue in currencies other than SEK. To the extent we are unable to match revenue received in foreign currencies with costs paid in the same currency, exchange rate fluctuations could have a negative impact on our consolidated income statement, balance sheet and cash flows when foreign currencies are exchanged or translated to SEK, which increases volatility in reported results.

As market prices are predominantly established in USD or EUR, we presently have a net revenue exposure in foreign currencies which means that a stronger SEK exchange rate would generally have a negative effect on our reported results. Our attempts to reduce the effects of exchange rate fluctuations through a variety of hedging activities may not be sufficient or successful, resulting in an adverse impact on our results.

Our ability to benefit from intellectual property rights (IPR) which are critical to our business may be limited by changes in regulation limiting patents, inability to prevent infringement, the loss of licenses from third parties and IP infringement claims brought against us by competitors.

Although we have a large number of patents, there can be no assurance that they will not be challenged, invalidated, or circumvented, or that any rights granted in relation to our patents will in fact provide us with competitive advantages.

 

169


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In 2005, the European Union considered restricting the patentability of software. Although the European Union ultimately rejected this proposal, we cannot guarantee that they will not revisit this issue in the future. We rely on many software patents, and limitations on the patentability of software may materially affect our business.

We utilize a combination of trade secrets, confidentiality policies, nondisclosure and other contractual arrangements in addition to relying on patent, copyright and trademark laws to protect our intellectual property rights. However, these measures may not be adequate to prevent or deter infringement or other misappropriation. Moreover, we may not be able to detect unauthorized use or take appropriate and timely steps to establish and enforce our proprietary rights. In fact, existing laws of some countries in which we conduct business offer only limited protection of intellectual property rights, if at all.

Our solutions may also require us to license technologies from third parties. It may be necessary in the future to seek or renew licenses and there can be no assurance that they would be available on acceptable terms, or at all. Moreover, the inclusion in our products of software or other intellectual property licensed from third parties on a non-exclusive basis could limit our ability to protect proprietary rights in our products.

Many key aspects of telecommunications and data network technology are governed by industry-wide standards usable by all market participants. As the number of market entrants and the complexity of technology increases, the possibility of functional overlap and inadvertent infringement of intellectual property rights also increases. Third parties have asserted, and may assert in the future, claims, directly against us or against our customers, alleging infringement of their intellectual property rights. Defending such claims may be expensive, time-consuming and divert the efforts of our management and/or technical personnel. As a result of litigation, we could be required to pay damages and other compensation directly or to indemnify our customers for such damages and other compensation, develop non-infringing products/technology or enter into royalty or licensing agreements. However, we cannot be certain that such licenses will be available to us on commercially reasonable terms or at all, and such judgments could have a materially adverse effect on our business.

We are involved in lawsuits and investigations which, if determined against us, could require us to pay substantial damages, fines and/or penalties.

In the normal course of our business we are involved in legal proceedings. These lawsuits include such matters as commercial disputes, claims regarding intellectual property, antitrust, tax and labour disputes. Litigation can be expensive, lengthy and disruptive to normal business operations. Moreover, the results of complex legal proceedings are difficult to predict. An unfavourable resolution of a particular lawsuit could have a material adverse effect on our business, reputation, operating results, or financial condition.

As a publicly listed company, Ericsson may be exposed to lawsuits in which plaintiffs allege that the Company or its officers have failed to comply with securities laws, stock market regulations or other laws, regulations or requirements. Whether or not there is merit to such claims, the time and costs incurred to defend the Company and its officers and the potential settlement or compensation to the plaintiffs could have significant impact on our reported results and reputation. For additional information regarding certain of the lawsuits in which we are involved, see “Legal proceedings” in the Board of Directors’ Report.

Our operations are complex and several critical operations are centralized in a single location. Any disruption of our operations, whether due to natural or man made events, may be highly damaging to the operation of our business.

Our business operations rely on complex operations and communications networks, which are vulnerable to damage or disturbance from a variety of sources. Having outsourced a significant portion of our IT operations, we depend partly on security and reliability measures of external companies. Regardless of protection measures, our systems and communications networks are susceptible to disruption due to failure, vandalism, computer

 

170


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

viruses, security breaches, natural disasters, power outages and other events. We also have a concentration of operations on certain sites, including R&D, production, network operation centres, and logistic centres and shared services centres, where business interruptions could cause material damage and costs. The delivery of goods from suppliers, and to customers, could also be hampered for the reasons stated above. We cannot provide any assurance that interruptions to our systems and communications will not have an adverse effect on our operations and financial conditions.

Cyber security incidents affecting our business may have a material adverse effect on our business operations, financial condition and brand.

Ericsson’s business operations involve areas that are particularly vulnerable to cyber security incidents such as data breaches, intrusions, espionage, knowhow and data privacy infringements, leakage and general malfeasance. Examples of these areas include, amongst others, research and development, managed services, usage of cloud solutions, software development, lawful interception and product engineering. Any cyber security incident including unintended use, involving our operations, product development, services, our third party providers or installed product base, could cause severe harm to Ericsson and could have a material adverse effect on our business operations, financial condition and brand.

Ericsson relies heavily on third parties to whom we have outsourced significant aspects of our IT infrastructure, product development and engineering services. While we have taken precautions relating to the selection, integration and ongoing management of these third parties, any event or attack that is caused as a result of vulnerabilities in their operations or products supplied to us, could have a material adverse effect upon Ericsson, our business operations, financial condition and brand, potentially slowing operations, leaking valuable intellectual property or damaging our products which have been installed in our customers’ networks.

We must continue to attract and retain highly qualified employees to remain competitive.

We believe that our future success largely depends on our continued ability to hire, develop, motivate and retain engineers and other qualified personnel needed to develop successful new products, support our existing product range and provide services to our customers.

Competition for skilled personnel and highly qualified managers in the telecommunications industry remains intense. We are continuously developing our corporate culture, remuneration, promotion and benefits policies as well as other measures aimed at empowering our employees and reducing employee turnover. However, there are no guarantees that we will be successful in attracting and retaining employees with appropriate skills in the future, and failure in retention and recruiting could have a material adverse effect on our business.

If our customers’ financial conditions decline, we will be exposed to increased credit and commercial risks.

After completing sales to customers, we may encounter difficulty collecting accounts receivables and could be exposed to risks associated with uncollectable accounts receivable. We regularly assess the credit worthiness of our customers and based on that we determine a credit limit for each one of them. Challenging economic conditions have impacted some of our customers’ ability to pay their accounts receivables. Although our credit losses have historically been low and we have policies and procedures for managing customer finance credit risk we may be unable to avoid future losses on our trade receivables. We have also experienced demands for customer financing, and in adverse financial markets or more competitive environments, those demands may increase. Upon the financial failure of a customer, we may experience losses on credit extended and loans made to such customer, losses relating to our commercial risk exposure, and the loss of the customer’s on-going business. If customers fail to meet their obligations to us, we may experience reduced cash flows and losses in excess of reserves, which could materially adversely impact our results of operations and financial position.

 

171


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

We rely on various capital sources for short-term and long-term capital for the funding of our business. Should such capital become unavailable or available in insufficient amounts or unreasonable terms, our business may materially suffer.

If we do not generate sufficient amounts of capital to support our operations, service our debt and continue our research and development and customer finance programs, or if we cannot raise sufficient amounts of capital at the required times and terms, our business is likely to be adversely affected. Access to funding may decrease or become more expensive as a result of our operational and financial condition, market conditions, including financial conditions in the Euro-zone, or due to deterioration in our credit rating. There can be no assurance that additional sources of funds that we from time to time may need, will be available or available on reasonable terms. If we cannot access capital on commercially viable terms, our business could materially suffer.

Impairment of goodwill may negatively impact financial condition.

An impairment of goodwill or other intangible assets could adversely affect our financial condition or results of operations. We have a significant amount of goodwill and intangible assets, for example patents, customer relations, trademarks and software. Goodwill is the only intangible asset the company has recognized to have indefinite useful life.

Other intangible assets are mainly amortized on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives, but no more than ten years, and are reviewed for impairment whenever events such as product discontinuances, product dispositions or other changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be wholly recoverable. Those not yet in use are tested for impairment annually.

Historically, we have recognized impairment charges related to intangible assets mainly due to restructuring. Additional impairment charges may be incurred in the future that could be significant due to various reasons, including restructuring actions or adverse market conditions that are either specific to us or the broader telecommunications industry or more general in nature and that could have an adverse effect on our results of operations or financial condition.

Negative deviations in actual cash flows compared to estimated cash flows as well as new estimates that indicate lower future cash flows might result in recognition of impairment charges. Estimates require management judgment as well as the definition of cash generating units for impairment testing purposes. Other judgments might result in significantly different results and financial position in the future.

REGULATORY, COMPLIANCE AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE RISKS

Our business may suffer as a result of changes in laws or regulations which could subject us to liability, increase costs, or reduce product demand.

Telecommunications is an industry which is subject to regulations. Changes to these regulations may adversely affect both our customers’ and our own operations. For example, regulations imposing more stringent, time-consuming or costly planning and zoning requirements or building approvals for radio base stations and other network infrastructure could adversely affect the timing and costs of network construction or expansion, and ultimately the commercial launch and success of these networks. Similarly, tariff and roaming regulations or rules on network neutrality could also affect operators’ ability or willingness to invest in network infrastructure, which in turn could affect the sales of our systems and services. Additionally, delay in radio frequency spectrum allocation, and allocation between different types of usage may affect operator spending adversely or force us to develop new products to be able to compete.

Further, we develop many of our products and services based on existing regulations and technical standards. Changes to existing regulations and technical standards, or the implementation of new regulations and

 

172


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

technical standards relating to products and services not previously regulated, could adversely affect our development efforts by increasing compliance costs and causing delay. Demand for those products and services could also decline. Regulatory changes in license fees, environmental, health and safety, privacy and other regulatory areas may increase costs and restrict our operations or the operations of network operators and service providers. Also indirect impacts of such changes and regulatory changes in other fields, such as pricing regulations, could have an adverse impact on our business even though the specific regulations may not apply directly to our products or us.

Ericsson may fail or be unable to comply with laws or regulations and could experience adverse rulings in enforcement or other proceedings, which could have a material adverse impact on our business operations, financial condition and brand.

Our substantial international operations are subject to uncertainties which could affect our operating results.

We conduct business throughout the world and are subject to the effects of general global economic conditions as well as conditions unique to specific countries or regions. We have customers in more than 180 countries, with a significant proportion of our sales to emerging markets in the Asia Pacific region, Latin America, Eastern Europe, the Middle East and Africa.

Our extensive operations are subject to numerous additional risks, including civil disturbances, economic and political instability, the imposition of exchange controls, economies which are subject to significant fluctuations, nationalization of private assets or other governmental actions affecting the flow of goods and currency, and difficulty of enforcing agreements and collecting receivables through local legal systems. Further, in certain markets in which we operate, there is a risk of protectionist governmental measures implemented to assist domestic market participants at the expense of foreign competitors. The implementation of such measures could adversely affect sales or our ability to purchase critical components.

We must always comply with relevant export control regulations and sanctions or other trade embargoes in force, not only at the time of sale but also at the time of delivery. The political situation in parts of the world, particularly in the Middle East, has led to an increase of sanctions imposed by the global community. A universal element of these sanctions is the financial restrictions with respect to individuals and/or legal entities, but sanctions can also restrict certain exports and ultimately lead to a complete trade embargo towards a country. In particular, the sanctions towards Iran have been strengthened significantly during 2012, both by the EU and the U.S. Even though the EU has imposed a ban on deliveries on many items, especially so called dual use items, an exemption for certain standard telecom equipment is still maintained.

There is a risk in many of these countries of unexpected changes in regulatory requirements, tariffs and other trade barriers, price or exchange controls, or other governmental policies which could limit our operations and decrease our profitability. Further export control regulations, sanctions or other forms of trade restrictions imposed on countries in which we are active may result in a reduction of commitment in those countries. The need to terminate activities as a result of further trade restrictions may also expose us to customer claims and other actions. Although we seek to comply with all such regulations, there can be no assurance that we are, or will be in the future, compliant with all relevant regulations and such violations, even unintentional violations, could have material adverse effects on our business, operational results and brand.

There has been a growing concern reported by media and others, that certain countries may use features of their telecommunications systems violating the human rights. This may adversely affect the telecommunications business and may have a negative impact on our brand.

 

173


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

As a result of the credit crisis in Europe, concerns persist regarding the debt burden of certain Eurozone countries and their ability to meet future financial obligations, the overall stability of the euro and the suitability of the euro as a single currency given the diverse economic and political circumstances in individual member states. These and other concerns could in worst case lead to the re-introduction of individual currencies in one or more member states, or, in more extreme circumstances, the possible dissolution of the euro entirely. These potential developments, or market perceptions concerning these and related issues, could adversely affect our operations and have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition.

We may fail to comply with our corporate governance standards which could negatively affect our financial condition, business, results of operations and our brand.

We are subject to corporate governance laws and regulations and are also committed to several corporate responsibility and environmental initiatives. In some of the countries where we operate corruption risks are high. In addition, there is higher focus on anticorruption, with changed legislation in many countries. To ensure that our operations are executed in accordance with applicable requirements, our management system includes a Code of Business Ethics, a Sustainability Policy, as well as other policies and directives to govern our processes and operations. Our commitment to apply the UN Guiding principles for business and human rights to our operation cannot prevent unintended or unlawful use of our technology by non democratic regimes. While we attempt to monitor and audit internal compliance with the policies and directives as well as our suppliers’ adherence to our Code of Conduct and strive for continuous improvements, we cannot provide any assurances that violations will not occur which could have material adverse effects on our operations, business results and brand.

Failure to comply with environmental, health and safety regulations in many jurisdictions may expose us to significant penalties and other sanctions.

We are subject to certain environmental, health and safety laws and regulations that affect our operations, facilities and products in each of the jurisdictions in which we operate. While we believe that we are in compliance with all material laws and regulations related to the environment, health, and safety, we can provide no assurance that we have been, are, or will in the future be compliant with these regulations. If we have failed or fail to comply with these regulations, we could be subject to significant penalties and other sanctions that could have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition. Additionally, there is a risk that we may have to incur expenditures to cover environmental and health liabilities to maintain compliance with current or future laws and regulations or to undertake any necessary remediation. It is difficult to reasonably estimate the future impact of environmental matters, such as climate change and weather events, including potential liabilities. This is due to several factors, particularly the length of time often involved in resolving such matters. Adverse future events, regulations, or judgments could have a material effect on our business, operating results and financial condition.

Potential health risks related to electromagnetic fields may subject us to various product liability claims and result in regulatory changes.

The mobile telecommunications industry is subject to claims that mobile handsets and other devices that generate electromagnetic fields expose users to health risks. At present, a substantial number of scientific studies conducted by various independent research bodies have indicated that electromagnetic fields, at levels within the limits prescribed by public health authority safety standards and recommendations, cause no adverse effects to human health. However, any perceived risk or new scientific findings of adverse health effects from mobile communication devices and equipment could adversely affect us through a reduction in sales or through liability claims. Although Ericsson’s products are designed to comply with all current safety standards and

 

174


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

recommendations regarding applicable electromagnetic fields, we cannot guarantee that we or the jointly owned ST-Ericsson will not become the subject of product liability claims or be held liable for such claims or be required to comply with future regulatory changes that may have an adverse effect on our business, operating results and financial condition.

New regulations related to “conflict minerals” may cause us to incur additional expenses, and may make our supply chain more complex.

On August 22, 2012, the US Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”), adopted a new rule requiring disclosures beginning in 2014 of specified minerals (“conflict minerals”) that are necessary to the functionality or production of products manufactured or contracted to be manufactured by companies registered with the SEC, whether or not these products or its components are manufactured by third parties. While we believe that we will be able to fulfill these requirements without materially affecting our costs or access to materials, we can provide no assurance that there will not be material costs associated with complying with the disclosure requirements.

While we work and strive to be able to sufficiently verify the origins of these minerals, our supply chain is complex, and we may not be able to sufficiently verify the origins of the relevant minerals used in our products through the due diligence procedures that we implement, which may harm our reputation. In addition, we may encounter challenges if customers require that all of the components of our products be certified as conflict-free. These new disclosure requirements may negatively affect our brand, financial condition, business and results of operations.

RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH OWNING ERICSSON SHARES

Our share price has been and may continue to be volatile, especially as technology companies, securities and markets as a whole remain volatile.

Our share price has been volatile due to various factors, including our operating performance as well as the high volatility in the securities markets generally and volatility in telecommunications and technology companies’ securities in particular. Our share price is also likely to be affected by future developments in our market, our reported financial results and the expectations of financial analysts, as well as statements and market speculation regarding our future prospects or the timing or content of any public communications, including reports of operating results, by us or our competitors.

Factors other than our financial results that may affect our share price include, but are not limited to:

 

   

A weakening of our brand name or other circumstances with adverse effects on our reputation

 

   

Announcements by our customers, competitors or us regarding capital spending plans of our customers

 

   

Financial difficulties for our customers

 

   

Awards of large supply or service contracts

 

   

Speculation in the press or investment community about the business level or growth in the telecommunications market

 

   

Technical problems, in particular those relating to the introduction and viability of new network systems, including lte/4g and new platforms such as the rbs 6000 (multi-standard radio base station) platform

 

   

Actual or expected results of ongoing or potential litigation

 

175


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Announcements concerning bankruptcy or investigations into the accounting procedures of ourselves or other telecommunications companies

 

   

Our ability to forecast and communicate our future results in a manner consistent with investor expectations.

Currency fluctuations may adversely affect share value or value of dividends.

Because our shares are quoted in SEK on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm (our primary stock exchange), but in USD on NASDAQ New York (ADSs), fluctuations in exchange rates between SEK and USD may affect the value of our shareholders’ investment. In addition, because we pay cash dividends in SEK, fluctuations in exchange rates may affect the value of distributions when converted into other currencies. An increasing part of the trade in our shares is carried out on alternative exchanges or markets, which may lead to less accurate share price information on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm or NASDAQ New York.

 

176


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This Annual Report includes forward-looking statements, including statements reflecting management’s current views relating to the growth of the market, future market conditions, future events and expected operational and financial performance. The words “believe”, “expect”, “foresee”, “anticipate”, “assume”, “intend”, “may”, “could”, “plan”, “estimate”, “forecast”, “will”, “should”, “predict”, “aim”, “ambition”, “target”, “might” or, in each case, their negative, and similar words are intended to help identify forward-looking statements.

Forward-looking statements may be found throughout this document, but in particular in the chapter “Board of Directors’ Report” and include statements regarding:

 

   

Our goals, strategies and operational or financial performance expectations

 

   

Development of corporate governance standards, stock market regulations and related legislation

 

   

The future characteristics of the markets in which we operate

 

   

Projections and other characterizations of future events

 

   

Our liquidity, capital resources, capital expenditures, our credit ratings and the development in the capital markets, affecting our industry or us

 

   

The expected demand for our existing as well as new products and services

 

   

The expected operational or financial performance of our joint ventures and other strategic cooperation activities

 

   

The time until acquired entities will be accretive to income

 

   

Technology and industry trends including regulatory and standardization environment, competition and our customer structure

 

   

Our plans for new products and services including research and development expenditures.

Although we believe that the expectations reflected in these and other forward-looking statements are reasonable, we cannot assure you that these expectations will materialize. Because forward-looking statements are based on assumptions, judgments and estimates, and are subject to risks and uncertainties, actual results could differ materially from those described or implied herein.

Important factors that could affect whether and to what extent any of our forward-looking statements materialize include, but are not limited to:

 

   

Our ability to respond to changes in the telecommunications market and other general market conditions in a cost effective and timely manner

 

   

Developments in the political, economic or regulatory environment affecting the markets in which we operate, including trade embargoes, changes in tax rates, changes in patent protection regulations, allegations of health risks from electromagnetic fields, cost of radio licenses for our customers, allocation of radio frequencies for different purposes and results of standardization activities

 

   

The effectiveness of our strategies and their execution, including partnerships, acquisitions and divestments

 

   

Financial risks, including changes in foreign exchange rates or interest rates, lack of liquidity or access to financing, our credit ratings, changes in tax liabilities, credit risks in relation to counterparties, customer defaults under significant customer finance arrangements and risks of confiscation of assets in foreign countries

 

177


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

The financial strength of our customer base

 

   

The impact of the consolidation in the industry, and the resulting (i) reduction in the number of customers, and adverse consequences of a loss of, or significant decline in, our business with a major customer; (ii) increased strength of a competitor or the establishment of new competitors

 

   

The impact of changes in product demand, technology adoption, price erosion, competition from existing or new competitors or new technologies or alliances between vendors of different types of technology and the risk that our products and services may not sell at the rates or levels we anticipate

 

   

The product mix and margins of our sales

 

   

The volatility of market demand and difficulties to forecast such demand

 

   

Our ability to develop commercially viable products, systems and services, to acquire licenses of necessary technology, to protect our intellectual property rights through patents and trademarks and to license them to others and defend them against infringement, and the results of patent litigation

 

   

Our ability to manage cyber security incidents

 

   

Supply constraints, including component or production capacity shortages, suppliers’ abilities to cost effectively deliver quality products on time and in sufficient volumes, and risks related to concentration of proprietary or outsourced production in a single facility or sole source situations with a single vendor

 

   

Our ability to successfully manage operators’ networks to their satisfaction with satisfactory margins

 

   

Our ability to maintain a strong brand and good reputation and to be acknowledged for good corporate governance

 

   

Our ability to recruit and retain qualified management and other key employees

 

   

Our ability to trace conflict minerals in our complex supply chain.

Certain of these risks and uncertainties are described further in “Risk factors”. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements included in this Annual Report, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by applicable law or stock exchange regulation.

 

178


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 2012

Corporate governance describes how rights and responsibilities are distributed among corporate bodies according to applicable laws, rules and processes. Corporate governance also defines the decision-making systems and structure through which owners directly or indirectly control a company.

Good corporate governance forms the basis for building a robust corporate culture throughout a global organization. Efficient and reliable controls and procedures are important, but it is also crucial that ethical business practices are highly valued and followed by all people in the organization—starting at the top.

As Chairman of the Board, it is my responsibility to ensure that the Board’s work is efficient and that applicable principles and processes in the Board’s work procedure are complied with. The Board of Directors’ main tasks include supporting Group management and exercising critical review of their work. To be able to fulfill these tasks successfully, it is also my responsibility as Chairman to enable an open and meaningful dialogue between the Board and Group management. Relevant and timely information from Group management is very important as it forms the best possible basis for the Board’s discussions and resolutions. The Board’s work is constantly evaluated and improved to allow the Board to fulfill its duties successfully.

I believe that Ericsson’s continuous focus on corporate governance matters, ethical business and open and meaningful dialogue within the organization promote sustainable business. I believe that this, in turn, generates value for Ericsson’s shareholders.

Leif Johansson

Chairman of the Board of Directors

This Corporate Governance Report is rendered as a separate report added to the Annual Report in accordance with the Annual Accounts Act ((SFS 1995:1554) Chapter 6, Sections 6 and 8) and the Swedish Corporate Governance Code. The report has been reviewed by Ericsson’s auditor in accordance with the Annual Accounts Act.

 

179


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

REGULATION AND COMPLIANCE

External rules

As a Swedish public limited liability company with securities quoted on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm as well as on NASDAQ New York, Ericsson is subject to a variety of rules that affect its governance. Major external rules include:

 

   

The Swedish Companies Act

 

   

The Rule Book for issuers of NASDAQ OMX Stockholm

 

   

The Swedish Corporate Governance Code (the “Code”)

 

   

NASDAQ Stock Market Rules, including applicable NASDAQ New York corporate governance requirements (subject to certain exemptions principally reflecting mandatory Swedish legal requirements)

 

   

Applicable requirements of the US Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”).

Internal rules

In addition, to ensure compliance with legal and regulatory requirements and the high ethical standards that we set for ourselves, Ericsson has adopted internal rules that include:

 

   

A Code of Business Ethics

 

   

Group Steering Documents, including Group policies and directives, instructions and business processes for approval, control and risk management

 

   

A Code of Conduct, to be applied in the product development, production, supply and support of Ericsson products and services worldwide.

The work procedure for the Board of Directors also includes internal corporate governance rules.

Compliance with the Swedish Corporate Governance Code

The Code has been applied by Ericsson since 2005. Ericsson is committed to complying with best-practice corporate governance on a global level wherever possible. This includes continued compliance with the Code. Ericsson has not deviated from any of the rules of the Code. The Code can be found on the website of the Swedish Corporate Governance Board which administrates the Code: www.corporategovernanceboard.se.

Compliance with applicable stock exchange rules

There has been no infringement of applicable stock exchange rules and no breach of good practice on the securities market reported by the stock exchange’s disciplinary committee or the Swedish Securities Council.

Code of Business Ethics

Ericsson’s Code of Business Ethics sets out how the Group works to achieve and maintain high ethical standards. It summarizes the Group’s basic policies and directives and underpins the importance of ethical conduct in all business activities.

The Code of Business Ethics has been translated into 30 languages. This ensures that it is accessible to all employees. During recruitment, employees acknowledge that they are aware of the principles of the Code of

 

180


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Business Ethics. This procedure is repeated at regular intervals throughout the term of employment. Through this process, Ericsson strives to raise awareness and to ensure that the business is run with integrity so that Ericsson can maintain credibility with customers, partners, employees, shareholders and other stakeholders. During 2012, the Code of Business Ethics was reviewed and updated and acknowledged by employees throughout the global organization. In addition, Ericsson’s whistleblower procedure was extended to a greater scope.

All employees have an individual responsibility to ensure that business practices adhere to the Code of Business Ethics.

 

LOGO

GOVERNANCE STRUCTURE

Shareholders may exercise their decision-making rights in the Company at General Meetings of shareholders.

A Nomination Committee is appointed by the major shareholders in accordance with the Instruction for the Nomination Committee adopted by the Annual General Meeting of shareholders. The tasks of the Nomination Committee include the proposal of an external auditor and the proposal of Board members for election by the Annual General Meeting of shareholders.

In addition to the Directors elected by shareholders, the Board of Directors consists of employee representatives appointed by the unions. The Board of Directors is ultimately responsible for the organization of Ericsson and the management of its operations.

The President and CEO, appointed by the Board of Directors, is responsible for handling the day-to-day management of Ericsson in accordance with instructions from the Board. The President and CEO is supported by the Executive Leadership Team (ELT).

The external auditor of Ericsson is elected by the General Meeting of shareholders.

SUSTAINABILITY, CORPORATE RESPONSIBILITY AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility (CR) are important parts of Ericsson’s corporate governance framework. For Ericsson, sustainability is about long-term social equity, economic prosperity and environmental performance. CR is about maintaining the necessary controls to minimize risks, while creating positive business impacts for Ericsson’s stakeholders and brand, by linking products, services and solutions to an overall business goal of sustainable growth, ensuring that Ericsson is a trusted partner to its stakeholders. Ericsson’s Sustainability and CR strategy is integrated in the Group’s yearly strategy process and implemented in the business units and the regions. The strategy process is further described on pages 204 and 205. CR risks are also included in Ericsson’s risk management framework.

 

181


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

During 2012, Ericsson’s continued focus on sustainability and CR matters was reflected through a number of corporate governance activities within the organization:

 

 

Effective October 2012, Ericsson’s Head of Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility reports directly to the President and CEO. This repositioning of the Sustainability and CR unit within the organization was made to better integrate the sustainability and CR work with the company’s business operations, decision-making, culture and ways of working and to help build sustainable value creation for Ericsson.

 

 

Ericsson’s Code of Business Ethics was reviewed and updated and now includes a commitment to the new UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights. Also, Ericsson’s whistleblower procedure was extended to a wider scope in terms of incidents covered by the procedure and with respect to who can report violations. The updated Code was confirmed by employees throughout the global organization.

 

 

The Sales Compliance Board was further strengthened and formalized to assess and manage human rights and CR risks.

 

LOGO

SHAREHOLDERS

Ownership structure

As of December 31, 2012, Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (the “Parent Company”) had 551,719 shareholders (according to the share register kept by Euroclear Sweden AB). Swedish institutions hold approximately 58% of the votes. The largest shareholders are Investor AB, holding 21.37% of the votes, and AB Industrivärden, holding 19.81% of the votes (together with Svenska Handelsbankens Pensionsstiftelse and Pensionskassan SHB Försäkringsförening).

A significant number of the shares held by foreign investors are nominee-registered, i.e. held off-record by banks, brokers and/or nominees. This means that the actual shareholder is not displayed in the share register or included in the shareholding statistics.

 

182


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

More information on Ericsson’s shareholders can be found in the chapter “Share Information” in the Annual Report.

 

LOGO

CONTACT THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson

The Board of Directors Secretariat

SE-164 83 Stockholm

Sweden

boardsecretariat@ericsson.com

Shares and voting rights

The share capital of the Parent Company consists of two classes of listed shares: A and B shares. Each Class A share carries one vote and each Class B share carries one tenth of one vote. Class A and B shares entitle the holder to the same proportion of assets and earnings and carry equal rights to dividends.

The Parent Company may also issue Class C shares in order to create treasury stock to finance and hedge long-term variable remuneration programs resolved by the General Meeting of shareholders. Class C shares are converted into Class B shares before they are used for long-term variable remuneration programs.

The members of the Board of Directors and the Executive Leadership Team have the same voting rights on shares as other shareholders.

GENERAL MEETINGS OF SHAREHOLDERS

Decision-making at General Meetings

The decision-making rights of Ericsson’s shareholders are exercised at General Meetings of shareholders. Most resolutions at General Meetings are passed by a simple majority. However, the Swedish Companies Act requires qualified majorities in certain cases, for example in case of:

 

   

Amendment of the Articles of Association

 

183


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Resolution to transfer own shares to employees participating in long-term variable remuneration programs.

The Annual General Meeting of shareholders

The Annual General Meeting of shareholders (AGM) is held in Stockholm. The date and venue for the meeting is announced on the Ericsson website no later than at the time of release of the third-quarter interim financial report.

Shareholders who cannot participate in person may be represented by proxy. Only shareholders registered in the share register have voting rights. Nominee-registered shareholders who wish to vote may request to be entered into the share register by the record date for the AGM.

The AGM is held in Swedish and is simultaneously interpreted into English. All documentation provided by the Company is available in both Swedish and English.

The AGM gives shareholders the opportunity to raise questions relating to the operations of the Group. Ericsson always strives to ensure that the members of the Board of Directors and the Executive Leadership Team are present to answer such questions. Shareholders and other interested parties may also correspond in writing with the Company at any time.

The external auditor is always present at the AGM.

Ericsson’s Annual General Meeting 2012

Including shareholders represented by proxy, 3,224 shareholders were represented at the AGM held on May 3, 2012, representing approximately 70% of the votes.

The meeting was also attended by members of the Board of Directors, members of the Executive Leadership Team (ELT) and the external auditor.

Decisions of the AGM 2012 included:

 

   

Payment of a dividend of SEK 2.50 per share

 

   

Re-election of Leif Johansson as Chairman of the Board of Directors

 

   

Re-election of members of the Board of Directors: Roxanne S. Austin, Sir Peter L. Bonfield, Börje Ekholm, Ulf J. Johansson, Sverker Martin-Löf, Nancy McKinstry, Anders Nyrén, Hans Vestberg, Michelangelo Volpi and Jacob Wallenberg

 

   

Election of Alexander Izosimov as a new member of the Board of Directors

 

   

Board of Directors’ fees:

 

   

Chairman: SEK 3,750,000 (unchanged)

 

   

Other non-employed Board members: SEK 875,000 each (previously SEK 825,000)

 

   

Chairman of the Audit Committee: SEK 350,000 (unchanged)

 

   

Other non-employed members of the Audit Committee: SEK 250,000 each (unchanged)

 

   

Chairmen of the Finance and Remuneration Committees: SEK 200,000 each (unchanged)

 

   

Other non-employed members of the Finance and Remuneration Committees: SEK 175,000 each (unchanged)

 

184


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Approval for part of the Directors’ fees to be paid in the form of synthetic shares

 

   

Approval of Guidelines for remuneration to Group Management

 

   

Implementation of a Long-Term Variable Remuneration Program 2012, including a share issue of and authorization to the Board to buy back 31,700,000 shares for the program

 

   

Approval of the Instruction for the Nomination Committee, including among other things, a procedure on how to appoint the members of the Nomination Committee, to apply until the General Meeting of shareholders resolves otherwise.

The minutes of the AGM 2012 are available at Ericsson’s website.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 2013

Ericsson’s AGM 2013 will take place on April 9, 2013 at Kistamässan in Kista, Stockholm. Shareholders who wish to have a matter addressed at the AGM should submit their written request to the Board in due time before the AGM. Further information is available on Ericsson’s website.

CONTACT THE NOMINATION COMMITTEE

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson

The Nomination Committee

c/o General Counsel’s Office

SE-164 83 Stockholm

Sweden

nomination.committee@ericsson.com

NOMINATION COMMITTEE

A Nomination Committee was elected by the AGM for the first time in 2001. Since then, each AGM has appointed a Nomination Committee, or resolved on the procedure for appointing the Nomination Committee.

The AGM 2012 resolved on an Instruction for the Nomination Committee, including the tasks of the Nomination Committee and the procedure for appointing the members of the Nomination Committee. The Instruction for the Nomination Committee shall apply until the General Meeting of shareholders resolves otherwise. Under the instruction, the Nomination Committee shall consist of:

 

   

Representatives of the four largest shareholders by voting power by the end of the month in which the AGM was held

 

   

The Chairman of the Board of Directors.

As described in the Instruction for the Nomination Committee, the Committee may include additional members following a request by a shareholder. The request must be justified by changes in the shareholder’s ownership of shares and be received by the Nomination Committee no later than December 31. No fees are paid to the members of the Nomination Committee.

Members of the Nomination Committee

In addition to the Chairman of the Board of Directors, Leif Johansson, the current Nomination Committee consists of four representatives appointed by the four shareholders with the largest voting power as of May 31, 2012:

 

   

Petra Hedengran (Investor AB), Chairman of the Nomination Committee

 

185


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Carl-Olof By (AB Industrivärden, Svenska Handelsbankens Pensionsstiftelse)

 

   

Johan Held (AFA Försäkring)

 

   

Marianne Nilsson (Swedbank Robur Fonder).

The tasks of the Nomination Committee

Over the years, the tasks of the Nomination Committee have evolved to comply with the requirements of the Code. The main task of the Committee remains to propose Board members for election by the AGM. In doing this, the Committee must not only orientate itself on the Company’s strategy and future challenges to be able to assess the competence and experience that is required by the Board; it must also consider all applicable rules on independence of the Board of Directors and its committees.

In addition, the Committee prepares remuneration proposals, for resolution by the AGM, to non-employed Directors elected by the AGM and to the auditor.

The assignment of the Nomination Committee further includes proposing auditors, whereby candidates are selected in cooperation with the Audit Committee of the Board. The Committee also proposes a candidate for election of the Chairman at the AGM.

Work of the Nomination Committee for the AGM 2013

The Nomination Committee started its work by going through a checklist of all its duties according to the Code and the Instruction for the Nomination Committee, resolved by the AGM. The Committee also set a time plan for its work ahead. A thorough understanding of Ericsson’s business is paramount to the role of the members of the Committee. Therefore, the President and CEO was invited to, together with the Chairman of the Board, present their views on the Company’s position and strategy.

The Committee was thoroughly informed of the results of the evaluation of the Board’s work and procedures, including the performance of the Chairman of the Board. On this basis, the Committee was able to assess the competence and experience required by Board members. When proposing Board members, the Nomination Committee considered a number of things, including necessary experience and competence as well as the value of diversity and renewal and the improvement of gender balance.

The Committee also acquainted itself with the assessments made by the Company and the Audit Committee on the quality and efficiency of external auditor work, and received recommendations on external auditor and audit fees. As of March 5, 2013 the Nomination Committee has held six meetings.

PROPOSALS TO THE NOMINATION COMMITTEE

Shareholders may submit proposals to the Nomination Committee at any time, but should do so in due time before the AGM to ensure that the proposals can be considered by the Committee. Further information is available on Ericsson’s website.

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

The Board of Directors is ultimately responsible for the organization of Ericsson and the management of Ericsson’s operations. The Board of Directors develops guidelines and instructions for day-to-day operations, managed by the President and CEO. The President and CEO ensures that the Board is updated regularly on events of importance to the Group. This includes updates on business development, results, financial position and the liquidity of the Group.

 

186


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

According to the Articles of Association, the Board of Directors shall consist of no less than five and no more than 12 directors, with no more than six deputies. In addition, under Swedish law, trade unions have the right to appoint three directors and their deputies to the Board.

Directors serve from the close of one AGM to the close of the next, but can serve any number of consecutive terms.

The President and CEO may be elected director of the Board, but, under the Swedish Companies Act, the President of a public company may not be elected Chairman of the Board.

Conflicts of interest

Ericsson maintains rules and regulations regarding conflicts of interest. Directors are disqualified from participating in any decision regarding agreements between themselves and Ericsson. The same applies to agreements between Ericsson and any third party or legal entity in which the Board member has an interest.

The Audit Committee has implemented a procedure on related-party transactions and a pre-approval process for non-audit services carried out by the external auditor.

Composition of the Board of Directors

The Board of Directors consists of 12 Directors, including the Chairman of the Board, elected by the shareholders at the AGM 2012 for the period until the close of the AGM 2013. It also consists of three employee representatives, each with a deputy, appointed by the trade unions for the same period of time. The President and CEO, Hans Vestberg, is the only Board member who was also a member of Ericsson’s management during 2012.

Work procedure

Pursuant to the Swedish Companies Act, the Board of Directors has adopted a work procedure that outlines rules for the distribution of tasks between the Board and its Committees as well as between the Board, its Committees and the President and CEO. This complements the regulations in the Swedish Companies Act and in the Articles of Association of the Company. The work procedure is reviewed, evaluated and adopted by the Board as required and at least once a year.

Independence

The Board of Directors and its Committees are subject to a variety of independence rules under applicable Swedish law, the Code and applicable US securities laws, SEC rules and the NASDAQ Stock Market Rules. However, Ericsson can rely on exemptions from certain US requirements.

The composition of the Board of Directors meets all applicable independence criteria. The Nomination Committee concluded before the AGM 2012 that, for purposes of the Code, at least seven of the nominated Directors were independent of Ericsson, its senior management and its major shareholders. These were Roxanne S. Austin, Sir Peter L. Bonfield, Alexander Izosimov, Leif Johansson, Ulf J. Johansson, Nancy McKinstry and Michelangelo Volpi.

Structure of the work of the Board of Directors

The work of the Board follows a yearly cycle. This enables the Board to appropriately address each of its duties and to keep strategy, risk assessment and value creation high on the agenda.

 

187


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Statutory meeting

The yearly cycle starts with the statutory Board meeting which is held in connection with the AGM. At this meeting, members of each of the three Board Committees are appointed and the Board resolves on signatory power.

 

   

First interim report meeting

At the next ordinary meeting (depending on the date of the AGM), the Board handles the interim financial report for the first quarter of the year.

 

   

Main strategy meeting

Various strategic issues are addressed at most of the Board meetings. In accordance with the annual cycle for the strategy process, a main strategy Board meeting is also held, which is in essence dedicated to short- and long-term strategies of the Group. Following the Board’s input on and approval of the overall strategy, the strategy is cascaded throughout the entire organization, starting at the Global Leadership Summit with Ericsson’s top 250 leaders.

 

   

Second interim report meeting

At the second interim report meeting, the Board handles the interim financial report for the second quarter of the year.

 

   

Follow-up strategy and risk management meeting

Following the summer, a meeting is held to address particular strategy matters in further detail and to finally confirm the Group strategy. The meeting also addresses the overall risk management of the Group.

 

   

Third interim report meeting

A Board meeting is held to handle the interim financial report for the third quarter of the year. At this meeting, the results of the Board evaluation are presented to and discussed by the Board.

 

   

Budget and financial outlook meeting

A meeting is held for the Board to address the budget and financial outlook as well as further analysis of internal and external risks.

 

   

Fourth-quarter and full-year financial results meeting

Following the end of the calendar year, the Board holds a meeting which focuses on the financial results of the entire year and handles the fourth-quarter financial report.

 

   

Annual Report meeting

The Annual Report meeting closes the yearly cycle of work of the Board of Directors. At this meeting the Board approves the Annual Report.

As the Board is responsible for financial oversight, financial information is presented and evaluated at each Board meeting. Furthermore, each Board meeting generally includes reports on Committee work by the Chairman of each Committee. In addition, minutes from Committee meetings are distributed to all Directors prior to the Board meeting.

 

188


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

At every Board meeting, the President and CEO reports on business and market developments as well as on the financial performance of the Company. Strategic issues and risks are also addressed at most Board meetings. The Board is regularly informed of developments in legal and regulatory matters of importance.

The Board’s annual work cycle

The annual cycle applied to the Board’s work allows the Board to appropriately address its duties during the year. It also facilitates for the organization to align its global processes to allow appropriate Board involvement. This is particularly relevant for the Group’s strategy process and risk management.

 

LOGO

Auditor involvement

The Board meets with Ericsson’s external auditor in closed sessions at least once a year to receive and consider the auditor’s observations. The auditor reports to management on the accounting and financial reporting practices of the Group.

The Audit Committee also meets with the auditor to receive and consider observations on the interim reports and the Annual Report. The auditor has been instructed to report on whether the accounts, the management of funds and the general financial position of the Group are under control in all material respects.

In addition, the Board reviews and assesses the process for financial reporting, as described later in “Internal control over financial reporting 2012”. Combined with internal controls, the Board’s and the auditor’s review of interim and annual reports are deemed to give reasonable assurance on the quality of financial reporting.

Training of the Board of Directors

All new Directors receive comprehensive training tailored to their individual needs. Introductory training typically includes meetings with the heads of the business units and Group functions, as well as training arranged by NASDAQ OMX Stockholm on listing issues and insider rules. In addition, full-day training sessions are held twice a year for all Directors. These sessions enhance the Directors’ knowledge of specific operations and issues as appropriate to ensure that the Board has knowledge and understanding of the forefront of technical development and of the business activities of the Group.

As a rule, the Board receives Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility training at least once a year.

 

189


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Key focus areas in Board training in 2012 were:

 

   

Technology leadership, including market development, competitor overview, Ericsson Research long-term view and ways of working.

 

   

Ericsson’s strategic forecast, including purpose, process, roles and methodology forecast.

Work of the Board of Directors in 2012

In 2012, 12 Board meetings were held. For attendance at Board meetings, see the table on page 195. Among the matters addressed by the Board this year (apart from regular matters in the annual Board work cycle) were:

 

   

A number of acquisitions, including BelAir Networks, Technicolor’s broadcast services division, ConceptWave and increased ownership in Ericsson-LG.

 

   

Entry to the US bond market through issuing a ten-year US bond.

 

   

Loan agreements with the European Investment Bank (EIB) and the Nordic Investment Bank (NIB).

 

   

Strong focus on risk management, strategy and the competitive market development, as well as on sustainability and corporate responsibility matters.

 

   

A number of divestments, including the divestment of the Multimedia brokering platform (IPX) and EDA 1500 GPON assets.

 

   

Continued focus on the effects of general financial uncertainty on the market, including the effects of political unrest in the Middle East and Africa and financial uncertainty in Europe.

 

   

Continuous work relating to strategic plans for the joint venture ST-Ericsson.

Board work evaluation

A key objective of the Board evaluation is to ensure that the Board is functioning well. This includes gaining an understanding of the issues that the Board thinks warrant greater focus, as well as determining areas where additional competence is needed within the Board. The evaluation also serves as guidance for the work of the Nomination Committee.

Each year, the Chairman of the Board initiates and leads the evaluation of the Board and Committee work and procedures. Evaluation tools include detailed questionnaires and discussions.

In 2012, all the Directors responded to written questionnaires, covering the Director’s individual performance, Board work in general, Committee work and the Chairman’s performance. The Chairman was not involved in the development or compilation of the questionnaire which related to his performance, nor was he present when his performance was evaluated. The evaluations were thoroughly discussed and an action plan was developed in order to further improve the work of the Board.

COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

The Board of Directors has established three Committees: the Audit Committee, the Finance Committee and the Remuneration Committee. Members of each Committee are appointed for one year amongst the Board members.

The task of the Committees is mainly to prepare matters for final resolution by the Board. However, the Board has authorized each Committee to determine certain issues in limited areas. It may also on occasion provide extended authorization for the Committees to determine specific matters.

 

190


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

If deemed appropriate, the Board of Directors and each Committee have the right to engage external expertise, either in general or with respect to specific matters.

 

LOGO

Prior to the Board meetings, each Committee submits to the Board minutes from Committee meetings. The Chairman of the Committee also reports on the Committee work at each Board meeting.

Audit Committee

On behalf of the Board, the Audit Committee monitors the following:

 

   

The scope and correctness of the financial statements

 

   

Compliance with legal and regulatory requirements

 

   

Internal control over financial reporting

 

   

Risk management

 

   

The effectiveness and appropriateness of the Group’s anti-corruption program.

The Audit Committee also reviews the annual and interim financial reports and oversees the external audit process, including audit fees. This involves:

 

   

Reviewing, with management and the external auditor, the financial statements (including their conformity with generally accepted accounting principles)

 

   

Reviewing, with management, the reasonableness of significant estimates and judgments made in preparing the financial statements, as well as the quality of the disclosures in the financial statements

 

   

Reviewing matters arising from reviews and audits performed.

The Audit Committee itself does not perform audit work. Ericsson has an internal audit function which reports directly to the Audit Committee.

The Committee is also involved in the preparatory work of proposing auditor for election by the AGM. It also monitors Group transactions and the ongoing performance and independence of the auditor with the aim to avoid conflicts of interest.

 

191


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In order to ensure the auditor’s independence, the Audit Committee has established pre-approval policies and procedures for non-audit related services to be performed by the external auditor. Pre-approval authority may not be delegated to management. The Audit Committee also oversees:

 

   

The process for reviewing transactions with related parties

 

   

The whistleblower procedure for the reporting of alleged violations of the Code of Business Ethics that (i) are conducted by Group or local management, and (ii) relate to corruption, questionable accounting or auditing matters or otherwise seriously affect vital interests of the Group or personal health and safety. The whistleblower procedure was updated and extended during 2012 in connection with the review and update of the Code of Business Ethics.

Violations reported through the whistleblower procedure are investigated by Ericsson’s internal audit function together with the relevant Group function. Information regarding any incident is reported to the Audit Committee. Reports include measures taken, details of the responsible Group function and the status of any investigation.

 

LOGO

Members of the Audit Committee

The Audit Committee consists of five Board members appointed by the Board. In 2012, the Audit Committee comprised Ulf J. Johansson (Chairman of the Committee), Roxanne S. Austin, Sir Peter L. Bonfield, Kristina Davidsson and Sverker Martin-Löf.

The composition of the Audit Committee meets all applicable independence requirements. The Board of Directors has determined that each of Ulf J. Johansson, Roxanne S. Austin, Sir Peter L. Bonfield and Sverker Martin-Löf is an audit committee financial expert, as defined under the SEC rules. Each of them is independent under applicable US securities laws, SEC rules and NASDAQ Stock Market Rules and each of them is financially literate and familiar with the accounting practices of an international company, such as Ericsson.

Former authorized public accountant Peter Markborn was previously appointed as an external expert advisor to assist and advise the Audit Committee. He left this assignment during 2012.

Work of the Audit Committee in 2012

The Audit Committee held six meetings in 2012. Directors’ attendance is reflected in the table on page 195. During the year, the Audit Committee reviewed the scope and results of external financial audits and the independence of the external auditor. It also monitored the external audit fees and approved non-audit services performed by the external auditor in accordance with the Committee’s pre-approval policies and procedures.

 

192


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

The Committee approved the annual audit plan for the internal audit function and reviewed its reports. Prior to publishing it, the Committee also reviewed and discussed each interim report with the external auditor.

The Committee monitored the continued compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act as well as the internal control and risk management process. It also reviewed certain related-party transactions in accordance with its established process.

The Committee reviewed and evaluated the effectiveness and appropriateness of the Group’s anti-corruption program.

Finance Committee

The Finance Committee is primarily responsible for:

 

   

Handling matters related to acquisitions and divestments

 

   

Handling capital contributions to companies inside and outside the Ericsson Group

 

   

Raising loans, issuing guarantees and similar undertakings, and approving financial support to customers and suppliers

 

   

Continuously monitoring the Group’s financial risk exposure.

The Finance Committee is authorized to determine matters such as:

 

   

Direct or indirect financing

 

   

Provision of credits

 

   

Granting of securities and guarantees

 

   

Certain investments, divestments and financial commitments.

Members of the Finance Committee

The Finance Committee consists of four Board members appointed by the Board. In 2012, the Finance Committee comprised: Leif Johansson (Chairman of the Committee), Pehr Claesson, Anders Nyrén and Jacob Wallenberg.

Work of the Finance Committee in 2012

The Finance Committee held seven meetings in 2012. Directors’ attendance is reflected in the table on page 195. During the year, the Finance Committee approved numerous customer finance credit arrangements and reviewed a number of potential mergers and acquisitions and real estate investments from a financial perspective. As a result of the uncertainty on the financial markets and the macroeconomic development, the Finance Committee has focused particularly on discussing and securing an adequate capital structure, cash flow and cash-generating ability. It has also continuously monitored Ericsson’s financial position and credit exposure.

Remuneration Committee

The Remuneration Committee’s main responsibility is to prepare for resolution by the Board of Directors matters regarding salary and other remuneration, including pension benefits of the President and CEO, the Executive Vice Presidents and other officers who report directly to the President and CEO. Responsibilities include:

 

   

Reviewing and preparing for resolution by the Board, proposals on salary and other remuneration, including retirement compensation, for the President and CEO

 

193


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

   

Reviewing and preparing for resolution by the Board, proposals to the AGM on guidelines for remuneration to the ELT

 

   

Approving proposals on salary and other remuneration, including retirement compensation, for the Executive Vice Presidents and other CEO direct reports

 

   

Reviewing and preparing for resolution by the Board, proposals to the AGM on LTV and similar equity arrangements.

Consideration is given to trends in remuneration, legislative changes, disclosure rules and the general global environment surrounding executive remuneration. The Committee reviews salary survey data before approving any salary adjustment for CEO direct reports. In addition, the Committee prepares salary adjustments for the President and CEO for resolution by the Board.

Members of the Remuneration Committee

The Remuneration Committee consists of four Board members appointed by the Board. In 2012, the Remuneration Committee comprised: Leif Johansson (Chairman of the Committee), Börje Ekholm, Nancy McKinstry and Karin Åberg.

Piia Pilv has been appointed by the Remuneration Committee as an independent expert advisor to assist the Committee, particularly regarding international trends and developments.

Work of the Remuneration Committee in 2012

The Remuneration Committee held six meetings in 2012. Directors’ attendance is reflected in the table on page 195.

The Committee reviewed and prepared a proposal for the LTV 2012 for resolution by the Board. This was approved by the AGM 2012. The Committee further resolved on salaries and Short-Term Variable remuneration (STV) for 2012 for CEO direct reports. It prepared remuneration to the President and CEO, for resolution by the Board. The Committee also prepared guidelines for remuneration to the ELT, which were subsequently referred by the Board to the AGM for approval.

Towards the end of the year, the Committee concluded its analysis of the current LTV structure and executive remuneration. The resulting proposals on LTV and guidelines for remuneration to the ELT will be referred to the AGM 2013 for resolution.

For further information on fixed and variable remuneration, please see Notes to the consolidated financial statements—Note C28 “Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees” and the “Remuneration Report” included in the Annual Report.

 

194


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Directors’ attendance and fees 2012

 

     Fees resolved by the
AGM 2012
     Number of Board/Committee
meetings attended
 

Board member

   Board
fees1)
    Committee
fees
     Board      Audit
Committee
     Finance
Committee
     Remuneration
Committee
 

Leif Johansson

     3,750,000        400,000         12            7         6   

Sverker Martin-Löf

     875,000        250,000         12         6         

Jacob Wallenberg

     875,000        175,000         12            5      

Roxanne S. Austin

     875,000        250,000         11         6         

Sir Peter L. Bonfield

     875,000        250,000         12         6         

Börje Ekholm

     875,000        175,000         12               6   

Alexander Izosimov2)

     875,000           8            

Ulf J. Johansson

     875,000        350,000         12         6         

Nancy McKinstry

     875,000        175,000         11               6   

Anders Nyrén

     875,000        175,000         12            7      

Carl-Henric Svanberg3)

     —             4            

Hans Vestberg

     —             12            

Michelangelo Volpi

     875,000           10            

Pehr Claesson

     18,000 7)         12            7      

Jan Hedlund4)

     6,000 7)         4         3         

Karin Åberg

     18,000 7)         12               6   

Kristina Davidsson5)

     18,000 7)         12         3         

Rickard Fredriksson6)

     10,500 7)         7            

Karin Lennartsson

     18,000 7)         12            

Roger Svensson

     18,000 7)         12            
       

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total number of meetings

          12         6         7         6   
       

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Non-employed Directors can choose to receive part of their Board fee (exclusive of Committee fees) in the form of synthetic shares.
2) Elected Board member as of May 3, 2012.
3) Resigned as Board member as of May 3, 2012.
4) Resigned as employee representative and from the Audit Committee as of May 3, 2012.
5) Member of the Audit Committee since May 3, 2012.
6) Appointed deputy employee representative as of May 3, 2012.
7) Employee representative Board members and their deputies are not entitled to a Board fee but compensation in the amount of SEK 1,500 per attended Board meeting.

REMUNERATION TO BOARD MEMBERS

Remuneration to Board members not employed by the Company is proposed by the Nomination Committee for resolution by the AGM.

The AGM 2012 approved the Nomination Committee’s proposal for fees to the non-employed Board members for Board and Committee work. For information on Board of Directors’ fees 2012, please refer to Notes to the consolidated financial statements—Note C28 “Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees” in the Annual Report. The AGM 2012 also approved the Nomination Committee’s proposal that Board members may be paid part of their Board fee in the form of synthetic shares.

A synthetic share gives the right to receive a future cash payment of an amount which corresponds to the market value of a Class B share in Ericsson at the time of payment. The director’s right to receive payment with regard to allocated synthetic shares occurs, as a main rule, after the publication of the Company’s year-end

 

195


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

financial statement during the fifth year following the General Meeting which resolved on the allocation of the synthetic shares. The purpose of paying part of the Board of Directors’ fee in the form of synthetic shares is to further align the Directors’ interest with shareholder interest. For more information on the terms and conditions of the synthetic shares, please refer to the notice convening the AGM 2012 and to the minutes from the AGM 2012, which are available at Ericsson’s website.

MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Board members elected by the AGM 2012

Leif Johansson (first elected 2011)

Chairman of the Board of Directors, Chairman of the Remuneration Committee and of the Finance Committee

Born 1951. Master of Science in Engineering, Chalmers University of Technology, Gothenburg, Sweden.

Board Chairman: Astra Zeneca PLC, European Round Table of Industrialists and the International Advisory Board of the Nobel Foundation.

Board Member: Svenska Cellulosa Aktiebolaget SCA and Ecolean AB.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 17,933 Class B shares. Principal work experience and other information: President of the Royal Swedish Academy of Engineering Sciences. President and CEO of AB Volvo 1997-2011. Executive Vice President of AB Electrolux 1988-1991, President 1991-1994 and President and CEO of AB Electrolux 1994-1997. Holds honorary Doctorates at Blekinge Institute of Technology, the University of Gothenburg and Chalmers University of Technology. Awarded the Large Gold Medal of the Royal Swedish Academy of Engineering Sciences in 2011.

Sverker Martin-Löf (first elected 1993)

Deputy Chairman of the Board of Directors, Member of the Audit Committee

Born 1943. Doctor of Technology and Master of Engineering, KTH Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden.

Board Chairman: Svenska Cellulosa Aktiebolaget SCA, SSAB and AB Industrivärden.

Board Member: Skanska AB and Svenska Handelsbanken AB.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 10,400 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President and CEO of Svenska Cellulosa Aktiebolaget SCA 1990–2002, where he was employed 1977–1983 and 1986–2002. Previous positions at Sunds Defibrator and Mo och Domsjö AB.

Jacob Wallenberg (first elected 2011)

Deputy Chairman of the Board of Directors, Member of the Finance Committee

Born 1956. Bachelor of Science in Economics and Master of Business Administration, Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania, USA. Officer of the Reserve, Swedish Navy.

Board Chairman: Investor AB.

Deputy Board Chairman: SAS AB and SEB Skandinaviska Enskilda Banken AB (SEB).

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

196


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Board member: ABB Ltd, The Coca-Cola Company, The Knut and Alice Wallenberg Foundation and Stockholm School of Economics.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 2,413 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: Chairman of the Board of Investor AB since 2005. Extensive experience in banking and finance, including experience from the commercial banks JP Morgan, New York and SEB. Appointed President and CEO of SEB in 1997 and appointed Chairman of SEB’s Board of Directors in 1998. Executive Vice President and CFO of Investor AB 1990-1993. Honorary Chairman of IBLAC (Mayor of Shanghai’s International Business Leaders Advisory Council) and member of The European Round Table of Industrialists.

Roxanne S. Austin (first elected 2008)

Member of the Audit Committee

Born 1961. Bachelor of Business Administration in Accounting, University of Texas, San Antonio, USA.

Board Member: Abbott Laboratories, Teledyne Technologies Inc. and Target Corporation.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 3,000 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President of Austin Investment Advisors since 2004. President and CEO of Move Networks Inc. 2009–2010. President and COO of DirecTV 2001–2003. Corporate Senior Vice President and CFO of Hughes Electronics Corporation 1997–2000, which she joined in 1993. Previously a partner at Deloitte & Touche. Member of the California State Society of Certified Public Accountants and the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants.

Sir Peter L. Bonfield (first elected 2002)

Member of the Audit Committee

Born 1944. Honors degree in Engineering, Loughborough University, Leicestershire, UK.

Board Chairman: NXP Semiconductors N.V.

Board Member: Mentor Graphics Inc., Sony Corporation and Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Company, Ltd.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 4,400 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: CEO and Chairman of the Executive Committee of British Telecommunications plc 1996–2002. Chairman and CEO of ICL plc 1985–1996. Positions with STC plc and Texas Instruments Inc. Member of the Advisory Boards of New Venture Partners LLP, the Longreach Group and Apax Partners LLP. Board Mentor of CMi. Senior Advisor, Rothschild, London.

Chair of Council and Senior Pro-Chancellor, Loughborough University, UK. Fellow of the Royal Academy of Engineering.

Börje Ekholm (first elected 2006)

Member of the Remuneration Committee

Born 1963. Master of Science in Electrical Engineering, KTH Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden. Master of Business Administration, INSEAD, France.

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

197


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Board Chairman: KTH Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm and Nasdaq OMX Group Inc.

Board Member: Investor AB, AB Chalmersinvest, EQT Partners AB and Husqvarna AB.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 30,760 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President and CEO of Investor AB since 2005. Formerly Head of Investor Growth Capital Inc. and New Investments. Previous positions at Novare Kapital AB and McKinsey & Co Inc.

Alexander Izosimov (first elected 2012)

Born 1964. Master of Business Administration, INSEAD, France and Master of Science in Production Management Systems and Computer Science, Moscow Aviation Institute, Russian Federation.

Board Member: East Capital AB, Modern Times Group MTG AB, EVRAZ Group S.A., Dynasty Foundation, Transcom WorldWide SA and International Chamber of Commerce (ICC).

Holdings in Ericsson1): 1,600 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: CEO and President of VimpelCom 2003-2011. Previous positions with Mars Inc., including Member of the Global Executive Board and Regional President for CIS, Central Europe and Nordics. Earlier positions with McKinsey & Co as consultant in the Stockholm and London offices. Served as GSMA Board member 2005-2008 and Chairman of GSMA 2008-2010.

Ulf J. Johansson (first elected 2005)

Chairman of the Audit Committee

Born 1945. Doctor of Technology and Master of Science in Electrical Engineering, KTH Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden.

Board Chairman: Acando AB, Eurostep Group AB, Novo A/S, Novo Nordisk Foundation and Trimble Navigation Ltd.

Board Member: European Institute of Innovation and Technology.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 6,435 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: Founder of Europolitan Vodafone AB, where he was the Chairman of the Board 1990–2005. Previous positions at Spectra-Physics AB as President and CEO and at Ericsson Radio Systems AB. Member of the Royal Academy of Engineering Sciences.

Nancy McKinstry (first elected 2004)

Member of the Remuneration Committee

Born 1959. Master of Business Administration in Finance and Marketing, Columbia University, USA. Bachelor of Arts in Economics, University of Rhode Island, USA.

Board Chairman: CEO and Chairman of the Executive Board of Wolters Kluwer n.v.

Board Member: Abbott Laboratories and Sanoma Corporation.

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

198


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Holdings in Ericsson1): 4,000 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: CEO and Chairman of the Executive Board of Wolters Kluwer n.v. President and CEO of CCH Legal Information Services 1996–1999. Previous positions at Booz, Allen & Hamilton and New England Telephone Company. Member of the Advisory Board of the University of Rhode Island, the Advisory Council of the Amsterdam Institute of Finance, the Board of Overseers of Columbia Business School and the Advisory Board of the Harrington School of Communication and Media.

Anders Nyrén (first elected 2006)

Member of the Finance Committee

Born 1954. Graduate of Stockholm School of Economics, Sweden, Master of Business Administration from Anderson School of Management, UCLA, USA.

Board Chairman: Sandvik AB.

Deputy Board Chairman: Svenska Handelsbanken AB.

Board Member: Svenska Cellulosa Aktiebolaget SCA, AB Industrivärden, SSAB, AB Volvo, Ernströmgruppen and Stockholm School of Economics.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 6,686 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President and CEO of Industrivärden since 2001. CFO and Executive Vice President of Skanska AB 1997–2001. Director Capital Markets of Nordbanken 1996–1997. CFO and EVP of Securum AB 1992–1996. Managing Director of OM International AB 1987–1992. Earlier positions at STC Scandinavian Trading Co AB and AB Wilhelm Becker.

Hans Vestberg (first elected 2010)

Born 1965. Bachelor of Business Administration and Economics, University of Uppsala, Sweden.

Board Chairman: ST-Ericsson and Svenska Handbollförbundet.

Board Member: Thernlunds AB.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 149,382 Class B shares.

Principal work experience and other information: President and CEO of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson since January 1, 2010. Previously, First Executive Vice President, CFO and Head of Group Function Finance and Executive Vice President and Head of Business Unit Global Services. Various positions in the Group since 1988, including Vice President and Head of Market Unit Mexico and Head of Finance and Control in USA, Brazil and Chile. International advisor to the Governor of Guangdong, China and co-chairman of the Russian-Swedish Business Council. Founding member of the Broadband Commission for Digital Development, and heading the Commission’s climate change working group. Member of the European Cloud Partnership Steering Board and the Leadership Council of the United Nations Sustainable Development Solutions Network.

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

199


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Michelangelo Volpi (first elected 2010)

Born 1966. Bachelor of Science in Mechanical Engineering and Masters in Manufacturing Systems Engineering from Stanford University, USA. MBA from the Stanford Graduate School of Business, USA.

Board Member: EXOR S.p.A.

Holdings in Ericsson1): None.

Principal work experience and other information: Partner at Index Ventures since July 2009. Previously CEO of Joost Inc. Various positions in Cisco from 1994-2007, including Senior Vice President and General Manager of the Routing and Service Provider Technology Group and Chief Strategy Officer. Has also worked for Hewlett Packard in the optoelectronics division.

Board members and deputies appointed by the unions

Pehr Claesson (first appointed 2008)

Employee representative, Member of the Finance Committee

Born 1966. Appointed by the union The Swedish Association of Graduate Engineers.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 999 Class B shares. Employed since 1997. Working with marketing and communication for Consulting and Systems Integration within Business Unit Global Services.

Kristina Davidsson (first appointed 2006)

Employee representative, Member of the Audit Committee

Born 1955. Appointed by the union IF Metall.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 1,629 Class B shares. Employed since 1995. Previously working as repairer within Business Unit Networks and currently working full time as union representative.

Karin Åberg (first appointed 2007)

Employee representative, Member of the Remuneration Committee

Born 1959. Appointed by the union Unionen.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 2,751 Class B shares. Employed since 1995. Working as a Service Engineer within the IT organization.

Rickard Fredriksson (first appointed 2012)

Deputy employee representative

Born 1969. Appointed by the union IF Metall.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 799 Class B shares.

Employed since 2000. Previously working as machine operator within Business Unit Networks and currently working full time as union representative.

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

200


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Karin Lennartsson (first appointed 2010)

Deputy employee representative

Born 1957. Appointed by the union Unionen.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 493 Class B shares.

Employed since 1976. Working as Process Expert within Group Function Finance—Process Management.

Roger Svensson (first appointed 2011)

Deputy employee representative

Born 1971. Appointed by the union The Swedish Association of Graduate Engineers.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 7,710 Class B shares.

Employed since 1999. Working as Senior Specialist Test Strategy Power Amplifier within Business Unit Networks.

Hans Vestberg was the only Director who held an operational management position at Ericsson in 2012. No Director has been elected pursuant to an arrangement or understanding with any major shareholder, customer, supplier or other person.

At the Annual General Meeting 2012, Alexander Izosimov was elected new member of the Board of Directors, replacing Carl-Henric Svanberg. Jan Hedlund resigned as employee representative of the Board of Directors as of the date of the Annual General Meeting 2012 and Kristina Davidsson (previously deputy employee representative) was appointed employee representative as of the same date. Rickard Fredriksson was appointed new deputy employee representative as of the date of the Annual General Meeting 2012.

MANAGEMENT

The President/CEO and the Executive Leadership Team

The Board of Directors appoints the President and CEO and the Executive Vice Presidents. The President and CEO is responsible for the management of day-to-day operations and is supported by the Executive Leadership Team (the “ELT”). During 2012, the ELT consisted of the President and CEO, the heads of Group functions, the heads of business units and the heads of two of Ericsson’s regions. The role of the ELT is to:

 

   

Establish a strong corporate culture, a long-term vision and Group strategies and policies, all based on objectives stated by the Board

 

   

Determine targets for operational units, allocate resources and monitor unit performance

 

   

Secure operational excellence and realize global synergies through efficient organization of the Group.

Remuneration to the Executive Leadership Team

Guidelines for remuneration to the ELT were approved by the AGM 2012. For further information on fixed and variable remuneration, see the Remuneration report and Notes to the consolidated financial statements—Note C28, “Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees” in the Annual Report.

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

201


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

The Ericsson Group Management System

Ericsson has a global management system, the Ericsson Group Management System (EGMS) to drive corporate culture and to ensure that the business is managed:

 

   

To fulfill the objectives of Ericsson’s major stakeholders (customers, shareholders, employees)

 

   

Within established risk limits and with reliable internal control

 

   

In compliance with relevant applicable laws, listing requirements, governance codes and corporate social responsibilities.

The EGMS is founded on ISO 9001 (International Standard for Quality management system) but is designed as a dynamic governance system, enabling Ericsson to adapt the system to evolving demands and expectations, including new legislation as well as customers’ and other stakeholders’ requirements. The management system is an important foundation and is continuously evaluated and improved.

Certificates are evidence from an independent body verifying that the operations fulfill defined requirements. As the EGMS is a global system, group-wide certificates can be issued by a third party certification body proving that the system is efficient throughout the whole organization. Ericsson is currently globally certified to ISO 9001 (Quality), ISO 14001 (Environment) and OHSAS 18001 (Health & Safety). Selected Ericsson units are also certified to additional standards, for example ISO 27001 (Information Security) and TL 9000 (telecom-specific standard).

The EGMS comprises three elements:

 

   

Management and control

 

   

Ericsson business processes

 

   

Organization and resources.

 

LOGO

 

202


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Management and control

Ericsson’s strategy and target setting processes consider the demands and expectations of customers as well as other key stakeholders. The process facilitates the alignment of objectives and their measurement in activities at all levels of the organization.

Ericsson uses balanced scorecards as tools for translating strategic objectives into a set of performance indicators for its operational units. Based on annual strategy work, these scorecards are updated with targets for each unit for the next year and are communicated throughout the organization.

Group-wide policies and directives govern how the organization works and are core elements in managing and controlling Ericsson. The Group Policies and Directives include a Code of Business Ethics, a Code of Conduct and accounting and reporting directives to fulfill external reporting requirements and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

The Group Steering Documents Committee works to ensure that the policies and directives cover relevant issues; that they are aligned and consistent with Group strategies, values and structures; and that they are not in conflict with legal and regulatory requirements. In addition, the Group Steering Documents Committee works to ensure that the said strategies, values and structures are implemented by the responsible function.

Ericsson business processes

As a market leader, Ericsson utilizes the competitive advantages that are gained through global scale and has implemented common processes and IT tools across all operational units worldwide. Customer requirements are identified, clarified and formalized in Ericsson Business Processes where requirements transform from theory to reality. Through management and continuous improvement of processes and IT tools, Ericsson attempts to reduce costs with efficient and effective process flows and with standardized internal controls and performance indicators.

Organization and resources

Ericsson is operated in two dimensions: one operational structure and one legal structure.

The operational structure aligns accountability and authority regardless of country borders and supports the process flow with cross-country operations. During 2012 there were four business units and ten regions. Group functions coordinate Ericsson’s strategies, operations and resource allocation and define the necessary directives, processes and organization for the effective governance of the Group.

The legal structure is the basis for legal requirements and responsibility as well as for tax and statutory reporting purposes. There are more than 200 legal entities within the Ericsson Group with representation (via legal entities, branch and representative offices) in more than 140 countries.

Risk management

Ericsson’s risk management is integrated with the business and its operational processes, and is a part of the EGMS to ensure accountability, effectiveness, efficiency, business continuity and compliance with corporate governance, legal and other requirements. The Board of Directors is also actively engaged in the Company’s risk management. Risks related to set long-term objectives are discussed and strategies are formally approved by the Board as part of the annual strategy process. Risks related to annual targets for the Company are also reviewed by the Board and then monitored continuously during the year. Certain transactional risks require specific Board approval, e.g. acquisitions, management remuneration, borrowing or customer finance in excess of pre-defined limits.

 

203


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Strategic and tactical risks

Strategic risks constitute the highest risk to the Company if not managed properly as they could have a long-term impact. Ericsson therefore reviews its long-term objectives, main strategies and business scope on an annual basis and continuously works on its tactics to reach these objectives and to mitigate any risks identified.

In the annual strategy and target setting process, objectives are set for the next three to five years. Risks and opportunities are assessed and strategies are developed to achieve the objectives. The strategy process in the Company is well established and involves regions, business units and Group functions. The strategy is finally summarized and discussed in a yearly Global Leadership Summit with approximately 250 leaders from all parts of the business. By involving all parts of the business in the process, potential risks are identified early and mitigating actions can be incorporated in the strategy and in the annual target process following the finalization of the strategy.

Technology development, industry and market fundamentals and the development of the economy are key components in the evaluation of risks related to Ericsson’s long-term objectives.

The outcome from the strategy process forms the basis for the annual target process, which involves regions, business units and Group functions. Risks and opportunities linked to the targets are identified as part of this process together with actions to mitigate the identified risks. Follow-up of targets, risks and mitigating actions are reported and discussed continuously in business unit and region steering groups and are reviewed by the Board of Directors.

Ericsson continuously strives to improve its risk management and believes that it is important that the entire global organization takes part in the risk management and strategy work. Therefore, risk management was given a stronger focus in 2012. During the year, an enhanced risk management framework was implemented and aligned with the Strategy and Target setting process. Risks were identified and analyzed in four categories: industry & market risks, commercial risks, operational risks and compliance risks. For more information on risks related to Ericsson’s business, see the chapter “Risk factors” in the Annual Report.

Strategic, target setting and risk management cycle

The annual strategic, target setting and risk management cycle is part of Ericsson’s strategy process, which is well established within the Group and involves regions, business units and Group functions.

 

LOGO

 

204


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Operational and financial risks

Operational risks are owned and managed by operational units. Risk management is embedded in various process controls, such as decision tollgates and approvals. Certain cross-process risks are centrally coordinated, such as information security, IT security, corporate responsibility and business continuity and insurable risks. Financial risk management is governed by a Group policy and carried out by the Treasury and Customer Finance functions, both supervised by the Finance Committee. The policy governs risk exposures related to foreign exchange, liquidity/financing, interest rates, credit risk and market price risk in equity instruments. For further information on financial risk management, see Notes to the consolidated financial statements—Note C14, “Trade receivables and customer finance”, Note C19, “Interest-bearing liabilities” and Note C20, “Financial risk management and financial instruments” in the Annual Report.

Compliance risks

Ericsson has implemented Group policies and directives in order to comply with applicable laws and regulations, including a Code of Business Ethics and a Code of Conduct. Risk management is integrated in the Company’s business processes. Policies and controls are implemented to comply with financial reporting standards and stock market regulations, such as the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

Compliance officer

Ericsson has a Chief Compliance Officer (CCO) whose responsibilities include providing support for compliance with laws, regulations, internal policies and directives, coordinating the different strands of expertise within Ericsson. Attention from senior-management level on compliance matters is crucial, as is ensuring that this is addressed from a cross-functional perspective. Initially, the CCO’s primary focus has been to further develop Ericsson’s Anti-corruption Compliance Program. This is reviewed and evaluated by the Audit Committee at least annually.

Monitoring and audits

Company management monitors compliance with policies, directives and processes through internal self-assessment within all units. This is complemented by internal and external audits. External financial audits are performed by PricewaterhouseCoopers, and ISO/ management system audits by Intertek. Internal audits are performed by the company’s internal audit function which reports to the Audit Committee. Audits of suppliers are also conducted in order to secure compliance with Ericsson’s Code of Conduct, which is mandatory for suppliers to the Ericsson Group.

Risk mitigation

Significant ongoing activities in order to mitigate risks include:

 

   

Establishing flexibility to cost-effectively accommodate to fluctuations in customer demand

 

   

Conducting regular Supplier Code of Conduct audits

 

   

Continuous assessment and management of CR risks

 

   

Conducting business continuity management in an efficient way

 

   

Conducting corporate governance training as needed

 

   

Continuous monitoring of information systems to guard against data breaches

 

   

Reviewing top risks and mitigating actions at various internal governance meetings.

 

205


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

LOGO

Example of risk heat map document

Risk heat maps are generated by business units, regions and Group functions in four risk categories:

 

   

Industry and market

 

   

Commercial

 

   

Operational

 

   

Compliance

 

LOGO

MEMBERS OF THE EXECUTIVE LEADERSHIP TEAM

Hans Vestberg

President and CEO (since 2010)

Born 1965.

Bachelor of Business Administration and Economics, University of Uppsala, Sweden.

Board Chairman: ST-Ericsson and Svenska Handbollförbundet.

 

206


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Board member: Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson and Thernlunds AB.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 149,382 Class B shares.

Background: Previously First Executive Vice President, CFO and Head of Group Function Finance and Executive Vice President and Head of Business Unit Global Services. Various positions in the Group since 1988, including Vice President and Head of Market Unit Mexico and Head of Finance and Control in USA, Brazil and Chile. International advisor to the Governor of Guangdong, China and co-chairman of the Russian-Swedish Business Council. Founding member of the Broadband Commission for Digital Development, and heading the Commission’s broadband and climate change working group. Member of the European Cloud Partnership Steering Board and the Leadership Council of the United Nations Sustainable Development Solutions Network.

Jan Frykhammar

Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer and Head of Group Function Finance (since 2009)

Born 1965.

Bachelor of Business Administration and Economics, University of Uppsala, Sweden.

Board member: ST-Ericsson and the Swedish International Chamber of Commerce.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 14,844 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Senior Vice President and Head of Business Unit Global Services. Various positions within Ericsson including Sales and Business Control in Business Unit Global Services, CFO in North America and Vice President, Finance and Commercial within the Global Customer Account Vodafone.

Magnus Mandersson

Executive Vice President (since 2011) and Head of Business Unit Global Services (since 2010)

Born 1959.

Bachelor of Business Administration, University of Lund, Sweden.

Board member: None.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 22,602 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Head of Business Unit CDMA, Market Unit Northern Europe, Global Customer Account Deutsche Telekom AG and Product Area Managed Services. Has also been President and CEO of SEC/ Tele2 Europe and COO of Millicom International Cellular S.A.

Johan Wibergh

Executive Vice President (since 2010) and Head of Business Unit Networks (since 2008)

Born 1963.

Master of Computer Science, Linköping Institute of Technology, Sweden.

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

207


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Board member: ST-Ericsson, Confederation of Swedish Enterprise, KTH Royal Institute of Technology and Teknikföretagen.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 40,448 Class B shares.

Background: President of Ericsson Brazil, President of Market Unit Nordic and Baltics and Vice President and Head of Sales at Business Unit Global Services.

Per Borgklint

Senior Vice President and Head of Business Unit Support Solutions (since 2011)

Born 1972.

Master of Science in Business Administration, Jönköping International Business School, Sweden.

Board member: None.

Holdings in Ericsson1): None.

Background: Previously CEO of Net1 (Ice.net), Canal Plus Nordic and Versatel. Has also held several leading positions at Tele2.

Bina Chaurasia

Senior Vice President, Chief Human Resources Officer and Head of Group Function Human Resources and Organization (since 2010)

Born 1962.

Master of Science in Management and Human Resources, Ohio State University, USA, and Master of Arts in Philosophy, University of Wisconsin, USA.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 19,144 Class B shares.

Background: Joined Ericsson from Hewlett Packard, where she was Vice President of Global Talent Management. Has held senior HR leadership roles at Gap, Sun Microsystems and PepsiCo/Yum.

Ulf Ewaldsson

Senior Vice President, Chief Technology Officer and Head of Group Function Technology (since February 1, 2012)

Born 1965.

Master of Science in Engineering and Business Management, Linköping Institute of Technology, Sweden.

Board member: None.

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

208


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Holdings in Ericsson1): 14,985 Class B shares. Background: Previously Head of Product Area Radio within Business Unit Networks. Has held various managerial positions within Ericsson since 1990.

Douglas L. Gilstrap

Senior Vice President and Head of Group Function Strategy (since 2009)

Born 1963.

Bachelor of Science in Accounting, University of Richmond, USA, and Master of Business Administration, Emory University, Atlanta, USA. Executive program at INSEAD, France.

Board member: Telecom Management Forum (TMF). Deputy board member: ST-Ericsson.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 8,643 Class B shares. Background: Has held various global managerial positions within the telecommunications sector for more than 15 years.

Nina Macpherson

Senior Vice President, General Counsel, Head of Group Function Legal Affairs and secretary to the Board of Directors (since 2011)

Born 1958.

Master of Laws, LL M, University of Stockholm, Sweden.

Board member: The Association for Swedish Listed Companies.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 7,857 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Vice President and Deputy Head of Group Function Legal Affairs at Ericsson. Previous positions also include private practice and in-house attorney. Member of the Swedish Securities Council.

Helena Norrman

Senior Vice President and Head of Group Function Communications (since 2011)

Born 1970.

Master of International Business Administration, Linköping University, Sweden.

Board member: None.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 8,312 Class B shares.

Background: Previously Vice President, Communications Operations at Group Function Communications at Ericsson. Has held various positions within Ericsson’s global communications organization since 1998. Previous positions as communications consultant.

Mats H. Olsson

Head of Region North East Asia (since 2010)

Born 1954.

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

209


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Master of Business Administration, Stockholm School of Economics, Sweden.

Board member: None.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 61,252 Class B shares.

Background: International economic advisor to a number of Chinese provincial and municipal governments. Previously Head of Market Unit Greater China. Appointed President of Ericsson Greater China in 2004, with overall responsibility for mainland China, Hong Kong, Macao and Taiwan. Also assumed overall responsibility for Japan and South Korea in 2010. Has held various executive positions across Asia-Pacific over the last 25 years.

Rima Qureshi

Senior Vice President and Head of Business Unit CDMA Mobile Systems (since 2010)

Born 1965.

Bachelor of Information Systems and Master of Business Administration, McGill University, Montreal, Canada.

Board member: MasterCard Incorporated.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 4,932 Class B shares.

Background: Also serves as Head of Ericsson Response. Previously Vice President of Strategic Improvement Program and Vice President Product Area Customer Support. Has held various positions within Ericsson since 1993.

Angel Ruiz

Head of Region North America (since 2010)

Born 1956.

Bachelor of Electrical Engineering, University of Central Florida, USA, and Master of Management Science and Information Systems, Johns Hopkins University, USA.

Board member: CTIA.

Holdings in Ericsson1): 38,546 Class B shares. Background: Joined Ericsson in 1990 and has held a variety of technical, sales and managerial positions within the Company, including heading up the global account teams for Cingular/SBC/BellSouth (now AT&T). Was appointed President of Ericsson North America in 2001.

Jan Wäreby

Senior Vice President and Head of Sales and Marketing (since 2011)

Born 1956.

Master of Science, Chalmers University, Gothenburg, Sweden.

Board member: ST-Ericsson.

 

1) The number of shares reflects ownership as of December 31, 2012 and includes holdings by related natural and legal persons, as well as holdings of any ADS, if applicable.

 

210


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Holdings in Ericsson1): 66,495 Class B shares. Background: Senior Vice President and Head of Business Unit Multimedia and Executive Vice President and Head of Sales and Marketing for Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications.

Up until January 31, 2012, Håkan Eriksson, former Senior Vice President, Chief Technology Officer and Head of Group Function Technology & Portfolio Management, was a member of the Executive Leadership Team.

AUDITOR

According to the Articles of Association, the Parent Company shall have no less than one and no more than three registered public accounting firms as external independent auditor. Pursuant to the Swedish Companies Act, the mandate period of an auditor shall be one year, unless the Articles of Association provide for a longer mandate period up to four years. The auditor reports to the shareholders at General Meetings.

The duties of the auditor include the following:

 

   

Updating the Board of Directors regarding the planning, scope and content of the annual audit

 

   

Examining the interim and year-end financial statements to assess accuracy and completeness of the accounts and adherence to accounting standards and policies

 

   

Advising the Board of Directors of non-audit services performed, the consideration paid and other issues that determine the auditor’s independence.

For further information on the contacts between the Board and the auditor, please see “Work of the Board of Directors” earlier in this Corporate Governance Report.

All Ericsson’s quarterly financial reports are reviewed by the auditor.

Current auditor

PricewaterhouseCoopers AB was elected auditor at the AGM 2012 for a period of one year, i.e. until the close of the AGM 2013.

PricewaterhouseCoopers AB has appointed Peter Nyllinge, Authorized Public Accountant, to serve as auditor in charge.

Fees to the auditor

Ericsson paid the fees (including expenses) for audit-related and other services listed in the table in Notes to the consolidated financial statements—Note C30, “Fees to auditors” in the Annual Report.

INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING 2012

This section has been prepared in accordance with the Annual Accounts Act and the Swedish Corporate Governance Code and is limited to internal control over financial reporting.

Since Ericsson is listed in the United States, the requirements outlined in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) apply. These regulate the establishment and maintenance of internal controls over financial reporting as well as management’s assessment of the effectiveness of the controls.

In order to support high quality reporting and to meet the requirement of SOX, the Company has implemented detailed documented controls and testing and reporting procedures based on the internationally established COSO framework for internal control. The COSO framework is issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

 

211


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Management’s internal control report according to SOX is included in this Annual Report on Form 20-F and filed with the SEC in the United States.

During 2012, the Company has included operations of acquired entities as well as continued to improve the design and execution of its financial reporting controls.

Disclosure policies

Ericsson’s financial disclosure policies aim to ensure transparent, relevant and consistent communication with equity and debt investors on a fair and equal basis. This will support a fair market value for Ericsson securities. Ericsson wants current and potential investors to have a good understanding of how the Company works, including operational performance, prospects and potential risks.

To achieve these objectives, financial reporting and disclosure must be:

 

   

Transparent—enhancing understanding of the economic drivers and operational performance of the business, building trust and credibility

 

   

Consistent—comparable in scope and level of detail to facilitate comparison between reporting periods

 

   

Simple—to support understanding of business operations and performance and to avoid misinterpretations

 

   

Relevant—with focus on what is relevant to Ericsson’s stakeholders or required by regulation or listing agreements, to avoid information overload

 

   

Timely—with regular scheduled disclosures as well as ad-hoc information, such as press releases on important events, performed in a timely manner

 

   

Fair and equal—where all material information is published via press releases to ensure that the whole investor community receives the information at the same time

 

   

Complete, free from material errors and a reflection of best practice—disclosure is compliant with applicable financial reporting standards and listing requirements and in line with industry norms.

Ericsson’s website comprises comprehensive information on the Group, including:

 

   

An archive of annual and interim reports

 

   

On-demand access to recent news

 

   

Copies of presentations given by senior management at industry conferences.

Disclosure controls and procedures

Ericsson has controls and procedures in place to allow for timely information disclosure under applicable laws and regulations, including the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, and under agreements with NASDAQ OMX Stockholm and NASDAQ New York. These procedures also require that such information is provided to management, including the CEO and CFO, so timely decisions can be made regarding required disclosure.

The Disclosure Committee comprises members with various expertise. It assists managers in fulfilling their responsibility regarding disclosures made to the shareholders and the investment community. One of the main tasks of the committee is to monitor the integrity and effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures.

Ericsson has investments in certain entities that the Company does not control or manage. With respect to such entities, disclosure controls and procedures are substantially more limited than those maintained with respect to subsidiaries.

 

212


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

During the year, Ericsson’s President and CEO and the CFO evaluated the disclosure controls and procedures and concluded that they were effective at a reasonable assurance level as at December 31, 2012.

Internal control over financial reporting

Ericsson has integrated risk management and internal control into its business processes. As defined in the COSO framework, internal control is an aggregation of components such as a control environment, risk assessment, control activities, information and communication and monitoring.

During the period covered by the Annual Report 2012, there were no changes to the internal control over financial reporting that have materially affected, or are likely to materially affect, the internal control over financial reporting.

Control environment

The Company’s internal control structure is based on the division of tasks between the Board of Directors and its Committees and the President and CEO. The Company has implemented a management system that is based on:

 

   

Steering documents, such as policies, directives and a Code of Business Ethics

 

   

A strong corporate culture

 

   

The Company’s organization and mode of operations, with well-defined roles and responsibilities and delegations of authority

 

   

Several well-defined Group-wide processes for planning, operations and support.

The most essential parts of the control environment relative to financial reporting are included in steering documents and processes for accounting and financial reporting. These steering documents are updated regularly to include, among other things:

 

   

Changes to laws

 

   

Financial reporting standards and listing requirements, such as IFRS and SOX.

The processes include specific controls to be performed to ensure high quality financial reports. The management of each reporting legal entity, region and business unit is supported by a financial controller function with execution of controls related to transactions and reporting. The financial controller functions are organized in a number of Company Control Hubs, each supporting a number of legal entities within a geographical area. A financial controller function is also established on Group level, reporting to the CFO.

Risk assessment

Risks of material misstatements in financial reporting may exist in relation to recognition and measurement of assets, liabilities, revenue and cost or insufficient disclosure. Other risks related to financial reporting include fraud, loss or embezzlement of assets and undue favorable treatment of counterparties at the expense of the Company.

Policies and directives regarding accounting and financial reporting cover areas of particular significance to support correct, complete and timely accounting, reporting and disclosure.

Identified types of risks are mitigated through well-defined business processes with integrated risk management activities, segregation of duties and appropriate delegation of authority. This requires specific approval of material transactions and ensures adequate asset management.

 

213


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Control activities

The Company’s business processes include financial controls regarding the approval and accounting of business transactions. The financial closing and reporting process has controls regarding recognition, measurement and disclosure. These include the application of critical accounting policies and estimates, in individual subsidiaries as well as in the consolidated accounts.

Regular analyses of the financial results for each subsidiary, region and business unit cover the significant elements of assets, liabilities, revenues, costs and cash flow. Together with further analysis of the consolidated financial statements performed at Group level, these procedures are designed to produce financial reports without material errors.

For external financial reporting purposes, the Disclosure Committee performs additional control procedures to review whether the disclosure requirements are fulfilled.

The Company has implemented controls to ensure that financial reports are prepared in accordance with its internal accounting and reporting policies and IFRS as well as with relevant listing regulations. It maintains detailed documentation on internal controls related to accounting and financial reporting. It also keeps records on the monitoring of the execution and results of such controls. This allows the President and CEO and the CFO to assess the effectiveness of the controls in a way that is compliant with SOX.

Entity-wide controls, focusing on the control environment and compliance with financial reporting policies and directives, are implemented in all subsidiaries. Detailed process controls and documentation of controls performed are also implemented in almost all subsidiaries, covering the items with significant materiality and risk.

In order to secure compliance, governance and risk management in the areas of legal entity accounting and taxation, as well as securing funding and equity levels, the Company operates through a Company Control hub structure, covering subsidiaries in each respective geographical area.

Based on a common IT platform, a common chart of account and common master data, the hubs and shared services centers perform accounting and financial reporting services for most subsidiaries.

Information and communication

The Company’s information and communication channels support complete, correct and timely financial reporting by making all relevant internal process instructions and policies accessible to all the employees concerned. Regular updates and briefing documents regarding changes in accounting policies, reporting and disclosure requirements are also supplied.

Subsidiaries and operating units prepare regular financial and management reports for internal steering groups and Company management. These include analysis and comments on financial performance and risks. The Board of Directors receives financial reports monthly. Ericsson has established a whistleblower procedure for the reporting of alleged violations that (i) are conducted by Group or local management, and (ii) relate to corruption, questionable accounting or auditing matters or otherwise seriously affect vital interests of the Group or personal health and safety.

Monitoring

The Company’s process for financial reporting is reviewed annually by the management. This forms a basis for evaluating the internal management system and internal steering documents to ensure that they cover all

 

214


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

significant areas related to financial reporting. The shared service center and company control hub management continuously monitors accounting quality through a set of performance indicators. Compliance with policies and directives is monitored through annual self-assessments and representation letters from heads and company controllers in all subsidiaries as well as in business units and regions.

The Company’s financial performance is also reviewed at each Board meeting. The Committees of the Board fulfill important monitoring functions regarding remuneration, borrowing, investments, customer finance, cash management, financial reporting and internal control. The Audit Committee and the Board of Directors review all interim and annual financial reports before they are released to the market. The Company’s internal audit function reports directly to the Audit Committee. The Audit Committee also receives regular reports from the external auditor. The Audit Committee follows up on any actions taken to improve or modify controls.

BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Stockholm, March 5, 2013

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ)

Org. no. 556016–0680

 

215


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

REMUNERATION REPORT

INTRODUCTION

This report outlines how the remuneration policy is implemented throughout Ericsson in line with corporate governance best practice, with specific references to Group management. The work of the Remuneration Committee in 2012 and the remuneration policy are explained, at the beginning of the report, followed by descriptions of plans and approaches.

More details of the remuneration of Group management and Board members’ fees can be found in the Notes to the Consolidated financial statements—Note C28, “Information regarding members of the Board of Directors, the Group management and employees”.

THE REMUNERATION COMMITTEE

The Remuneration Committee advises the Board of Directors on an ongoing basis on the remuneration to the Executive Leadership Team (ELT). This includes fixed salaries, pensions, other benefits and short-term and long-term variable remuneration, all in the context of pay and employment conditions throughout Ericsson. The Remuneration Committee reviews and prepares for resolution by the Board:

 

   

Proposals on salary and other remuneration, including retirement compensation, for the President and CEO

 

   

Proposals on targets for the short-term variable remuneration for the President and CEO

 

   

Proposals to the Annual General Meeting on guidelines for remuneration to the ELT

 

   

Proposals to the Annual General Meeting on long-term variable remuneration and similar equity arrangements

The responsibility for the Remuneration Committee is also to:

 

   

Approve proposals on salary and other remuneration, including retirement compensation, for the Executive Vice Presidents and other ELT.

 

   

Approve proposals on targets for the short-term variable remuneration for the Executive Vice Presidents and other ELT.

 

   

Approve pay out of the short-term variable renumeration for the ELT, based on achievements and performance.

The Remuneration Committee’s work is the foundation for the governance of Ericsson’s remuneration processes together with Ericsson’s internal systems and audit controls. The Committee is chaired by Leif Johansson and its other members are Börje Ekholm, Nancy McKinstry, and Karin Åberg. All the members are non-executive directors, independent (except for the employee representative) as required by the Swedish Corporate Governance Code and have relevant knowledge and experience of remuneration matters.

The Company’s General Counsel acts as secretary to the Committee. The Chief Executive Officer, the Senior Vice President, Head of Human Resources and Organization and the Vice President, Head of Total Rewards attend the Remuneration Committee meetings by invitation and assist the Committee in its considerations, except when issues relating to their own remuneration are being discussed.

The Remuneration Committee has appointed an independent expert advisor, Piia Pilv, to assist and advise the Committee. The independent advisor provided no other services to the Company during 2012. The

 

216


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Remuneration Committee is also provided with national and international pay data collected from external survey providers and can call on other independent expertise, should it so require. The Chairman continues to ensure that contact is maintained, as necessary and appropriate, with principal shareholders regarding remuneration.

The purpose and function of the Remuneration Committee and its responsibilities can be found on the Ericsson website. These responsibilities, together with the Guidelines for remuneration to Group Management (ELT) and the Long-Term Variable remuneration plan, are reviewed and evaluated annually in light of matters such as changes to corporate governance best practice or changes to accounting, legislation, political opinion or business practices among peers. This helps to ensure that the policy continues to provide Ericsson with a competitive remuneration strategy.

The Guidelines for remuneration to Group Management are, in accordance with Swedish law, brought to shareholders annually for approval.

The Remuneration Committee met six times during the year 2012.

The winter meetings focused on following up on results from the 2011 variable remuneration programs and preparing proposals to shareholders for the 2012 Annual General Meeting (AGM). During the spring the committee determined remuneration to a new member of the ELT and revised the remuneration to others. In the fall, the committee reviewed the Guidelines for remuneration to Group Management and decided to continue the Long-Term Variable remuneration plans without any material changes and the Short-Term Variable remuneration plans with an increased weighting on capital and margins for 2013. The committee based its considerations on the business needs, analyses and reviews of the global market trends and feedback from shareholders and institutions. Supported by the independent advisor, the Committee also reviewed the competitiveness of the ELT remuneration in the global market. The Remuneration Committee is of the opinion that the Long-Term Variable remuneration plans fulfill the defined objectives to promote “One Ericsson” and to align the interests of employees with those of shareholders. The number of participants as of December 1, 2012 was 27,000 employees, compared to 24,000 employees as of December 1, 2011. The evaluation also confirms that the Key Contributor Retention Plan meets the purpose of retaining our key employees. The voluntary attrition rate among Key Contributors is about two-thirds compared to the attrition rate in the total number of employees.

REMUNERATION POLICY

Remuneration at Ericsson is based on the principles of performance, competitiveness and fairness. The remuneration policy, together with the mix of remuneration elements, is designed to reflect these principles by creating a balanced remuneration package. The Guidelines for remuneration to Group Management 2012 approved by AGM can be found in note C28. The auditor’s report regarding whether we have complied with the guidelines for compensation to the ELT during 2012 is posted on the Ericsson website.

 

217


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Summaries of 2012 short- and long-term variable remuneration

 

What we call it

 

What is it?

 

What is the objective?

 

Who participates?

  How is it earned?

Short-term: Remuneration delivered over 12 months or less

Fixed salary   Fixed remuneration paid at set times   Attract and retain employees, delivering part of annual remuneration in a predictable format   All employees   Market appropriate
levels set according
to position and
evaluated according
to individual
performance
Short-Term Variable remuneration (STV)   A variable plan that is measured and paid over a single year   Align employees with clear and relevant targets, providing an earnings opportunity in return for performance, and flexible cost   Enrolled employees, including Executive Leadership Team. Approx. 73,900 in 2012   Achievements
against set targets.
Reward can increase
to up to twice the
target level and
decrease to zero,
depending on
performance
Local and Sales Incentive Plans   Tailored versions of the STV   As for STV, tailored for local or business requirements, such as sales   Employees in sales. Approx. 2,300 in 2012   Similar to STV. All
plans have maximum
award and vesting
limits

Long-term: Remuneration delivered over 3 years or more

Stock Purchase Plan (SPP)   All-employee stock-based plan   Reinforce a “One Ericsson” mentality and align employees’ interests with those of shareholders   All employees are eligible   Buy one share and it
will be matched by
one share after
3 years if still
employed
Key Contributor Retention Plan (KC)   Share-based plan for selected individuals   Recognize, retain and motivate key contributors for performance, critical skills and potential   Up to 10% of employees   If selected, get one
more matching share
in addition to the
SPP one
Executive Performance Stock Plan (EPSP)   Share-based plan for senior executives   Remuneration for long-term commitment and value creation   Senior executives, including Executive Leadership Team   Get up to 4, 6 or, for
CEO, 9 further
matching shares to
the SPP one for
long-term
performance

REMUNERATION 2012

To enhance the understanding of how Ericsson translates remuneration principles and policy into practice, an internal remuneration website was launched in January 2011. The site contains e-learning and training programs targeted at line managers. It supports more informed decisions and better communication to the wider employee population. The next step in this development is the planned implementation of an Integrated HR IT tool. The first phase was launched to all managers in Ericsson in November 2012 and include performance management, talent planning, variable pay and annual salary review.

 

218


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

TOTAL REMUNERATION

When considering the remuneration of an individual, it is the total remuneration that matters. First, the total annual cash compensation is defined, consisting of the target level of short-term variable remuneration plus fixed salary. Thereafter, target long-term variable remuneration may be added to get to the total target remuneration and, finally, pension and other benefits may be added to arrive at the total remuneration.

For the ELT, remuneration consists of fixed salary, short-term and long-term variable remuneration, pension and other benefits. If the size of any one of these elements is increased or decreased when setting the remuneration, at least one other element has to change if the competitive position is to remain unchanged.

The remuneration costs for the CEO and the ELT are reported in Note C28.

Fixed salary

When setting fixed salaries, the Remuneration Committee considers the impact on total remuneration, including pension and associated costs. The absolute levels are determined by the size and complexity of the position and the year-to-year performance of the individual. Together with other elements of remuneration, ELT salaries are subject to an annual review by the Remuneration Committee, which considers external pay data to ensure that levels of pay remain competitive and appropriate to the remuneration policy.

Variable remuneration

Ericsson strongly believes that, where possible, variable compensation should be encouraged as an integral part of total remuneration. First and foremost, this aligns employees with clear and relevant targets, but it also enables more flexible payroll costs and emphasizes the link between performance and pay. All variable remuneration plans have maximum award and vesting limits. Short-term variable remuneration is to a greater extent dependent on the specific unit or function, while long-term variable remuneration is dependent on the achievements of the Ericsson Group.

Short-term variable remuneration

Annual variable remuneration is delivered through cash-based programs. Specific business targets are derived from the annual business plan approved by the Board of Directors and, in turn, defined by the Company’s long-term strategy. Ericsson strives to grow faster than the market with best-in-class margins and strong cash conversion and therefore the starting point is to have three core targets:

 

   

Net sales growth

 

   

Operating income

 

   

Cash flow.

For the ELT, targets are thus predominantly financial at either Group level (for Heads of Group functions) or at the individual unit level (for Heads of regions or business units) and may also include operational targets like customer satisfaction and employee engagement.

 

219


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

The chart below illustrates how payouts to the ELT have varied with performance over the past five years.

 

LOGO

Short-term variable remuneration structure

 

      Short-term variable remuneration
as percentage of fixed salary
    Percentage of short-term variable
remuneration maximal opportunity
 
     Target
level
    Maximum
level
    Actual paid
for 2012
    Group financial
targets
    Unit/functional
financial targets
    Non-financial
targets
 

CEO 2012

     40     80     32     90     0     10

CEO 2013

     40     80     —          100     0     0

Average ELT 20121)

     36     72     37     49     27     24

Average ELT 20131)

     38     76     —          50     24     26

 

1) Excludes CEO—differences in target and maximum levels from year to year are due to changes in the composition of the ELT.

The Board of Directors and the Remuneration Committee decide on all Ericsson Group targets, which are cascaded to unit-related targets throughout the Company, always subject to a two-level management approval process. The Remuneration Committee monitors the appropriateness and fairness of Group target levels throughout the performance year and has the authority to revise them should they cease to be relevant or stretching or to enhance shareholder value.

During 2012, approximately 76,200 employees participated in short-term variable remuneration plans.

Long-term variable remuneration

Share-based long-term variable remuneration plans are submitted each year for approval by shareholders at the AGM. All long-term variable remuneration plans are designed to form part of a well-balanced total remuneration package and to span over a minimum of three years. As these are variable plans, outcomes are unknown and rewards depend on long-term personal investment, corporate performance and resulting share price performance. During 2012, share-based remuneration was made up of three different but linked plans: the all-employee Stock Purchase Plan, the Key Contributor Retention Plan and the Executive Performance Stock Plan.

The Stock Purchase Plan

The all-employee Stock Purchase Plan is designed to offer, where practicable, an incentive for all employees to participate. This reinforces “One Ericsson” aligned with shareholder interests. Employees can save up to 7.5% of gross fixed salary (the President and CEO can save up to 10% of gross fixed salary and short-term variable remuneration) for purchase of Class B shares at market price on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm or ADSs on

 

220


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

NASDAQ New York (contribution shares) over a twelve-month period. If the contribution shares are retained by the employee for three years after the investment and employment with the Ericsson Group continues during that time, the employee’s shares will be matched with a corresponding number of Class B shares or ADSs, as applicable. The plan was introduced in 2002 and employees in 71 countries participated during its first year. In December 2012, the number of participants was over 27,000, or approximately 28% of eligible employees in 100 countries.

Participants save each month, beginning with the August payroll, towards quarterly investments. These investments (in November, February, May and August) are matched on the third anniversary of each such investment and hence the matching spans over two financial years and two tax years.

The Key Contributor Retention Plan

The Key Contributor Retention Plan is part of Ericsson’s talent management strategy. It is designed to recognize individuals for performance, critical skills and potential as well as to encourage retention of key employees.

Under the program, operating units around the world can nominate up to 10% of employees worldwide. Each unit nominates individuals that have been identified according to performance, critical skills and potential. The nominations are calibrated in management teams locally and are reviewed by both local and corporate Human Resources to ensure that there is a minimum of bias and a strong belief in the system.

Participants selected obtain one extra matching share in addition to the one matching share for each contribution share purchased under the Stock Purchase Plan during a twelve-month investment period. The plan was introduced in 2004.

The Executive Performance Stock Plan

The Executive Performance Stock Plan was first introduced in 2004. The plan is designed to focus management on driving long-term financial performance and to provide market competitive remuneration. Senior executives, including the ELT, are selected to obtain up to four or six extra shares (performance matching shares). This is in addition to the one matching share for each contribution share purchased under the all-employee Stock Purchase Plan. Performance matching is subject to the fulfillment of performance targets. Since 2010, the President and CEO may obtain up to nine performance matching shares in addition to the Stock Purchase Plan matching share for each contribution share.

In the 2004 to 2010 plans, the performance targets were Earnings Per Share (EPS) targets.

To support the long-term strategy and value creation of the Company, new targets were defined for the 2011 plan. At the AGM 2012, the following targets for the 2012 Executive Performance Stock Plan were resolved on proposal by the Board:

 

   

Up to one-third of the award shall vest provided the compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of consolidated net sales between year 0 (2011 financial year) and year 3 (2014 financial year) is between 2% and 8%.

 

   

Up to one-third of the award shall vest provided the compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of consolidated operating income between year 0 (2011 financial year) and year 3 (2014 financial year) is between 5% and 15%.

 

   

Up to one-third of the award will be based on the cash conversion during each of the years during the performance period, calculated as cash flow from operating activities divided by net income reconciled to cash. One-ninth of the total award will vest for any year, i.e. financial years 2012, 2013 and 2014, if cash conversion is at or above 70%.

 

221


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Before the number of performance shares to be matched are finally determined, the Board of Directors shall examine whether the performance matching is reasonable considering the Company’s financial results and position, conditions on the stock market and other circumstances, and if not, as determined by the Board of Directors, reduce the number of performance shares to be matched to the lower number of shares deemed appropriate by the Board of Directors. When undertaking its evaluation of performance outcomes the Board of Directors will consider, in particular, the impact of larger acquisitions, divestitures, the creation of joint ventures and any other significant capital event on the three targets on a case by case basis.

Benefits and terms of employment

Pension benefits follow the competitive practice in the employee’s home country and may contain various supplementary plans, in addition to any national system for social security. Where possible, pension plans are operated on a defined contribution basis. Under these plans, Ericsson pays contributions into a plan but does not guarantee the ultimate benefit, unless local regulations or legislation prescribe that defined benefit plans that do give such guarantees have to be offered.

For the President and CEO and other members of the ELT employed in Sweden before 2011, a supplementary pension plan is applied in addition to the occupational pension plan for salaried staff on the Swedish labor market (ITP). The pension age for these ELT members is normally 60 years.

The ELT members employed in Sweden from 2011 are normally covered by the defined contribution plan under the ITP1 scheme, with a pensionable age of 65 years.

For members of the ELT who are not employed in Sweden, local market competitive pension arrangements apply.

Other benefits, such as company car and medical insurance, are also set to be competitive in the local market. The ELT members may not receive loans from the Company.

The ELT members locally employed in Sweden have a mutual notice period of up to six months. Upon termination of employment by the Company, severance pay can amount to up to 18 months’ fixed salary. For other ELT members, different notice period and severance pay agreements apply; however, no agreement exceeds the notice period of six months or the severance pay period of 18 months.

 

222


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

SHARE INFORMATION

STOCK EXCHANGE TRADING

The Ericsson Class A and Class B shares are listed on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm. In the United States, the Class B shares are listed on NASDAQ New York in the form of American Depositary Shares (ADS) evidenced by American Depositary Receipts (ADR) under the symbol ERIC. Each ADS represents one Class B share.

In 2012, approximately 2.4 (3.4) billion shares were traded on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm and about 1.1 (1.6) billion shares were traded on NASDAQ New York. A total of 3.5 (5) billion Ericsson shares where thus traded on the exchanges were we are listed. Trading volume in Ericsson shares decreased by approximately 27% on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm and by approximately 30% on NASDAQ New York compared to 2011.

The Ericsson share is also traded on other venues such as BATS Europe, Burgundy, Chi-X Europe.

The Ericsson share

 

Share listings

  

NASDAQ OMX Stockholm

  

NASDAQ New York

  

Share data

  

Total number of shares in issue

     3,305,051,735   

of which Class A shares, each carrying one vote1)

     261,755,983   

of which Class B shares, each carrying one tenth of one vote1)

     3,043,295,752   

Ericsson treasury shares, Class B

     84,798,095   

Quotient value

     SEK 5.00   

Market capitalization, December 31, 2012

     approx. SEK 215 b.   

ICB (Industry Classification Benchmark)

     9500   

Ticker codes

  

NASDAQ OMX Stockholm

     ERIC A/ERIC B   

NASDAQ New York

     ERIC   

Bloomberg NASDAQ OMX Stockholm

     ERICA SS/ERICB SS   

Bloomberg NASDAQ

     ERIC US   

Reuters NASDAQ OMX Stockholm

     ERICa.ST/ERICb.ST   

Reuters NASDAQ

     ERIC.O   

 

1) Both classes of shares have the same rights of participation in the net assets and earnings.

Changes in number of shares and capital stock 2008–2012

 

          Number of shares      Share capital  

2008

   June 2, reverse split 1:5      3,226,451,735         16,132,258,678   

2008

   July 23, new issue (Class C shares, later converted to Class B)      19,900,000         99,500,000   

2008

   December 31      3,246,351,735         16,231,758,678   

2009

   June 8, new issue (Class C shares, later converted to Class B)      27,000,000         135,000,000   

2009

   December 31      3,273,351,735         16,366,758,678   

2010

   December 31      3,273,351,735         16,366,758,678   

2011

   December 31      3,273,351,735         16,366,758,678   

2012

   June 29, new issue (Class C shares, later converted to Class B)1)      31,700,000         158,500,000   

2012

   December 31      3,305,051,735         16,525,258,678   

 

223


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

1) The Annual General Meeting (AGM) 2012 resolved to issue 31.7 million Class C shares for the Long-Term Variable Remuneration Program (LTV). In accordance with an authorization from the AGM, in the second quarter 2012, the Board of Directors resolved to repurchase the new issued shares, which were subsequently converted into Class B shares. The quotient value of the repurchased shares was SEK 5.00, totaling SEK 158.5 million, representing less than one percent of capital stock, and the acquisition cost was approximately SEK 158.7 million.

Share performance indicators

 

     2012      2011      2010      2009      2008  

Earnings per share, diluted (SEK)1)

     1.78         3.77         3.46         1.14         3.52   

Earnings per share, diluted non-IFRS (SEK)2)

     2.74         4.72         4.80         2.87         4.24   

Operating income per share (SEK)3)4)

     3.25         5.58         7.42         5.80         7.50   

Stockholders’ equity per share, basic, end of period (SEK)5)

     42.51         44.57         45.34         43.79         44.21   

P/E ratio

     36         19         22         57         17   

Total shareholder return (%)

     –3         –7         22         15         –20   

Dividend per share (SEK)6)

     2.75         2.50         2.25         2.00         1.85   

 

1) Calculated on average number of shares outstanding, diluted.
2) EPS, diluted, excluding amortizations and write-downs of acquired intangible assets, SEK.
3) Calculated on average number of shares outstanding, basic.
4) For 2010, 2009 and 2008 excluding restructuring charges.
5) Calculated on number of shares, end of period.
6) For 2012 as proposed by the Board of Directors.

For definitions of the financial terms used, see Glossary, Financial Terminology and Exchange Rates.

SHARE TREND

In 2012, Ericsson’s total market capitalization decreased by about 7% to SEK 215 billion, compared to a decrease by 10% reaching SEK 230 billion in 2011. The OMX Stockholm Index on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm increased by 12% and the NASDAQ composite index increased by 16%. The S&P 500 Index increased by 13%.

 

LOGO

 

224


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

225


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

OFFER AND LISTING DETAILS

Principal trading market—NASDAQ OMX Stockholm—share prices

The table below states the high and low share prices for our Class A and Class B shares as reported by NASDAQ OMX Stockholm for the last five years. Trading on the exchange generally continues until 5:30 p.m. (CET) each business day. In addition to trading on the exchange, there is also trading off the exchange and on alternative venues during trading hours and also after 5:30 p.m. (CET).

NASDAQ OMX Stockholm publishes a daily Official Price List of Shares which includes the volume of recorded transactions in each listed stock, together with the prices of the highest and lowest recorded trades of the day. The Official Price List of Shares reflects price and volume information for trades completed by the members. The equity securities listed on the NASDAQ OMX Stockholm Official Price List of Shares currently comprise the shares of 258 companies.

 

226


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Share prices on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm

 

(SEK)

   2012      2011      2010      2009      2008  

Class A at last day of trading

     63.90         69.55         74.00         65.00         59.30   

Class A high (January 3, 2012)

     72.00         93.60         88.40         78.80         83.60   

Class A low (November 16, 2012)

     55.55         59.05         65.20         55.40         40.60   

Class B at last day of trading

     65.10         70.40         78.15         65.90         58.80   

Class B high (January 3, 2012)

     71.90         96.65         90.45         79.60         83.70   

Class B low (July 18, 2012)

     55.90         61.70         65.90         55.50         40.60   

 

Source: Nasdaq OMX Stockholm

Share prices on NASDAQ New York

 

(USD)

   2012      2011      2010      2009      2008  

ADS at last day of trading

     10.10         10.13         11.53         9.19         7.81   

ADS high (April 3, 2012)

     10.60         15.44         12.39         10.92         14.00   

ADS low (May 17, 2012)

     8.23         8.83         9.40         6.60         5.49   

 

Source: Nasdaq New York

Host market NASDAQ New York—ADS prices

The table below states the high and low share prices quoted for our ADSs on NASDAQ New York for the last five years. The NASDAQ New York quotations represent prices between dealers, not including retail mark-ups, markdowns or commissions, and do not necessarily represent actual transactions.

 

227


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Share prices on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm and NASDAQ New York

 

     NASDAQ OMX Stockholm      NASDAQ New York  
     SEK per Class A share      SEK per Class B share      USD per ADS1)  

Period

       High              Low              High              Low              High              Low      

Annual high and low

                 

2008

     83.60         40.60         83.70         40.60         14.00         5.49   

2009

     78.80         55.40         79.60         55.50         10.92         6.60   

2010

     88.40         65.20         90.45         65.90         12.39         9.40   

2011

     93.60         59.05         96.65         61.70         15.44         8.83   

2012

     72.00         55.55         71.90         55.90         10.60         8.23   

Quarterly high and low

                 

2011 First Quarter

     80.05         70.50         83.00         73.25         13.06         10.99   

2011 Second Quarter

     93.60         73.00         96.65         75.30         15.44         12.06   

2011 Third Quarter

     91.80         60.50         93.80         63.15         14.82         9.33   

2011 Fourth Quarter

     71.50         59.05         72.55         61.70         11.25         8.83   

2012 First Quarter

     72.00         59.25         71.90         58.15         10.53         8.58   

2012 Second Quarter

     69.70         58.75         69.95         59.60         10.60         8.23   

2012 Third Quarter

     67.00         55.95         67.80         55.90         10.05         8.23   

2012 Fourth Quarter

     64.90         55.55         66.85         56.60         10.21         8.31   

Monthly high and low

                 

August 2012

     67.00         60.55         67.80         61.50         10.05         9.14   

September 2012

     62.55         58.35         64.10         59.85         9.79         8.91   

October 2012

     59.85         56.10         61.00         57.40         9.27         8.57   

November 2012

     60.50         55.55         62.30         56.60         9.41         8.31   

December 2012

     64.90         60.00         66.85         62.45         10.21         9.40   

January 2013

     74.30         62.90         76.95         64.50         11.82         9.78   

February 2013

     77.75         72.30         79.90         74.20         12.70         11.97   

March 2013

     84.55         75.60         86.40         77.60         13.46         12.07   

 

1) One ADS = 1 Class B share.

Source: Nasdaq OMX Stockholm and Nasdaq New York

SHAREHOLDERS

As of December 31, 2012, the Parent Company had 551,719 shareholders registered at Euroclear Sweden AB (the Central Securities Depository—CSD), of which 1,080 holders had a US address. According to information provided by our depositary, Citibank, there were 189,454,944 ADSs outstanding as of December 31, 2012, and 4,500 registered holders of such ADSs. A significant number of Ericsson ADSs are held by banks, brokers and/or nominees for the accounts of their customers. As of January 3, 2013, the total number of bank, broker and/or nominee accounts holding Ericsson ADSs was 169,190.

According to information known at year-end 2012, approximately 78% of our Class A and Class B shares were owned by institutions, Swedish and international.

Our major shareholders do not have different voting rights than other shareholders holding the same classes of shares.

As far as we know, the Company is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled by another corporation, by any foreign government or by any other natural or legal person(s) separately or jointly.

 

228


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

 

LOGO

The table shows the total number of shares in the Parent Company owned by the Executive Leadership Team and Board members (including Deputy employee representatives) as a group as of December 31, 2012.

The Executive Leadership Team and Board members, ownership

 

     Number of
Class A
shares
     Number of
Class B
shares
     Voting
rights,
percent
 

The Executive Leadership Team and Board members as a group (31 persons)

     0         559,450         0.01   

 

For individual holdings, see Corporate Governance Report.

 

229


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

The following table shows share information, as of December 31, 2012, with respect to our 15 largest shareholders, ranked by voting rights, as well as percentage of voting rights as of December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010.

Largest shareholders, December 31, 2012 and percentage of voting rights, December 31, 2012, 2011 and 2010

 

Identity of person or group1)

  Number of
Class A

shares
    Of total
Class A
shares,
percent
    Number of
Class B
shares
    Of total
Class B
shares,
percent
    2012
Voting rights,
percent
    2011
Voting rights,
percent
    2010
Voting rights,
percent
 

Investor AB

    115,018,707        43.94        59,284,545        1.95        21.37        21.48        19.33   

AB Industrivärden

    84,708,520        32.36        0        0.00        14.96        14.34        13.80   

Handelsbankens Pensionsstiftelse

    21,057,443        8.04        0        0.00        3.72        4.20        3.52   

Swedbank Robur Fonder AB

    1,505,751        0.58        138,107,152        4.54        2.71        2.79        2.73   

AFA Försäkring AB

    11,423,000        4.36        9,151,631        0.30        2.18        2.31        0.45   

Blackrock Fund Advisors

    0        0.00        77,802,606        2.56        1.37        1.46        1.44   

Norges Bank Investment Management

    0        0.00        77,226,311        2.54        1.36        1.24        0.89   

Skandia Liv

    6,263,167        2.39        11,414,818        0.38        1.31        1.36        2.98   

AMF Pensionsförsäkring AB

    0        0.00        71,108,980        2.34        1.26        1.34        1.34   

Aberdeen Asset Managers Ltd.

    0        0.00        65,706,158        2.16        1.16        1.05        1.01   

Dodge & Cox, Inc.

    0        0.00        64,443,081        2.12        1.14        0.96        1.43   

Pensionskassan SHB Försäkringsförening

    6,381,570        2.44        0        0.00        1.13        1.39        2.07   

Orbis Investment Management Ltd.

    0        0.00        62,271,048        2.05        1.10        0.35        0.06   

OppenheimerFunds, Inc.

    0        0.00        62,070,708        2.04        1.10        1.20        1.29   

Handelsbanken Fonder AB

    261,500        0.10        58,019,980        1.91        1.07        0.96        1.05   

Others

    15,136,325        5.78        2,286,688,734        75.14        43.07        43.57        46.61   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    261,755,983        100        3,043,295,752        100        100        100        100   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) Source: Capital Precision

 

230


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION

The following information is provided to comply with certain requirements of Form 20-F which are not satisfied in full by the information in the Swedish Annual Report.

GENERAL FACTS ON THE COMPANY

Legal name of the Parent Company: Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ)

Organization number: 556016-0680

Legal form of the Parent Company: A Swedish limited liability company, organized under the Swedish Companies Act. The terms “Ericsson”, the “Company”, the “Group”, “us”, “we”, and “our” all refer to Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson and its subsidiaries.

Country of incorporation: Sweden.

Date of incorporation: The Parent Company was incorporated on August 18, 1918, as a result of a merger between AB LM Ericsson & Co. and Stockholms Allmänna Telefon AB.

Domicile: Our registered office is Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson, SE–164 83 Stockholm, Sweden. Our headquarters are located at Torshamnsgatan 23, Kista, Sweden.

Telephone number: +46 10 719 0000

Website: www.ericsson.com

The information included on our website is not incorporated herein by reference.

Agent in the US: Ericsson Inc., Vice President Legal Affairs, 6300 Legacy Drive, Plano, Texas 75024. Telephone number: +1 972 583 0000.

Shares: Ericsson’s Class A and Class B shares are traded on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm. In the US, our American Depository Shares (ADS), each representing one underlying Class B share, are traded on NASDAQ.

Parent Company operations: The business of the Parent Company, Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson, consists mainly of corporate management, holding company functions and internal banking activities. Parent Company operations also include customer credit management activities performed by Ericsson Credit AB on a commission basis.

Subsidiaries and associated companies: For a listing of our significant subsidiaries, please see section “Investments”. In addition to our joint venture ST-Ericsson, we are engaged in a number of other minor joint ventures and cooperative arrangements. For more information regarding risks associated with joint ventures, strategic alliances and third-party agreements please see Risk Factors, “Market, Technology and Business Risks”.

Filings in the US: Annual reports and other information are filed with, or furnished to, the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) in the United States, pursuant to the rules and regulations that apply to foreign private issuers. Electronic access to these documents may be obtained from the SEC’s website, www.sec.gov, where they are stored in the EDGAR database.

 

231


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

COMPANY HISTORY AND DEVELOPMENT

Innovating to empower people, business and society

Our origins date back to 1876 when Alexander Graham Bell filed a patent application in the United States for the telephone. The same year, Lars Magnus Ericsson opened a small workshop in Stockholm to repair telegraph instruments and sell his own telephone equipment.

Today, Ericsson is a leading provider of communications equipment, telecom services and support solutions. Our customers, in over 180 countries, are mainly operators of communications networks worldwide. We manage networks, or parts of networks, for 950 million subscribers.

EXCHANGE RATES

The following tables provide information with respect to the exchange rate for SEK per USD 1.00, based on the noon buying rate for cable transfers in SEK as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. The noon buying rate of March 29, 2013, was SEK 6.5280 per USD 1.00. The average is computed using the noon buying rate on the last business day of each month during the period indicated.

AVERAGE EXCHANGE RATES

 

Year ended December 31

   Average  

2008

     6.6424   

2009

     7.6232   

2010

     7.1895   

2011

     6.4263   

2012

     6.7247   

 

EXCHANGE RATES, MONTHLY HIGH AND LOW      

Month

   High      Low  

September 2012

     6.7450         6.5018   

October 2012

     6.7023         6.5484   

November 2012

     6.8019         6.6092   

December 2012

     6.6920         6.5074   

January 2013

     6.5568         6.3476   

February 2013

     6.4764         6.2880   

March 2013 (latest available data is for March 29)

     6.5280         6.3412   

Effects of exchange rate fluctuations on our business is described in the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements—Note C20, “Financial Risk Management and Financial Instruments.” Noon buying rates are not used in the preparation of our financial statements.

 

232


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

PRIMARY MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY FACILITIES

We continuously adjust our production capacity to meet expected customer demand. At year-end 2012, our overall capacity utilization was close to 100%. The table “Primary manufacturing and assembly facilities” summarizes where we have major sites and the total floor space at year-end. In Sweden, the majority of the floor space within our production facilities is used for node assembly and verification.

PRIMARY MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY FACILITIES

 

     2012      2011     2010  
     Sites      Thousands of
sq meters
     Sites      Thousands
of sq  meters
    Sites      Thousands
of sq  meters
 
                

Sweden

     7         125.1         7         125.1     6         204.4   

China

     5         83.5         5         91.1        4         61.1   

Estonia

     1         23.7         1         23.7        1         20.6   

Italy

     1         10.5         2         20.1        2         20.1   

Brazil

     1         37.4         1         33.7        1         23.3   

Mexico

     1         0.6         —           —          —           —     

India

     1         25.0         1         25.0     1         15.6   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     17         305.8         17         318.7        15         345.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

* Restated for 2011 to only include manufacturing and assembly areas. The reported number for China in the 20-F for 2011 was 80.7 and for Sweden 429.3. These numbers comprised total land use.

OPERATING RESULTS

Years ended December 31, 2011 and 2012

Please refer to Board of Directors’ Report.

 

233


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Years ended December 31, 2010 and 2011

FINANCIAL RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

ABBREVIATED INCOME STATEMENT WITH RECONCILIATION IFRS—NON-IFRS MEASURES

 

     IFRS     Restructuring charges      Non-IFRS measures  

SEK billion

   2011     2010     2009     2011      2010      2009      2011     2010     2009  

Net sales

     226.9        203.3        206.5                 226.9        203.3        206.5   

Cost of sales

     –147.2        –129.1        –136.3        –1.2         –3.4         –4.2         –146.0        –125.7        –132.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross income

     79.7        74.3        70.2        –1.2         –3.4         –4.2         80.9        77.6        74.4   

Gross margin %

     35.1     36.5     34.0              35.7     38.2     36.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating expenses

     –59.3        –58.6        –60.0        –2.0         –3.5         –7.1         –57.3        –55.2        –52.9   

Operating expenses as % of sales

     26.1     28.8     29.0              25.3     27.1     25.6

Other operating income and expenses

     1.3        2.0        3.1        —           —           —           1.3        2.0        3.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income before share in earnings of JVs and associated companies

     21.7        17.6        13.3        –3.2         –6.8         –11.3         24.9        24.4        24.6   

Operating margin % before share in earnings of JVs and associated companies

     9.6     8.7     6.5              11.0     12.0     11.9
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Share in earnings of JVs and associated companies

     –3.8        –1.2        –7.4        –0.6         –0.5         –1.3         –3.2        –0.7        –6.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

     17.9        16.5        5.9        –3.7         –7.3         –12.6         21.6        23.7        18.5   

Operating margin %

     7.9     8.1     2.9              9.5     11.7     9.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Financial income and expense, net

     0.2        –0.7        0.3                  

Taxes

     –5.6        –4.5        –2.1                  

Net income

     12.6        11.2        4.1                  

EPS diluted (SEK)

     3.77        3.46        1.14                  
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The non-IFRS financial measures presented herein are not measures of financial performance calculated or presented under IFRS, but rather are measures used as supplemental information to the IFRS results. Since there were restructuring costs during 2009 and 2010 with significant impact on reported results and margins, certain income statement line items excluding restructuring charges, are presented as non-IFRS financial measures to facilitate analysis by indicating Ericsson’s underlying performance. Non-IFRS financial measures have limitations as analytical tools and should not be viewed in isolation or as substitutes to the IFRS financial measures, and do not necessarily indicate whether cash flow will be sufficient or available to meet Ericsson’s requirements, and may not be indicative of our historical operating results, nor are such measures meant to be predictive of future results. Non-IFRS measures for 2011 have also been included to facilitate comparison with previous years.

Sales

2011 was a year with strong sales growth of 12%, driven by strong demand for mobile broadband along with network rollout services. Sales were negatively impacted by the strong SEK. Sales for comparable units, adjusted for currency exchange rate effects and hedging, increased 19%.

 

234


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In 2011, the Company executed on its strategy to leverage its strengths in the growth areas mobile broadband, managed services, OSS and BSS. Due to the technology cycle where mobile broadband is being rolled out, the business mix shifted to more coverage projects. Ericsson also implemented its strategy to capture new market share in the network modernization projects in Europe, despite their initial lower margins.

In 2011, seven out of ten regions grew. In the year, there was an impact from slower operator spending after a period of high investments in capacity, especially in North America and Russia, as well as political unrest in certain countries. In the last quarter of the year, the Company also noticed some increased operator cautiousness due to uncertainties such as economic development and continued political unrest in certain countries.

In 2011, the share of software sales declined to 23% (24%) of sales while the portion of hardware increased to 40% (37%). The increase in hardware is a result of demand for mobile broadband products. In the short term, the software share might continue to decrease due to a higher portion of projects with a lot of hardware. Longer term, the software part should increase following more expansions and upgrades of networks.

Services sales amounted to 37% (39%) in 2011.

Seasonality

The Company’s quarterly sales, income and cash flow from operations are seasonal in nature, generally lowest in the first quarter of the year and highest in the fourth quarter. This is mainly a result of the seasonal purchase patterns of network operators.

MOST RECENT FIVE-YEAR AVERAGE SEASONALITY

 

     First
quarter
    Second
quarter
    Third
quarter
    Fourth
quarter
 

Sequential change

     –21     8     –4     27

Share of annual sales

     23     24     23     30

Financial numbers in this section are reported:

 

   

for 2011, including restructuring charges

 

   

for 2010, excluding restructuring charges.

Gross margin

Gross margin declined to 35.1% (38.2%) due to higher share of coverage projects, network modernization projects in Europe and 3G rollouts in India. Gross margin in 2010, including restructuring charges, amounted to 36.5%.

Operating expenses

To secure continued technology leadership, focus is on innovation and R&D. R&D expenses amounted to SEK 32.6 (29.9) billion. Spending on R&D as a percentage of sales was 14.4% (14.7%). In 2010, R&D spend including restructuring charges was SEK 31.6 billion or 15.5% of sales. The increase in absolute number is a result of planned higher investments in radio, such as TD-LTE, IP and the acquired LG-Ericsson operations. In 2012, R&D expenses of SEK 29–31 billion is estimated. The estimate includes amortizations/write-downs of intangible assets related to major acquisitions previously made. However, currency effects may cause this to change.

 

235


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Selling and administrative expenses represented 11.8% of sales compared to 12.4% in 2010. The amount was SEK 26.7 (25.3) billion. In 2010, the amount including restructuring charges was SEK 27.1 billion, representing 13.3% of sales. In the year, there were positive effects from efficiency work along with the strong SEK.

Operating margin before JVs

Operating margin before share in JV earnings decreased to 9.6% (12.0%). However, in 2010, operating margin before share in JV earnings and including restructuring charges amounted to 8.7%.

Share in earnings of JVs

In 2011, Sony Ericsson reported a loss. The loss reflects intense competition, price erosion, restructuring charges and supply chain issues following the earthquake and tsunami in Japan. Ericsson’s share in Sony Ericsson’s income before tax was SEK –1.2 (0.9) billion. In 2010, Ericsson’s share amounted to SEK 0.7 billion including restructuring charges.

ST-Ericsson reported a loss also in 2011. ST-Ericsson is currently in a shift from legacy to new products. Ericsson’s share in ST-Ericsson’s income before tax, adjusted to IFRS, was SEK –2.7 (–1.5) billion. In 2010, the loss amounted to SEK –1.8 billion including restructuring charges.

Operating income

Operating income was SEK 17.9 (23.7) billion. However, in 2010, operating income including restructuring charges amounted to SEK 16.5 billion.

Financial net

The financial net was SEK 0.2 (–0.7) billion. The difference is mainly attributable to a higher interest net of SEK 0.8 billion compared to 2010.

Taxes

The tax expense for the year was SEK 5.6 (4.5) billion or 30.6% (28.8%) of income after financial items. The tax rate may vary between years depending on business and geographic mix. The tax rate excluding joint ventures and associated companies was 26.4% (25.7%) due to lower tax rates from the loss-making joint ventures.

Net income

Net income increased 12% to SEK 12.6 (11.2) billion driven by higher sales and lower restructuring charges.

Earnings per share, diluted

Earnings per share increased 9% to SEK 3.77 (3.46). The Board of Directors proposes a dividend of SEK 2.50 (2.25). This represents an increase of 11%.

Restructuring charges

Total restructuring charges were SEK 3.2 (6.8) billion, excluding joint ventures. Cash outlays that have been provided for were SEK 3.2 (3.3) billion. At the end of the year, cash outlays of SEK 1.3 billion remain to be made. In 2012, restructuring charges of approximately SEK 4 billion are estimated.

 

236


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Ericsson’s share in Sony Ericsson’s restructuring charges amounted to SEK 0.4 (0.2) billion. Ericsson’s share in ST-Ericsson’s restructuring charges was SEK 0.1 (0.3) billion.

RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

 

     2011     2010     2009  

Expenses (SEK billion)1)

     32.6        29.9        27.0   

As percent of Net sales

     14.4     14.7     13.1

Employees within R&D as of December 312)

     22,400        20,800        18,300   

Patents2)

     30,000        27,000        25,000   

 

1) Excluding restructuring charges for 2009 and 2010.
2) The number of employees and patents are approximate.

FINANCIAL POSITION

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET (ABBREVIATED)

 

December 31, SEK billion

   2011     2010      2009  

ASSETS

       

Non-current assets, total

     81.5        83.4         87.4   

of which intangible assets

     44.0        46.8         48.2   

of which property, plant and equipment

     10.8        9.4         9.6   

of which financial assets

     13.7        14.5         15.3   

of which deferred tax assets

     13.0        12.7         14.3   

Current assets, total

     198.8        198.4         182.4   

of which inventory

     33.1        29.9         22.7   

of which trade receivables

     64.5        61.1         66.4   

of which other receivables/financing

     20.7        20.2         16.6   

of which short-term investments, cash and cash equivalents

     80.5 2)      87.2         76.7   

Total assets

     280.3        281.8         269.8   

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

       

Equity

     145.3        146.8         141.0   

Non-current liabilities

     38.1        38.3         43.3   

of which post-employment benefits

     10.0        5.1         8.5   

of which borrowings

     23.3        27.0         30.0   

of which other non-current liabilities

     4.8        6.2         4.8   

Current liabilities

     97.0        96.8         85.5   

of which provisions

     6.0        9.4         12.0   

of which current borrowings

     7.8        3.8         2.1   

of which trade payables

     25.3        25.0         18.9   

of which other current liabilities

     58.0        58.6         52.5   

Total equity and liabilities1)

     280.3        281.8         269.8   

 

1) Of which interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits SEK 41.0 (35.9) billion.
2) Including loan to ST-Ericsson of SEK 2.8 billion.

Ericsson’s strategy is to maintain a strong balance sheet including a sufficiently large cash position to ensure the financial flexibility to operate freely and to capture business opportunities. This has been particularly important during the past years’ difficult macroeconomic and financial market situation.

 

237


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

By maintaining a strong cash position, the Company can also maintain an active strategy for strategic mergers and acquisitions.

An important focus area is the monitoring of working capital. Major efforts have been made during the year in order to reduce days sales outstanding and inventory turnover days as well as to increase payable days. The target for payable days was met, while the other two targets were not achieved. The efforts to further reduce working capital will continue in 2012 and the working capital targets are the same as previous years.

In 2011, the dividend was SEK 2.25 per share. The Board of Directors will propose to the Annual General Meeting 2012 a dividend of SEK 2.50 per share. This represents a total dividend of approximately SEK 8.2 billion. The proposal reflects year 2011’s earnings and balance sheet structure, as well as coming years’ business plans and expected economic development.

Non-current assets

Intellectual property rights, brands and other intangible assets decreased to SEK 13.1 (16.7) billion due to amortizations.

Customer financing, current and non-current, decreased slightly to SEK 4.2 (4.4) billion.

Current assets

Inventory levels increased during the year by SEK 3.2 billion due to higher sales and increased share of coverage projects. At year end, inventory was SEK 33.1 (29.9) billion. The higher inventory level followed a higher level of work in progress in the regions. The target of inventory turnover days less than 65 days was not reached and improvement efforts will continue in 2012.

Trade receivables: Days sales outstanding reached 91 (88) days at year-end. This reflects a higher portion of coverage projects and higher sales volumes. The Company’s nominal credit losses have historically been low and continued to be so in 2011.

Net cash decreased to SEK 39.5 (51.3) billion, mainly due to a negative change in net operating assets, investing and dividend paid to shareholders. Pension liabilities increased due to lower discount rate and this impacted net cash negatively.

Equity

Equity decreased by SEK –1.5 billion to SEK 145.3 (146.8) billion. Net income was SEK 12.6 (11.2) billion and dividends of SEK 7.5 (6.7) billion was paid during the year. The equity ratio was maintained at a healthy level of 52% (52%).

Return on equity increased to 8.5% (7.8%), primarily due to higher sales and lower restructuring charges.

Return on capital employed (ROCE) was 11.3% (9.6%). In 2010, ROCE excluding restructuring charges was 13.6%.

Non-current liabilities

Post-employment benefits related to defined benefit plans increased to SEK 10.0 (5.1) billion. In 2011 there was a decrease in discount rates, and plan assets yielded lower than expected. Consequently, the Company experienced an increase in the net pension liability and the funded ratio (plan assets as percentage of defined benefit obligations) decreased to 77% (89%).

 

238


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Current liabilities

Provisions declined to SEK 6.0 (9.4) billion. SEK 1.3 (3.2) billion were related to restructuring. The cash outlays of provisions were SEK 6.0 (7.2) billion. The lower amount of provisions is mainly due to lower restructuring. In addition, the business mix with more coverage projects as well as good performance in both hardware and software for new products introduced decreased the need for warranty provisions. There is also an effect of improved project management as well as geographical mix. Provisions will fluctuate over time, depending on business mix, market mix and technology shifts.

Payable days was unchanged at 62 (62) days. The target of payable days of above 60 days was met.

Non-current borrowings decreased to SEK 23.3 (27.0) billion. No major changes were made in the debt maturity profile during 2011. Debt of SEK 3.4 billion is maturing in 2012 and SEK 5.4 billion in 2013. The Company also has unutilized committed credit facilities of USD 2.0 billion available, maturing in 2014.

Off-balance sheet arrangements

There are currently no material off-balance sheet arrangements that have, or would be reasonably likely to have, a current or anticipated effect on the Company’s financial condition, revenues, expenses, result of operations, liquidity, capital expenditures or capital resources.

CASH FLOW

CASH FLOW (ABBREVIATED) JANUARY-DECEMBER

 

SEK billion

   2011     2010     2009  

Net income

     12.6        11.2        4.1   

Income reconciled to cash

     25.2        23.7        21.0   

Changes in operating net assets

     –15.2        2.9        3.5   

Cash flow from operating activities

     10.0        26.6        24.5   

Adjusted operating cash flow1)

     13.2        29.8        28.7   

Cash flow from investing activities

     4.5        –12.5        –37.5   

of which capital expenditures, sales of PP&E, product development

     –6.1        –5.2        –4.9   

of which acquisitions/divestments, net

     –3.1        –2.8        –18.1   

of which short-term investments for cash management purposes and other investing activities

     13.8        –4.5        –14.5   

Cash flow before financing activities

     14.5        14.0        –13.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flow from financing activities

     –6.5        –5.7        –1.7   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash conversion (Cash flow from operating activities divided by income reconciled to cash)

     40     112     117
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross cash (Cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments)

     80.5 2)      87.2        76.7   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash (Gross cash less interest-bearing liabilities and post-employment benefits)

     39.5        51.3        36.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) Cash flow from operations excl. restructuring cash outlays that have been provided for.
2) Including loan to ST-Ericsson of SEK 2.8 billion.

In 2011, gross cash decreased by SEK 6.6 billion to SEK 80.5 (87.2) billion. The net income reconciled to cash of SEK 25.2 billion was offset by a change in net operating assets of SEK –15.2 billion and investing activities of SEK –9.9 billion. Dividends to shareholders amounted to SEK –7.5 (–6.7) billion.

Net cash decreased to SEK 39.5 (51.3) billion.

 

239


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Cash flow from operating activities

The adjusted operating cash flow was negatively impacted by higher working capital.

During 2011, cash flow was negatively impacted by a significant increase in working capital as a result of higher sales and more projects.

Cash flow from investing activities

Cash outlays for regular investing activities increased to SEK –6.1 (–5.2) billion.

Acquisitions and divestments during the year were net SEK –3.1 (–2.8) billion, with the major items Nortel’s GDNT operation in China and Nortel’s Multi-Service Switch business (MSS). The Nortel patent portfolio was acquired in partnership with other industry players.

Cash flow for short-term investments for cash management purposes and other investing activities was net SEK 13.8 (–4.5) billion, mainly attributable to changes between short-term investments and cash and cash equivalents.

Capital expenditures

Annual capital expenditures are normally around two percent of sales and are expected to remain at this level. This corresponds to the needs for keeping and maintaining the current capacity level, including the introduction of new technology and methods. The expenditures are largely related to test equipment in R&D units, network operations centers as well as manufacturing and repair operations.

The Board of Directors reviews the Company’s investment plans and proposals.

The Company has sufficient cash and cash generation capacity to fund expected capital expenditures without external borrowings in 2012.

We believe that the Company’s property, plant and equipment and the facilities the Company occupies are suitable for its present needs in most locations. As of December 31, 2011, no material land, buildings, machinery or equipment were pledged as collateral for outstanding indebtedness.

CAPITAL EXPENDITURES 2007–2011

 

SEK billion

   2011     2010     2009     2008     2007  

Capital expenditures

     5.0        3.7        4.0        4.1        4.3   

of which in Sweden

     1.7        1.4        1.3        1.6        1.3   

as percent of net sales

     2.2     1.8     1.9     2.0     2.3

Cash flow from financing activities

Cash flow from financing activities was SEK –6.5 billion. Dividends paid were SEK –7.5 (–6.7) billion and other financing activities net amounted to SEK 1.0 billion.

Cash conversion

Cash conversion was 40% (112%), below the target of 70%. Over the years 2008–2010, cash conversion was above target. The cash conversion in 2011 was negatively impacted by higher working capital.

 

240


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Restricted cash

Cash balances in certain countries with restrictions on transfers of funds to the Parent Company as cash dividends, loans or advances amounted to SEK 13.9 (10.8) billion.

In this context all countries with currency restrictions are included. In most cases the currency is nonconvertible and flow of funds in a foreign currency requires approval by a central bank or similar. Out of the total amount, China, India, Korea, Brazil and Indonesia are the top five countries accounting for SEK 9.6 billion.

BUSINESS RESULTS—REGIONS

SALES PER REGION AND SEGMENT 2011 AND 2010

 

     Networks      Global Services      Multimedia               

SEK billion

   2011     Percent
change
     2011     Percent
change
     2011     Percent
change
     Total
2011
    Percent
change
 

North America

     28.9        –5%         18.6        5%         1.3        7%         48.8        –1%   

Latin America

     11.5        25%         9.5        23%         1.0        5%         22.0        23%   

Northern Europe and Central Asia

     9.7        34%         5.0        17%         0.5        –20%         15.2        25%   

Western and Central Europe

     7.8        –7%         10.3        –2%         1.0        –7%         19.0        –4%   

Mediterranean

     10.7        1%         11.8        11%         1.3        –5%         23.8        5%   

Middle East

     7.4        4%         6.8        4%         1.2        –13%         15.5        2%   

Sub-Saharan Africa

     5.9        63%         3.4        –26%         0.9        –12%         10.2        11%   

India

     6.1        19%         3.1        13%         0.5        –25%         9.8        13%   

China and North East Asia

     27.8        63%         9.9        19%         0.5        –5%         38.2        47%   

South East Asia and Oceania

     7.6        –3%         5.6        –14%         0.7        26%         13.9        –7%   

Other*

     9.1        53%         –0.2        –132%         1.7        57%         10.6        41%   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

     132.4        17%         83.9        5%         10.6        1%         226.9        12%   

Share of total

     58        37        5        100  
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

* Other includes sales of e.g. mobile broadband modules, cables, power modules as well as licensing and IPR. Mobile broadband modules are sold directly by business unit Networks to PC/netbook manufacturers. A central IPR unit manages sales of licenses to equipment vendors or others who wish to use Ericsson’s patented technology. TV solutions are sold both through other equipment vendors as resellers and directly by business unit Multimedia to cable TV operators.

Regional development

The regions are the Company’s primary sales channels. Ericsson reports ten regions, mirroring the internal geographical organization.

North America

North America is the world’s most developed region in terms of smartphone penetration and mobile data usage. Operators are continuing the implementation of tiered pricing to capitalize on changing user behavior. Half of the net additions of subscriptions in the second half of 2011 came from connected devices or machine to machine communication. Through the year multiple LTE network buildouts have been initiated and launched in both the US and Canada, and Ericsson is a leading supplier to these projects.

The networks business developed slower in the second half of 2011 after a period of high operator investments in network capacity. Operators’ focus on cash flow management and operator consolidation also had a negative impact. This was to a large degree offset by a positive uptake in services and multimedia.

 

241


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Latin America

There is a push for mobile broadband in Latin America, driven by consumer demand for 3G services. Smartphone penetration is still low, but is expected to grow as these handsets become more affordable.

Operators show an increasing interest in network performance and Ericsson is taking part in OSS/BSS transformation projects in managed services deals, including network sharing arrangements.

Northern Europe and Central Asia

The Nordics are mature and advanced markets with strong 3G coverage and LTE commercially available in all countries. Nordic operators are increasingly shifting their business models towards network sharing and the outsourcing of network operations.

Deployment of 3G networks started later in the eastern part of the region. Here, operators are focusing on providing coverage and quality in the networks. Mobile broadband is growing rapidly in the region. Many consolidation activities, of both operators and networks, are taking place. In the latter half of the year, network sales slowed, especially in Russia, following strong operator investments in network capacity and coverage.

Western and Central Europe

Modernization of networks accelerated across the region in 2011. Operator focus is on replacing old 2G/3G equipment with modern, more efficient multi-standard radio base stations. Interest in LTE is limited, with certain countries still to allocate spectrum for this.

Penetration of mobile broadband is high, with some operators’ smartphone shipments representing more than half of their totals. Data revenues are growing and represent over 40% with some operators. There is also high interest in managed services and network sharing.

Mediterranean

This region has seen an impact from weak economies as well as political unrest in Northern Africa. The uptake of mobile broadband is mixed, with the strongest growth in the south west parts of the region. Here, operators are implementing a range of tiered pricing models.

Mobile data usage is high in the Mediterranean area, due to the low availability of fixed broadband. Most operators’ investments are for 3G coverage and in the second half of the year, network modernization projects took off.

Middle East

The Middle East was impacted by political unrest in several countries and by delays in license auctions. As a consequence, some operators have postponed their infrastructure investments and increased their focus on efficiencies.

The region has lower penetration rates, mobile broadband adoption and mobile data usage than the world average. The crucial driver for increasing these parameters is the affordability of smartphones.

Rollouts of LTE have started in some parts of the region.

 

242


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Sub-Saharan Africa

Mobile penetration continues to increase rapidly in Africa. Operator focus is still on 2G coverage and capacity buildouts, although some operators are building 3G coverage.

With smartphones in the region set to become cheaper, operators are focusing on creating efficiency in their networks to allow them to capitalize on future uptake.

Inflation and competition are also driving operators’ need for increased efficiency. This leads them to focus on power consumption reductions and managed services solutions. There is also a need for operators to harmonize policy frameworks to increase data take-up.

India

Initial 3G rollouts reached a temporary peak in 2011. The Indian market is fragmented and in the near future a telecom policy reform is expected which might make operator consolidation easier.

Besides the need for affordable smartphones, availability of dual SIM card phones is a key component in driving mobile data uptake. The Indian market is highly competitive, which drives operator interest in managed services and network sharing.

China and North East Asia

China’s operators have focused on building 2G capacity with GPRS/EDGE to meet the increase in mobile data traffic from smartphones. In 2011, large scale trials for TD-LTE took place with China Mobile.

In Korea and Japan, 3G capacity and LTE coverage rollouts are ongoing, driven by high smartphone penetration, mobile broadband adoption and mobile data usage. In Korea, three LTE networks are live, and Ericsson is a supplier to all of them.

South East Asia and Oceania

Parts of this region, such as Australia and Singapore, have high penetration rates, adoption and usage. In these areas, LTE is also starting to emerge. Indonesia is moving towards 3G, however take-up is hampered by the affordability of devices. 3G auctions are yet to take place in some markets. Coverage projects, where old equipment is replaced with new, are underway across most markets, as operators build for data growth and seek operating cost efficiencies. The decline in network sales is due to reduced 2G business in Vietnam. The services business declined due to a concluded managed services contract in Australia.

BUSINESS RESULTS—SEGMENTS

Networks

HIGHLIGHTS IN 2011

 

 

Increased market share in mobile network equipment by 6 percentage points to 38% (estimated)

 

 

Market share of more than 60% in LTE

 

 

Smart Services Router family introduced. Volume deliveries expected in 2012

 

243


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Sales

Networks sales increased 17% to SEK 132.4 billion, negatively impacted by a strong SEK in 2011. The increase was an effect of continued high sales in mobile broadband-related equipment including packet core, IP routers and microwave-based backhaul. Demand was especially strong in regions China and North East Asia and North America.

The year was characterized by high volumes of mobile broadband equipment and ramp-up of the multi-standard radio base station RBS 6000. The product introduction of the RBS 6000 has been the quickest and most successful in the Company’s history. At the end of the year, the first RBS 6000 with CDMA functionality was shipped. The RBS 6000 accounts for close to 100% of all deliveries of GSM/WCDMA/LTE radio base stations. In the fourth quarter, shipping of the IP Edge router, the Smart Services Router SSR 8000 family, and the Antenna Integrated Radio unit (AIR) also commenced.

In 2010, Ericsson acquired Nortel’s CDMA business in order to strengthen its position in North America. Ericsson is now established as the leader in this market. CDMA sales increased slightly in 2011. At the end of the year the Company saw the expected decline in CDMA sales and subsequent rapid shift to LTE. The CDMA acquisition has created substantial value for the Company.

In March, the earthquake and tsunami in Japan caused temporary delays in the supply chain, but by the third quarter lead times were back to normal.

Profitability

Operating margin decreased to 13% (15%). The margin was negatively impacted by planned R&D investments to accelerate technology leadership. Operating margin in 2010 was 11% including restructuring charges.

Cost structure

In the Networks segment, cost of sales is quite large and to a large part variable. To reduce variable cost, the Company works with product rationalization and product substitution. R&D is a significant cost item and for this reason it is important to focus on R&D effectiveness and efficiency. It is essential to ensure global platforms and common components across the whole portfolio. To maximize the outcome of R&D investment, the Company also seeks to give R&D sites clear accountability and the same IS/IT environment.

The networks business

Sales to network operators are normally based on multi-year frame agreements after an initial open tender. During the frame agreement, software, equipment, services and spare parts are called off according to price lists.

Prior to the introduction of the multi-standard radio base station RBS 6000, operators could have co-siting, with one supplier for GSM and another for WCDMA. Today, a multi-standard approach means that all technologies are supported by one radio base station. Any supplier has to be equally capable of all technologies. R&D investments and scale are therefore essential for a supplier to stay competitive. The footprint of multi-standard radio access network increases opportunities for additional network business, e.g. backhaul and core networks. Following radio and core footprint is a significant software sales opportunity based on capacity, functionality and new features.

 

244


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Competitors

In the networks segment, Ericsson competes mainly with telecommunication equipment suppliers such as Alcatel-Lucent, Cisco, Huawei, Juniper, Nokia Siemens Networks, Samsung and ZTE. The Company also competes with local and regional manufacturers and providers of telecommunications equipment.

Global Services

HIGHLIGHTS IN 2011

 

 

More than 2 billion subscribers in networks for which Ericsson provides support

 

 

Over 900 million subscriber in networks managed by Ericsson

 

 

500 million subscribers in network operation contracts

Sales

Global Services sales increased 5% to SEK 83.9 (80.1) billion, driven by network rollout, consulting and systems integration.

Professional Services sales were SEK 58.8 billion, up 1% from 2010. Currency adjusted sales of Professional Services increased 7%. The increase is mainly a result of increased sales of consulting and systems integration. Managed Services sales decreased by –1% to SEK 21.0 billion. Currency adjusted sales increased 7%. The growth reflects the 70 (54) signed managed services contracts, of which 32 (26) were extensions or expansions. More than 60% of Professional Services sales were recurring.

Network Rollout sales amounted to SEK 25.1 (21.6) billion, an increase of 16%, driven by high volumes of network modernization.

Profitability

Global Services’ operating margin decreased to 7% (11%). The margin was negatively impacted by a loss in Network Rollout.

Operating margin in 2010 was 8% including restructuring charges.

Operating margin for Professional Services amounted to 13% (15%). Operating margin in 2010 was 11% including restructuring charges.

Operating margin for Network Rollout amounted to –8% (1%), due to high activity levels related to network modernization projects in Europe and 3G rollouts in India. Operating margin in 2010 was 0% including restructuring charges.

Cost structure

In the services segment, almost all cost resides in cost of sales and the majority of the cost is related to employee costs. A few years ago, the cost of sales base was to a higher degree variable. With the increasing share of managed services, the portion of fixed costs has increased, which makes it important to find scale by winning more deals in the same geographical area. Another measure to keep cost down is to establish a one-to-many delivery model. The development of global tools, methods and processes are also crucial in order to secure efficiencies and knowledge sharing.

 

245


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

In managed services, Ericsson often insources employees from the customer. In the transition period, restructuring costs are taken, e.g. for replacement of IS/IT systems and migration of employees into new systems and premises. In the transformation phase, following the transition, synergies are carried through.

The services business

Ericsson’s offering covers all areas within an operator’s operational scope. The Company’s service offering includes consulting, systems integration, managed services, network deployment and integration, education and support services. Ericsson provides services for both mobile and fixed telecom networks as well as for IT and broadcast networks and in some cases for adjacent industries such as the utilities industry. Most often operators turn to Ericsson for support in a certain part of their operations. Contracts for managed services and customer support are typically for five to seven years. Payments with regularity provide a lower rate of working capital. Consulting and systems integration contracts are shorter and paid after fulfillment of contract.

In managed services deals the contracts are normally split into fixed and variables, where the variables are a smaller part. The invoicing is based on fulfillment of certain key performance indicators and projects. When an operator explores the possibility of a managed services deal, the financial strength of the supplier is a prerequisite.

Network rollout includes coverage and modernization projects with a large part of third-party sourcing, making it a lower-margin business.

The Company rolls out its own equipment, but also has high multi-vendor skills in all other parts of the services business.

Competitors

Competition in services includes the traditional telecommunication equipment suppliers. The Company also competes with companies such as Accenture, HP, IBM, Oracle, Tata Consultancy Services and Tech Mahindra. Among the competition is also a large number of smaller but specialized companies operating on a local or regional basis.

Multimedia (CHANGED NAME TO SUPPORT SOLUTIONS IN 2012)

HIGHLIGHTS IN 2011

 

   

13 new contracts signed for mobile broadband charging

 

   

World’s largest IPTV upgrade in Taiwan

 

   

11 new customers for convergent charging and billing

Sales

Multimedia sales increased 1% to SEK 10.6 (10.5) billion, negatively impacted by political unrest in the Middle East and weak development in India.

Profitability

Operating margin was –5% (–4%). Restructuring charges had no material impact on profitability.

 

246


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Cost structure

In the multimedia segment, cost of sales is low and the majority is variable, due to the fact that third party hardware is used, on which the Company implements its software. Multimedia is a software business with a high degree of fixed R&D cost for software development.

The OSS and BSS business

The OSS/BSS business is divided into two different sales types:

Transformation sales

Simplification and consolidation of processes, operations, systems and platforms. Key components are software solutions, consulting and systems integration. Typically these projects last for 18–36 months. The software part represents 25–40% of the contract value and the rest is consulting and systems integration.

Product sales

Product sales is mainly expansions and upgrades, e.g. upgrading from Ericsson Charging System version 4 to 5. Key components are software solutions and systems integration. Typically these projects last for 1–12 months. The software part represents 70–90% of the contract value and the rest is systems integration.

Telcordia acquisition

In 2011, Ericsson announced the acquisition of Telcordia, a global leader in the development of software and services for OSS/BSS. The price was USD 1.15 billion in an all cash transaction, on a cash and debt-free basis. The acquisition is expected to be accretive to Ericsson’s earnings per share within twelve months. Telcordia has approximately 2,600 employees. During its last fiscal year, ended January 31, 2011, Telcordia generated revenues of USD 739 million. Telcordia’s revenues will be split between segments Multimedia and Global Services according to portfolio mix. With the acquisition, Ericsson aspires to a leading position in the OSS and BSS market.

Competitors

In the multimedia segment, Ericsson competes in rather fragmented markets with many local players. Competitors vary depending on the solution being offered. In the OSS and BSS market, they include many of the traditional telecommunication equipment suppliers as well as IT suppliers, such as Amdocs, Comverse and Oracle. Competition in the TV business includes Harmonic and Thompson.

Sony Ericsson

Sony Ericsson is a 50/50 joint venture between Sony Corporation and Ericsson, established in 2001. Sony Ericsson is accounted for according to the equity method. In October 2011, it was announced that Sony Corporation would acquire Ericsson’s 50% share in Sony Ericsson. As part of the deal, Sony and Ericsson will also enter into a broad IP cross-licensing agreement and create a wireless connectivity initiative to drive connectivity across multiple platforms. The transaction is a logical strategic step that makes it possible for Ericsson to focus on enabling connectivity for all devices.

Sony Ericsson will become a wholly-owned subsidiary of Sony and integrated into Sony’s broad platform of network-connected consumer electronics products. The agreed cash consideration for the transaction is a EUR 1.05 billion cash payment.

 

247


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Sony Ericsson’s units shipped in 2011 decreased by –20% to 34.4 (43.1) million while the average selling price increased by 4% to EUR 152 (146). Sales decreased by –17% to EUR 5.2 (6.3) billion.

In 2011, Sony Ericsson had a market share of 10% in the smartphone market, measured in units, and 10% measured in value.

Gross margin decreased during the year to 28% (29%) attributed to product and geographic mix. Income before taxes, including restructuring charges, was EUR –0.24 (0.15) billion. Income decreased during the year due to declining gross margin and increased operating expenses. The result includes restructuring charges of EUR 93 million. Ericsson’s share in Sony Ericsson’s income before taxes was SEK –1.2 (0.7) billion.

Sony Ericsson’s primary competitors include Apple, HTC, LG, Motorola, Nokia, RIM and Samsung.

ST-Ericsson

ST-Ericsson is a 50/50 joint venture between STMicroelectronics and Ericsson, established in February, 2009. ST-Ericsson is accounted for according to the equity method.

At the end of 2011, ST-Ericsson was still in a shift from legacy to new products. Though its path to success is challenging, ST-Ericsson is, when entering 2012, continuing to focus on securing the successful execution and delivery of its new products to customers while lowering its break-even point.

The changes in the business environment at a large customer during 2011 reduced demand for legacy products and delayed the ramp-up of new products with that customer. In the light of the business environment at the end of 2011, ST-Ericsson’s CEO is reviewing the company’s strategic plan and financial prospects. Ericsson, together with its partner STMicroelectronics, is firmly committed to supporting ST-Ericsson in the transition to turn-over to sustainable profitability and cash generation. As a result of the strategic review, Ericsson may consider additional actions to solidify and accelerate ST-Ericsson’s path to profitability. In such an event, or in case of a significant worsening of business prospects, the value of ST-Ericsson for Ericsson could decrease to a value significantly lower than the current carrying amount of ST-Ericsson on Ericsson’s books and Ericsson might be required to take an impairment charge.

Sales in 2011 declined –28% to USD 1.7 (2.3) billion. The operating loss for the year, adjusted for restructuring costs, was USD –0.7 (–0.4) billion. ST-Ericsson reports in US-GAAP. Ericsson’s share in ST-Ericsson’s income before taxes, adjusted to IFRS, was SEK –2.7 (–1.8) billion. Adjustments for IFRS compliance mainly consist of capitalization of R&D expenses for hardware development. The Company’s net financial position was USD –798 (–82) million at year-end. At the end of the year, ST-Ericsson had utilized USD 800 million of a short-term credit facility granted on a 50/50 basis by the parent companies.

In December 2011, a new President and CEO of ST-Ericsson was appointed.

ST-Ericsson’s major competitor is Qualcomm. The market is growing in complexity as several new operating systems for handsets and other devices have been launched, e.g. Google’s Android, Microsoft’s Windows phone and Samsung’s Bada.

MEMORANDUM AND ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson is entered under no. 556016–0680 in the Company Register kept by the Swedish Companies Registration Office. Our Company’s objective and purposes are described in §2 of the Articles of Association.

 

248


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Our Articles of Association do not stipulate anything regarding:

 

   

a director’s power to vote on a proposal, arrangement, or contract in which the director is materially interested

 

   

our directors’ power to vote for compensation to themselves

 

   

our directors’ borrowing powers

 

   

retirements rules for our directors or

 

   

the number of shares required for a director’s qualification.

Applicable provisions are found in the Swedish Companies Act, as referred to in “Certain Powers of Directors and the President” below.

There are no age limit restrictions for directors and they are not required to own any shares in the Company.

Share Capital, Increases of Share Capital and Preferential Rights of Shareholders

The Articles of Association of Ericsson provide that the share capital of the Company may not be less than SEK 6,000,000,000 nor more than SEK 24,000,000,000, and that the number of shares in the Company shall amount to no less than 3,000,000,000 and no more than 12,000,000,000. The registered share capital is SEK 16,525,258,678 and the Company has in total issued 3,305,051,735 shares.

The Company’s shares are divided into three series: Class A shares, Class B shares and Class C shares; however, no Class C shares are currently outstanding. Under the Swedish Companies Act of 2005, applicable as of January 1, 2006 (the “Swedish Companies Act”), shareholders must approve each issue of additional shares either by deciding on the share issue at a shareholders’ meeting, or by a shareholders’ approval of a decision on a share issue by the Board, or by giving an authorization to the Board to decide about a share issue. If we decide to issue new Class A, Class B and Class C shares by means of a cash issue, or an issue against payment through set-off of claims, Class A, Class B and Class C shareholders (except for Ericsson and its subsidiaries, in the event they hold shares in Ericsson) have a primary preferential right to subscribe for new shares of the same type in relation to the number of shares previously held by them. Shares not subscribed for through a preferential right shall be offered to all shareholders for subscription on a pro rata basis. If we decide to issue new shares of only one series by means of a cash issue or an issue against payment through set-off of claims, all shareholders, regardless of whether their shares are Class A, Class B or Class C, are entitled to a preferential right to subscribe for new shares in proportion to the number of shares previously held by them. Shareholders may vote to waive shareholders’ preferential rights at a general meeting.

If we decide to issue warrants or convertibles through a cash issue or an issue against payment through set-off of claims, the shareholders have preferential rights to subscribe to warrants as if the issue were of the shares that may be subscribed to pursuant to the warrant and, respectively, preferential rights to subscribe to convertibles as if the issue were of the shares that the convertibles may be converted to.

The above does not constitute any restriction to waive the shareholders’ preferential rights when deciding on either a cash issue, an issue against payment through set-off of claims, an issue of warrants or an issue of convertibles.

Dividends

Our Class A and Class B shareholders have the same right to dividends, while Class C shareholders have a right to a yearly dividend as described in article 15 of our Articles of Association. No Class C shares are currently outstanding.

Under Swedish law, only a general meeting of shareholders may decide on payment of dividends, which may not exceed the amount proposed by the Board of Directors (except in certain limited circumstances), and

 

249


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

may only be paid from funds legally available for that purpose. Under Swedish law, no interim dividends may be paid in respect of any fiscal period for which audited financial statements of the company have not yet been adopted by the annual general meeting of shareholders. The market practice in Sweden is for dividends to be paid annually. Under the Swedish Companies Act, dividends to shareholders and other transfers of value from a company—such as purchases of own shares (see below)—may only be made in case the company’s restricted equity remains fully covered after the transfer of value has been made. The calculation shall be based upon the most recently adopted balance sheet, and any changes in the restricted equity that has occurred after the balance sheet date shall be taken into account. In addition, dividends to shareholders and other transfers of value from the company may only be made if this is justifiable taken into account the type of business activities of the company, their scope and risks related thereto and the company’s need for financial resources, its liquidity and financial position. In respect of parent companies, also the business activities of the group, their scope and risks related thereto and the group’s need for financial resources, its liquidity and financial position should be taken into account.

The Company’s shares are registered in the computerized book-entry share registration system administered by Euroclear Sweden AB (“Euroclear”). The rights attached to shares eligible for dividends accrue to those persons whose names are recorded in the register of shareholders on the record day. The dividends are then sent to a specified account as directed by the person registered with Euroclear, or to the address of that person. The relevant record day must, in most circumstances, be specified in the resolution declaring a dividend or resolving upon a capital increase or any similar matter in which shareholders have preferential rights, or the Board of Directors must be authorized to determine the relevant record day.

Where the registered holder is a nominee, the nominee receives, for the account of the beneficial owner, dividends and, on issues of shares with preferential rights for the shareholders, shares, as well as rights. Dividends are remitted in a single payment to the nominee who is responsible for the distribution of such dividends to the beneficial owner. A similar procedure is adopted for share issues. Specific authority to act as a nominee must be obtained from Euroclear. The nominee must issue a public report to Euroclear every third month, listing all beneficial holders of more than 500 shares. Euroclear is required to keep a register with regard to any holding on behalf of a single beneficial owner in excess of 500 shares in any one company. This list must reveal the names of the beneficial owner and must be open to public inspection.

Voting

In a general meeting of Ericsson, each Class A share shall carry one vote, each Class B share one tenth of one vote and each Class C share one-thousandth of one vote.

We are required to publish notices to attend annual general meetings no earlier than six weeks and no later than four weeks prior to the general meeting and the same notice period requirements apply regarding extraordinary general meetings concerning changes in our articles of association. Notices to attend other types of extraordinary general meetings at Ericsson must be published no earlier than six weeks and no later than three weeks prior to the general meeting.

Directors are elected during the annual general meeting for a period of one year at a time and do not stand for reelection at staggered intervals.

A shareholder may attend and vote at the meeting in person or by proxy. For companies whose shares are registered in a central securities depositary register, proxies are valid for up to five years from the date of issuance. Any shareholder wishing to attend a general meeting must notify us no later than on the day specified in the notice, preferably before 4:00 p.m. (CET). We are required to accept all notifications of attendance received at least five business days (Saturdays normally included) prior to the meeting. A person designated in

 

250


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

the register as a nominee (including the depositary of the ADSs) is not entitled to vote at a general meeting, nor is a beneficial owner whose share is registered in the name of a nominee (including the depositary of the ADSs) unless the beneficial owner first arranges to have such owner’s own name entered in the register of shareholders maintained by Euroclear no later than the designated record day.

Under the Swedish Companies Act, resolutions are passed by a simple majority of votes cast at the meeting with the chairman of the meeting having a decisive vote (except in respect of elections), unless otherwise required by law or a company’s articles of association. Under the Swedish Companies Act, certain resolutions require special quorums and majorities, including, but not limited to, the following:

 

  A a resolution to amend the articles of association requires a majority of two-thirds of the votes cast as well as two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting, except in those circumstances described in B—D below;

 

  B a resolution to amend the articles of association which reduces any shareholder’s rights to profits or assets, restricts the transferability of shares or alters the legal relationship between shares, normally requires the unanimous approval of the shareholders present at the meeting and who hold nine-tenths of all outstanding shares;

 

  C a resolution to amend the articles of association for the purpose of limiting the number of shares with which a shareholder may vote at a general meeting or allocating part of the net profit for the fiscal year to a restricted fund or limiting the use of the company’s profits or assets in a liquidation or dissolution, normally requires the approval of shareholders representing two-thirds of the votes cast and nine-tenths of the shares represented at the meeting;

 

  D a resolution of the kind referred to under B or C above may, however, be taken with a lower supermajority requirement if the amendments referred to therein will only adversely affect specific shares or classes of shares. In such cases, the requirement under a above will apply together with the following separate supermajority: (a) where only a class of shares is adversely affected, approval of the owners of one-half of all shares of such class and nine-tenths of the shares of such class represented at the meeting, or (b) where the shares adversely affected do not constitute a class of shares, the unanimous approval of all such affected outstanding shares present at the meeting and who hold nine-tenths of all outstanding shares adversely affected;

 

  E a resolution to issue, approve or authorize the issuance for cash of new shares, warrants or convertibles with a deviation from the preferential right for existing shareholders requires a two-thirds majority of votes cast at the meeting as well as two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting;

 

  F a resolution to reduce the outstanding share capital requires a two-thirds majority of votes cast at the meeting as well as two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting. In case there are several classes of shares in a company, the above described majority requirement shall apply also within each share class represented at the meeting and for which the rights of the shares are adversely affected; and

 

  G a resolution to approve a merger requires a two-thirds majority of the votes cast at the meeting and two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting (however, under certain circumstances a higher majority is required).

At a general meeting of shareholders, a shareholder or proxy for one or more shareholders may cast full number of votes represented by the holder’s shares.

Purchase of Own Shares

A Swedish public limited liability company whose shares are traded on a regulated market place within the European Economic Area (“EEA”) or a market place comparable to a regulated market place outside the EEA is entitled to purchase its own shares under certain conditions. A purchase by us of our own shares may take place

 

251


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

only if (a) the purchase has been decided upon by a general meeting of shareholders or the Board has been authorized by a general meeting of shareholders, in both cases by a two thirds majority of votes cast at the meeting as well as two-thirds of the shares represented at the meeting, (b) the purchase is effected on a regulated market place within the EEA or a market place comparable to a regulated market place outside the EEA (in the latter case with the approval of the Swedish Financial Supervisory Authority the “SFSA”) or pursuant to an offer to all shareholders or holders of a specific class of shares, (c) the Company’s restricted equity will still be fully covered and the purchase is justifiable taken into account the type of business activities of the Company and the group, their scope and risks related thereto and the Company’s and the group’s need for financial resources, its liquidity and financial position, and (d) we and our subsidiaries do not hold or, as a result of purchase, will not hold in excess of 10% of all our outstanding shares. As of December 31, 2012, the Company held an aggregate of 84,798,095 treasury stock of Class B shares.

Investment Restrictions

There are no limitations imposed by Swedish law or by our Articles of Association in respect of the rights of non-residents or foreign persons to purchase, own or sell securities issued by us.

There are, however, certain flagging and ownership examination rules that apply, irrespective of nationality.

Pursuant to the Swedish Financial Instruments Trading Act any change in a holding of shares, depository receipts with voting rights or financial instruments that entitle the holder to acquire shares in issue in a Swedish limited liability company whose shares are admitted for trading on a regulated market place within the EEA shall be reported by the holder to the company and the SFSA, where the change entails that the holder’s portion of all shares or votes in the company reaches, exceeds or falls below any of the limits of 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, 66 2/3 or 90 per cent. Such a change should, as a main rule, be reported not later than the trading day following the day on which the party with a duty to report has entered into an agreement for the acquisition or transfer of shares or any other change to the shareholding has occurred.

In addition, the Act on Reporting Obligations Regarding Certain Holdings of Financial Instruments requires, among other things, certain individuals who own shares representing 10% or more of the share capital or the voting rights in a Swedish public limited liability company whose shares are traded on a regulated market within the EEA to report such ownership to the SFSA, which keeps a public register based on the information contained in such reports, and also to report any changes in such ownership within five business days.

EXCHANGE CONTROLS

There is no Swedish legislation affecting a) the import or export of capital or b) the remittance of dividends, interest or other payments to non-resident holders of our securities except that, subject to the provisions in any tax treaty, dividends are subject to withholding tax.

TAXATION

General

The taxation discussion set forth below does not purport to be a complete analysis or listing of all potential tax effects relevant to the acquisition, ownership or disposition of Class B shares or ADSs. The statements of United States and Swedish tax laws set forth below are based on the laws in force as of the date of this report and may be subject to any changes in United States or Swedish law, and in any double taxation convention or treaty between the United States and Sweden, occurring after that date, which changes may then have retroactive effect.

 

252


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Specific tax provisions may apply for certain categories of tax payers. Your tax treatment if you are a holder of Class B shares or ADSs depends in part on your particular situation. If you are a holder of Class B shares or ADSs, you should therefore consult a tax advisor as to the tax consequences relating to your particular circumstances resulting from the ownership of Class B shares or ADSs.

The tax consequences to holders of ADSs, as discussed below, apply equally to holders of Class B shares.

Certain Swedish Tax Considerations

This section describes the material Swedish income and net wealth tax consequences for a holder of ADSs or Class B shares who is not considered to be a Swedish resident for Swedish tax purposes. This section applies to you only if you are a holder of portfolio investments representing less than 10% of capital and votes and is not applicable if the ADSs or Class B shares pertain to a permanent establishment or fixed place of business in Sweden.

TAXATION ON CAPITAL GAINS

Generally, non-residents of Sweden are not liable for Swedish capital gains taxation with respect to the sale of ADSs or Class B shares. However, under Swedish tax law, capital gains from the sale of shares in Swedish companies and certain other securities by an individual may be taxed in Sweden at a rate of 30% if the seller has been a resident of Sweden or has lived permanently in Sweden at any time during the year of the sale or the 10 calendar years preceding the year of the sale (absent treaty provisions to the contrary). The provision is applicable on ADSs or Class B shares. From 1 January 2008 the rule has been extended so that it also applies to shares in foreign companies, provided that the shares were acquired during the time that the person was liable to tax in Sweden.

This provision may, however, be limited by tax treaties that Sweden has concluded with other countries. Under the tax treaty between Sweden and the United States (the “U.S. Tax Treaty”), this provision applies for ten years from the date the individual became a non-resident of Sweden.

TAXATION ON DIVIDENDS

A Swedish dividend withholding tax at a rate of 30% is imposed on dividends paid by a Swedish corporation, such as us, to non-residents of Sweden. The same withholding tax applies to certain other payments made by a Swedish corporation, including payments as a result of redemption of shares and repurchase of stock through an offer directed to its shareholders. Exemption from the withholding tax or a lower tax rate may apply by virtue of a tax treaty. Under the U.S. Tax Treaty, the withholding tax on dividends paid on portfolio investments to eligible U.S. holders is reduced to 15%.

Under all Swedish tax treaties, except the tax treaty with Switzerland, withholding tax at the applicable treaty rate should be withheld by the payer of the dividends. With regard to dividends paid from shares in corporations registered with the Euroclear Sweden (such as our shares), a reduced rate of dividend withholding tax under a tax treaty is generally applied at the source by the Euroclear Sweden or, if the shares are registered with a nominee, the nominee, as long as the person entitled to the dividend is registered as a non-resident and sufficient information regarding the tax residency of the beneficial owner is available to the Euroclear Sweden or the nominee.

In those cases where Swedish withholding tax is withheld at the rate of 30% and the person who received the dividends is entitled to a reduced rate of withholding tax under a tax treaty, a refund may be claimed from the Swedish tax authorities before the end of the fifth calendar year following the year that the distribution was made.

 

253


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

TAXATION ON INTEREST

No Swedish withholding tax is payable on interest paid to non-residents of Sweden.

NET WEALTH TAXATION

The Swedish net wealth tax has been abolished from 1 January 2007.

Certain United States Federal Income Tax Consequences

The following discussion is a summary of the material United States federal income tax consequences relevant to the ownership and disposition of ADSs or Class B shares. This discussion is based on the tax laws of the United States (including the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations thereunder, published rulings and court decisions) as in effect on the date hereof, all of which are subject to change, possibly with retroactive effect. The discussion is not a full discussion of all tax considerations that may be relevant to the ownership and disposition of ADSs or Class B shares. The discussion applies only if you will hold the ADSs and/or the Class B shares as capital assets and you use the USD as your functional currency. It does not deal with the tax treatment of investors subject to special rules, such as grantor trusts, real estate investment trusts, regulated investment companies, banks, brokers or dealers in securities or currencies, traders in securities that elect to use a mark-to-market method of recording for their securities holdings, financial institutions, insurance companies, tax-exempt entities, investors liable for alternative minimum tax, holders (either actually or constructively) of 10% or more of our Class B shares, persons holding ADSs and/or Class B shares as part of a hedging, straddle, conversion or constructive sale transaction and persons who are resident or ordinarily resident in Sweden. In addition, investors holding ADSs and/or Class B shares indirectly through partnerships are subject to special rules not discussed below. You should consult your own tax advisors about the United States federal, state, local and foreign tax consequences to you of the ownership and disposition of the ADSs or Class B shares.

The discussion below applies to you only if you are a beneficial owner of ADSs and/or Class B shares not resident in Sweden for purposes of the U.S. Tax Treaty and you are, for United States federal income tax purposes, (1) a citizen or resident of the United States, (2) a corporation or any other entity treated as a corporation that is organized in or under the laws of the United States or its political subdivisions, including the District of Columbia, (3) a trust if all of the trust’s substantial decisions are subject to the control of one or more United States persons and the primary supervision of the trust is subject to a United States court, or if a valid election is in effect with respect to the trust to be taxed as a United States person, or (4) an estate the income of which is subject to United States federal income taxation regardless of its source.

The discussion below assumes that the representations contained in the deposit agreement are true and that the obligations in the deposit agreement and any related agreement will be complied with in accordance with the terms. If you hold ADSs, you will be treated as the holder of the underlying Class B shares represented by those ADSs for United States federal income tax purposes.

TAXATION OF ADSS OR CLASS B SHARES

Dividends

Subject to the passive foreign investment company rules discussed below, the gross amount of dividends paid (before reduction for any Swedish withholding taxes) with respect to the ADSs or Class B shares generally will be included in your gross income as ordinary income from foreign sources to the extent paid out of our current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for United States federal income tax purposes). Distributions in excess of earnings and profits will be treated as a non-taxable return of capital to the extent of

 

254


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

your adjusted tax basis in the ADSs or Class B shares and thereafter as capital gain. The dividends will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction available to corporations in respect of dividends received from other U.S. corporations. The amount of any dividend paid in SEK will be the USD value of the dividend payment based on the exchange rate in effect on the date of receipt (or constructive receipt) by you, in the case of Class B shares or by the depositary, in the case of ADSs, whether or not the payment is converted into USD at that time. Your tax basis in the SEK received will equal such USD amount. Gain or loss, if any, recognized on a subsequent sale or conversion of the SEK will be U.S. source ordinary income or loss.

If you are a non-corporate holder of ADSs or Class B shares, dividends you receive on the ADSs or Class B shares may be taxed at the lower applicable capital gains rate provided that (1) we are not a passive foreign investment company (as discussed below) for either our taxable year in which the dividend was paid or the preceding taxable year, (2) certain holding period requirements are met, (3) you are not under any obligation to make related payments with respect to substantially similar or related property and (4) either (a) in the case of ADSs our ADSs continue to be listed on the Nasdaq Stock Market (or a national securities exchange that is registered under section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended) or (b) we are eligible for the benefits of the U.S. Tax Treaty. You should consult your own tax advisors regarding the availability of the lower rate for dividends paid with respect to ADSs or Class B shares.

Subject to certain limitations, you will generally be entitled to receive credit against your United States federal income tax liability (or a deduction against your United States federal taxable income) with respect to any Swedish tax withheld in accordance with the U.S. Tax Treaty and paid over to Sweden. If a refund of the tax withheld is available to you under the laws of Sweden or under the U.S. Tax Treaty, the amount of tax withheld that is refundable will not be eligible for such credit against your United States federal income tax liability (and will not be eligible for the deduction in computing your United States federal taxable income). For foreign tax credit limitation purposes, the dividend will be income from sources without the United States, and will generally be treated as “passive category income” (or, in the case of certain holders, “general category income”).

SALE OR EXCHANGE OF ADSS OR CLASS B SHARES

Subject to the passive foreign investment company rules discussed below, you will generally recognize capital gain or loss on the sale or other disposition of the ADSs or Class B shares equal to the difference between the USD value of the amount realized and your adjusted tax basis (determined in USD) in the ADSs or Class B shares. Such gain or loss will be capital gain or loss and will generally be treated as arising from U.S. sources for foreign tax credit limitation purposes.

The amount realized on a disposition of ADSs or Class B shares will generally be the amount of cash you receive for the ADSs or Class B shares (which, in the case of payment in a non-U.S. currency, will equal the USD value of the payment received determined on (a) the date of receipt of payment if you are a cash basis taxpayer and (b) the date of disposition if you are an accrual basis taxpayer). If the ADSs or Class B shares are treated as traded on an “established securities market,” if you are a cash basis taxpayer (or, if you are an accrual basis taxpayer, if you so elect) you will determine the USD value of the amount realized by translating the amount received at the spot rate of exchange on the settlement date of the sale.

You will have a tax basis in any foreign currency received equal to the USD amount realized. Any gain or loss you realize on a subsequent conversion of foreign currency will be U.S. source ordinary income or loss.

PASSIVE FOREIGN INVESTMENT COMPANY STATUS

A non-U.S. corporation is a passive foreign investment company (a “PFIC”) in any taxable year in which, after taking into account the income and assets of certain subsidiaries, either (a) at least 75% of its gross income

 

255


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

is passive income or (b) at least 50% of the quarterly average value of its assets is attributable to assets that produce or are held to produce passive income. Based on the market value of our shares, the composition of our assets and income and our operations, we believe we were not a PFIC during the year 2012. However, whether or not we will be considered a PFIC will depend on the nature and source of our income and the value of our assets, as determined from time to time. If we are treated as a PFIC, we will not provide information necessary for the “qualified electing fund” election as the term is defined in the relevant provisions of the Code. You should consult your own tax advisors about the consequences of our potential classification as a PFIC.

If we were a PFIC, for any taxable year in which you held ADSs or Class B shares, you would be subject to special rules with respect to:

 

   

any gain realized on the sale or other disposition of ADSs or Class B shares; and

 

   

any “excess distribution” made to you (generally, any distributions to you in respect of ADSs or Class B shares during a single taxable year that are, in the aggregate, greater than 125% of the average annual distributions received by you in respect of ADSs or Class B shares during the three preceding taxable years or, if shorter, your holding period for ADSs or Class B shares).

Under these rules:

 

   

the gain or excess distribution would be allocated ratably over your holding period for ADSs or Class B shares;

 

   

the amount allocated to the taxable year in which the gain or excess distribution was realized and any year before we became a PFIC would be taxable as ordinary income and

 

   

the amount allocated to each prior year, other than the current year and any taxable year prior to the first taxable year in which we were a PFIC, would be subject to tax at the highest applicable marginal tax rate in effect for each such year; and an interest charge would be imposed.

If we are a PFIC for any taxable year, you will also be deemed to own shares in any of our subsidiaries that are also PFICs in such a year. As an alternative to the special rules described above, holders of “marketable stock” in a PFIC may elect mark-to-market treatment with respect to their ADSs or Class B shares. ADSs or Class B shares will not be considered marketable stock unless they are regularly traded on a qualified exchange or other market. If the mark-to-market election is available and you elect mark-to-market treatment you will, in general, include as ordinary income each year an amount equal to the increase in value of your ADSs or Class B shares for that year (measured at the close of your taxable year) and will generally be allowed a deduction for any decrease in the value of your Class B shares for the year, but only to the extent of previously included mark-to-market income. In addition, any gain you recognize upon the sale or other disposition of the ADSs or Class B shares will be treated as ordinary income and any loss will be treated as ordinary loss, but only to the extent of previously included mark-to-market income. However, a mark-to-market election would likely be unavailable with respect to your proportionate share in any of our subsidiaries that are PFICs.

If you own ADSs or Class B shares during any year in which we are a PFIC, you will generally be required to make an annual return on IRS Form 8621.

INFORMATION REPORTING AND BACKUP WITHHOLDING

In general, information reporting requirements may apply to dividends paid in respect of ADSs or Class B shares and the proceeds received on the sale or exchange of the ADSs or Class B shares within the United States or by a broker with certain United States connections. Backup withholding may apply to payments to you of dividends paid in respect of ADSs or Class B shares or the proceeds of a sale or other disposition of ADSs or Class B shares if you fail to provide an accurate taxpayer identification number (certified on IRS Form W–9) or,

 

256


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

upon request, to certify that you are not subject to backup withholding, or otherwise to comply with the applicable requirements of backup withholding. The amount of any backup withholding from a payment to you will be allowed as a credit against your United States federal income tax liability and a refund of any excess amount withheld under the backup withholding rules may be obtained by filing the appropriate claim for refund with the IRS and furnishing any required information.

ADDITIONAL REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

Certain holders who are individuals may be required to report information relating to an interest in ADSs or Class B shares, subject to certain exceptions (including an exception for ADSs or Class B shares held in accounts maintained by certain financial institutions). Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the effects, if any, of these requirements on their ownership and disposition of ADSs or Class B shares.

DEPOSITARY FEES AND CHARGES

FEES AND CHARGES PAYABLE BY ADS HOLDERS

 

    

Service

  

Rate

  

By whom paid

1)    Receipt of deposits and issuance of receipts    USD 5 per 100 American Depositary Shares of fraction thereof    Party to whom receipts are issued
2)    Delivery of deposited shares against surrender of receipts    USD 5 per 100 American Depositary Shares or fraction thereof    Party surrendering receipts
3)    Payments of dividends distributions or rights offering is respect of shares    No charge    Not applicable

Except as otherwise provided in the Deposit Agreement, any and all other expenses of the Depositary, including without limitation, expenses or charges for printing, stationery, postage, insurances, cables, etc, are to be borne by the Depositary, or by the Company in accordance with agreements entered into from time to time with the Company.

Fees payable by the Depositary to the Issuer

Citibank, as depositary, has agreed to reimburse Ericsson USD 5 million per year for expenses related to our ADS program (the “Program”), including Program-related legal fees, expenses related to investor relations in the US, US investor presentations, ADS-related financial advertising and public relations, fees and expenses of Citibank as administrator of the ADS Direct Plan, fees in relation to our Form 20-F and SOX compliance.

Citibank has further agreed to waive other ADS program related expenses amounting to USD 33,128.79 associated with the administration of the Program.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REQUIREMENTS

The Ericsson Board of Directors is subject to, and applies, a variety of independence requirements. However, it can rely on exemptions from certain U.S. requirements, including those that are different from Swedish Law.

 

257


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Independence requirements on the board of directors:

 

   

A majority of the members of the board of directors must be independent in accordance with the NASDAQ rules. Ericsson relies on an exemption for employee representative directors from NASDAQ’s independence requirements.

Independence requirements on the audit committee:

 

   

All members of the audit committee must be independent in accordance with the SEC and the NASDAQ rules. The SEC rules include a specific exemption from these independence requirements for audit committee members who are non-executive employee representatives. The Company does not consider that reliance on this exemption adversely affects the ability of the Audit Committee to act independently or satisfy other SEC requirements.

In addition, foreign private issuers such as Ericsson may follow home-country practice in lieu of certain NASDAQ corporate governance requirements.

Below is a list of practices followed by Ericsson that differ from certain corporate governance requirements under the NASDAQ Marketplace Rules:

 

   

Employee representatives to be elected to the Board of Directors and serve on Committees (including the Audit and the Remuneration Committees) in accordance with Swedish law

 

   

Shareholders to participate in the election of Directors and the Nomination Committee, in accordance with Swedish law and common market practice, respectively

 

   

Employee representatives on the Board to attend all Board and Committee meetings (including those of the Audit and the Remuneration Committees) in accordance with Swedish laws concerning attendance and decision making processes

 

   

No minimum quorum requirements for shareholder meetings, except under certain circumstances.

AUDIT COMMITTEE PRE-APPROVAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

The Audit Committee reviews and approves the scope of audits to be performed (external and internal) and analyzes the results and costs of the audits. The Committee makes recommendations to the Board of Directors regarding the auditor’s performance. It also makes recommendations to the Nomination Committee regarding the external auditor’s fees. In order to ensure the auditor’s independence, the Audit Committee has established pre-approval policies and procedures for non-audit related services to be performed by the external auditor. Pre-approval authority may not be delegated to management. The policies and procedures include a list of prohibited services and services that require pre-approval by the Committee. Such services fall into two broad categories:

 

   

General pre-approval—certain services regarding taxes, transactions, risk management, business improvement, corporate finance, attestation and accounting and so called general services. These services have received general pre-approval by the Audit Committee, provided that the estimated fee for each project does not exceed SEK 1 million. The external auditor must advise the Audit Committee of services rendered under the general pre-approval policy.

 

   

Specific pre-approval—all other non-audit related services must receive specific pre-approval. The Audit Committee Chairman has the delegated authority for specific pre-approval in between Committee meetings, provided that the fee in each case does not exceed SEK 2.5 million. The Chairman reports any pre-approval to the Audit Committee at its next meeting. For matters which may not be handled by the Chairman and require specific pre-approval by the Audit Committee, the auditor submits an application to the Parent Company for final approval by the Audit Committee.

 

258


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

DISCLOSURE PURSUANT TO SECTION 219 OF THE IRAN THREAT REDUCTION AND SYRIA HUMAN RIGHTS ACT OF 2012 (ITRA)

Ericsson has conducted business in Iran/Persia since the late nineteenth century, opened an office in Iran in 1973 and later established a local subsidiary in the country. Ericsson strongly believes in enabling communication for all and believes that access to communications can enable the right to health, education and freedom of expression. Ericsson’s business activities in Iran principally involve the sale of telecommunications infrastructure related products and services, including support, installation and maintenance services. Ericsson’s exports from the European Union (the “EU”) to Iran are performed under export licenses from the Swedish Agency for Non-Proliferation and Export Controls. The EU sanctions towards Iran grant an exemption for the supply of certain telecommunications equipment and software based on which these export licenses are granted. While we seek to obtain information regarding the ownership of our customers in Iran, it is sometimes difficult to determine ownership and control with certainty, particularly with respect to the government.

During 2012, Ericsson sold telecommunications infrastructure related products and services in Iran to MTNIrancell and to Mobile Communication Company of Iran (“MCCI”), telecommunications companies operating in Iran. During 2012, our gross revenue related to sales to MTNIrancell and MCCI in Iran was approximately SEK 1,149 million. Ericsson does not normally allocate net profit on a country-by-country or activity-by-activity basis, other than as set forth in Ericsson’s consolidated financial statements prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB. However, Ericsson has estimated that its net profit from such sales, after internal cost allocation was less than SEK 50 million during 2012. We anticipate that the sales of telecommunications infrastructure related products to MTNIrancell and MCCI in Iran will be phased out during 2013 and that our business activities in Iran after 2013 will consist of the provision of services under existing contracts or with respect to equipment already delivered by Ericsson (which services may include repair and replacements of products) and collection of software license related revenues under existing agreements.

Further, Ericsson is party to agreements entered into prior to 2012 with Telecommunications Company of Iran, an affiliate of MCCI, Zaeim Electronic Industries Company and TAKTA (reseller). No sales were made by Ericsson under these contracts during 2012 and we do not anticipate that any sales will be made during 2013.

In some instances, we have had to arrange performance bonds or similar financial guarantees to secure our performance of obligations under the commercial agreements we have entered into relating to our business in Iran. In such instances, we usually engage our banks outside Iran, who in turn engage local banks in the country. These local banks include Tejarat Bank, Melli Bank and Saderat Bank. Although some bonds and guarantees involving these banks are still in place, no new performance bonds or similar guarantees with respect to our business activities in Iran were issued during 2012, nor were payments made to beneficiaries under any such existing bond or guarantee.

During 2012 Ericsson’s Iranian subsidiary maintained accounts with Bank Mellat and Tejarat Bank. Deposits with those banks generated less than SEK 20 million of interest income during 2012. Those accounts were closed during 2012. Some payments made to our local subsidiary and payments required to be made by our local subsidiary to suppliers involve banks controlled by the government of Iran, such as Bank Mellat, Tejarat Bank, Bank Melli, Saderat Bank, Keshavarzi Bank, Eghtesad Novin Bank, Refah Bank and Bank Sepah. We also received payments from customers to Ericsson’s accounts outside Iran.

During 2012, Ericsson purchased telecommunication infrastructure related materials and services from Havafaza Industry Organization (SATAF). Ericsson stopped purchasing from them during 2012.

Due to its operations in Iran, and having staff permanently in the country, Ericsson obtains and requires services and has other dealings incidental to its local activities including paying taxes and salaries and obtaining rentals, electricity, water and telecommunications services, office and similar supplies and customs related services from Iranian companies who may be owned or controlled by the government of Iran.

 

259


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

INVESTMENTS

The following listing shows certain shareholdings owned directly and indirectly by the Parent Company as of December 31, 2012. A complete listing of shareholdings, prepared in accordance with the Swedish Annual Accounts Act and filed with the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket), may be obtained upon request to: Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson, External Reporting, SE-164 83 Stockholm, Sweden.

SHARES OWNED DIRECTLY BY THE PARENT COMPANY

 

Type

 

Company

   Reg. No.      Domicile    Percentage
of ownership
    Par value
in local
currency,
million
     Carrying
value,
SEK million
 

Subsidiary companies

             
I   Ericsson AB      556056-6258       Sweden      100        50         20,731   
I   Ericsson Shared Services AB      556251-3266       Sweden      100        361         2,216   
I   Netwise AB      556404-4286       Sweden      100        2         306   
II   AB Aulis      556030-9899       Sweden      100        14         6   
III   Ericsson Credit AB      556326-0552       Sweden      100        5         5   
  Other (Sweden)            —          —           1,742   
I   Ericsson Austria GmbH       Austria      100        4         65   
I   Ericsson Danmark A/S       Denmark      100        90         216   
I   Oy LM Ericsson Ab       Finland      100        13         196   
II   Ericsson Participations France SAS       France      100        26         524   
I   Ericsson Germany GmbH       Germany      100        —           4,232   
I   Ericsson Hungary Ltd.       Hungary      100        1,301         120   
II   LM Ericsson Holdings Ltd.       Ireland      100        2         15   
I   Ericsson Telecomunicazioni S.p.A.       Italy      100        44         5,857   
II   Ericsson Holding International B.V.       The Netherlands      100        222         3,200   
I   Ericsson A/S       Norway      100        75         114   
II   Ericsson Television AS       Norway      100        161         1,788   
I   Ericsson Corporatia AO       Russia      100        5         5   
I   Ericsson España       Spain      100        43         170   
I   Ericsson AG       Switzerland      100        —           —     
II   Ericsson Holding Ltd.       United Kingdom      100        328         4,094   
  Other (Europe, excluding Sweden)            —          —           275   
II   Ericsson Holding II Inc.       United States      100        2,830         29,006   
I   Cía Ericsson S.A.C.I.       Argentina      95 1)      41         178   
I   Ericsson Canada Inc.       Canada      100        —           51   
I   Bel-Air Networks       Canada      100        —           170   
I   Ericsson Telecom S.A. de C.V.       Mexico      100        n/a         1,050   
  Other (United States, Latin America)            —          —           67   
II   Teleric Pty Ltd.       Australia      100        20         100   
I   Ericsson Ltd.       China      100        2         2   
I   Ericsson (China) Company Ltd.       China      100        65         475   
I   Ericsson India Private Ltd.       India      100        725         147   
I   Ericsson India Global Services PVT. Ltd       India      100        389         64   
I   LG-Ericsson Ltd.       Korea      75        150         3,285   
I   Ericsson (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.       Malaysia      70        2         4   
I   Ericsson Telecommunications Pte. Ltd.       Singapore      100        2         1   
I   Ericsson South Africa PTY. Ltd       South Africa      100        —           108   
I   Ericsson Taiwan Ltd.       Taiwan      80        240         20   
I   Ericsson (Thailand) Ltd.       Thailand      49 2)      90         17   
  Other countries (the rest of the world)            —          —           215   
            

 

 

    

 

 

 
  Total                 80,839   
            

 

 

    

 

 

 

Joint ventures and associated companies

             
II   ST-Ericsson SA       Switzerland      50        137         —     
III   ST-Ericsson AT SA       Switzerland      51        —           —     
I   Rockstar Consortium Group       Canada      21        1         7   
I   Ericsson Nikola Tesla d.d.       Croatia      49        65         330   
            

 

 

    

 

 

 
  Total                 337   
            

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

260


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Key to type of company

 

I Manufacturing, distribution and development companies
II Holding companies
III Finance companies
1) Through subsidiary holdings, total holdings amount to 100% of Cia Ericsson S.A.C.I.
2) Through subsidiary holdings, total holdings amount to 100% of Ericsson (Thailand) Ltd.

SHARES OWNED BY SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES

 

Type

  

Company

   Reg. No.      Domicile    Percentage
of ownership
 
Subsidiary companies         

II

   Ericsson Cables Holding AB      556044-9489       Sweden      100   

I

   Ericsson France SAS       France      100   

I

   Ericsson Telekommunikation GmbH & Co. KG 1)       Germany      100   

I

   LM Ericsson Ltd.       Ireland      100   

II

   Ericsson Nederland B.V.       The Netherlands      100   

I

   Ericsson Telecommunicatie B.V.       The Netherlands      100   

I

   Ericsson Telekomunikasyon A.S.       Turkey      100   

I

   Ericsson Ltd.       United Kingdom      100   

I

   Ericsson Inc.       United States      100   

I

   Ericsson IP Infrastructure Inc.       United States      100   

I

   Drutt Corporation Inc.       United States      100   

I

   Optimi Corporation       United States      100   

I

   Redback Networks Inc.       United States      100   

I

   Telcordia Technologies Inc.       United States      100   

I

   Ericsson Telecommunicações S.A.       Brazil      100   

I

   Ericsson Australia Pty. Ltd.       Australia      100   

I

   Ericsson (China) Communications Co. Ltd.       China      100   

I

   Nanjing Ericsson Panda Communication Co. Ltd.       China      51   

I

   Ericsson Japan K.K.       Japan      100   

I

   Ericsson Communication Solutions Pte Ltd.       Singapore      100   

Key to type of company

 

I Manufacturing, distribution and development companies
II Holding companies
1) Disclosures Pursuant to Section 264b of the German Commercial Code (Handelsgesetzbuch—HGB) Applying Section 264b HGB, LHS Holding GmbH & Co. KG, LHS Communication GmbH & Co. KG and LHS Telekommunikation GmbH & Co. KG, all located in Frankfurt am Main/Germany, are exempted from the obligation to prepare, have audited and disclose financial statements and a management report in accordance with the legal requirements being applicable for German corporations.

RECONCILIATIONS TO IFRS

This section includes a reconciliation of certain non-IFRS financial measures to the most directly comparable IFRS financial measures. The presentation of non-IFRS financial measures has limitations as analytical tools and should not be considered in isolation or as a substitute for our related financial measures prepared in accordance with IFRS.

 

261


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

We present non-IFRS financial measures to enhance an investor’s evaluation of our ongoing operating results, to aid in forecasting future periods and to facilitate meaningful comparison of our results between periods. Our management uses these non-IFRS financial measures to, among other things, evaluate our ongoing operations in relation to historical results, for internal planning and forecasting purposes and in the calculation of certain performance-based compensation.

The non-IFRS financial measures presented in this report may differ from similarly-titled measures used by other companies.

ERICSSON—EXPENSES

 

     IFRS     Restructuring Charges      Non-IFRS  

SEK billion

   2011     2010     2011      2010      2011     2010  

Selling and administrative expenses

     26.7        27.1        1.4         1.8         25.3        25.3   

R&D expenses

     32.6        31.6        0.6         1.7         32.1        29.9   

Net sales

     226.9        203.3              226.9        203.3   
  

 

 

   

 

 

         

 

 

   

 

 

 

R&D expenses as a percent of net sales

     14.4     15.5           14.1     14.7
  

 

 

   

 

 

         

 

 

   

 

 

 

ERICSSON EBITA MARGIN (INCLUDING RESTRUCTURING)

 

SEK billion

   2012     2011     2010     2009  

Net income

     5.9        12.6        11.2        4.1   

Interest

     0.3        –0.2        0.7        –0.3   

Tax

     4.2        5.6        4.5        2.1   

Amortization and write-downs of acquired intangibles

     4.6        4.5        5.9        7.8   

EBITA

     15.0        22.4        22.4        13.8   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net sales

     227.8        226.9        203.3        206.5   

EBITA margin (%)

     6.6     9.9     11.0     6.7
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

ADJUSTED OPERATING CASH FLOWS

 

SEK billion

   2011      2010  

Operating cash flow

     10.0         26.6   

Restructuring cash outlays

     3.2         3.3   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Adjusted operating cash flows

     13.2         29.8   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

262


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

SEGMENT NET SALES, OPERATING INCOME AND OPERATING MARGIN

 

SEK billion

   2011     2010  

Net sales

    

Networks

     132.4        112.7   

Global Services

     83.9        80.1   

Support solutions

     10.6        10.5   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

    

Networks

     17.3        12.5   

Global Services

     5.5        6.5   

Support solutions

     –0.5        –0.6   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating margin

    

Networks

     13     11

Global Services

     7     8

Support solutions

     –5     –6
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Restructuring charges

    

Networks

     1.6        3.9   

Global Services

     1.4        2.7   

Support solutions

     0.1        0.2   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income excl. restructuring charges

    

Networks

     18.9        16.4   

Global Services

     6.9        9.2   

Support solutions

     –0.4        –0.4   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating margin excl. restructuring charges

    

Networks

     14     15

Global Services

     8     11

Support solutions

     –3     –4
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

In 2012, for all above items except EBITA margin, non-IFRS financial measures were not used.

CAPITAL EMPLOYED

 

     2012      2011      2010      2009      2008  

Total assets

     274,996         280,349         281,815         269,809         285,684   

Non-interest-bearing provisions and liabilities

              

Provisions, non-current

     –211         –280         –353         –461         –311   

Deferred tax liabilities

     –3,120         –2,250         –2,571         –2,270         –2,738   

Other non-current liabilities

     –2,377         –2,248         –3,296         –2,035         –1,622   

Provisions, current

     –8,427         –5,985         –9,391         –11,970         –14,039   

Trade payables

     –23,100         –25,309         –24,959         –18,864         –23,504   

Other current liabilities

     –61,108         –57,970         –58,605         –52,529         –61,032   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Capital employed

     176,653         186,307         182,640         181,680         182,439   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

263


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

RETURN ON CAPITAL EMPLOYED

 

     2012     2011     2010     2009     2008  

Operating income

     10,458        17,900        16,455        5,918        16,252   

Financial income

     1,708        2,882        1,047        1,874        3,458   

Average capital employed1)

          

Capital employed at January 1

     186,307        182,640        181,680        182,439        168,456   

Capital employed at December 31

     176,653        186,307        182,640        181,680        182,439   

Average capital employed

     181,480        184,474        182,160        182,060        175,448   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Return on capital employed2)

     6.7     11.3     9.6     4.3     11.3
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) Average capital employed is the average of the amounts of capital employed at January 1 and December 31.
2) Return on capital employed is the total of operating income and financial income as a percentage of average capital employed.

GROSS CASH AND NET CASH

 

     2012     2011     2010     2009     2008  

Cash and cash equivalents

     44,682        38,676        30,864        22,798        37,813   

Short term investments

     32,026        41,866        56,286        53,926        37,192   

Gross cash

     76,708        80,542        87,150        76,724        75,005   

Post-employment benefits

     –9,503        –10,016        –5,092        –8,533        –9,873   

Interest-bearing liabilities

          

Borrowings non-current

     –23,898        –23,256        –26,955        –29,996        –24,939   

Borrowings current

     –4,769        –7,765        –3,808        –2,124        –5,542   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash

     38,538        39,505        51,295        36,071        34,651   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
RETURN ON EQUITY           
     2012     2011     2010     2009     2008  

Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company

     5,775        12,194        11,146        3,672        11,273   

Average stockholders’ equity1)

          

Stockholders’ equity at January 1

     143,105        145,106        139,870        140,823        134,112   

Stockholders’ equity at December 31

     136,883        143,105        145,106        139,870        140,823   

Average stockholders’ equity

     139,994        144,106        142,488        140,347        137,468   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Return on equity2)

     4.1     8.5     7.8     2.6     8.2
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

1) Average stockholders’ equity is based on the amounts at January 1 and December 31.
2) Return on equity is Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company as a percentage of average Stockholders’ equity (based on the amounts at January 1 and December 31).

 

264


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

WORKING CAPITAL

 

     2012      2011      2010      2009      2008  

Current assets

     193,254         198,816         198,443         182,442         198,525   

Current non-interest-bearing provisions and liabilities

              

Provisions, current

     –8,427         –5,985         –9,391         –11,970         –14,039   

Trade payables

     –23,100         –25,309         –24,959         –18,864         –23,504   

Other current liabilities

     –61,108         –57,970         –58,605         –52,529         –61,032   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Working capital1)

     100,619         109,552         105,488         99,079         99,951   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) Working capital is Current assets less current non-interest-bearing provisions and liabilities

CASH CONVERSION

 

            2012     2011     2010  

Cash flow from operating activities

     A         22,031        9,982        26,583   

Net income

     B         5,938        12,569        11,235   

Adjustments to reconcile net income to cash

     C         13,077        12,613        12,490   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash conversion = A/(B+C)

        116     40     112
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

265


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

GLOSSARY

2G

The first digital generation of mobile systems. Includes GSM, TDMA, PDC and cdmaOne.

3G

3rd generation mobile system. includes WCDMA/HSPA, CDMA2000 and TD-SCDMA.

4G

See LTE.

All-IP

A single, common IP infrastructure that can handle all network services, including fixed and mobile communications, for voice and data services as well as video services such as TV.

Backhaul

Transmission between radio base stations and the core network.

BSS

Business support systems

CaGR

Compound Annual Growth Rate.

Capex

Capital expenditure.

CDMA

(Code Division Multiple Access) A radio technology on which the cdmaOne (2G) and CDMA2000 (3G) mobile communication standards are both based.

CLOUD

When data and applications reside in the network.

Edge

A mobile standard, developed as an enhancement of GSM. Enables the transmission of data at speeds up to 250 kbps. (Evolved EDGE up to 1 Mbps)

GDP

(Gross Domestic Product) The total annual cost of all finished goods and services produced within a country.

 

266


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

GPON

(Gigabit Passive Optical Network) Used for fiber-optic communication to the home (FTTH).

GSM

(Global System for Mobile Communications) A first digital generation mobile system.

HSPA

(High Speed Packet Access) Enhancement of 3G/WCDMA that enables mobile broadband.

ICT

Information and Communication Technology.

IMS

(IP Multimedia Subsystem) A standard for offering voice and multimedia services over mobile and fixed networks using internet technology (IP).

IP

(Internet Protocol) Defines how information travels between network elements across the internet.

IPR

Intellectual Property Rights

IPTV

(IP Television) A technology that delivers digital television via fixed broadband access.

JV

(Joint Venture) A business enterprise in which two or more companies enter a partnership.

LTE

(Long-Term Evolution) The next evolutionary step of mobile technology beyond HSPA, allowing data rates above 100 Mbps.

Managed services

Management of operator networks and/or hosting of their services.

Mobile broadband

Wireless high-speed internet access using the HSPA, LTE and CDMA2000EV-DO technologies.

 

267


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

OSS

Operations support systems

Penetration

The number of subscriptions divided by the population in a geographical area.

PETAbyte

Million gigabytes.

RAN

Radio Access Network.

TD-SCDMA

(Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), an alternative to WCDMA used in China.

WCDMA

(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) A 3G mobile communication standard. WCDMA builds on the same core network infrastructure as GSM.

xDSL

Digital Subscriber Line technologies for broadband multimedia communications in fixed-line networks. Examples: IP-DSL, ADSL and VDSL.

The terms “Ericsson”, “the Company”, “the Group”, “us”, “we”, and “our” all refer to Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson and its subsidiaries.

 

268


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

FINANCIAL TERMINOLOGY

Capital employed

Total assets less non-interest-bearing provisions and liabilities. (which includes: provisions, non-current; deferred tax liabilities; other non-current liabilities; provisions, current; trade payables; other current liabilities).

Capital turnover

Net sales divided by average capital employed.

Cash conversion

Cash flow from operating activities divided by the sum of net income and adjustments to reconcile net income to cash, expressed as percent.

Cash dividends per share

Dividends paid divided by average number of shares, basic.

Compound annual growth rate (CAGR)

The year-over-year growth rate over a specified period of time.

Days sales outstanding (DSO)

Trade receivables balance at quarter end divided by net sales in the quarter and multiplied by 90 days. If the amount of trade receivables is larger than last quarter’s sales, the excess amount is divided by net sales in the previous quarter and multiplied by 90 days, and total DSO are the 90 days of the most current quarter plus the additional days from the previous quarter.

Earnings per share (EPS)

Basic earnings per share: profit or loss attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company divided by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period. Diluted earnings per share: the weighted average number of shares outstanding are adjusted for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares.

EBITA margin

Earnings before interest, taxes, amortization and write-downs of acquired intangibles (intellectual property rights, trademarks and other intangible assets, see Note C10 “Intangible assets”) as a percentage of net sales.

EPS (non-IFRS)

EPS, diluted, excluding amortizations and write-down of acquired intangible assets and including restructuring charges.

Equity ratio

Equity, expressed as a percentage of total assets.

Gross cash

Cash and cash equivalents plus short-term investments.

 

269


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Inventory turnover days (ITO-days)

365 divided by inventory turnover, calculated as total cost of sales divided by the average inventories for the year (net of advances from customers).

Net cash

Cash and cash equivalents plus short-term investments less interest-bearing liabilities (which include: borrowings, non-current and borrowings, current) and post-employment benefits.

P/E ratio

The P/E ratio is calculated as the price of a Class B share at last day of trading divided by Earnings per share, basic.

Payable days

The average balance of trade payables at the beginning and at the end of the year divided by cost of sales for the year, and multiplied by 365 days.

Payment readiness

Cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments less short-term borrowings plus long-term unused credit commitments. Payment readiness is also shown as a percentage of net sales.

Return on capital employed

The total of Operating income plus Financial income as a percentage of average capital employed (based on the amounts at January 1 and December 31).

Return on equity

Net income attributable to stockholders of the Parent Company as a percentage of average Stockholders’ equity (based on the amounts at January 1 and December 31).

Stockholders’ equity per share

Stockholders’ equity divided by the number of shares outstanding at end of period, basic.

Total shareholder return (TSR)

The increase or decrease in Class B share price during the period, adjusted for dividends paid, expressed as a percentage of the share price at the start of the period.

Trade receivables turnover

Net sales divided by average trade receivables.

Value at risk (VaR)

A statistical method that expresses the maximum potential loss that can arise with a certain degree of probability during a certain period of time.

Working capital

Current assets less current non-interest-bearing provisions and liabilities (which include: provisions, current; trade payables; other current liabilities).

 

270


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

EXCHANGE RATES

Exchange rates used in the consolidation

 

     January–December  
     2012      2011  

SEK/EUR

     

Average rate

     8.70         9.02   

Closing rate

     8.58         8.92   

SEK/USD

     

Average rate

     6.73         6.48   

Closing rate

     6.51         6.90   

 

271


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

SHAREHOLDER INFORMATION

FOR PRINTED PUBLICATIONS

A printed copy of the Annual Report is provided on request.

Strömberg Distribution

SE-120 88 Stockholm, Sweden

Phone: +46 8 449 89 57

Email: ericsson@strd.se

IN THE UNITED STATES:

Ericsson’s Transfer Agent Citibank:

Citibank Shareholder Services

Registered holders: +1 877 881 59 69

Interested investors: +1 781 575 45 55

Email: citibank@shareholders-online.com

www.citi.com/dr

Ordering a hard copy of the Annual Report: +1 888 301 2504

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson’s shareholders are invited to participate in the Annual General Meeting to be held on Tuesday, April 9, 2013, at 3 p.m. at Kistamässan, Arne Beurlings Torg 5, Kista, Stockholm, Sweden.

Registration and notice of attendance

Shareholders who wish to attend the Annual General Meeting must:

 

   

Be recorded in the share register kept by Euroclear Sweden AB (the Swedish Securities Registry) on Wednesday, April 3, 2013, and

 

   

Give notice of attendance to the Company at the latest on Wednesday, April 3, 2013. Notice of attendance can be given by telephone: +46 8 402 90 54 on weekdays between 10 a.m. and 4 p.m., or on Ericsson’s website.

Notice of attendance may also be given in writing to:

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson

General Meeting of Shareholders

Box 7835, SE-103 98 Stockholm, Sweden

When giving notice of attendance, please state name, date of birth, address, telephone number and number of assistants, if any.

The meeting will be conducted in Swedish and simultaneously interpreted into English.

Shares registered in the name of a nominee

In addition to giving notice of attendance, shareholders having their shares registered in the name of a nominee, must request the nominee to temporarily enter the shareholder into the share register as per Wednesday, April 3, 2013, in order to be entitled to attend the meeting. The shareholders should inform the nominee to that effect well before that day.

 

272


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

Proxy

Shareholders represented by proxy shall issue and submit to the Company a power of attorney for the representative. A power of attorney issued by a legal entity must be accompanied by a copy of the entity’s certificate of registration, or if no such certificate exist, a corresponding document of authority. Such documents must not be older than one year unless the power of attorney explicitly provides that it is valid for a longer period, up to a maximum of five years. In order to facilitate the registration at the Annual General Meeting, the power of attorney in original, certificates of registration and other documents of authority should be sent to the Company in advance to the address above for receipt by Monday, April 8, 2013. Forms of power of attorney in Swedish and English are available on Ericsson’s website.

Dividend

The Board of Directors has decided to propose the Annual General Meeting to resolve on a dividend of SEK 2.75 per share for the year 2012 and that Friday, April 12, 2013 will be the record date for dividend.

Financial information from Ericsson

 

Interim reports 2013:

           Q1, April 24, 2013            Q3, October 24, 2013
           Q2, July 18, 2013            Q4, January 30, 2014

Annual Report 2013: March, 2014

2012 Form 20-F for the US market: March-April 2013

WHERE YOU CAN FIND OUT MORE

Information about Ericsson and its development is available on our website.

Annual and interim reports and other relevant shareholder information can be found on our website.

Ericsson headquarters

Torshamnsgatan 23

Kista, Stockholm, Sweden

Registered office

Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson

SE–164 83 Stockholm, Sweden

Investor relations

For questions on the Company,

please contact Investor Relations:

Telephone: +46 10 719 00 00

Email: investor.relations@ ericsson.com

 

273


Table of Contents

ERICSSON ANNUAL REPORT ON FORM 20-F 2012

 

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this Annual Report on its behalf.

TELEFONAKTIEBOLAGET LM ERICSSON

April 8, 2013

 

By:

 

/s/    ROLAND HAGMAN        

  Roland Hagman

By:

 

/s/    NINA MACPHERSON        

  Nina Macpherson

 

274